ML13148A101
| ML13148A101 | |
| Person / Time | |
|---|---|
| Site: | Braidwood  |
| Issue date: | 04/15/2013 |
| From: | NRC/RGN-III |
| To: | Exelon Generation Co |
| Zoia, C. | |
| Shared Package | |
| ML11354A333 | List: |
| References | |
| Download: ML13148A101 (852) | |
Text
R-120 Page 1 of 6 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an extra NSO.
- 2. Both units are at power.
INITIATING CUES:
Channel Checks of the Unit 1 RCS Subcooling Margin Monitors and Containment Water level indications need to be performed to close out work packages. The Unit Supervisor has directed you to perform the applicable step(s) of 1BwOSR 3.3.3.1, Unit One Accident Monitoring Instrumentation Channel Checks.
R-120 Page 2 of 6 TASK TITLE:
Perform Channel Checks of the RCS Subcooling Margin Monitor and Containment Water Level. JPM No.: R-120 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4C.AM-01 K&A No.: 2.1.18 TASK No.: R-AM-018, Perform Mode 1
-3 shiftly and K&A IMP: 3.6/3.8 daily operating surveillance.
EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Trainee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 2, 3, 4, 5 COMPLETION TIME: 10 MINUTES
CRITICAL TIME:
N/A ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR _ CONTROL ROOM GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. 1BwOSR 3.3.3.1, Rev. 14, Unit One Accident Monitoring Instrumentation Channel Checks.
MATERIALS:
- 1. 1BwOSR 3.3.3.1, Rev. 14.
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Perform the channel checks of the RCS Subcooling Margin Monitor and Containment floor water level.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an extra NSO.
- 2. Both units are at power
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. Channel Checks of the Unit 1 RCS Subcooling Margin Monitors and Containment Water level indications need to be performed to close out work packages. The Unit Supervisor has directed you to perform the applicable step(s) of 1BwOSR 3.3.3.1, Unit One Accident Monitoring Instrumentation Channel Checks.
R-120 Page 3 of 6 RECORD START TIME ____________
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 1. Obtain copy of 1BwOSR 3.3.3.1
CUE: Give student surveillance.
As each precaution etc is inquired about, provide cue that it is met Obtain and review procedure:
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Check Precautions, Prerequisites, and Limitations and Actions are met Determine steps F.2.a-e and F.5.a
-f are applicable SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: Note: The Channel Check of the Subcooling Margin Monitor consists of comparing of the two trains with a Maximum Allowed Deviation of
< 10 degrees F.
Each consists of an average of the 10 highest Incore Thermocouples and a W/R RCS Pressure channel.
Note: The procedure does not specifically require that the SMM channel check be performed prior to the Containment Water level channel checks or vice versa. If examinee starts with the Containment Floor water level checks, go to step 4 of the JPM then return to step 2.
- 2. Record the instrument readings for each train of SMM Acceptable values:
1TI-IT001: 595 o F 1TI-IT002: "As read" o F The values recorded for 1PI-403A and 1PI
-405 should match the indications on the meters, which may range from 2225 to 2300 psig.
At 1PM05J/6J,RECORD:
1TI-IT001 (CETC) 1TI-IT002 (CETC) 1PI-403A (1A RC Loop WR pressure) 1PI-405 (1C RC Loop WR pressure) SAT UNSAT N
/A Comments:
R-120 Page 4 of 6 *3. Determine SMM Channel Check Status Examinee will determine that the CETC temperatures are >10 F apart from each other and notifies US to enter LCO.
CUE: (When examinee gives information that CETCs are not within channel check allowance) CUE: The SRO has evaluated "A" train CETC channel reading as inoperable, but the "B" train is operable based on the individual CETC readings.
CUE: SRO directs you to complete channel check of subcooling margin monitor. DETERMINE SMM Channel Check Status as follows:
CALCULATE and RECORD the "Actual Maximum Deviation" between OPERABLE readings COMPARE to the stated "Allowed Maximum Deviation" DETERMINE that the Actual Deviation is NOT within the Allowed Deviation and circles the recorded reading for 1 TI-IT001 as suspect and calls to SRO attention
. o Determine that the RC LOOP W/R Pressure meters (1PI
-403A and 1PI
-405) DO MEET the allowed maximum deviation.
INDICATE the acceptability of the Channel Check of each instrument by checking the
'Y/N' boxes (checks N for 1TI-IT001 checks Y for 1TI-IT002 in CHANNEL CHECK OK column);
checks Y for 1PI
-403A and 1PI-405. VERIFY the total number of OPERABLE Channels
> Required Channels Operable (NOT met) o Verify Reg guide 1.97 designation (black dot) on labels by checking Y for each. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *4. Record the instrument readings for each Containment Water level instrument.
Acceptable range:
1LI-PC006 0-1 inches 1LI-PC007 9-11 inches At 1PM06J, RECORD:
1LI-PC006 (0 inches) 1LI-PC007 (10 inch es) SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
R-120 Page 5 of 6 *5. Determine Containment Water Level Channel Check Status Examinee will determine that the Containment Water level channels differ by more than 7.2% and notify the US to enter LCO. CUE: The SRO has evaluated 1LI
-PC007 reading as inoperable, 1LI
-PC006 is operable based on RF sump and other parameters.
Checks "Y" box for 1LI
-PC006 in "CHANNEL CHK OK?" column.
Checks "N" box for 1LI
-PC007 in "CHANNEL CHK OK?" column. CUE: The SRO acknowledges the notification.
DETERMINE Containment Water Level Channel Check Status as follows:
CALCULATE and RECORD the "Actual Maximum Deviation" between OPERABLE readings COMPARE to the stated "Allowed Maximum Deviation" DETERMINE that the Actual Deviation is NOT within the Allowed Deviation INDICATE the acceptability of the Channel Check of each instrument by checking the
'Y/N' boxes VERIFY the total number of OPERABLE Channels
> Required Channels Operable (not met) o Inform US of status SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME ____________
COMMENTS:
R-120 Page 6 of 6 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM
-408P REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE (S): Any 100% power IC.
MALFUNCTION #'S:
Override CETC train A and B to indicate >10 degrees apart from each other by placing RF OR02 in OVER and forcing a value with RF OR02A to 595 degrees F.
Override 1LI
-PC007 to 10% using IOR ZAO1LIPC007 10
.
COMMENTS:
WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61 ATTACHMENT 10 SURVEILLANCE WO DISPOSITION SHEET (APPLICABLE TO MID
-WEST SITES ONLY)
Page 1 of 1 Unit: _1__ Procedure: PMID/RQ: ______1BwOSR 3.3.3.1____
123456____ Work Order #:
__ N/APMID/RQ Title: ____________
PMID/RQ Due Date: ___UNIT 1 ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION CHANNEL CHECKS N/A________ PMID/RQ Late Date: N/A Signature/Authorization Approval Review:
Name Date Shift Authorization to Start Work:
__Time _Joe Supervisor
______ Today Work Started
__________________________
________ ________ 5 min ago Work Stopped:
__________________________
________ ________ Supv Review of Work Completion:
__________________________
________ ________ ANI Review of work package:
__________________________
________ ________ Surveillance Found Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO Surveillance Left Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO ("Work Started" date (above shall beComplete one of the following:
the credit date unless otherwise explained)
Verify Credit Surveillance Credit Date per another WO# _________
Below: If crediting 'per another WO', verify credit date is 'Work Started' date of referenced WO.
_________ Complete Sat
- Credit Surveillance Complete w/ Portions Unsat
- Credit Surveillanc e No Work Performed
- Credit Surveillance Failed - Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)
No Work Performed
- Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)
Comments Perform the applicable step(s) for the Unit 1 RCS Subcooling Margin Monitors and Containment Water level instruments, needs to be performed to close out work packages
_ ADDITIONAL REVIEW OF RESULTS (IF REQUIRED)
____________________
____________________________________
________ ____________________
____________________________________
________ ____________________
____________________________________
________ Title Signature Date WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61
BRAIDWOOD STATION PROCEDURE 1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 UNIT NO. 1 REVISION NO.
14 PROCEDURE TITLE:
UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION CHANNEL CHECKS Rev Summary IR# / EC# (if applicable) 14 Clarification concerning performance of WRGM steps at 1PM10J or 2PM10J.
PCRA 1208019
-02 1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use 1 UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION CHANNEL CHECKS
A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY This procedure outlines the steps necessary to verify the OPERABILITY of the Accident Monitoring Instrumentation by performing a CHANNEL CHECK of the required instruments and indications and verifying the required number of channels are OPERABLE. This procedure is applicable in MODES 1, 2 & 3.
B. REFERENCES
- 1. Technical Specifications:
- a. LCO 3.3.3
- b. SR 3.3.3.1
- c. Table 3.3.3
-1
- 2. TRMs: a. TLCO 3.3.i
- b. TLCO 3.3.j
- c. TSR 3.3.i.1
- d. TSR 3.3.j.2
- e. Table T3.3.i
-1
- 3. Station Procedures:
- a. 1BwOL 3.3.3 LCOAR
- Post Accident Monitoring (PAM) Instrumentation.
- b. 1BwOL TRM 3.3.i, LCOAR
- Post Accident Monitoring (PAM) Instrumentation.
- c. 1BwOL TRM 3.3.j, LCOAR
- Hydrogen Monitor.
- 4. Tech Spec Definition: Section 1.1 "CHANNEL CHECK".
-003.
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use 2 C. PREREQUISITES
- 1. Receive permission to perform this surveillance from the Shift Manager or Designee prior to performance by having the Data Package Cover Sheet signed and dated.
- 2. This procedure may be performed in MODES 1, 2, 3, or 4.
D. PRECAUTIONS The Unit Operator should VERIFY that a qualified relief is monitoring the Unit panels prior to checking any Control Room back panels.
E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS
- 1. As stated in Tech Spec LCO 3.3.3.
- 2. The parameters do not have to be surveilled in sequence.
- 3. Any inoperable parameter(s) that reduce the number of OPERABLE Channels to less than the total number specified requires a LCOAR be entered or already in effect to VERIFY the "Required Channels" OPERABLE requirements of Tech Spec Table 3.3.3
-1, TRM Table T3.3.i
-1 and TRM 3.3.j are satisfied. The "Required Channels" columns of the Data sheets provides guidance.
- 4. System instrumentation used in this procedure must be in current calibration.
- 5. In the event the Acceptance Criteria is not met during the performance of this surveillance, IMMEDIATELY notify the Shift Manager or designee to initiate LCOAR 1BwOL 3.3.3, 1BwOL TRM 3.3.i or 1BwOL TRM 3.3.j for the affected parameter(s) if in MODES 1, 2 or 3, as applicable.
- 6. Instrument readings that exceed the "MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DEVIATION" guidelines shall be referred to an SRO for further evaluation. The SRO shall evaluate the readings against all other available indications and parameters that may assist in determining channel OPERABILITY and RECORD the evaluation of the results in the comments section of each data sheet.
- 7. A partial surveillance may be performed at the discretion of the Shift Manager or designee to demonstrate operability of individual instruments in the data tables provided all Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions are observed. The Shift Manager or designee shall determine the steps to be performed. The Data Package Cover Sheet must indicate that a partial surveillance was performed and the reason why listed in the Comments section.
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use 3 E. 8. A CHANNEL CHECK shall be the qualitative assessment, by observation of channel behavior during operation. This determination shall include where possible, comparison of the channel indication and status to other indications or status derived from independent instrument channel measuring the same parameter.
- 9. If only one hydrogen monitor is available, then the channel check shall consist of the qualitative assessment of channel behavior during operation (i.e. indicating as expected for current plant operation and is typically less than 1%
).
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use 4 F. MAIN BODY NOTE Steps F.1 through F.5 may be performed in any order.
NOTE Although TRM TLCO 3.3.j only requires ONE hydrogen monitor to be OPERABLE, a Channel Check should be performed on both monitors, if available.
- 1. PERFORM the CHANNEL CHECK of the Hydrogen Monitor(s) on the appropriate data sheet as follows:
- a. VERIFY/OPEN the following valves to ALIGN the hydrogen monitor(s) being checked:
Hydrogen Monitor 1HSU
-PS345:
1PS228A 1PS229A 1PS230A Hydrogen Monitor 1HSU
-PS346:
1PS228B 1PS229B 1PS230B b. PLACE the ON
-OFF Selector switch(es) to the ON position at the Hydrogen Monitor Panels at 1PM12J for the hydrogen monitors being checked:
1HSU-PS345 1HSU-PS346 c. RECORD the status of the GREEN light on the Data Sheet.
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use 5 F. 1. d. PERFORM the following for the Hydrogen Monitor(s) being checked:
- 1) WAIT at least 4 minutes.
- 2) VERIFY the following lights are OFF:
H2 SYSTEM STATUS
- 3) RECORD the light status on the Data Sheet.
- e. WAIT at least 30 minutes to allow an adequate purge of the sample lines, THEN PERFORM the following:
- 1) RECORD the containment hydrogen concentration on the Data Sheet from one of the following:
Meter (The meter is the preferred choice):
1AI-PS344 1AI-PS343 Computer point: Y2001 Y2002
- 2) VERIFY the value(s) obtained in the previous step indicate as expected for current plant status.
- 3) VERIFY Reg Guide 1.97 designation (black dot) on the labels for each of the following:
1AI-PS344 1AI-PS343 f. INDICATE the acceptability of the CHANNEL CHECK of each Hydrogen Monitor(s) being surveilled by checking "Y" or "N" in the space provided.
¢ g. VERIFY at least one Hydrogen Monitor OPERABLE.
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use 6 F. 1. h. VERIFY/PLACE the ON
-OFF Selector switches to the OFF position at the Hydrogen Monitor Panels.
1HSU-PS345 1HSU-PS346 NOTE 1PS228A/B and 1PS229A/B are normally maintained open.
- i. CLOSE the following valves:
1PS230A, POST LOCA H2 MON A outside Disch Valve.
1PS230B, POST LOCA H2 MON B outside Disch Valv
- e. 2. PERFORM the CHANNEL CHECKS of the Reactor Coolant Subcooling Margin Monitor on the Data Sheet as follows:
NOTE The CHANNEL CHECK of the Subcooling Margin Monitor consists of comparing of the two trains with a Maximum Allowed Deviation of 10F. Each consists of an average of the 10 highest Incore Thermocouples and a W/R RCS Pressure channel.
- a. RECORD the instrument readings for each train.
- b. CALCULATE and RECORD the "Actual Maximum Deviation" between OPERABLE readings, and COMPARE to the stated "Allowed Maximum Deviation".
- c. IF the "Actual Maximum Deviation" exceeds the stated "Allowed Maximum Deviation", CIRCLE the readings that are suspect and REFER the deviation to an SRO for evaluation of the channel OPERABILITY status.
- d. INDICATE the acceptability of the CHANNEL CHECK of each instrument by checking "Y" or "N" in the space provided (channels that were circled as suspect are to be marked "Y" or "N" based on the SRO evaluation).
¢ e. VERIFY the number of OPERABLE channels is the "Required Channels Operable".
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use 7 F. 3. PERFORM the CHANNEL CHECKS of the Radiation Monitoring Instrumentation as follows:
NOTE The Aux Building Vent Stack WRGM low, medium and high range channels inputs are not in continuous use. Only one green "AVAIL" light will be ILLUMINATED for the channel range in use.
NOTE If it is desired, some or all of the CHANNEL CHECKS may be accomplished from the RM
-23 as indicated on the data sheets. If the RM-23 is used, the checks need not be performed using the RM-11 if a parameter is NOT surveilled using the RM
-23, it MUST be surveilled using the RM
-11. a. Perform the following for each Radiation Monitoring Instrument channel using the RM
-23 at 1PM10J
- (2PM10J for 2RIU
-PR030): Containment High Range Area Radiation Monitors a) RECORD the green "AVAIL" light status on the data sheet D-8.
b) VERIFY Reg Guide 1.97 designation (black dot) on the labels for each of the following:
1RIU-AR020 1RIU-AR021 Main Steam Line Radiation Monitors a) RECORD the green "AVAIL" light status on the data sheet D-8.
b) VERIFY Reg Guide 1.97 designation (black dot) on the labels for each of the following:
1RIU-AR022 1RIU-AR023 1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use 8 F. 3. a. Aux Building Vent Stack WRGM a) RECORD the green "AVAIL" light for the three (Low, Med, or High) Channels on data sheet D
-9.
b) RECORD the green "AVAIL" light for the effluent Channel on data sheet D
-9.
c) VERIFY Reg Guide 1.97 designation (black dot) on the labels for each of the following:
1RIU-PR030 2RIU-PR030 b. OBTAIN the INSTRUMENT VALUE and CHANNEL CHECK from the RM-23 by performing the following:
- 1) DEPRESS the channel DISPLAY/CONTROL key pushbutton and VERIFY it ILLUMINATES.
- 2) VERIFY the following lights/pushbuttons are NOT ILLUMINATED:
a) ITEM.
b) MON.
c) ERROR.
d) SUPV MODE.
e) KYBD LOCK OUT.
- 3) RECORD the Rad level from the LED digital readout.
- 4) INDICATE the acceptability of the CHANNEL CHECK of each instrument by checking "Y" or "N" in the space provided (channels that were circled as suspect are to be marked "Y" or "N" based on the SRO evaluation).
¢ 5) VERIFY the number of OPERABLE channels is the "Required Channels Operable".
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use 9 F. 3. c. To perform the CHANNEL CHECKS of the Rad Monitoring Instrumentation using the RM
-11 console, the following steps apply:
- 1) SELECT the grid indicated on the data sheet using the appropriate pushbutton.
- 2) ENTER the channel number from the data sheet.
- 3) DEPRESS the SEL pushbutton and VERIFY the channel is outlined.
- 4) DEPRESS the STATUS pushbutton.
- 5) VERIFY the Monitor status using the status cursor and RECORD the highest cursor color.
- 6) RECORD the Rad level.
- 7) INDICATE the acceptability of the CHANNEL CHECK of each instrument by checking "Y" or "N" in the space provided (channels that were circled as suspect are to be marked "Y" or "N" based on the SRO evaluation).
¢ 8) VERIFY the number of OPERABLE channels is the "Required Channels Operable".
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use 10 F. 4. PERFORM the CHANNEL CHECKS of the Incore Thermocouples on the appropriate Data Sheet from 1TI
-IT001 and 1 TI-IT002 as follows:
NOTE The Incore Thermocouple CHANNEL CHECKS are in two groups: those with 1/8 core symmetry (Max Allowed Deviation of 20F) and those without any symmetry (Max Allowed Deviation of 60F). a. RECORD the instrument reading for each Incore Thermocouple that is not known inoperable (RECORD "INOP" for any that are known inoperable).
- b. CALCULATE and RECORD the "Actual Maximum Deviation" between OPERABLE readings and COMPARE to the stated "Allowed Maximum Deviation".
- c. IF the "Actual Maximum Deviation" exceeds the stated "Allowed Maximum Deviation", CIRCLE the readings that are suspect and REFER the deviation to an SRO for evaluation of the channel OPERABILITY status.
¢ d. RECORD the total number of OPERABLE Incore Thermocouples per quadrant and VERIFY the total is 4. e. VERIFY Reg Guide 1.97 designation (black dot) on the labels for each of the following:
1TI-IT001 1TI-IT002 1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use 11 F. 5. PERFORM all remaining CHANNEL CHECKS of the instrumentation on the appropriate Data Sheets as follows:
- a. RECORD the instrument readings for all instruments (RECORD "INOP" for any that are known inoperable).
- b. CALCULATE and RECORD the "Actual Maximum Deviation" between OPERABLE readings, and COMPARE to the stated "Allowed Maximum Deviation".
- c. IF the "Actual Maximum Deviation" exceeds the stated "Allowed Maximum Deviation", CIRCLE the readings that are suspect and REFER the deviation to an SRO for evaluation of the channel OPERABILITY status.
- d. INDICATE the acceptability of the CHANNEL CHECK of each instrument by checking "Y" or "N" in the space provided (channels that were circled as suspect are to be marked "Y" or "N" based on the SRO evaluation).
¢ e. VERIFY the total number of OPERABLE channels is the "Required Channels Operable".
- f. PERFORM the following for each of the instruments listed on the Data Sheets: 1) VERIFY Reg Guide 1.97 designation (black dot) on the labels.
- 2) CHECK "Y" or "N" as appropriate in the designated area.
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use 12 G. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
- 1. When performing this surveillance as a complete, routinely scheduled surveillance, the following criteria apply:
- a. The required number of channels are OPERABLE for each instrument or indication listed on the data sheets.
- b. A CHANNEL CHECK was SATISFACTORILY performed for each OPERABLE instrument or indication listed on the data sheets.
- 2. When performing this surveillance as a partial to meet the retest criteria to exit a LCOAR, this surveillance shall be considered SATISFACTORILY COMPLETED if the following criteria are me t: a. A CHANNEL CHECK was SATISFACTORILY performed for the parameter(s) being restored.
- b. The Data Package Cover Sheet indicates that a partial surveillance was performed and the reason why listed in the Comments section.
(Fina l) 1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION SURVEILLANCE DATA SHEET D-2 PARAMETER INSTRUMENT STATUS ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA VERIFY the green "ON" light is ILLUMINATED for each Instrument Channel being checked.
1HSU-PS345 ON OFF GREEN LIGHT ON 1HSU-PS346 ON OFF VERIFY the H2 and SYSTEM STATUS light is OFF after 4 minutes for each Instrument Channel being checked.
1HSU-PS345 ON OFF H2 AND SYSTEM STATUS LIGHTS OFF 1HSU-PS346 ON OFF NOTE The Hydrogen Monitor must be operating for 30 minutes prior to taking data. To perform the CHANNEL CHECK, CNMT ISOL Valves 1PS228A/B, 1PS229A/B & 1PS230A/B must be OPEN. (The meter is the preferred choice).
PARAMETER INSTRUMENT VALUE CHANNEL CHECK SAT? RG 1.97 DOT ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA HYDROGEN MONITORS CNMT H2 CONCENTRATION 1AI-PS343 or Y2001 % Y N Y N TRM 3.3.j AT LEAST 1 OPERABLE CHANNEL WITH CHAN CHK SAT 1AI-PS344 or Y2002 % Y N Y N 1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION SURVEILLANCE DATA SHEET D-3 PARAMETER INSTRUMENT INSTR VALUE MAXIMUM DEVIATION UNITS CHANNEL CHK OK? RG 1.97 DOT REQUIRED CHANNELS ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ACTUAL ALLOWED CONTAINMENT PRESSURE 1PI-PC004 4.8 PSIG Y N Y N 2 T.S. 3.3.3.7 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1PI-PC005 Y N Y N NOTE For the S/G Aux Feed Flow instruments that are not in use, the reading may range from slightly above to slightly below zero but should not be pegged low on scale (contact IMD for assistance as necessary).
S/G 1A AUX FEED FLOW PP 1A 1FI-AF011A N/A GPM Y N Y N 2 TRM 3.3.i.1 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT PP 1B 1FI-AF012A Y N Y N S/G 1B AUX FEED FLOW PP 1A 1FI-AF013A N/A GPM Y N Y N 2 TRM 3.3.i.1 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT PP 1B 1FI-AF014A Y N Y N S/G 1C AUX FEED FLOW PP 1A 1FI-AF015A N/A GPM Y N Y N 2 TRM 3.3.i.1 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT PP 1B 1FI-AF016A Y N Y N S/G 1D AUX FEED FLOW PP 1A 1FI-AF017A N/A GPM Y N Y N 2 TRM 3.3.i.1 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT PP 1B 1FI-AF018A Y N Y N CONTAINMENT WATER LEVEL 1LI-PC006 7.2 IN Y N Y N 2 T.S. 3.3.3.10 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1LI-PC007 Y N Y N CNMT FLOOR DRN SUMP WATER LEVEL 1LI-PC002 9.9 IN Y N Y N 2 TRM 3.3.i.5 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1LI-PC003 Y N Y N NOTE Both the CETCs and the associated Wide range pressure channels must be operable to ensure that subcooling margin operability is met.
CETCs 1TI-IT001 10 F Y N Y N 2 TRM 3.3.i.7 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1TI-IT002 Y N Y N RC LOOP W/R PRESSURE 1A 1PI-403A 210 PSIG Y N Y N 2 T.S. 3.3.3.1 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1C 1PI-405 Y N Y N 1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION SURVEILLANCE DATA SHEET D-4 PARAMETER INSTRUMENT INSTR VALUE MAXIMUM DEVIATION UNITS CHANNEL CHK OK? RG 1.97 DOT REQUIRED CHANNELS ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ACTUAL ALLOWED RWST LEVEL 1LI-930 7 % Y N Y N 2 T.S. 3.3.3.9 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1LI-931 Y N Y N 1LI-932 Y N Y N 1LI-933 Y N Y N REACTOR COOLANT HOT LEG WIDE RANGE TEMPERATURE 1A 1TI-413A 49 F Y N Y N 2 T.S. 3.3.3.2 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1B 1TI-423A Y N Y N 1C 1TI-433A Y N Y N 1D 1TI-443A Y N Y N REACTOR COOLANT COLD LEG WIDE RANGE TEMPERATURE 1A 1TI-413B 49 F Y N Y N 2 T.S. 3.3.3.3 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1B 1TI-423B Y N Y N 1C 1TI-433B Y N Y N 1D 1TI-443B Y N Y N NOTE A Reactor Vessel Water Level instrument channel is considered OPERABLE if one of the two (1/2) sensors in the HEAD region and three of the six (3/6) sensors in the PLENUM region are OPERABLE. The operability of a sensor may be determined by reviewing the ERROR messages on the control board indicator. BwOP RC-12 provides the ERROR message code meanings.
REACTOR VESSEL WATER LEVEL 1LI-RC019 N/A N/A % Y N Y N 2 T.S. 3.3.3.14 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1LI-RC020 Y N Y N PRESSURIZER WATER LEVEL 1LI-459A 7 % Y N Y N 2 T.S. 3.3.3.6 2 OPERABLE CHANNELS WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1LI-460A Y N Y N 1LI-461 Y N Y N Comments:
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION SURVEILLANCE DATA SHEET D-5 PARAMETER INSTRUMENT INSTR VALUE MAXIMUM DEVIATION UNITS CHANNEL CHECK OK? RG 1.97 DOT REQUIRED CHANNELS ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ACTUAL ALLOWED NOTE ## PORV VPI IS NOT APPLICABLE for valve(s) with the associated block valve in the closed position. Record the indicated valve position in the "INSTR VALUE" column.
PZR PORV VALVE POSITION IND 1RY-455A N/A N/A AVAIL N/A Y N 1 PER VALVE TRM 3.3.i.2 1 OPERABLE INDICATION PER VALVE 1RY-456 Y N NOTE ** BLOCK VALVE VPI IS NOT APPLICABLE IF valve is verified closed AND power is removed (INDICATE status in comments section below). IF power is available to the valve, then VPI is required. Record the indicated valve position in the "INSTR VALUE" column.
PZR PORV ISOLATION VALVE POS IND 1RY-8000A N/A N/A AVAIL N/A Y N 1 PER VALVE TRM 3.3.i.3 1 OPERABLE INDICATION PER VALVE 1RY-8000B Y N PZR SAFETY VALVE POS IND 1RY-8010A N/A N/A AVAIL N/A Y N 1 PER VALVE TRM 3.3.i.4 1 OPERABLE INDICATION PER VALVE 1RY-8010B 1RY-8010C S/G 1A PRESSURE 1PI-514A 91 PSIG Y N Y N 2 T.S. 3.3.3.8 2 OPERABLE CHAN WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1PI-515A Y N Y N 1PI-516A Y N Y N S/G 1B PRESSURE 1PI-524A 91 PSIG Y N Y N 2 T.S. 3.3.3.8 2 OPERABLE CHAN WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1PI-525A Y N Y N 1PI-526A Y N Y N S/G 1C PRESSURE 1PI-534A 91 PSIG Y N Y N 2 T.S. 3.3.3.8 2 OPERABLE CHAN WITH CHAN CHKS S AT 1PI-535A Y N Y N 1PI-536A Y N Y N S/G 1D PRESSURE 1PI-544A 91 PSIG Y N Y N 2 T.S. 3.3.3.8 2 OPERABLE CHAN WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1PI-545A Y N Y N 1PI-546A Y N Y N Comments:
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION SURVEILLANCE DATA SHEET D-6 PARAMETER INSTRUMENT INSTR VALUE MAXIMUM DEVIATION UNITS CHANNEL CHECK OK? RG 1.97 DOT REQUIRED CHANNELS ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ACTUAL ALLOWED S/G 1A NARROW RNG WATER LEVEL 1LI-517 7 % Y N Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.5 1 OPERABLE CHAN WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1LI-518 Y N Y N 1LI-519 Y N Y N S/G 1B NARROW RNG WATER LEVEL 1LI-527 7 % Y N Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.5 1 OPERABLE CHAN WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1LI-528 Y N Y N 1LI-529 Y N Y N S/G 1C NARROW RNG WATER LEVEL 1LI-537 7 % Y N Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.5 1 OPERABLE CHAN WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1LI-538 Y N Y N 1LI-539 Y N Y N S/G 1D NARROW RNG WATER LEVEL 1LI-547 7 % Y N Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.5 1 OPERABLE CHAN WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1LI-548 Y N Y N 1LI-549 Y N Y N S/G W/R WATER LEVEL 1A 1LI-501A N/A N/A % Y N Y N 1 PER S/G T.S. 3.3.3.4 4 OPERABLE CHAN WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1B 1LI-502A N/A N/A Y N Y N 1C 1LI-503A N/A N/A Y N Y N 1D 1LI-504A N/A N/A Y N Y N Comments:
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION SURVEILLANCE DATA SHEET D-7 PARAMETER INSTRUMENT INSTR VALUE MAXIMUM DEVIATION UNITS CHANNEL CHK OK? RG 1.97 DOT REQUIRED CHANNELS ACCEPTANCE CRITERI A ACTUAL ALLOWED NOTE The Post Accident Neutron Monitor Wide Range channel checks are performed by comparing the meter indication to the calorimetric power if in Mode 1 or between the channels if in Modes 2,3, or 4. The Narrow Range Channel Checks are performed by comparing the meter indications between the channels.
POST ACCIDENT NEUTRON MONITOR WIDE RANGE 1NI-NR005A 1/2 Decade % Y N Y N N/A* N/A 1NI-NR006A Y N Y N N/A* 10 MINUTE CALORIMETRIC POWER Plant Computer (See Note below) N/A N/A N/A POST ACCIDENT NEUTRON MONITOR Narrow Range 1NI-NR006B 1/2 Decade (See Note below) Cps Y N Y N N/A* N/A 1NI-NR005B Y N Y N N/A* Comments:
- If a Post Accident Neutron Monitor is inoperable, ENTER 1BwOS NR2
-1a. NOTE: The following is the agreed upon method of determining the half decade acceptance criteria.
log(meter 1)
- log(meter 2) = x As long as x is 0.5, then we meet the 1/2 decade acceptance criteria.
Example 1: 1NI-NR006B reads 2x10 4 CPS and 1NI
-NR005B reads 8x10 3 CPS To determine if they meet the 1/2 decade acceptance criteria:
Log (2x10 4) - Log (8x10 3) = 0.398 (Acceptable)
Example 2:
1NI-NR005A reads 77%, 1NI
-NR006A reads 67% and the calorimetric reads 23% Log 77 - Log 23 = 0.524 Unacceptable Log 67 - Log 23 = 0.464 Acceptable
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION SURVEILLANCE DATA SHEET D-8 The Rad Monitoring CHANNEL CHECKS on this page are performed using the RM
-23 (IF desired).
PARAMETER INSTRUMENT AVAIL LIGHT INSTR VALUE CH CHK ACCEPT
- UNITS CHANNEL CHK OK? RG 1.97 DOT REQUIRED CHANNELS ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA CONTAINMENT HIGH RANGE AREA RAD 1RIU-AR020 (R/HR Key)
ON OFF GREEN CHANNEL AVAIL Light ON MR/HR Y N Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.11 1 OPERABLE CHANNEL WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1RIU-AR021 (R/HR Key)
O N OFF Y N MAIN STEAM LINE 1A RADIATION 1RIU-AR022A (MR/HR Key)
ON OFF GREEN CHANNEL AVAIL Light ON MR/HR Y N Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.12 1 OPERABLE CHANNEL WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1RIU-AR023A (MR/HR Key)
ON OFF Y N MAIN STEAM LINE 1B RADIATION 1RIU-AR022B (MR/HR Key)
ON OFF GREEN CHANNEL AVAIL Light ON MR/HR Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.12 1 OPERABLE CHANNEL WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1RIU-AR023B (MR/HR Key)
ON OFF Y N MAIN STEAM LINE 1C RADIATION 1RI U-AR022C (MR/HR Key)
ON OFF GREEN CHANNEL AVAIL Light ON MR/HR Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.12 1 OPERABLE CHANNEL WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1RIU-AR023C (MR/HR Key)
ON OFF Y N MAIN STEAM LINE 1D RADIATION 1RIU-AR022D (MR/HR Key)
ON OFF GREEN CHANNEL AVAIL Light ON MR/HR Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.12 1 OPERABLE CHANNEL WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1RIU-AR023D (MR/HR Key)
ON OFF Y N
- Limitation and Action E.8 met.
Comments:
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION SURVEILLANCE DATA SHEET D-9 The Rad Monitoring CHANNEL CHECKS on this page are performed using the RM
-23 (IF desired):
PARAMETER INSTRUMENT AVAIL LIGHT INSTR VALUE CH CHK ACCEPT
- UNITS CHANNEL CHK OK? RG 1.97 DOT REQUIRED CHANNELS ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA UNIT ONE AUX BLDG VENT STACK WRGM GAS LOW 1RIU-PR030 (LOW Key) ON OFF One of three GREEN CHANNEL AVAIL Light ON µc/ml Y N Y N 1 TRM 3.3.i.6 1RIU-PR030 IS OPERABLE WITH CHAN CHKS SAT GAS MED 1RIU-PRO30 (MED Key) ON OFF GAS HIGH 1RIU-PR030 (HIGH Key)
ON OFF EFFL 1RIU-PR030 (EFFL Key)
ON OFF AVAIL Light ON µc/sec Y N N/A N/A UNIT TWO AUX BLDG VENT STACK WRGM GAS LOW 2RIU-PR030 (LOW Key) ON OFF One of three GREEN CHANNEL AVAIL Light ON µc/ml Y N Y N 1 TRM 3.3.i.6 2RIU-PR030 IS OPERABLE WITH CHAN CHKS SAT GAS MED 2RIU-PR030 (MED Key) ON OFF GAS HIGH 2RIU-PR030 (HIGH Key)
ON OFF EFFL 2RIU-PR030 (EFFL Key)
ON OFF AVAIL Light ON µc/sec Y N N/A N/A
- Limitation and Action E.8 met.
Comments:
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION SURVEILLANCE DATA SHEET D-10 The Rad Monitoring CHANNEL CHECKS on this page are performed using the RM
-11 (IF the RM
-23 is not used). Cursor color may be indicated as follows: G=Green, W=White, Y=Yellow, M=Magenta, DB=Dark Blue, LB=Light Blue, R=Red, C=Cyan.
PARAMETER INSTRUMENT CURSOR COLOR INSTR VALUE CH CHK ACCEPT
- UNITS CHANNEL CHK OK? REQUIRED CHANNELS ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA CONTAINMENT HIGH RANGE AREA RAD 1RE-AR020 (G4 4AS120)
Cursor is NOT White Dark Blue or Magenta R/HR Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.11 1 OPERABLE CHANNEL WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1RE-AR021 (G4 4AS121) Y N MAIN STEAM LINE 1A RADIATION 1RE-AR022A (G1 4AA122)
Cursor is NOT White Dark Blue or Magenta MR/HR Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.12 1 OPERABLE CHANNEL WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1RE-AR023A (G1 4AA123)
Y N MAIN STEAM LINE 1B RADIATION 1RE-AR022B (G1 4AB222)
Cursor is NOT White Dark Blue or Magenta MR/HR Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.12 1 OPERABLE CHANNEL WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1RE-AR023B (G1 4AB223)
Y N MAIN STEAM LINE 1C RADIATION 1RE-AR022C (G1 4AC322)
Cursor is NOT White Dark Blue or Magenta MR/HR Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.12 1 OPERABLE CHANNEL WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1RE-AR023C (G1 4AC323)
Y N MAIN STEAM LINE 1D RADIATION 1RE-AR022D (G1 4AD422)
Cursor is NOT White Dark Blue or Magenta MR/HR Y N 1 T.S. 3.3.3.1 2 1 OPERABLE CHANNEL WITH CHAN CHKS SAT 1RE-AR023D (G1 4AD423)
Y N
- Limitation and Action E.8 met.
Comments:
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION SURVEILLANCE DATA SHEET D-11 The Rad Monitoring CHANNEL CHECKS on this page are performed using the RM
-11 (IF the RM
-23 is not used). Cursor color may be indicated as follows: G=Green, W=White, Y=Yellow, M=Magenta, DB=Dark Blue, LB=Light Blue, R=Red, C=Cyan.
PARAMETER INSTRUMENT CURSOR COLOR INSTR VALUE CH CHK ACCEPT
- UNITS CHANNEL CHK OK? REQUIRED CHANNELS ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA UNIT ONE AUX BLDG VENT STACK WRGM GAS LOW 1RE-PR030 (G2 1PA130)
Cursor is NOT White Dark Blue or Magenta For Effluent Channel and at least one of the Gas Channels µc/ml Y N 1 TRM 3.3.i.6 1RE-PR030 IS OPERABLE CHAN CHKS SAT GAS @ MED 1RE-PR030 (G2 1PB230)
GAS @ HIGH 1RE-PR030 (G2 1PC330)
EFFL 1RE-PR030 (G2 1PF430)
µc/sec Y N N/A N/A UNIT TWO AUX BLDG VENT STACK WRGM GAS LOW 2RE-PR030 (G2 2PA130)
Cursor is NOT White Dark Blue or Magenta For Effluent Channel and at least one of the Gas Channel s µc/ml Y N 1 TRM 3.3.i.6 2RE-PR030 IS OPERABLE CHAN CHKS SAT GAS @ MED 2RE-PR030 (G2 2PB230)
GAS @ HIGH 2RE-PR030 (G2 2PC330)
EFFL 2RE-PR030 (G2 2PF430)
µc/sec Y N N/A N/A
- Limitation and Action E.8 met.
Comments: @ Gas Medium and Gas High Channels are normally NOT on line and are dark blue.
1BwOSR 3.3.3.1 Revision 14 Continuous Use UNIT ONE ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION SURVEILLANCE DATA SHEET D-12 The following Incore Thermocouple groups are symmetrically associated (one group per line). Maximum Deviation between thermocouples in each group is 20F. If the channel is inoperable, record "INOP". (Required channels: 4 per quadrant. T.S. 3.3.3.13)
IN NO QUADRANT QUADRANT 1 QUADRANT 2 QUADRANT 3 QUADRANT 4 DEVIATION 1 39 49 F 2 30 F 4 14 63 F 5 ** 55 ** 6 56 26 42 F 7 43 65 ** F 8 32 F 9 25 F 10 62 F 34 12 11 64 F 27 13 F 38 15 F 52 35 31 16 F 18 33 44 ** F 36 19 46 F 53 57 20 F 21 51 ** 54 28 48 47 61 F 22 ** 41 F 23 58 F 37 59 24 45 F The following Incore Thermocouples are NOT symmetrically associated. Maximum Deviation between all 6 is 60 F 40 3 50 17 29 ** F 60 RECORD total OPERABLE Incore Thermocouples for each quadrant
¢ _____ ( 4) ¢ _____ ( 4) ¢____ ( 4) ¢____ ( 4) VERIFY 4 per quadrant (init)
Comments: ** Incore Thermocouple disconnected. Value not required.
(Final)
Page 1 of 6 R-104 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an extra NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 is at full power (8,000 EFPH per 1BwOS NR
-1) with all control systems in automatic except rod control, which is in manual.
- 3. Boron concentration was 825 ppm 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> ago.
- 4. Control Bank 'D' is at 220 steps.
- 5. RCS Tave is 587 F. 6. At hrs (30 minutes ago) it was determined rods M
-4 and M-12 are inoperable and immovable due to failure to move during the Movable Control Assembly Surveillance. The QNE is informed.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The US has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2, Unit One Shutdown Margin Surveillance During Operation, per LCOAR 1BwOL 3.1.4, Condition A, Required Action A.1.1.
and inform the US of the results.
- 2. This is a time critical JPM.
Page 2 of 6 R-104 TASK TITL E: Determine Shutdown Margin is Inadequate JPM No.: R-104 REV: NRC 2011 TPO No.: 4.C.GP-03 K&A No.: 2.1.25 TASK No.: R-RK-005, Perform SDM Calculation K&A IMP: 3.9/4.2 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)
EVALUATOR:
DATE: The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 3-7 APPROX COMPLETION TIME:
23 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME:
30 minutes EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR X CLASSROOM GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. 1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2, Rev. 3, Unit One Shutdown Margin Surveillance During Operation
- 2. BwCB-1 (Various), Cycle 17 Braidwood Curve Book
- 3. 1BwOL 3.1.4, Rev. 4, LCOAR
- Rod Group Alignment Limits Tech Spec LCO 3.1.4 4. Braidwood TRM and Unit 1 COLR MATERIALS:
- 1. 1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2 2. BwCB-1 (Various), Cycle 17 Braidwood Curve Book
- 3. Braidwood Technical Requirements Manual (TRM)
- 4. Calculator
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Perform the required actions of 1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2, Unit 1 Shutdown Margin Surveillance During Operation (within 30 minutes).
- 2. Determine Shutdown Margin unacceptable for current plant conditions.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an extra NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 is at full power (8,000 EFPH per 1BwOS NR
-1) with all control systems in automatic except rod control, which is in manual.
- 3. Boron concentration was 825 ppm 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> ago.
- 4. Control Bank 'D' is at 220 steps.
- 5. RCS Tave is 587 F. 6. At hrs (30 minutes ago) it was determined rods M
-4 and M-12 are inoperable and immovable due to failure to move during the Movable Control Assembly Surveillance. The QNE is informed.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The US has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2, Unit One Shutdown Margin Surveillance During Operation, per LCOAR 1BwOL 3.1.4, Condition A, Required Action A.1.1. and inform the US of the results.
- 2. This is a time critical JPM.
Page 3 of 6 R-104 Provide CUES ONLY if actual plant/ simulator conditions are not available.
RECORD START TIME PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 1. Refer to 1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2. CUE: Provide a copy of the procedure.
All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions have been met. Open 1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. Document the "Present Conditions"
CUE: Core Average Burnup is 8,000 EFPH).
Tave is 587 F. Reactor Power level is 100%. RCS Boron is 825 ppm 1 hr ago, no changes have been made.
Determine and record the following:
Date and Time (step F.1.a). Core Average Burnup from 1BwOS NR-1 (step F.1.b).
Core Average Temperature (step F.1.c).
Power Level (step F.1.d).
Present Boron Concentration (step F.1.e).
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *3. Determine total worth due to rods. Control Bank D=220 steps.
10 pcm (0 to 25 pcm)
Student Value: ____
3304.9 pcm
- 10 pcm = 3294.9 pcm (3269.9 to 3304.9 pcm) Student Value: ____
3431.9 pcm + 3294.9 pcm
= 6726.8 pcm (6701.8 to 6736.8 pcm). Student Value:____
Determine total worth due to rods and record the following:
Control Bank position (step F.2.a). Remaining worth of the Control Banks from BwCB
-1 figure 2 based on recorded position in step F.2.a. (step F.2.b) and current EFPH.
SUBTRACT the Control Bank remaining worth from the Control Bank total worth to obtain the total available worth due to Control Bank position.
(step F.2.c). ADD the Shutdown Bank worth (from BwCB
-1, Table 4-1) plus the total available Control Bank worth (F.2.c.) and record the total worth due to rods (step F.2.d).
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
Page 4 of 6 R-104 PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 4. Determine actual reactivity available due to rods.
CUE: QNE has been notified that continued operations is desired.
2 untrippable rods 947.4 pcm 2 x 2000 = 4000 pcm 6726.8 -4000 - 947.4 = 1779.4 pcm (1754.4 to 1789.4 pcm)
Student Value:____
Determine and record actual reactivity due to rods as follows: Number of immovable or untrippable control rods (step F.3.a).
Highest stuck rod worth from BwCB-1 Table 4-1 (step F.3.b).
MULTIPLY the number of immovable or untrippable control rods (step F.3.a) by
2000pcm (step F.3.c).
Total rod worth (F.2.d) minus worth of immovable or untrippable rods (F.3.c.)
minus highest stuck rod worth (F.3.b) = actual reactivity available due to rods (step F.3.d).
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *5. Determine current Power Defect 1885 pcm + 15 (Fig. 17a) 1885 pcm (1898 to 1873) (Table 2-1) Determine and record the current power defect for this Boron Concentration and Power Level from either:
o Figure 17A
- OR - o Table 2-1 o Checks appropriate box for the method used.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
Page 5 of 6 R-104 PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 6. Perform Shutdown Margin Verification 1779.4 pcm + (-)1885 pcm = -105.6 pcm (-311.5 to -367.5 pcm) 1.3 x 1000 = 1300 pcm.
-336.5 pcm (-143.6 to -83.6 pcm > 1300 pcm (NO
) Student Value:______
CUE: As US acknowledge inadequate SDM and you will take the appropriate actions. Note: Record the time (________) that the SDM is determined to be unacceptable.
VERIFY Shutdown Margin as follows:
ADD total corrected rod worth (F.3.d) to the power defect (F.4) (Step F.5.a)
Record the Shutdown Margin Limit for Modes 1 and 2 from the COLR (step F.5.b) VERIFY the available shutdown reactivity recorded in step F.5.a is greater than or equal to the minimum required Shutdown Margin Limit recorded in step F.5.b.
(Step F.5.c) o Inform US that Shutdown Margin is NOT met and LCOAR 1BwOL TRM 3.1.h needs to be initiated SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *7. Verify total elapsed time to determine SDM unacceptable is
< 30 minutes.
Determine inadequate SDM within 60 minutes of time given in Task Conditions.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME
COMMENTS:
Page 6 of 6 R-104 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS
JPM NO: R-104 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE(S): If performed in simulator, 100% power steady state, Rods in Manual or can be performed in Classroom
MALFUNCTION #'S: N/A
COMMENTS: Perform surveillance beforehand to obtain correct numbers for grading purposes. Update JPM cues with latest numbers from current curve book data.
WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61 ATTACHMENT 10 SURVEILLANCE WO DISPOSITION SHEET (APPLICABLE TO MID
-WEST SITES ONLY)
Page 1 of 1 Unit: _1__ Procedure: PMID/RQ: ______1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2____ 123456____ Work Order #:
__ N/APMID/RQ Title: ____________
U-1 SHUTDOWN MARGIN SURV. DURING OPERATIONPMID/RQ Due Date: ____________ N/A________ PMID/RQ Late Date: N/A Signature/Authorization Approval Review:
Name Date Shift Authorization to Start Work:
__Time _Joe Supervisor
______ Today Work Started
__________________________
________ ________ 5 min ago Work Stopped:
__________________________
________ ________ Supv Review of Work Completion:
__________________________
________ ________ ANI Review of work package:
__________________________
________ ________ Surveillance Found Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO Surveillance Left Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO ("Work Started" date (above shall beComplete one of the following:
the credit date unless otherwise explained)
Verify Credit Surveillance Credit Date per another WO# ______________
Below: If crediting 'per another WO', verify credit date is 'Work Started' date of referenced WO.
_________ Complete Sat
- Credit Surveillance Complete w/ Portions Unsat
- Credit Surveillan ce No Work Performed
- Credit Surveillance Failed - Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)
No Work Performed
- Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)
Comments _____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
ADDITIONAL REVIEW OF RESULTS (IF REQUIRED)
____________________
____________________________________
________ ____________________
____________________________________
________ ____________________
____________________________________
________ ____________________
____________________________________
________ Title Signature Date WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61
1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2 Revision 3 Continuous Use 1 UNIT ONE SHUTDOWN MARGIN SURVEILLANCE DURING OPERATION A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY
This procedure outlines the steps necessary to verify Shutdown Margin in MODE 1 and MODE 2 when the Reactor is critical.
This Procedure SHALL be performed:
- 1. Within one hour after detection of one or more inoperable shutdown or control rods in MODE 1; and MODE 2 with the reactor critical as directed by LCOAR 1BwOL 3.1.4.
- 2. Within one hour after detection of one control or shutdown rod not within alignment limits and once per 12 hours0.5 days <br />0.0714 weeks <br />0.0164 months <br /> thereafter as directed by LCOAR 1BwOL 3.1.4.
- 3. Within one hour after detection of more than one shutdown or control rod not within alignment limits as directed by LCOAR 1BwOL 3.1.4.
- 4. Within one hour after detection of one or more shutdown banks not within the insertion limits specified in the COLR as directed by LCOAR 1BwOL 3.1.5.
- 5. Within one hour after detection of one or more control banks not within the insertion, sequence and overlap limits specified in the COLR in MODE 1; an d MODE 2 with the reactor critical as directed by LCOAR 1BwOL 3.1.6. B. REFERENCES
- 1. Tech Spec LCO:
- a. 3.1.4.
- b. 3.1.5.
- c. 3.1.6. 2. Technical Requirements Manual TLCO: 3.1.h.
- 3. Technical Requirements Manual Surveillance Requirements: 3.1.h.1.
1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2 Revision 3 Continuous Use 2 B. 4. Station Commitments:
- 5. Station Procedures:
- a. BwCB-1, Braidwood Curve Book
- Unit One.
- b. 1BwOS NR-1, Power History Hourly Surveillance.
- c. 1BwOL 3.1.4, LCOAR
- Reactivity Control Systems
- Rod Group Alignment Limits.
- d. 1BwOL 3.1.5, LCOAR
- Reactivity Control Systems
- Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits.
- e. 1BwOL 3.1.6, LCOAR
- Reactivity Control Systems
- Control Bank Insertion Limits.
- f. 1BwOL TRM 3.1.h, LCOAR
- Reactivity Control Systems
- Shutdown Margin (SDM).
- g. BwVS TRM 3.1.h.1, Core Reload Sequence and Verification.
- 6. Braidwood Station Core Operating Limits Report, (COLR).
C. PREREQUISITES
Receive permission to perform this surveillance from the Shift Manager or designee prior to performance by having the Data Package Cover Sheet signed and dated.
D. PRECAUTIONS
BwCB Figures are core life dependent. Ensure Figures and Tables used are correct for current core burnup.
1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2 Revision 3 Continuous Use 3 E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS
- 2. In the event the Acceptance Criteria is not met during the performance of this surveillance, IMMEDIATELY notify the Shift Manager to initiate LCOAR procedure 1BwOL TRM 3.1.h.
- 3. The following factors should be considered in calculating SDM:
- a. Reactor Coolant System boron concentration.
- b. Control rod position.
- c. Reactor Coolant System average temperature.
- d. Fuel burnup based on gross thermal energy generation.
- e. Xenon concentration.
- f. Samarium concentration.
1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2 Revision 3 Continuous Use 4 F. MAIN BODY 1. Present Conditions
- a. RECORD the Date/Time of this calculation:
Date: ___________
Time: ___________
- b. RECORD the Core EFPH (Burnup) from 1BwOS NR
-1 for the date and time recorded above:
___________ EFPH
- c. RECORD the Core Average Temperature:
___________ F d. RECORD the Power Level:
___________ %
- e. RECORD the present Boron Concentration:
___________ ppm
1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2 Revision 3 Continuous Use 5 NOTE The Shutdown banks must be fully withdrawn when operating with the Reactor critical, therefore, the Shutdown Bank worth is taken from BwCB-1, Table 4
-1, Shutdown Bank total Worth (pcm) for the appropriate time in cycle life. F. 2. Total Worth Due To Rods
- a. RECORD the Control Bank position:
Bank: _________
Step: _________
NOTE Select the appropriate graph from either BwCB
-1 Figure 2 or Figure 2a based on power level and core burnup.
- b. RECORD the inserted worth of the Control Banks from BwCB
-1 Figure 2 or Figure 2a using Control Bank position from step F.2.a:
___________ pcm
- c. SUBTRACT the Control Bank inserted worth (F.2.b) from the Control Bank total worth (from BwCB
-1, Table 4
-1) to obtain the total available worth due to the Control Bank position:
pcm - pcm = pcm (BwCB-1, Table 4
-1, (F.2.b) Total CB Worth)
- d. ADD the Shutdown Bank worth (from BwCB
-1, Table 4
-1) plus the total available Control Bank worth (F.2.c) and RECORD the total worth due to rods: pcm + pcm = pcm (BwCB-1, Table 4
-1, (F.2.c) Total Shutdown
Bank Worth)
1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2 Revision 3 Continuous Use 6 F. 3. Actual Reactivity Available Due To Rods NOTE If any inoperable Control Rod(s) is (are) determined to be immovable or untrippable, INFORM a Qualified Nuclear Engineer if continued operations is desired.
NOTE The following step addresses several off normal shutdown and control bank conditions. If there are no known stuck/untrippable rods, enter 0 in step F.3.a and F.3.c.
- a. RECORD the number of immovable and/or untrippable Control Rods:
_________ Rod(s)
- b. RECORD the highest stuck rod worth from BwCB
-1, Table 4
-1:
_________ pcm
- c. MULTIPLY the number of immovable and/or untrippable Control Rods (F.3.a) by 2000 pcm:
x 2000 pcm =
pc m (F.3.a) d. PERFORM the following calculation:
Total rod worth (F.2.d) minus worth of immovable/untrippable rod(s)
(F.3.c) minus the highest stuck rod worth (F.3.b) = actual reactivity available due to rods:
________ pcm
- ________ pcm
- ________ pcm = ________ pcm (F.2.d) (F.3.c) (F.3.b) 1BwOSR 3.1.1.1
-2 Revision 3 Continuous Use 7 F. 4. Power defect for present Power Level
- NOTE The pcm value for Power Defect as used in this procedure will always be a negative number.
- a. RECORD Power Defect from BwCB
-1 Figure 17A (or proper chart i n Table 2-1 for the core age) using Boron Concentration (F.1.e) and Power Level (F.1.d):
(-) ___________ pcm INDICATE Method used:
Figure 17A Table 2-1 ¢ 5. Shutdown Margin Verification
- a. ADD the total corrected rod worth (F.3.d) to the Power Defect (F.4):
_________ pcm + (-)_________ pcm = ¢_________ pcm (F.3.d) (F.4.a) b. RECORD the Shutdown Margin Limit for MODES 1 and 2 from the COLR:
_________ % k/k x 1000 ___pcm____ = _________ pcm SDM Limit % k/k c. VERIFY that the available shutdown reactivity recorded in step (F.5.a) is greater than or equal to the minimum required Shutdown Margin Limit recorded in step (F.5.b)
_________ pcm _________ pcm (F.5.a) (F.5.b) G. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA The available Shutdown Margin must be within the limits specified in the COLR.
(Final)
R-203 Page 1 of 5 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 2 Assist NSO.
- 2. The U-0 Hogging vacuum pump is being removed from service for the FIN team to make a packing adjustment.
- 3. A standard worker tagout for 0OG01P has been printed.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit 2 Unit Supervisor directs you to review the first hang for Worker Tagout #P13
-100, to isolate and drain 0OG01P. The final clear will be prepared at a later date.
- 2. Inform the Unit Supervisor when you have completed your review of the WTO and, either approve the WTO form or feedback (mark up) all necessary changes.
R-203 Page 2 of 5 TASK TITLE:
Verify Worker Tagout Checklist.
JPM No.: R-203 REV: 2013 NRC Task No.: 4E.AM-06 K&A No.: 2.2.13 Objective No.:
R-AM-010 K&A IMP:
4.1/4.3 EXAMINEE: RO EVALUATOR:
DATE: The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 5, 6, 7 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 30 MINUTES
CRITICAL TIME:
N/A EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFOR M X IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. OP-AA-109-101, CLEARANCE AND TAGGING, REV 9.
- 2. M-47, sheet 1A, DIAGRAM OF OFF
-GAS SYSTEM UNIT 1.
- 3. M-150, sheet 1, DIAGRAM OF OFF
-GAS SYSTEM UNIT 2.
- 4. 20E-0-4030-OG01, SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM HOGGING VACUUM PUMP 0
- 0OG01P. 5. 20E-0-4030-OG05, SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM VACUUM PUMP 0 INLET VALVE
- 0OG009. MATERIALS:
- 1. OP-AA-109-101, CLEARANCE AND TAGGING, REV 9.
- 2. OP-BR-109-101-1001, BRAIDWOOD SYSTEM SPECIFIC TAGGING GUIDES, REV 8.
- 3. M-47, sheet 1A, DIAGRAM OF OFF
-GAS SYSTEM UNIT 1.
- 4. 20E-0-4030-OG01, SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM HOGGING VACUUM PUMP 0
- 0OG01P. 5. 20E-0-4030-OG05, SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM VACUUM PUMP 0 INLET VALVE
- 0OG009. TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Determine 0OG047 valve has incorrect unit designator.
- 2. Determine 0OG01P suction line not properly isolated.
- 3. Determine the sequence of isolation points for 0OG01P C/S and breaker is incorrect.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 2 Assist NSO.
- 2. The U-0 Hogging vacuum pump is being removed from service for the FIN team to make a packing adjustment.
- 3. A standard worker tagout for 0OG01P has been printed.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit 2 Unit Supervisor directs you to review the first hang for Worker Tagout #P13
-100, to isolate and drain 0OG01P. the final clear will be prepared at a later date.
CUE: Hand examinee partially completed Worker Tagout.
- 2. Inform the Unit Supervisor when you have completed your review of the WTO and either approve the WTO form or feedback (mark up) all necessary changes.
R-203 Page 3 of 5 RECORD START TIME:
NOTE TO EVALUATOR: DO NOT PROVIDE DRAWING M-150 UNTIL THE EXAMINEE REQUESTS IT LATER IN THE JPM. THE OTHER DRAWINGS AS HIGHLIGHTED ARE PART OF THE PACKAGE AND MAY BE PROVIDED ALL TOGETHER TO THE EXAMINEE.
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 1. Refer to OP
-AA-109-101, CLEARANCE AND TAGGING.
CUE: Provide copy of OP-AA-109-101. Refer to OP
-AA-109-101. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. Refer to Drawing:
M-47, sheet 1A, DIAGRAM OF OFF-GAS SYSTEM UNIT 1 CUE: Provide copy of M
-47, sheet 1A. Refer to M
-47, sheet 1A.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 3. Refer to Drawing:
20E-0-4030-OG01, SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM HOGGING VACUUM PUMP 0
- 0OG01P CUE: Provide copy of 20E-0-4030-OG01. Refer to 20E 4030-OG01. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 4. Refer to Drawing:
20E-0-4030-OG05, SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM HOGGING VACUUM PUMP 0 INLET VALVE
- 0OG009 CUE: Provide copy of 20E-0-4030-OG05. Refer to 20E 4030-OG05. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: Evaluators Note: The performer should review the WTO checklist for proper isolation points, sequencing, tag types and OOS positions.
The critical steps of identifying each error in the WTO can be performed in any order. All (3) three errors must be identified to the evaluator for successful JPM performance.
Any additional comments made by the performer should be acknowledged by the evaluator in the same manner as the identification of the WTO errors.
- 5. Determine the clearance sequence for the U0 Hogging Vacuum Pump breaker and C/S are swapped.
CUE: Acknowledge as Unit Supervisor and inform examinee that C/O will be corrected per their mark
up. Determines clearance sequence is incorrect:
0OG01P U0 Hogging Pump C/S should be sequenced prior to the Brkr.
o Notifies US of sequencing error. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
R-203 Page 4 of 5 PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 6. Determine the U0 Hogging Vacuum Pump suction isolation is not adequate
.
CUE: Acknowledge as Unit Supervisor and inform examinee that C/O will be corrected per their mark up. CUE: If asked, provide drawing M-150 sheet 1.
Determines clearance isolation is incorrect:
Suction isolation point of 0OG009 is inadequate and further action is needed for proper isolation as follows:
o Gag closed the 0OG009 valve OR o Identify and use upstream isolation points (1OG043 and 2OG043, both air op valves that fail closed are acceptable upstream isolation points
) o Notifies US of isolation error. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *7. Determine a wrong unit designator is used.
CUE: Acknowledge as Unit Supervisor and inform examinee that C/O will be corrected per their mark up. Determines a wrong unit designator is used.
Valve 0OG011 is misidentified as 1OG011 o Notifies US of component EPN error.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 8. Determine the WTO Tag types are correct. Determines the WTO Tag
types are correct.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 9. Determine the WTO Hang Positions are correct.
Determines the WTO Hang Positions are correct.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME:
COMMENTS:
R-203 Page 5 of 5 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS N/A COMMENTS Provide copy of OP
-AA-109-101, CLEARANCE AND TAGGING, REV 5.
Provide copy of M
-47, sheet 1A, DIAGRAM OF OFF
-GAS SYSTEM UNIT 1.
Provide copy of 20E 4030-OG01, SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM HOGGING VACUUM PUMP 0
- 0OG01P. Provide copy of 20E 4030-OG05, SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM VACUUM PUMP 0 INLET VALVE
- 0OG009.
OP-AA-109-101 Revision 9 Page 78 of 86 ATTACHMENT 14 PART 1 WTO Form Hang/Lift Section Page 1 of 1 Exceptional C/O:
Mode Dependent:
Condition Dependent:
Production Risk:
Environmental Risk:
Atmospheric Risk: Reactivity Risk:
WORKER TAGOUT
- P13-100 JOB DESCRIPTION
- WORKING DEPARTMENT:
U-0 HOGGING VACUUM PUMP PACKING ADGUSTMENT MMD W/O OR W/R:
12345 EQUIP. TAG# COMPONENT DESCRIPTION: 0OG01P FIRST APPROVAL:
U-0 HOGGING VACUUM PUM P __Jim NSO_________________________
DATE/TIME: Today/One hour agoSECOND APPROVAL:
_____________ ___________________
DATE/TIME: Today/45 minutes agoWTO AUTHORIZATION:
____________ __________________
DATE/TIME Today/30 minutes ago SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:
YES: NO: (IF YES SEE ATTACHMENT 14 PART 2)
EQUIP. TAG/EQUIPMENT NAME SEQ TAG TYPE POSITION HUNG BY VERIF. BY SFTY. VERIF. RTS SEQ RTS POSITION RTS BY VERIF. BY Bus 134Y Cub 5B (1AP17E Q) 0OG01P U0 Hogging Pump Brk 1 RD R/O 0OG01P U0 Hogging Pump C/S 0HS-OG011 (0PM01J) 2 CI PTL 0OG009 L/C/S Hog Vac pp Inlet Vlv 0HS-OG030 (0OG01J) 2 CD CLOSED 0OG009 FU-5X Fuse Hog Vac Pp Inlet Vlv C/P (0OG01J) 3 RD RMVD 0OG044A U0 Hog Vac Pp Suct Isol From U1 Wtr Box Priming Hdr 4 RD CLOSED 0OG044B U0 Hog Vac Pp Suct Isol From U2 Wtr Box Priming Hdr 4 RD CLOSED 0OG023 Hog Vac Pp Demin Wtr Supply 4 RD CLOSED 0OG047 Air Sep Tk 0 Outlet To U
-2 Vent Stack 4 RD CLOSED 1OG011 Air Sep Tk 0 Outlet To U
-1 Vent Stack 4 RD CLOSED 0OG046 Air Sep Tk 0 Drn 5 RI INFO 0OG045 Hog Vac Pp 0 Seal Drn Vlv 5 RI INFO WTO PLACED:
___________________________________________________________
DATE/TIME: _______________WTL COMPLETED WORK START: ___________________________________________ DATE/TIME:
_______________
WTO FINAL CLEAR:
WORK CREWMEMBER RELEASE: _________________________ DATE/TIME:
_______________
WTO CLEARED: ____________________________________________________________ DATE/TIME: ____________________
(COPIES MAY BE MADE OF THIS FORM FOR ADDITIONAL ISOLATION POINTS)
OP-AA-109-101 Revision 9 Page 79 of 86 ATTACHMENT 14 PART 2 WTO Form Special Instructions Section Page 1 of 1 WTO # P13-100 EXEPTIONAL CO Motor htr. not OOS.
WS not isolated to hogging cooler. Reference BwOP OG
-1 & BwOP OG
-2 as necessary Info card instruction: 0OG045 and 0OG046 open for drain.
- RTS NOTES ******************************************************************************
Review BwOP OG
-2 For S/D Line up
OP-AA-109-101 Revision 9 Page 66 of 86 ATTACHMENT 5 Clearance Preparation/Approval Checklist Page 1 of 4 CLEARANCE #
______ P13-100____________
EQUIPMENT
___0OG01P_______________________________________________
Exceptional C/O:
Mode Dependent:
Condition Dependent:
Production Risk:
Environmental Risk:
Atmospheric Risk:
Reactivity Risk:
Preparation Brief:
Pre-Job Brief may be Required IF:
(Initial following brief, or N/A)
HU-AA-1212 may be required IF:
(Initial, or N/A)
Writer/Preparer Approver First time for writing this type of C/O?
N/A N/A Complex C/O which integrates several systems?
N/A Unfamiliar with system or prints? Boundary involves Daisy Chains? Confusing nomenclature?
Boundary impacts PLC or Black box logic?
Emergent request?
Pre-Job Brief required Pre-Job Brief Discussion Items:
(, or N/A) (Initial, or N/A)
Is there any in
-house or external OE?
N/A What human performance tools will be utilized (e.g. C/O Preparer Checklist, HU
-AA series procedures)?
Applicable Clearance Order preparation considerations.
Actions to be performed for all checklist types:
Writer/Preparer
() - N/A Approver () - N/A Preparation Brief requirements reviewed Special Instructions reviewed / entered Exceptional criteria evaluated Containment integrity considered N/A C/O hang (lift) risk considered (See Page 4 of 4)
C/O Production/Reactivity/Environmental/Atmospheric (Breathing or Explosive) Risk impact evaluated and critical steps identified
OP-AA-109-101 Revision 9 Page 67 of 86 ATTACHMENT 5 Clearance Preparation/Approval Checklist Page 2 of 4 Specific actions to be performed for hang checklists: CHK # _________
Writer/Preparer
() - N/A Approver () - N/A C/O positions and Sequence correct All attached work scope understood Drain and vent requirements identified Tech Spec applicability assessed Fire Protection concerns noted / addressed C/O step types and tag types correct Requestor notified if work not isolated as requested Specific actions to be performed for lift checklists:
CHK # _________
Writer/Preparer
() - N/A Approver () - N/A Lift positions / sequence appropriate for plant status N/A Non-tagged items included in checklist as needed N/A Fill and vent issues addressed N/A Instrumentation backfill requirements identified N/A Configuration control actions properly addressed?
N/A Specific actions for Work Addition to an approved C/O: List W/O's
- Writer/Preparer
() - N/A Approver () - N/A New work scope reviewed and understood N/A Isolation point positions and tag types verified as adequate N/A Exceptional C/O criteria evaluated N/A Containment integrity considered N/A Drain and vent requirements identified N/A Special Instructions reviewed / entered N/A Requestor notified if work not isolated as requested N/A
- IF C/O is placed, THEN complete ALL approvals before attaching the additional work
OP-AA-109-101 Revision 9 Page 68 of 86 ATTACHMENT 5 Clearance Preparation/Approval Checklist Page 3 of 4 Clearance Order preparation considerations Determine the scope of work:
Review and approve the Clearance Request.
Review the Work Order instructions and applicable procedures.
Identify C/O and temp lift requirements, placement of jumpers, or introductions of any energy sources.
Review any TMOD's or design changes that are in progress against the system or equipment.
Review the applicable Unit Turnovers for any abnormalities or unusual conditions.
Consult with the Work Planner or SME (Fire Marshal, Engineer) if doubt exists on the scope of work and/or return the C/R if needed for further information. Establish the Zone of Protection:
Identify electrical and mechanical drawings as needed. Refer to Passport T210 or T215 panels to identify pending document changes.
Request DCP or Mod packages as needed Prepare a sketch or outline of the protection needed including grounds.
Review equipment procedures for special needs in startup, shutdown, or changeover.
Walkdown the equipment looking for interfaces with other equipment/systems not identified or incorrect on drawings.
Submit label requests and drawing change requests as needed.
Review any historical/model C/O's for the same work scope. Compare zone of protection, Special Instructions, etc.
Verify positions correct, sequencing appropriate, tag types correct.
Identify "concerns" in the Special Instructions:
Equipment draining requirements. Note any process lines that can't be drained, any siphon paths, hoses needed, etc.
"Daisy chained" neutrals.
Safety hazards (confined space, fall hazard, etc.)
Tech Spec / TRM / ODCM requirements.
Document any Subject Matter Expert review (Fire Marshal, System Engineer, Component Engineer, etc.)
Any switching orders required, other departments needed to assist in hanging/clearing the C/O (Rad Pro, Maintenance, etc.). The Operations Planning person(s) should be notified to appropriately schedule these resources.
Include a note of any grounds that need to be installed / removed, by which department, and manipulations that may be required.
Exceptional C/O criteria evaluated.
Containment integrity considered.
Environmental concerns such as special sampling equipment affected, compensatory measures required, draining of hazardous materials, or systems containing tritium.
OP-AA-10 9-101 Revision 9 Page 69 of 86 ATTACHMENT 5 Clearance Preparation/Approval Checklist Page 4 of 4 C/O Hang/Lift risk consideration Hang risk actions Lift risk actions Possible effects Fuse or circuit board removal Fuse or circuit board installation Auto-starts Equipment trips Reactor Protection Logic signals Control Room indication changes Control Room annunciators Opposite Unit / Train effects Turbine Supervisory Logic Radioactive release Loss of Main condenser vacuum Draining / venting Filling / Venting Isolating instruments Valving in instruments Jumper installation Jumper removal Breaking daisy chains Restoring daisy chains Isolating control air Valving in control air De-energizing control power Energizing control power Lifting of leads Landing of leads Installing grounds Removing grounds What are the Critical Steps in the task?
The 5 Key Questions What is the Worst Thing that can go wrong?
What are the Error Likely Situations?
What Defenses are we relying upon?
What actions will assure proper configuration control?
Note: When assembling the C/O package include pages 1
-4 of this attachment.
Writer/Preparer ___________Jim NSO_________________________/_Today Name Date ___ Approver _______________________________________________/_________
Name Date C/O Challenge ________________________________________/_________
Name Date
NOTE TO EXAMINER:
ONLY PROVIDE THE ENCLOSED DRAWING (M
-150 SHEET 1) IF THE EXAMINEE SPECIFICALLY REQUESTS THAT DRAWING.
DO NOT PROVIDE THIS DRAWING AS PART OF THE INITIAL CLEARANCE ORDER PACKAGE AT START OF THE JPM.
R-402 Page 1 of 7 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 2 Assist NSO.
- 2. A reactor trip has occurred on Unit 1.
- 3. An Alert was declared forty minutes ago. The initial NARS notification was transmitted in accordance with required procedures. Two minutes ago a change in plant condition resulted in an upgrade to the emergency action level to a Site Area Emergency FS1.
- 4. EP-MW-114-100-F-01, NUCLEAR ACCIDENT REPORTING SYSTEM (NARS) FORM has been filled out and approved.
- 5. This is a Time Critical JPM.
INITIATING CUES: 1. The Shift Manager directs you to transmit the NARS form for the upgraded EAL status of Unit 1 per EP-MW-114-100, MW Region Offsite Notifications.
- 2. Another NSO will monitor the remainder of the Main Control Board panels and address alarms as necessary.
- 3. Inform the Shift Manager when the NARS form has been transmitted.
R-402 Page 2 of 7 TASK TITLE:
Perform NARS Update Transmittal JPM No.: R-402 REV: CERT 2013 TPO No.: 4F.ZP-02 K&A No.: 2.4.39 TASK No.: R-ZP-004 Transmit NARS Form K&A IMP: 3.9/3.8 EXAMINEE: RO EVALUATOR: DATE: The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 3, 4 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 10 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME:
13 minutes
EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. EP-MW-114-100, MW REGION OFFSITE NOTIFICATIONS, Rev. 12.
- 2. EP-MW-114-100-F-01, NUCLEAR ACCIDENT REPORTING SYSTEM (NARS) FORM, Rev. G.
MATERIALS:
- 1. EP-MW-114-100, Rev. 12, MW REGION OFFSITE NOTIFICATIONS.
- 2. EP-MW-114-100-F-01, Rev. G, NUCLEAR ACCIDENT REPORTING SYSTEM (NARS) FORM.
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Determine correct NARS phone code or phone number.
- 2. Complete NARS initial roll call within 15 minutes of the initiating cue.
- 3. Transmit NARS data to offsite agencies.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 2 Assist NSO.
- 2. A reactor trip has occurred on Unit 1.
- 3. An Alert was declared forty minutes ago. The initial NARS notification was transmitted in accordance with required procedures. Two minutes ago a change in plant condition resulted in an upgrade to the emergency action level to a Site Area Emergency FS1.
- 4. EP-MW-114-100-F-01, NUCLEAR ACCIDENT REPORTING SYSTEM (NARS) FORM has been filled out and approved.
- 5. This is a Time Critical JPM.
INITIATING CUES
- 1. The Shift Manager directs you to transmit the NARS form for the upgraded EAL status of Unit 1 per EP-MW-114-100, MW Region Offsite Notifications.
- 2. Another NSO will monitor the remainder of the Main Control Board panels and address alarms as necessary.
- 3. Inform the Shift Manager when the NARS form has been transmitted.
R-402 Page 3 of 7 RECORD START TIME:
EVALUATOR NOTE: Provide examinee the completed NARs form and copy of EP
-MW-114-100-F-01. EVALUATOR NOTE: JPM critical time (13 minutes) starts when the initiati ng cue has been read to the examinee and stops after the initial roll call is made and the NARS information starts to be transmitted.
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 1. Refer to EP
-MW-114-100, MW REGION OFFSITE NOTIFICATIONS.
Refer to EP
-M W-114-100: Determine step 4.2 needs to be performed.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2 Refer to EP
-MW-114-100-F-01, NUCLEAR ACCIDENT REPORTING SYSTEM (NARS) FORM. Refer to EP
-MW-114-100-F-01: Determine NARS Code 20 to be used to transmit NARS form.
R-402 Page 4 of 7 *3. Establish communications:
Note: After examinee dials Code 20, provide the following cue:
CUE: After a short pause, a busy signal is heard.
CUE: After a short pause, a dial tone is heard. (if candidate tries code 20 or 50 again, repeat the same cues).
CUE: After dialing 1
-217-782-7860, you announce that you are Steve from IEMA on the line.
Note: After examinee reads messages, provide the following cue:
CUE: IEMA online.
Establish communications as follows: Pick up NARS phone.
DIAL code 20. (hear s busy signal
) DIAL code 50 to enter the bridge. (hears pause and then dial tone)
Determines that it will be necessary to call via the commercial exchange number for IEMA found on page 2 of the NARS form.
Dials 1-217-782-7860. Read the following message: "This is Exelon Nuclear Braidwood Station Control Room. Please standby for a NARS message." o Read the following message: "This is the Exelon Nuclear Braidwood Station Control room. Please standby to receive a NARS message and respond as the roll is called." TAKE Initial Roll Call Mark Initial Box for IEMA Record time and date initial roll call complete.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: EVALUATOR NOTE: Critical time TIME STOPS when examinee completes initial roll call.
Determine critical time:
_________________________
- ________________________
= ________________________
(Time initial roll call complete) (JPM start time)
< 13 minutes
R-402 Page 5 of 7 PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABL E *4. Verbally transmit the NARS Form. Verbally transmit the NARS Form: Utility Message No:
2_ State Message No: N/A Status - [B] Drill/Exercise Station - [A] Braidwood Onsite Condition
- [C] Site Area Emergency Accident Classified:
Time: Two minutes ag
- o. Date: Today. EAL # : FS1 Accident Terminated Date and Time: N/A Release Status: [A] None Type of Release: [A] Not Applicable Wind Dir:
270 Wind Speed:
o [A] is N/A
[B] 4.5 Miles/Hr Recommended Actions:
Utility Recommendation: [A] None Additional Information: None Verified With: U. Supervisor Approved By: S. Manager SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 5. Complete the NARS form.
CUE: IF examinee asks for a phone number to use, provide: outside line is
815-458-7882. CUE: Steve Smith, IEMA. Fill in the following information on the NARS Form after transmitting info in blocks 1
-10: Mark 11A, EXELON Examinee Name Outside line number Current Time Current Date Name of person from IEMA receiving message Organization (IEMA)
Current time Today's date SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
R-402 Page 6 of 7 PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 6. Perform Final Roll Call Note: As examinee performs final roll call provide the following cues:
CUE: IEMA (Steve)
CUE: No questions from either IEMA PERFORM Final Roll Call and marks boxes for:
IEMA Ask if there are any questions about the information provided.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 7. STATE "NARS communication is complete."
STATE "NARS communication is complete."
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME:
COMMENTS:
R-402 Page 7 of 7 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS Verify/perform TQ
-BR-201-0113, BRAIDWOOD TRAINING DEPARTMENT SIMULATOR EXAMINATION SECURITY ACTIONS CHECKLIST.
Complete items on Simulator Ready for Training Checklist COMMENTS Provide copy of EP
-MW-114-100, MW REGION OFFSITE NOTIFICATIONS, Rev. 12.
Provide copy of EP
-MW-114-100-F-01, NUCLEAR ACCIDENT REPORTING SYSTEM (NARS) FORM, Rev. G, with the following information completed:
Utility Message No
- 2 State Message No
- N/A Status - [B] Drill/Exercise Station - [A] Braidwood Onsite Condition
- [C] Site Area Emergency Accident Classified:
Time - Two minutes ago.
Date - Today. EAL # - FS1 Accident Terminated Date and Time are N/A.
Release Status
- [A] None Type of Release
- [A] Not Applicable Wind Dir - 270 Wind Speed
- [B] 4.5 Miles/Hr ([A] is N/A)
Recommendations
- [A] None Additional Information
- "None" Verified With
- U. Supervisor Approved By
- S. Manager
(Final)
S-111A 1 TASK CONDITIONS:
INITIAL CONDITIONS:
- 2. Tave is 0.5°F greater than Tref.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The QNE has advised Control Bank D should be withdrawn 13 steps to the desired target for proper long term fuel burn up.
- 2. The RO has completed the following:
Calculated the expected final Tave
-Tref error that will result from the rod movement.
Calculate reactivity change to match Tave to Tref following the manual rod withdrawal.
- 3. The RO has provided you with:
The Reactivity Change Determination Form, Attachment 1 of OP-AP-300-1004 for the reactivity addition following the rod movement, and A copy of the procedure that will be used for the reactivity addition and asked you to approve the reactivity plan.
S-111A 2 TASK TITLE:
Review/Approve Reactivity Change
JPM No.: S-111A REV: CERT 2013 TPO No.: 4.C.CV-04 K&A No.: 2.1.43 TASK No.: R-CV-003, Perform boron dilution of the RC System K&A IMP: 4.1/4.3 EXAMINEE: RO SRO
EVALUATOR:
DAT E:
The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 3,4,5,6,7 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 15 MINUTES
CRITICAL TIME:
N/A EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X_ SIMULATOR ___
GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. OP-AP-300-1004, Rev.2, Pwr Boration and Dilution Requirements
- 2. BwCB-1 (Various), Braidwood Curve Book
- 3. Operator Aid (01
-18) REMA Unit 1 Reactivity Parameters
MATERIALS:
- 1. OP- AP-300-1004, Rev.2, Boration and Dilution Requirements (Note: have 2 copies of Att.1
) 2. BwCB-1 (Various), Braidwood Curve Book
- 3. Operator Aid (01
-18) REMA Unit 1 Reactivity Parameters
- 4. BwOP CV-5, Operation of the Reactor Makeup System in the Dilute Mode, Alternate Dilute Mode, Batch Dilution Method, rev. 25.
- 5. 1BwGP 100-8, Rev. 28, Generic Reactor Control Guidance, step F.10.
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Calculate the reactivity change required to match Tave to Tref.
- 2. Complete the Reactivity Change Determination Form.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 2. Tave is currently 0.5°F greater than Tref.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The QNE has advised Control Bank D should be withdrawn 13 steps to the desired target for proper long
-term fuel burn up.
- 2. The RO has completed the following:
Calculated the expected final Tave
-Tref error that will result from the rod movement Calculated a reactivity change to match Tave to Tref following the manual rod withdrawal.
S-111A 3 3. The RO has provided you wit h: The Reactivity Change Determination Form, Attachment 1 of OP-AP-300-1004 for the reactivity addition following the rod movement, and A copy of the procedure that will be used for the reactivity addition and asked you to approve the reactivity plan.
S-111A 4 EVALUATOR NOTE: These steps may be performed in any order.
RECORD START TIME Note to evaluator: Provide the first completed copy of OP
-AP-300-1004 Att. 1 with the procedure. Later, when (if) examinee directs the RO to correct the calculation, provide the second copy of Att. 1.
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 1. Refer to OP-AP-300-1004, Rev 2, Pwr Boration and Dilution Requirements Operator Aid, Unit 1 Reactivity Parameters NOTE: Provide the attached Operator Aid for Unit 1 Cycle 17 1000-2000 EFPH, OP
-AP-300-1004, 1BwGP 100
-8 step F.10 and BwOP CV
-5. Inform the examinee that the Operator Aid is current for the purposes of this calculation.
Reviews: OP-AP-300-1004, Rev 2, Pwr Boration and Dilution Requirements Operator Aid, Unit 1 Reactivity Parameters SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. Determine temperature change calculated for the 13 step rod withdrawal is correct.
Determines that the ROs calculation for the change in Tave due to stepping rods out is correct.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *3. Determine total temperature error that must be compensated Determines Tave
-Tref existing difference of 1.0 oF plus 0.5 oF after withdrawing rods 13 steps for a total 1.5 o F. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *4. Determine amount of boron or dilution required to match temperature NOTE: IF examinee fails to identify the temperature error, skip to JPM step 6.
From Operator aid:
boration amount for a 1.0 oF temperature drop is 25 to 26 gallons boric acid. The total gallons boric acid required is 1.5 times (25-26) = 37.5 to 39 gallons boric acid.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *5. Directs the RO to correct the calculation based on:
Total Tave difference of 1.5 o F Cue: Provide corrected Attachment 1 completed (boric acid calculation of 37.5
-39 gallons).
Directs the RO to correct the calculation.
Determines corrected Attachment 1 is acceptable.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
S-111A 5 *6. Identifies that the procedure the RO plans to use is incorrect.
NOTE: per step 4.4 of OP
-AP-300-1004 it is the US responsibility to ensure all planned MCR borations and dilutions are performed using the governing procedure.
Identifies that BwOP CV
-5 would result in dilution and directs the RO to use BwOP CV
-6. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *7. Approves reactivity change Signs as SRO approval on Attachment 1 SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME COMMENTS:
S-111A 6 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS NOTE: Update JPM with current cycle reactivity numbers, or specify cycle and unit prior to use.
JPM NO: R-111A REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE(S): N/A
MALFUNCTION #'S: N/A
COMMENTS:
OP-AP-300-1004 Revision 2 Page 4 of 4 ATTACHMENT 1 REACTIVITY CHANGE DETERMINATION FORM Station: _Braidwood_ Unit: 1 2 Time: _Now___ Date: _Today __ Desired change:
(Parameter, Magnitude, and Direction: Reactor Power, Rod Position, RCS Temp, Delta I, etc.)
(Withdraw control bank D 13 steps per QNE for core burnup). Compensate for rod withdrawal to match Tave to Tref.
Reason for Change:
(Temperature control, flux control, fuel burn up)
Temperature Control
What is the method and amount required for the reactivity change?
(Bleed Tank Volume, Gallons of Dilution/Boration/Blended Flow, Rod Insertion/Rod Withdrawal steps/percent) boration of 26 gallons
Inputs: (ReMA Thumbrules, ReMA maneuver guidance, Curve Book Figure/Table, Computer based trend plot, RCS Cb, EFPD
- Preparer and Reviewer should use independent inputs when possible) Approved operator aid for current cycle and EFPH
Calculation of change:
(E.G. Bwd/Byr: ReMA Thumbrule identifies 20 gallons BA = 1.0°F RCS temp reduction.
Desired change = 0.5°F drop. Calculation of change
- (20 gal/1.0°F)
- 0.5°F = 10 gal., previously used borations and dilutions)
(TMI: Procedure 1102
-4 Power Operations Fig. 1, Volume of Deminerlized Water for 1% Rod Insertion)
(13 steps)(1 oF/13 steps) = 1 o F Tave rise (26 gallons) x 1 o 1F = 26 gallons to match Tave to Tref o___F JN Preparer Reviewer Approver ______ ______________
______________
(RO) (RO/SRO) (SRO) Shift Manager Notified: Yes No
OP-AP-300-1004Revision 2 Page 1 of 4 PWR BORATION AND DILUTION REQUIRMENTS
- 1. PURPOSE 1.1. The purpose of this T&RM is to define responsibilities and provide guidance for PWR boration and dilution evolutions.
- 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.1. Approved
(Governing) Procedure
- as used in this document, refers to a procedure approved for use at the station, or to a document whose generation is described in and directed by a procedure approv ed for use at the station.
2.2. Licensed
Operator
- is synonymous with Reactor operator (RO), Senior Reactor Operator (SRO), or Nuclear Station Operator (NSO).
2.3. Steady-State:
Reactivity Core Characterist ics that are stable and behaving as expected per the core burn-up pl ot with stable Xenon conditions.
2.4. Non-Transient Conditions:
Operations within norma l station administrative parameters and guidance.
2.5. Deboration
Removal of Boric Acid from the letdown fluid by deborating demineralizers, the effluent of which is returned to the RCS. For the intent of this procedure is synonymous with Dilution.
- 3. RESPONSIBILITIES
3.1. Operations
is responsible for all Boration and Dilutions of the Reactor Coolant System. 4. MAIN BODY 4.1. Operations shall PERFORM borations and dilutions in a deliberate, carefully controlled manner while constantly m onitoring nuclear instrumentation and redundant indications of reactor power leve l, neutron flux, and coolant temperature (SOER 96-02). 4.2. The effects of boration or dilution must be observed in terms of resulting Control Rod motion, changes in Coolant Tave or Source Range Counts or change in Heatup/Cooldown Rate.
STOP the operation if the expected response does not occur and take corrective action.
OP-AP-300-1004Revision 2 Page 2 of 4
4.3. Operations
shall PERFORM peer checking of all Main Control Room, MCR, non-transient boration and dilution evolutions. When utilizing a second SRO to support reactivity management functions related to the primary (Primary SRO), the following expectations must be adhered to:
- The Unit Supervisor must be aw are of the reactivity plan.
- The Primary SRO is not required to in form the Unit Supervisor of every manipulation that is within the plan. Any deviation or unexpected response MUST be communicated to the Unit Supervisor.
- The US/Primary SRO may provide the PEER check for reactivity manipulations. NOTE: Boration and/or dilution while shutdown, where adequate shutdown margin is assured , does not require the supervisor to be proximate to the reactor operator. 4.4. The Unit Supervisor shall ENSURE all planned MCR borations and dilutions are performed by the Licensed Operator in accordance with the governing procedure or Operator Aid. In plant acti vities affecting reactivity equipment shall be directed by a licensed operator. NOTE: If a ReMA was developed for a planned Reactivity Change, Attachment 1, Reactivity Change Determination Form is
not required. 4.5. Attachment 1, Reactivity C hange Determination Form, shall be used:
- To ensure proper Technical Human Performance during reactivity maneuver planning.
- For reactivity changes that do not involve planned turbine load changes.
- To document each Reactivity manipulation OR , an entire shift of Reactivity manipulations during steady-state conditions as determined by the SRO.
- Alone or in conjunction with a ReMA per Shift Manager discretion. 4.5.1. Completed forms shall be forwarded to the Shift Manager. 4.6. All Reactivity manipulations shall be documented in the Unit Operator Logs.
- 5. DOCUMENTATION
- None 6. REFERENCES
OP-AP-300-1004Revision 2 Page 3 of 4 6.1. INPO SOER 96-02, "Des ign and Operating Considerations for Reactor Cores"
- 7. ATTACHMENTS
7.1. Attachment
1 - Reactivity Change Determination Form OP-AP-300-1004Revision 2 Page 4 of 4 ATTACHMENT 1 REACTIVITY CHANGE DETERMINATION FORM
Station: _____________ Unit: 1 2 Time: _______ Date: ________
Desired change: (Parameter, Magnitude, and Direction: Reactor Po wer, Rod Position, RCS Temp, Delta I, etc.)
Reason for Change: (Temperature control, flux control, fuel burn up)
What is the method and amount required for the reactivity change? (Bleed Tank Volume, Gallons of Dilution/Borati on/Blended Flow, Rod Inse rtion/Rod Withdrawal steps/percent)
Inputs: (ReMA Thumbrules, ReMA maneuver guidance, Curve Book Figure/Table, Computer based trend plot, RCS Cb, EFPD - Preparer and Reviewer should use independent inputs when possible)
Calculation of change: (E.G. Bwd/Byr: ReMA Thumbrule identifies 20 gallons BA = 1.0°F RCS temp reduction.
Desired change
= 0.5°F drop.
Calculation of change:
(20 gal/1.0°F)
- 0.5°F = 10 gal., previously used borations and dilutions)
(TMI: Procedure 1102-4 Power Operations Fig. 1, Volume of Deminerlized Water for 1% Rod Insertion)
______________ ______________ ______________ Preparer Reviewer Approver (RO) (RO/SRO) (SRO) Shift Manager Notified: Yes No OP-AA-115-101 Revision 2 Page 1 of 6 Level 2 - Reference Use
- 1. OPERATOR AID POSTING S 1.1. The purpose of this instruction is to describe the methodology for the authorization, documentation, and review of Operator Aids.
PURPOSE 1.2. Existing Operator Aids approved under a previous revision or version of this procedure need not be re-issued upon approval of this procedure. However, any future update to an existing operator aid shall be performed in accordance with this procedure.
- 2. 2.1. TERMS AND DEFINITION S Operator:2.2. An operator is broadly defined as anyone authorized to operate equipment associated with plant operation. In addition to Operations Department personnel, this definition includes Chemistry Technicians, Nuclear Engineers, System Engineers, Instrument Maintenance Technicians or other station personnel.
Operator Aids:2.3. Information including sketches, notes, graphs, lists, drawings and other documents used to assist operators in performing assigned duties associated with plant operation. Operator aids are NOT to be used in place of approved procedures or controlled drawings.
Unauthorized Operator Aid:2.4. Uncontrolled, unauthorized direction, instruction, or information needed for plant operation located in the plant. Examples could include dyno-tape providing equipment manipulation instruction, graffiti that provides fuse ID numbers, etc. Station Work Aid:
- 3. Photographs and associated drawings, which are placed within the plant for the purpose of assisting station personnel in locating plant equipment in the performance of their duties. This type of information is not considered an
Operator Aid and therefore the requirements of this instruction do not apply.
3.1. RESPONSIBILITIES
Operations Management:3.2. Administers this procedure and approves new or revised Operator Aids.
Initiating Department:
Ensures that the current revision of an Operator Aid is being utilized. Performs an annual review of Operator Aids being utilized and verifies during this annual review that copies of Operator Aids derived from procedures contain current information.
OP-AA-115-101 Revision 2 Page 2 of 6 3.3. WEC SRO: 4. Administers an annual review of Operator Aids and informs the appropriate group or department of any Operator Aid removal and the reason for removal. 4.1. PREPARE the Operator Aid with consideration for the following:
MAIN BODY Does the Operator Aid replicate information from a procedure?
Should the information be incorporated into a procedure?
Could the Operator Aid be eliminated with better labeling or a permanent placard? Is the information clearly presented?
Are there any potential human error traps in the wording?
Is the information legible?
Do the words "Operator Aid" appear prominently?
Is color-coding appropriate for the conventions of the station?
Can the Operator Aid be positioned/mounted without interfering with other components?
Is the material used for the Operator Aid suitable for the environmental conditions?
4.2. ASSIGN
each Operator Aid a Designated Number that shall be annotated on the Operator Aid.
4.3. COMPLETE
Attachment 1 or electronic equivalent and submit it to the Department Head for review and approval.
4.4. SUBMIT
the Operator Aid and other applicable documentation for approval to a manager in Operations.
4.5. LOG the Operator Aid in the Operator Aid Log, Attachment 2, or electronic equivalent.
4.6. Post the Operator Aid in the intended location(s).
4.7. PLACE
the master copy of the Operator Aid along with its approval form in the Operator Aid Log.
4.8. IF the Operator Aid is posted in the control room, THEN Route a copy to the Simulator Fidelity Coordinator.
4.9. PERFORM
the following when an Operator Aid is no longer needed as deemed by the applicable Department Head or Annual Review:
OP-AA-115-101 Revision 2 Page 3 of 6 4.9.1. LOG the removal of the Operator Aid on Attachment 2
. 4.9.2. The WEC SRO shall REMOVE the master copy of the Operator Aid along with the Attachment 1 from the Operator Aid book and ENSURE copies are removed from all locations.
4.10. PERFORM an annual review of Operator Aids.
4.10.1. The Operator Aid Log in the WEC shall be reviewed to ensure only approved Operator Aids are in the book. This shall be done by comparing the Operator Aid Log to the Operator Aids in the WEC book.
4.10.2. Operations crew management will direct any department that has Operator Aids to review them. This review shall be returned to the Unit Supervisor in a timely manner. 4.10.3. The in-plant operators will conduct a field walkdown of accessible areas of the plant for authorized Operator Aids. This walkdown will check applicable items from 4.1.
4.11. Identification and removal of Unauthorized Operator Aids 4.11.1. All marker or other graffiti should be removed with appropriate cleaning solution, or paint/cover the affected area per the appropriate plant progra
- m. 4.11.2. Dyno-tape labels or other unauthorized information determined to be necessary to plant operation should be incorporated into the appropriate plant procedure(s) or replaced with an appropriate, approved labels or documents.
4.12. FORWARD copies of all added, revised, or removed Operator Aids to the Simulator Fidelity Coordinator if an electronic database version is not being maintained.
- 5. DOCUMENTATION
- 6. - None 6.1. INPO 01-002, "Guidelines for the Conduct of Operations at Nuclear Power Stations." REFERENCES
- 7. 7.1. Attachment 1, Operator Aid Review and Approval ATTACHMENTS
7.2. Attachment
2, Operator Aid Log
OP-AA-115-101 Revision 2 Page 4 of 6 ATTACHMENT 1 Operator Aid Review and Approval Page 1 of 1 Rev. No. 65 Op Aid # 01
-018 Operator Aid Title:
Unit 1 Reactivity Parameters Description/Use: Include primary posting locations.
Operator "Aid Book, Effective 3/16/2013
- 6/1/2013 Permanent Sign/Label Required: Yes No If Yes, Label Request Submittal Date:
x 3/1/2013 3/1/2013 OP-AA-115-101 Revision 2 Page 5 of 6 OP-AA-115-101 Revision 2 Page 6 of 6 ATTACHMENT 2 Operator Aid Log Page 1 of 1 OPERATOR AID NUMBER (sequential)
TITLE/DESCRIPTION REASON FOR POSTING LOCATION ORIGINATOR NAME/DATE POSTED BY NAME/DATE REMOVED BY NAME/DATE
OP-AP-300-1004 Revision 2 Page 4 of 4 ATTACHMENT 1 REACTIVITY CHANGE DETERMINATION FORM Station: _Braidwood_ Unit: 1 2 Time: _Now___ Date: _Today __ Desired change:
(Parameter, Magnitude, and Direction: Reactor Power, Rod Position, RCS Temp, Delta I, etc.)
(Withdraw control bank D 13 steps per QNE for core burnup). Compensate for rod withdrawal to match Tave to Tref.
Reason for Change:
(Temperature control, flux control, fuel burn up)
Temperature Control
What is the method and amount required for the reactivity change?
(Bleed Tank Volume, Gallons of Dilution/Boration/Blended Flow, Rod Insertion/Rod Withdrawal steps/percent) boration of 38 gallons
Inputs: (ReMA Thumbrules, ReMA maneuver guidance, Curve Book Figure/Table, Computer based trend plot, RCS Cb, EFPD
- Preparer and Reviewer should use independent inputs when possible) Approved operator aid for current cycle and EFPH
Calculation of change:
(E.G. Bwd/Byr: ReMA Thumbrule identifies 20 gallons BA = 1.0°F RCS temp reduction.
Desired change = 0.5°F drop. Calculation of change
- (20 gal/1.0°F)
- 0.5°F = 10 gal., previously used borations and dilutions)
(TMI: Procedure 1102
-4 Power Operations Fig. 1, Volume of Deminerlized Water for 1% Rod Insertion)
(13 steps)(1 oF/13 steps) = 1 oF Tave rise; Total error = 0.5 oF (current) + 1.0 oF = 1.5 o F (25 to 26 gallons) x 1.5 o 1F = 37.5 to 39 gallons to match Tave to Tref o___F JN Preparer Reviewer Approver ______ ______________
______________
(RO) (RO/SRO) (SRO) Shift Manager Notified:
Yes No S-107 Page 1 of 5 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit One Unit Supervisor.
- 2. Both units are at 100% power in a normal electrical lineup.
- 3. The State Estimator alarm is operable and indicates a potential degraded grid condition based on a Braidwood Unit Two trip.
- 4. The unit NSOs provide the following indication readings to you:
State Estimator predicted voltage is 343.8 KV for BOTH units Bus 143 1EI
-AP055 indicates 4280 Volts Bus 143 1II
-AP051 and 1II
-AP194 indicate 700 amps Bus 144 1EI
-AP087 indicates 4280 Volts Bus 144 1II
-AP083 and 1II
-AP198 indicate 700 amps Bus 243 2EI
-AP055 indicates 4350 Volts Bus 243 2IIAP051 and 2II
-AP194 indicate 650 amps Bus 244 2EI
-AP087 indicates 4350 Volts Bus 244 2II
-AP083 and 2II
-AP198 indicate 650 amps
INITIATING CUES:
Implement 0BwOA ELEC
-1 and determine the operability status of BOTH unit offsite circuits.
S-107 Page 2 of 5 TASK TITLE:
Determine Operability of Offsite Circuits per 0BwOA ELEC
-1 for Abnormal Grid Conditions.
JPM No.: S-107 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: T.OA01A-03. K&A No.: 2.1.25 K&A IMP: 4.2 TASK No.: S-TS-006, Ensure compliance with all Tech Spec LCOs.
TRAINEE: SRO EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Trainee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 2, 3, 4, 5 COMPLETION TIME: 15 MINUTES
CRITICAL TIME:
N/A ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR _ CONTROL ROOM GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. 0BwOA ELEC
-1 ABNORMAL GRID CONDITIONS rev. 8.
MATERIALS:
- 1. 0BwOA ELEC
-1 Rev. 8.
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Determine operability status of both units' offsite circuits.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are are the Unit One Unit Supervisor.
- 2. Both units are at 100% power in a normal electrical lineup. 3. The State Estimator alarm is operable and indicates a potential degraded grid condition based on a Braidwood Unit Two trip.
- 4. The unit NSOs provide the following indication readings to you:
State Estimator predicted voltage is 343.8 KV for BOTH uni ts Bus 143 1EI
-AP055 indicates 4280 Volts Bus 143 1II
-AP051 and 1II
-AP194 indicate 700 amps Bus 144 1EI
-AP087 indicates 4280 Volts Bus 144 1II
-AP083 and 1II
-AP198 indicate 700 amps Bus 243 2EI
-AP055 indicates 4350 Volts Bus 243 2IIAP051 and 2II
-AP194 indicate 650 amps Bus 244 2EI
-AP087 indicates 4350 Volts Bus 244 2II
-AP083 and 2II
-AP198 indicate 650 amps
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. Implement 0BwOA ELEC
-1 and determine the operability status of BOTH unit offsite circuits.
S-107 Page 3 of 5 RECORD START TIME ____________
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 1. Obtain copy of 0BwOA ELEC
-1 CUE: Give student procedure.
Obtain and review procedure:
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *2. Determine Type of State Estimator Alarm Alarm Operable (from task conditions)
Predicted grid voltage (from task conditions)
Abnormal grid: predicted (from task conditions)
Predicted due to a Braidwood Unit trip (from task conditions)
NOTE: The examinee enters the information into the blanks provided in the procedure and performs the calculations per procedure.
Determine Type of State Estimator Alarm:
State Estimator
- OPERABLE Record State Estimator actual/predicted grid voltage: Unit 1: 343.8 KV Unit 2: 343.8 KV Abnormal grid
- PREDICTED CONDITION Abnormal grid predicted due to BRAIDWOOD UNIT TRIP SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *3. Check 4KV Non
-ESF Loading (goes to Attachment A)
Check 4KV Non
-ESF Loading (goes to Attachment A
):
CALCULATE Unit 1 4 KV Non-ESF Bus Loading:
Bus 143 loading: 0.00173 x 4280 V x 700 amps =
5183 K va. Bus 144 loading: 0.00173 x 4280 V x 700 amps =
5183 Kva.
CALCULATE Unit 2 4 KV Non-ESF Bus Loading Bus 243 loading: 0.00173 x 4350 V x 650 amps = 4892 Kva Bus 244 loading: 0.00173 x 4350 V x 650 amps = 4892 Kv SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
S-107 Page 4 of 5 *4. Determine Minimum Switchyard Voltage. Determine Minimum Switchyard Voltage:
Record Unit 1 minimum switchyard voltage (given that both units are in normal electrical lineup so dual SAT operation applies) per Figure 0BwOA ELEC-1-1: 344 KV (range of 343.9 to 344.1 KV acceptable)
Record Unit 2 minimum switchyard voltage (given that both units are in normal electrical lineup so dual SAT operation applies) per Figure 0BwOA ELEC-1-1: 343.4 (range of 343.2 to 343.5 acceptable
. Records same values on page 5 (step 2b) main body of procedure.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *5. Determine if minimum required switchyard voltage is greater than state estimator predicted
DETERMINE if minimum required switchyard voltage is greater than state estimator predicted:: Identifies that Unit 1 minimum required switchyard voltage IS GREATER THAN STATE ESTIMATOR PREDICTED THEREFORE UNIT 1 OFFSITE CIRCUITS MUST BE DECLARED INOPERABLE.
Identifies that Unit 2 minimum required switchyard voltage IS LESS THAN STATE ESTIMATOR PREDICTED THEREFORE UNIT 2 OFFSITE CIRCUITS ARE OPERABLE. IDENTIFIES THAT 1BwOL 3.8.1, LCOAR AC SOURCES OPERATING TECH SPEC 3.8.1 must be entered.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME ____________
COMMENT S:
S-107 Page 5 of 5 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM
-408P REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE (S): Any 100% power IC.
MALFUNCTION #'S:
N/A Technical Data provided in Cue Sheet.
COMMENTS:
S-205 P age 1 of 6 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 1 Unit Supervisor.
- 2. Unit 1 is at 100% power.
- 3. The plant process computer has been inoperable for the last 30 minutes.
- 4. PDMS is inoperable.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit 1 Assist NSO has completed 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1, UNIT ONE QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR) CALCULATION.
- 2. The Shift Manager has directed you to perform the supervisory review of 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1.
- 3. Inform the Shift Manager when you have completed the review of 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1.
S-205 P age 2 of 6 TASK TITLE: Review QPTR Calculation JPM No.: S-205 REV: Task No.: S-AM-123 K&A No.: 2.2.42 Objective No.:
8E.AM-123 K&A IMP: 4.6 EXAMINEE: SRO EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED: JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 4, 5, 7, 8 APPROX COMPLETION TIME:
15 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME:
NA EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL REFERENCE S: 1. 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1, UNIT ONE QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR) CALCULATION, Rev. 6 2. Operator Aid for 100% Power NIS Detector Currents
- 3. Technical Specifications MATERIALS:
- 1. 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1
- 2. Operator Aid for current values used in QPTR Calculation.
TASK STANDARDS: 1. Determine QPTR for each NI detector.
- 2. Determine N42 upper detector QPTR is unacceptable.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 1 Unit Supervisor.
- 2. Unit 1 is at 100% power.
- 3. The plant process computer has been inoperable for the last 30 minutes.
- 4. PDMS is inoperable.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit 1 Assist NSO has completed 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1, UNIT ONE QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR) CALCULATION.
CUE: Hand examinee completed copy of 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1.
- 2. The Shift Manager has directed you to perform the supervisory review of 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1.
- 3. Inform the Shift Manager when you have completed the review of 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1.
S-205 P age 3 of 6 RECORD START TIME:
EVALUATOR NOTE: This JPM is performed by having the student review the Data Sheet D
-3, Unit 1 QPTR calculation using NIS meters. The data sheet is complete but N42 upper detector QPTR was calculated in error. The examinee must locate the error, determine the QPTR for channel N
-42 is outside the acceptance criteria, and provide the correct Tech Spec required action to the SM.
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 1. Refer to 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1, UNIT ONE QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR) CALCULATION.
CUE: All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and actions were met for the performance of this surveillance.
CUE: LCOAR 3.2.4 has NOT been entered.
PDMS is inoperable. Surveillance is performed as a normal weekly. Refer to 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1.
VERIFY all applicable Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions are satisfactorily addressed.
Review surveillance applicability (from statement of applicability)
NIS Power Range Tilts alarm is OPERABLE.
QPTR has been within limit. Process computer is NOT available.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. Review completed data sheet D
-3. CUE: LCOAR 3.2.4 has NOT been entered.
Review data sheet D
-3: Being completed once per 7 days (normal interval).
Date: Today.
Time: 45 minutes ago.
Channels indication reliable: Yes.
Instrument Readings:
100%. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 3. Review data sheet D
-3 detector currents. CUE: All present and 100% values of Upper and Lower Detector currents are accurate.
Review data sheet D
-3: ALL present Upper and Lower Detector Currents are recorded correctly from NIS drawer front indications ALL 100% detector Upper and Lower currents are recorded correctly from Operator Aid Book.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
S-205 P age 4 of 6 EVALUATOR NOTE: JPM page 6 contains a key of correct QPTR calculations.
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 4. Review the calculations to obtain the normalized detector currents and compare them to the calculated values on the data sheet.
Review the calculated Normalized Detector Currents for each detector by dividing its present detector current reading by the 100% detector current value.
Normalized detector current for N42 Upper Detector is in error. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *5. Review the calculations to obtain the average normalized currents and compare them to the values on the data sheet.
Calculate the Average Normalized Current by summing the upper (lower) normalized detector currents and dividing by 4.
The average normalized current in is error.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 6. Review the calculations to obtain QPTR for each detector and compare them to the QPTR values listed on the data sheet. Calculate the QPTR for each detector by dividing each Normalized Detector Current by the Average Normalized Current Each of the QPTR calculations is in error.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *7. Identify N42 Upper Detector QPTR is unacceptable (surveillance acceptance criteria).
CUE: As SM, acknowledge the required initiation of LCOAR 1BwOL 3.2.4.
Determine QPTR is unacceptable:
Identify N42 Upper Detector QPTR is >1.02 and is unacceptable.
Determine ALL other channels QPTR is acceptable.
o Immediately notify the Shift Manager or Designee to initiate LCOAR (1BwOL 3.2.4) SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *8. Cue: As SM, direct the examinee to identify any required actions to be completed this shift as a result of the QPTR result.
Determines power must be reduced to not greater than 91% within 2 hours0.0833 days <br />0.0119 weeks <br />0.00274 months <br />.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME:
COMMENTS:
S-205 Page 5 of 6 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS Verify/perform TQ
-BR-201-0113, BRAIDWOOD TRAINING DEPARTMENT SIMULATOR EXAMINATION SECURITY ACTIONS CHECKLIST. NOTE: This JPM may be performed in a classroom.
Establish the conditions of IC 21, 100% power, steady state, equilibrium xenon.
Complete items on Simulator Ready for Training Checklist.
Place simulator in RUN. COMMENTS Provide examinee copy of 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1, UNIT ONE QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR) CALCULATION, Rev. 6 Ensure copy of Operator Aid for current values to be used in QPTR Calculation available.
S-205 Page 6 of 6
QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO CALCULATION NIS METERS Being performed once per:
7 Days (normal interval)
Shiftly 12 Hours (with BwVSR 3.2.4.2.)
Other: Date: Today Time: 30 minutes ago Channel N41 N42 N43 N44 Is the channel operable?
Y N Y N Y N Y N Instrument reading 100% 100% 100% 100% UPPER DETECTORS (A)
Present upper detector current 192 187 190 185 100% upper detector current 194 181 192 186 Normalized detector current
.990 1.033 .990 .995 Average normalized current 1.002 Upper power tilt ratio (¢1.02) ¢ .988 ¢ 1.031 ¢ .988 ¢ .993 LOWER DETECTORS (B)
Present lower detector current 170 150 165 165 100% lower detector current 170 153 165 168 Normalized detector current 1.00 .980 1.00 .982 Average normalized current
.991 Lower power tilt ratio (¢1.02) ¢ 1.009 ¢ .989 ¢ 1.009 ¢ .991 Attach additional copies of this page as necessary.
KEY - DO NOT GIVE TO EXAMINEE KEY - DO NOT GIVE TO EXAMINEE
WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61 ATTACHMENT 10 SURVEILLANCE WO DISPOSITION SHEET (APPLICABLE TO MID
-WEST SITES ONLY)
Page 1 of 1 Unit: _1__ Procedure: PMID/RQ: ______1BwOSR 3.2.4.1____
123456____ Work Order #:
__ N/APMID/RQ Title: ____________
QPTR CALCULATIONPMID/RQ Due Date: ____________ TODAY________ PMID/RQ Late Date: N/A Signature/Authorization Approval Review:
Name Date Shift Authorization to Start Work:
__Time _Joe Supervisor
______ Today Work Started
___1 hr ago John NSO __________
Today Work Stopped:
___1 hr ago John NSO _____________
Today Supv Review of Work Completion:
__________________________
________ ________ 30 min. ago ANI Review of work package:
__________________________
________ ________ Surveillance Found Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO Surveillance Left Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO ("Work Started" date (above shall beComplete one of the following:
the credit date unless otherwise explained)
Verify Credit Surveillance Credit Date per another WO# ______________
Below: If crediting 'per another WO', verify credit date is 'Work Started' date of referenced WO.
_________ Complete Sat
- Credit Surveillance Complete w/ Portions Unsat
- Credit Surveillance No Work Performed
- Credit Surveillance Failed - Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)
No Work Performed
- Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)
Comments _____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
ADDITIONAL REVIEW OF RESULTS (IF REQUIRED)
____________________
____________________________________
________ ____________________
____________________________________
________ ____________________
____________________________________
________ ____________________
____________________________________
________ Title Signature Date WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61
PROCEDURE 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 UNIT NO. 1 REVISION NO.
8 PROCEDURE TITLE:
UNIT ONE QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR) CALCULATION Rev Summary IR# / EC# (if applicable) 8 Fix typo in first note on last page: Change "DMV" to "DVM". Add applicable step #s to Station Commitments wherever BwVSR 3.2.4.2 referenced, changed to NF
-AP-545. PCRA 1230954
-13 BRAIDWOOD STATION
1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 Revision 8 Continuous Use 1 UNIT ONE QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR) CALCULATION A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY This procedure outlines the steps necessary to verify the QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO is 1.02. It is applicable in MODE 1 above 50% RATED THERMAL POWER when the Power Distribution System (PDMS) is inoperable and shall be performed:
- 1. Once per 7 days.
- 2. Once per shift when the NIS Power Range Tilts alarm is INOPERABLE as directed by 1BwOL 3.2.4 and 1BwOSR 0.1
-1,2,3. 3. Once per 12 hours0.5 days <br />0.0714 weeks <br />0.0164 months <br /> when QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO is not within limits as directed by LCOAR 1BwOL 3.2.4.
B. REFERENCES
- 1. Tech Spec LCO 3.2.4.
- 2. Tech Spec Surveillance Requirements:
- a. 3.2.4.1. b. 3.2.4.2. 3. TRM TLCO 3.3.h.
- 4. Station Procedures:
- a. 1BwOSR 0.1
-1,2,3, Unit One MODES 1, 2 & 3 Shiftly & Daily.
- b. 1BwOL 3.2.4, LCOAR
- Power Distribution Limits
- QPTR. c. 1BwOL TRM 3.3.h, Technical Requirements Manual (TRM) LCOAR
- Power Distribution Monitoring System (PDMS)
- 5. Station Commitments:
- a. 456-200-87-38101, limitation to check the operability of the QPTR Alarm anytime QPTR exceeds 1.02. Step E.3.
- b. 456-130-98-3.2.4-0100 "Specific SAR Commitment" (Regarding shiftly surveillance interval when the power range tilts alarm is inoperable).
Steps A.2, E.3.
1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 Revision 8 Continuous Use 2 C. PREREQUISITES
- 1. Receive permission to perform this surveillance from the Shift Manager or designee prior to performance by having the Data Package Cover Sheet signed and dated.
- 2. Reactor power should be constant while recording NIS data.
- 3. The latest 100% Power NIS Detector Currents are available (from Station Nuclear Engineer or Operator Aid).
D. PRECAUTIONS Static electricity may cause the needles on the NIS Meters to indicate abnormally. If the NIS Meters are being used to perform this surveillance, the meter faces should be wiped with a damp cloth or equivalent to remove the static charge prior to taking the readin g. E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS
- 1. As stated in Tech Spec LCO 3.2.4.
- 2. In the event the Acceptance Criteria (¢) is not met during the performance of this surveillance, IMMEDIATELY notify the Shift Manager or designee to initiate LCOAR 1BwOL 3.2.4.
- 3. Anytime the calculated QPTR exceeds 1.02, the NIS Power Range Tilts alarm OPERABILITY should be reviewed. If the alarm is not illuminated the required frequency of this surveillance shall be increased from once per 7 days to once per shift in accordance with 1BwOL 3.2.4.
- 4. The process computer point calculation is the most accurate method of calculating QPTR and should normally be used. During the performance of AFD calibrations on the excore detectors the process computer point method will not
be correct until ALL drawers are calibrated. During this calibration period QPTR MUST be calculated using the NIS meter method.
- 5. If the Power Range channel is inoperable but individual detector current indication is reliable, performance of NF
-AP-545 is not required. Detector current indication can be considered reliable if detector degradation or failure is not indicated, the detector signal cable is attached to the 1PM07J drawer, and proper high voltage is applied to the detector. In this condition, the QPTR alarm may be inoperable but the neutron flux input to QPTR is available. QPTR can be calculated using the individual detector current meter indications.
1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 Revision 8 Continuous Use 3 F. MAIN BODY NOTE All data taken/calculated will be recorded on the appropriate Data sheet. 1. VERIFY all applicable Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions are satisfactorily addressed.
- 2. INDICATE the applicability of this surveillance on the appropriate Data Sheet (REFER to Statement of Applicability):
- a. Being performed once per 7 days.
- b. Being performed once per shift.
- c. Being performed once per 12 hrs with NF
-AP-545.
- d. Other (Specify).
- 3. RECORD the Date and Time.
- 4. RECORD the OPERABILITY status of the NIS drawer by checking the appropriate box on the Data Sheet.
NOTE With one Power Range Channel INOPERABLE and THERMAL POWER is 50% but 75%, the QPTR may be calculated using the three OPERABLE channels. With one Power Range channel input to QPTR INOPERABLE with THERMAL POWER 75%, the QPTR shall be calculated using the three OPERABLE channels taking data when directed by Reactor Engineering during performance of NF-AP-545. 5. RECORD the indicated Reactor Power from the operable NIS drawer front panel PERCENT FULL POWER meters on the appropriate Data Sheet. RECORD "N/A" for the INOPERABLE Power Range channel data.
1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 Revision 8 Continuous Use 4 NOTE Step F.6 and F.7 are independent of each other. Perform the applicable step.
Step F.6 will use the process computer to determine the QPTR.
Step F.7 will use installed NIS Meters or DVMs to determine QPTR.
F. 6. DETERMINE the QPTR using process computer points as follows (N/A if determined with the NIS meters):
- a. Perform the following for the Upper Detectors:
- 1) RECORD present computer point reading.
- 2) DIVIDE the sum of the computer points by the number of operable channels to obtain the average computer point reading.
Average Computer Point Reading
= Sum of Computer Points Number of Operable NIS Channels
- 3) DIVIDE the Computer Point Reading by the Average Computer Point Reading to determine the Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio.
Power Tilt Ratio
= Computer Point Reading Average Computer Point Reading
- b. Perform the following for the Lower Detectors:
- 1) RECORD present computer point reading.
- 2) DIVIDE the sum of the computer points by the number of operable channels to obtain the average computer point reading.
Average Computer Point Reading
= Sum of Computer Points Number of Operable NIS Channels
- 3) DIVIDE the Computer Point Reading by the Average Compute r
Point Reading to determine the Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio.
Power Tilt Ratio
= Computer Point Reading Average Computer Point Reading
1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 Revision 8 Continuous Use 5 F. 7. DETERMINE the QPTR using installed NIS Meters or DVMs NOTE Step 7.a will install DVMs, N/A step if using installed NIS Meters.
Step 7.b will determine the QPTR using installed NIS Meters or DVMs.
Step 7.c will remove DVMs, N/A step if using installed NIS Meters.
NOTE The following annunciator(s) may actuate during connection of the DVMs. This list is not all inclusive but if the annunciator(s) does not reset when the DVM is disconnected, investigate the cause before going to the next drawer.
10A04 PWR RNG UPPER DET FLUX DEV HIGH 10B04 PWR RNG LOWER DET FLUX DEV HIGH 10C04 PWR RNG CHANNEL DEV 10B05 PWR RNG FLUX HIGH ROD STOP CAUTION To minimize the effect of meter loading to the drawer, Fluke 8840A DVMs shall be used. If there are not enough 8840As available, Fluke 8505A and Fluke 8502 may be substituted. Other DVM may also be used with the consent of NIS System Engineer or backup. In addition, shielded test leads shall be used to avoid EMF induction to the reactor protection system circuitry.
CAUTION A Reactor Trip could occur if a 2 of 4 coincidence is made up due to a channel trip on the power range detector being measured. The DVM MUST be initially set to the millivolt range for detector current readings to prevent a channel trip.
If the current as seen on the face meter is low (at low powers), it is permissible to down range the detector meter current selector switch for better resolution.
1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 Revision 8 Continuous Use 6 CAUTION Ensure that the DVM leads to be used have no flaws in their insulation. Also ensure that any contact points between the leads and the drawer are properly protected to ensure that chafing of the leads' insulation does not occur. If the DVM leads become shorted to ground after connection, the associated power range channel will be made inoperable.
CAUTION Power range cables can become snagged while opening the drawers. Open the rear cabinet doors to 1PM07J and station a person at the rear of the drawers to ensure that all cables are free while opening the drawer. Minimize motion of the cables, since the cable may become disconnected from its connector if excessive motion occurs. This could make the drawer inoperable.
F. 7. a. NOTIFY IMD to perform the following for each Power Range "B" drawer:
- 1) CAREFULLY OPEN the Power Range Nuclear Instrumentation Channel "B drawer.
- 2) CONNECT a DVM between the red and black test jacks of the detector current meter for each of the eight Power Range detectors.
- 3) ROLL the Power Range "B" drawers carefully as far into the 1PM07J panel as possible. Avoid crimping or damaging the DVM leads. If possible, slightly engage the seismic screws on the front of the drawers.
- 5) COMPLETE the appropriate sections of the DVM Calibration Table.
1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 Revision 8 Continuous Use 7 F. 7. b. DETERMINE the QPTR using NIS meters or DVM as follows (N/A if determined with the computer points)
- 1) Perform the following for the Upper Detectors:
a) RECORD each present detector current.
b) RECORD the latest 100% Power NIS detector current (from Reactor Engineering or the Operator Aid).
c) DIVIDE the present detector current by the 100% detector current to obtain the normalized detector current.
Normalized Detector Current
= Present Detector Current 100% Detector Current d) DIVIDE the sum of the normalized detector currents by the number of operable channels to obtain the average
normalized current.
Average Normalized Current
= Sum of Normalized Detector Currents Number of Operable NIS Channels e) DIVIDE the Normalized Detector Current by the Average Normalized Current to determine the Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio. Power Tilt Rat io = Normalized Detector Current Average Normalized Current
1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 Revision 8 Continuous Use 8 F. 7. b. 2) Perform the following for the Lower Detectors:
a) RECORD each present detector current.
b) RECORD the latest 100% Power NIS detector current (from Reactor Engineering or the Operator Aid).
c) DIVIDE the present detector current by the 100% detector current to obtain the normalized detector current.
Normalized Detector Current
= Present Detector Current 100% Detector Current d) DIVIDE the sum of the normalized detector currents by the number of operable channels to obtain the average normalized current.
Average Normalized Current
= Sum of Normalized Detector Currents Number of Operable NIS Channels e) DIVIDE the Normalized Detector Current by the Average Normalized Current to determine the Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio. Power Tilt Ratio
= Normalized Detector Current Average Normalized Current
1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 Revision 8 Continuous Use 9 F. 7. c. PERFORM the following to RESTORE each Power Range "B" Drawers:
NOTE The following steps are applicable if DVMs are to be used to indicate detector current. Mark this section N/A if current meters installed in the drawers are to be used.
CAUTION Power Range cables can become snagged while opening the drawers. Open the rear cabinet doors to 1PM07J and station a person at the rear of the drawers to ensure that all cables are free while opening the drawer. Minimize motion of the cables, since the cable may become disconnected from its connector if excessive motion occurs. This could make the drawer inoperable. 1) CAREFULLY OPEN the Power Range "B" drawers.
- 3) CAREFULLY CLOSE and SECURE the Power Range "B" drawers.
- 4) REMOVE all material installed to secure equipment.
- 5) COMPLETE the appropriate sections of the DVM Calibration Table.
G. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA No Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio shall exceed 1.02.
(Final) 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 Revision 8 Continuous Use D-2 UNIT ONE QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO CALCULATION COMPUTER POINTS NOTE The process computer point calculation is the most accurate method of calculati ng QPTR and should normally be used. During the performance of AFD calibrations on the excore detectors the process computer point method will not be correct until ALL drawers are calibrated. During this calibration period QPTR MUST be calculated using the NIS meter method.
Being performed once per:
7 Days (normal interval)
Shiftly 12 Hours (with NF
-AP-545) Other: ___________________________________
{PRIVATE }Date: Time: Channel N41 N42 N43 N44 Is the channel operable?
Y N Y N Y N Y N Instrument reading
% % % % Upper Detectors (A)
Computer point N0041 N0043 N0045 N0047 Present computer point reading Average computer point reading Upper power tilt ratio (¢1.02) ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ Lower Detectors (B)
Computer poin t N0042 N0044 N0046 N0048 Present computer point reading Average computer point reading Lower power tilt ratio (¢1.02) ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ {PRIVATE }Date: Time: Channel N41 N42 N43 N44 Is the channel operable?
Y N Y N Y N Y N Instrument reading
% % % % Upper Detectors (A)
Computer point N0041 N0043 N0045 N0047 Present computer point reading Average computer point reading Upper power tilt ratio (¢1.02) ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ Lower Detectors (B)
Computer point N0042 N0044 N0046 N0048 Present computer point reading Average computer point reading Lower power tilt ratio (¢1.02) ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ATTACH additional copies of this page as necessary.
1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 Revision 8 Continuous Use D-3 UNIT ONE QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO CALCULATION NIS METERS Being performed once per:
7 Days (normal interval)
Shiftly 12 Hours (with NF
-AP-545) Other: ___________________________________
{PRIVATE }Date: Today Time: 30 minutes ago Channel N41 N42 N43 N44 Is the channel indication reliable?
Y N Y N Y N Y N Instrument reading 100% 100% 100% 100% Upper Detectors (A)
Present upper detector current 192 187 190 185 100% upper detector current 194 181 192 186 Normalized detector current
.990 .968 .988 .993 Average normalized current
.985 Upper power tilt ratio (¢1.02) ¢ 1.005 ¢ .983 ¢ 1.003 ¢ 1.008 Lower Detectors (B)
Present lower detector current 170 150 165 165 100% lower detector current 170 153 165 168 Normalized detector current 1.00 .980 1.00 .982 Average normalized current
.991 Lower power tilt ratio (¢1.02) ¢ 1.009 ¢ .989 ¢ 1.009 ¢ .991 {PRIVATE }Date: Time: Channel N41 N42 N43 N44 Is the channel indication reliable?
Y N Y N Y N Y N Instrument reading
% % % % Upper Detectors (A)
Present upper detector current 100% upper detector current Normalized detector current Average normalized current Upper power tilt ratio (¢1.02) ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ Lower Detectors (B)
Present lower detector current 100% lower detector current Normalized detector current Average normalized current Lower power tilt ratio (¢1.02) ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ATTACH additional copies of this page as necessary.
X 1BwOSR 3.2.4.1 Revision 8 Continuous Use D-4 UNIT ONE DVM CALIBRATION TABLE DVM QA# Cal Date Due Date Initials IV N41 Top Bottom N42 Top Bottom N 43 Top Bottom N44 Top Bottom DVM Leads Installed Name/Date IV Name/Date Leads Removed Name/Date IV Name/Date N41 Top Bottom N42 Top Bottom N43 Top Bottom N44 Top Bottom
(Final)
S-302 Page 1 of 7 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 1 Unit Supervisor.
- 2. Both Units are at full power.
- 3. The current time is 0700 today. Due to scheduled work on the liquid release line, release #L 002 must be COMMENCED by 0900 today using the low flow release path.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Shift Manager has handed you a portion of a 0WX01T liquid release package, #L 002, completed through section G.6, and has directed you to complete Section H. All previous sections of the release package have been successfully completed.
- 2. Notify the Shift Manager when Section H of the release package is complete.
S-302 Page 2 of 7 TASK TITLE:
Prepare/Perform a Liquid Radwaste Release JPM No.: S-302 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 8C.HP-001 K&A No.: 2.3.6 TASK No.: S-HP-001, Authorize a liquid K&A IMP: 3.8 radwaste release
EXAMINEE: SRO EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 3, 7 APPROX COMPLETION TIME:
30 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME:
NA EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR X CLASSROOM GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. BwOP WX-501T1, Rev. 66, Liquid Release Tank 0WX01T Release Form
- 2. BwOP WX-501T2, Rev 6, Liquid Release Window Determination
- 3. BwOP WX-501T3, Rev 1, Authorization to Release Outside of Release Window
MATERIALS:
- 1. BwOP WX-501T1, Rev. 66, Liquid Release Tank 0WX01T Release Form
- 2. BwOP WX-501T2, Rev 6, Liquid Release Window Determination
- 3. BwOP WX-501T3, Rev 1, Authorization to Release Outside of Release Window
- 4. Computer with network access.
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Complete Section G of a liquid release tank release form in accordance with BwOP WX
-501T1. 2. Determine release start time is outside release start time windo
- w.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 1 Unit Supervisor.
- 2. Both Units are at full power.
- 3. The current time is 0700 today. Due to scheduled work on the liquid release line, release #L 002 must be COMMENCED by 0900 today using the low flow release path.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Shift Manager has handed you a portion of a 0WX01T liquid release package, #L 002, completed through section G.6, and has directed you to complete Section H. All previous sections of the release package have been successfully completed. 2. Notify the Shift Manager when Section H of the release package is complete.
S-302 Page 3 of 7 RECORD START TIME Note: Provide the examinee with a copy of BwOP WX
-501T1 completed through Step G.5.
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 1. Obtain and record current Kankakee River flow data NOTE: The USGS internet site can be accessed from the computer desk top from workgroup apps menu or by using normal internet access.
NOTE: After examinee locates Kankakee river flow on usgs web site, indicator, provide following cue:
CUE: Kankakee river stream flow is 5680 cfs at 0700 on today's date AND the Kankakee River is currently NOT at flood stage. NOTE: If examinee attempts to access the Unit 1 US turnover, provide the following cue:
CUE: Kankakee river flow has
been logged in the Unit 1 US turnover.
Obtain and record current Kankakee River flow data by performing the following:
Access the United States Geological Survey internet site (usgs.gov).
Access water watch
-current stream flow conditions for Illinois Access USGS 05527500 Kankakee River near Wilmington Il flow Record discharge flow o Record Kankakee River flow in Unit 1 US turnover SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. Determine CW blowdown flow NOTE: After examinee locates CW blowdown flow indicator, provide following cue:
CUE: CW blowdown flow is 22,000 gpm.
Determine CW blowdown flow per BwOP WX
-501T2 as follows: o Record liquid release #L
-
13-002 Obtain and record current Kankakee River flow (5680 cfs) Record CW blowdown flow o F2400 o OUR-CW032 SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
S-302 Page 4 of 7 PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 3 Determine the Liquid Release Window per BwOP WX
-501T2 CUE: After examinee locates correct procedure, provide copy.
NOTE: After examinee locates liquid release spread sheet, inform student to use spreadsheet on computer desktop.
NOTE: A completed copy of the liquid release spread sheet is located on page
- 7. CUE: If examinee asks where release duration information is to be obtained from, inform the
examinee "the release duration is per BwOP WX-501T1". CUE: As Shift Manager inform the examinee that the BwOP WX-501T1 release duration is 638 minutes.
Determine the Liquid Release Window per BwOP WX
-501T2 as follows:
Access Liquid Release Window spread sheet (k:/shift/excel/liquid release) o Enter arrival date at Wilmington (tomorrow's date) Enter river flow rate (5680 cfs)
Enter release duration (638 mins from BwOP
WX-501T1 step D.6.f.2)
Enter blowdown flow rate (22,000 gpm)
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 4. Maximum Release Rate CUE: The RETDAS computer output values for Radioactive Release rate and most limiting are both 50 gpm.
Determine Maximum Release Rate (BwOP WX
-501T1 H.1.e.2)):
Records Chemistry release rate from step C.10.b (50 gpm) Record Radioactive Release rate (50 gpm) N/A step H.1.e.2)c)
Record the most limiting value (50 gpm)
- 5. Record the Liquid Release Window times Record the Liquid Release Window times on BwOP
WX-501T1 (step H.1.f)
Target start time (1215)
Start after time (1115)
Start before time (1300) Start after time recorded in step D.3.h (N/A)
S-302 Page 5 of 7 6. Evaluate the expected time of release CUE: Dechlorination skid is in operation.
Evaluate the expected time of release so that both biocide treatment and the release can be accommodated by performing the following:
Check if dechlorination skid in operation Verify CW blowdown flow 8000 gpm (22,000 from previous cue)
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 7. Identify release will not start within desired time
CUE: Acknowledge as SM notification of release performed outside start time window. Inform examinee another supervisor will perform BwOP WX-501T3. Perform the following:
Determine release will be performed outside of release start time window (from initiating cue, release must start at 0900)
Determine BwOP WX
-501T3 must be completed prior to authorizing release o Notify SM release will be performed outside of release start time window OR o Notify SM to delay release until work completed OR o Notify SM to delay work until release completed within desired time window.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME COMMENTS:
S-302 Page 6 of 7 SIMULATOR/CLASSROOM SETUP GUIDE:
Verify/copy Liquid Release Window spreadsheet to computer desktop prior to administering JPM. Spreadsheet is located at k:/shift/excel/liquid release.
Clear data from INPUTS field of Liquid Release Window spread sheet prior to administering JPM.
Clear computer history of recently accessed documents, programs, and web sites visited prior to administering JPM by performing the following:
Right mouse click on task bar Select properties Select advanced tab Select clear Delete Liquid Release Window spreadsheet from computer desktop after administering JPM to all candidates.
COMMENTS: BwOP WX-501T1, Rev. 66.
BwOP WX-501T2, Rev 6.
BwOP WX-501T3, Rev 1.
S-302 Page 7 of 7
INPUTSArrival Date at Wilmington mm/dd/yyyyTomorrowRiver Flow RateCFS 5680Release DurationMinutes 638Blowdown Rate (F2400)GPM 22000CALCULATED RESULTSBlowdown Time To RiverMinutes 120River Time To Wilmington IntakeMinutes 420Blowdown Peak Time To Wilmington IntakeMinutes 859MarginMinutes 98 Start After Time ( = Peak Arrives at 10 PM)Time#VALUE!Normal Start ( = Center of Peak occurs at 2:30 AM)Time#VALUE!Start BeforeTime
( = Peak Departs at 7 AM)Time#VALUE!Today 1115 Today 1215 Today 1300 K K E E Y Y K K E E Y Y K K E E Y Y K K E E Y Y (Final)
BRAIDWOOD STATION PROCEDURE NO.
BwOP WX-501T1 UNIT NO. REVISION NO.
66 PROCEDURE TITLE:
LIQUID RELEASE TANK 0WX01T RELEASE FORM Rev Summary IR# / EC# (if applicable) 63 Tank specific alarms created for individual Release Tanks 0WX01T & 0WX26T. BwAR 0PL01J A9 replaced by BwAR 0PL01J B1 and BwAR 0PL01J B2. References to alarm revised in BwOP WX-501T1/526T1. BwAR 0PL01J A9 deleted.
EC 385919 PCRA 1230957
-23 64 Corrected nomenclature for 0PR052 PCRA 1306712-02 65 Add Administrative steps and Attachment to comply with requirements of CC
-AA-112 CA 1182804
-33 66 Updated attachment to comply with CC
-AA-112. No Tech Eval required. Multiple editorial issues fixed.
PCRA 1306712
-02, 1321744
-02, 1323031-02, 1314053-02, 1319267-02, CA 1312921
-04 BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 1 LIQUID RELEASE TANK 0WX01T RELEASE FORM
NOTE If performing partial procedure to fill Release Tank with WM GO TO Step H.27 or perform BwOP WX
-174 to dilute/fill from PW.
Release Number L
- __13____ - __002 __ A. OPERATING DEPARTMENT RESPONSIBILITY RADWASTE OPERATOR NOTE Desired level is 85% to 90 A Release Package may be initiated anytime a release is deemed appropriate with Operations Supervision permission.
% for Release Package initiation.
The mixer should not be run when level is 70 Consideration should be given future water management needs when initiating a package with level %. 85 %. NOTE If a liquid release is being performed per BwOP TR
-21, Transferring the Clean Water Storage Tank to CW Blowdown, a liquid release from 0WX01T is not permitted.
JO __ 1. VERIFY 0WX01T is Recirculating per BwOP WX
-171. Tank Recirculation Started
_ Today_/_Date Time 14 hrs ago JO __ 2. RECORD 0WX01T Tank Level (0LR
-WX028, Release Tank 0WX01T, Leve l Indication).
0WX01T Tank Level __58.5 __% JO __ 3. COMPLETE the entries in the Liquid Release Log in the RWCR.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 2 A JO _ 4. VERIFY/RECORD the Release Number from the Liquid Release Log in the space provided on page 1.
NOTE The minimum mixing time required for an accurate sample is
5 minutes, if recirculating with the mixer ON or 60 minutes, if recirculating with the mixer OFF. After meeting time requirements, Chemistry can be called for a sample.
JO __ 5. WHEN the minimum mixing time requirements have been satisfied, NOTIFY Chemistry that a Release Package in progress requires 0WX01T sampling.
NOTE If more than 25 % of the volume in the Release Tank is water that was drained or processed out of one or more systems to support Refueling or Forced Outage activities, it is "Outage Water".
JO __ 6. Is the water in this tank considered to be outage water?
YES NO JO __ 7. Is 0WX01T level greater than 80 % (From Step A.2.)?
YES (GO TO STEP A.8.)
NO (MARK STEP A.8. "N/A".)
NOTE If more than 55 gallons of caustic has accumulated at the Release Tank Chemical Addition area (426' by 1A FW Pp), a caustic add should be performed unless directed otherwise by the Shift Supervisor based on release priority.
N/A __ 8. Is it desired to add caustic to 0WX01T? YES NO JO __ 9. VERIFY/DELIVER this release package to the non
-outage Unit Supervisor.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 3 B. OPERATING DEPARTMENT RESPONSIBILITY
- UNIT SUPERVISOR NOTE A TSS analysis is required on ALL tanks released on the first day of the sampling week that releases are performed. The first release tank of the month requires Oil and Grease sampling. These sample analysis add 4
-5 hours0.208 days <br />0.0298 weeks <br />0.00685 months <br /> to the processing time. All chemistry analysis calculations require second verification (If there is only one Chem Tech Available, the verification occurs the following shift). A release package can process through Chemistry in as little as 4 hours0.167 days <br />0.0238 weeks <br />0.00548 months <br /> if there are two Chem Techs, there are no higher priorities, no caustic add is required, and 0PR01J is operable.
NOTE Consideration should be given to scheduled activities that may impact operability/availability of 0PR01J and 0PR10J.
- 1. AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1
-1a in effect for:
JS ___ 0RE-PR001 YES NO VERIFICATION WS ___ JS ___ 0RE-PR010 YES NO VERIFICATION WS___
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 4 NOTE Two release path options are available. Generally, the Low Flow release would primarily be used when liquid radwaste inventory is high (i.e. outage). The Ultra Low Flow release rate is the preferred path and is correlated to the current river flow. This path would primarily be used when liquid radwaste inventory is normal. Contact Ops Supervisor for determination of which release flow path to use based on current liquid radwaste inventory, conditions, equipment availability, etc.
B. 2. SELECT which release path will be used for the release:
Low Flow Release Path
Ultra Low Flow Release Path NOTE Prior to forwarding this Release Package to the Chemistry Department, Step F.1. and F.2. may be performed if operating conditions permit.
- 3. OPS Supervisor: I have reviewed Parts A and B and have verified them accurate and complete.
___ Joe Supervisor
____________/__
today_/__OPS Supervisor Date Time 13 hrs ago JS ___ 4. NOTIFY the RADWASTE OPERATOR that his release package is ready for prompt delivery to Chemistry.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 5 C. CHEMISTRY DEPARTMENT RESPONSIBILITY NOTE 100% level for the 0WX01T release tank is 32,900 gallons. NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable under AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1
-1a, analyses other than isotopics required in this package, i.e., Tritium, Boron, O & G (if required), and TSS (if required) must be run and the numbers reported on one of two samples that meet the 30 % acceptance criteria.
JT ___ 1. To verify a request has been made to add caustic to 0WX01T Release Tank, verify yes applies to all statements specified in step A.7 and A.8.
All statements are yes, a chemical addition has been requested, GO TO step C.2.
Not all statements apply. A chemical addition will not be performed, GO TO step C.3.
- 2. Caustic addition to 0WX01T.
- a. Sample and analyze 0WX01T for boron concentration:
_____ Sampled by __________
_____ Time/Date ______/______
_____ Results __________ ppm (Record boron value in step C.9).
_____ b. Submit a chemical addition using BwCP 340
-1T4 for caustic to 0WX01T based on the following chart.
PPM BORON GALLONS OF CAUSTIC 200 0 200 5 >200 400 10 >400 600 15 >600 800 20 >800 1000 25 >1000 1200 30 >1200 1400 35 >1400 1600 40 >1600 1800 45 BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 6 C. 2. c. PERFORM either of the following:
Chemical Addition:
_____ a) SUBMIT Chem Add to Operations for __________ gallons caustic. Submitted by:
__________________
Time/Date ______/______
_____ b) RECORD the Time and Date the caustic addition was completed:
__________________
Time/Date ______/______
_____ c) WHEN the notification has been received that the caustic addition is complete, GO TO step C.3.
OR _____ OPS Supervisor notified that no caustic is to be added based on boron concentration. OPS Supervisor notified:
__________________ Time/Date ______/______ by Chem Tech
_______________________________________ GO TO Step C.3.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 7 C. 3. Sampling the Release Tank.
NOTE After obtaining a sample of the Release Tank, the analysis listed in Section C. (excluding sections C.1 and C.2) can be performed in any order necessary to perform the analysis in a safe and timely fashion. It is not necessary to complete one analysis before starting another.
The sequence of performing the analysis is left to the discretion of individual performing the tasks.
1st set 1st Sample 2nd Sample (If Required) 2nd set (If Required) 1st Sample 2nd Sample (If Required)
Sampled by JT JT Date today today Sample Time 13 hrs ago 12.5 hrs ago JT ___ a. One liter in a poly bottle for isotopic analysis, tritium analysis, and boron analysis using appropriate Chemistry procedures and 250 ml for the "monthly save" (monthly composites).
C/M __ b. For the first release package of the month, ANALYZE sample for Oil and Grease as directed per BwCP 323
-18. NOTE Additional release packages sampled on the same day as those analyzed in Step C.3.c. will require TSS samples also.
C/M __ c. For the day of the first release package of the week, obtain a sample for Total Suspended Solids (TSS) analysis for ALL releases as directed per BwCP 323-18.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 8 C. 4. ISOTOPIC SAMPLING CHECK JT __ IF the Radwaste Effluent Process Monitor, 0RE
-PR001 is operable per AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1.
-1a (see Step B.1.) then N/A Step C.5.
N/A __ IF Radwaste Effluent Process Monitor, OR E-PR001 is not operable per AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1.
-1a (see Step B.1.) then Perform Step C.5.
NOTE IF an Isotopic Verification is to be performed then an independent sample of sufficient volume for an Isotopic must be taken by an independent qualified individual. 5. ISOTOPIC VERIFICATION N/A __ a. VERIFY that Cobalt 60 (Co
-60) activities are within 30 % of each other by PERFORMING the following calculation:
A/B < 1.30 Where: A = The Larger Co
-60 activity, Ci/g = ____________________.
B = The Smaller Co-60 activity, Ci/g = ___________________.
_______________
÷ _______________ = _______________
(1.30) (A) (B) (A/B)
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 9 C. 5. b. PERFORM either of the following:
N/A __ IF the activities are NOT within 30 % of each other, GO TO step C.5.c. N/A __ IF the activities are within 30 % of each other, N/A Steps C.5.c. through C.5.g. and GO TO Step C.6.
- c. If the activities were not within 30 % of each other, PERFORM the following:
N/A __ 1) DISCARD any results obtained for O & G, TSS, boron, and tritium on these samples.
N/A _ 2) INFORM OPS Supervision.
N/A __ 3) OBTAIN another set of INDEPENDENT samples.
N/A __ 4) PERFORM an isotopic analysis on each of the second set of samples. N/A __ 5) VERIFY that Cobalt 60 (Co
-60) activities are within 30 % of each other by PERFORMING the following calculation:
A/B < 1.30 Where: A = The Larger Co
-60 activity, Ci/g = ____________________.
B = The Smaller Co
-60 activity, Ci/g = ___________________.
_______________
÷ _______________ = _____________
__ (A) (B) (A/B) (<1.30) N/A __ d. A second INDEPENDENT set of samples has been obtained, analyzed and the Co
-60 activities verified to be within 30 % of each other. (Check one of the following.)
YES, GO TO Step C.6.
NO, INFORM Operations Supervision and Chemistry Supervision immediately. Save other analysis results, i.e., Tritium, boron, O & G (if required) and TSS (if required) obtained on the second set of samples.
__________________________________/______
_ Signature Date BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 10 NOTE Chemistry and OPS Supervision will attempt to resolve the activity mismatch. Further INDEPENDENT sampling and isotopic analyses may be necessary. Radiation Protection Supervision may need to be consulted to re
-evaluate the 30 % acceptance criteria.
C____ 5. e. Radiation Protection has waived 30 % acceptance criteria.
________________________________________/______/______
Rad. Protection Supervisor Date Time ________________________________________/______/______
OPS Supervisor Date Time f. If Radiation Protection waives the 30 % acceptance criteria, report analysis results for Tritium, boron, O & G (if required) and TSS (if required) obtained on the second set of samples.
- g. If Radiation Protection does not waive the 30% acceptance criteria, discard analysis results for Tritium, boron, O & G (if required) and TSS (if required) obtained on the second set of samples. Notify OPS Supervisor that this package is terminated and return to him. Chemistry Supervision will begin an investigation to determine the difference.
JT ___ 6. Radionuclide Analysis Performed (Isotopic report(s) attached).
JT ___ 7. PERFORM the following:
ANALYZE sample for tritium using appropriate Chemistry procedures.
RECORD the results from the completed BwCP 22 0-2T1 or applicable procedure.
PARAMETER FREQUENCY LIMIT RESULTS Tritium Each Batch None 0.3333 _ Ci/g PLACE a copy of the completed Data Sheet that contains Tritium results in the Release Package for Radiation Protection.
JT ___ 8. Composite sample drawn, labeled with sample time, date and assigned release number and placed in designated sample storage area.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 11 C JT 9. ANALYZE sample for boron concentration, if not previously obtained in step C.2, using appropriate Chemistry procedure, and RECORD the results below.
PARAMETER FREQUENCY POST DILUTION DISCHARGE LIMIT TANK CONCENTRATION Boron Each Batch 1 ppm _______________ ppm JT ___ 10. Maximum Discharge Rate based on Water Quality Chemical Analysis.
- a. PERFORM the following calculation for each analysis: A x B C = MAXIMUM DISCHARGE RATE (GPM)
Where: A = Kankakee River Flowrate = 91,392B = Parameter Limit = 1 ppm gpm. C = Tank Concentration (from Step C.9.)
(__91392_ (GPM) X ___
1____ (PPM))
÷ __1464.6(A) (B) (C) _ (PPM) = ____62.4 _________ GPM (Maximum Discharge Rate)
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 12 NOTE When using the Low Flow release path, the MAXIMUM RELEASE RATE SHALL NOT exceed 50 gpm. When using the Ultra Low Flow release path, the MAXIMUM RELEASE RATE SHALL NOT exceed 20 gpm. C. 10. b. REFER to step B.2. to determine which release path will be used for this release. Then complete one of the following:
The Low Flow release path will be used. RECORD the calculated Maximum Discharge Rate from step C.10.a. or 50 gpm, whichever is less. ____50___________
GPM ( 50 gpm) The Ultra Low Flow release path will be used. RECORD the calculated Maximum Discharge Rate from step C.10.a. or 20 gpm, whichever is less.
______ N/A _______ GPM ( 20 gpm)
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 13 NOTE All required NPDES LIMITS must be satisfied in the release tank prior to a release.
C N/A 11. ANALYZE sample as required by the NPDES Permit for Total Suspended Solids and Oil and Grease using appropriate Chemistry procedures. RECORD the results from the completed analyses below and on the NPDES Weekly Data Sheet. N/A this Step and C.12 if NPDES sampling has been satisfied.
1st set 2nd set (If Required) 1st Sample 2nd Sample(If Required) 1st Sample 2nd Sample (If Required) Sampled by Date Sample Time PARAMETER FREQUENCY LIMIT RESULTS Total Suspended Solids Per Current NPDES Permit 30__________ ppm ppm Oil and Grease Per Current NPDES Permit 20__________ ppm ppm
- 12. Is the Release Tank within all specified NPDES limits as determined in Step C.11?
_____ YES The release tank is approved for Chemical Release. GO TO Step C.13. _____ NO a. IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY the OPS Supervisor.
- b. OPS Supervisor notified:
_________________________________/______/______
(Print Name)
Date Time c. RETURN this procedure to Operations for release
cancellation.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 14 C. 13. Chemistry Department: I have reviewed Part C and have verified it is accurate and complete.
________________________________________/______/______
Chemistry Department Date Time
________________________________________/______/______ Verification Date Time JT ___ 14. PROMPTLY DELIVER this release package to Rad Protection for processing (ENSURE receipt is acknowledged).
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 15 D. RAD PROTECTION DEPARTMENT RESPONSIBILITY RADIONUCLIDE ANALYSIS NOTE If 0RE-PR001 (Liquid Radwaste Release Monitor) is out
-of-service, two release tank samples must be obtained and analyzed. For all release calculations the isotopic with the highest total activity SHALL be used. If an isotope appears on only one of the two analyses, then ensure that isotope is included in the calculations.
NOTE Verification is required if manual calculations are performed. If a computerized release program is used, attach the printout and N/A the appropriate verification spaces.
NOTE Rad Protection or Operations is to notify Chemistry when a release package is cancelled prior to release so that the NPDES data sheets can be updated as required.
RT __ 1. OBTAIN and REVIEW the Isotopic(s) for the tank to be released and ENCLOSE in this release form.
RT __ 2. PERFORM the following:
RT __ a. CALL the Unit Supervisor and VERIFY that there are no "Liquid Release in Progress" placards for the 0WX01T on panel 0PM01J.
___ Joe Supervisor
_________/___
Today /_10 hrs agoName of Verifier Date Time _ RT __ b. VERIFY that the status of the 0RE
-PR001 and 0RE
-PR010 monitors are the same as indicated in Step B.1.
Yes. The status for both monitors is the same as indicated in Step B.1. CONTINUE processing this package.
No. The status for one or both monitors is not the same as indicated in Step B.1. OBTAIN guidance from Operations on whether or not processing of this package should be continued.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 16 NOTE 0WX01T has capacity of 32,900 gallons. Tank level is recorded in Step A.2 D. 3. PERFORM the following to calculate the H
-3 activity of this release:
RT __ a. __58.5%__ x 329 gal = _19246.5(Step A.2) 1% _ gallons NOTE The units in step C.7, Ci/g, are equivalent to Ci/ml as seen in the following step.
RT __ b. 3.33E-1 Ci /ml X 3785 ml/gal x 19246.5gal x 1E-06 Ci/Ci = __24.3(step C.7)
(step D.3.a)
__ Ci Performed by:
__ RT _____/__ today Initials Date __
Verification
- ___ VT ____/_ today Initials Date __
- c. PERFORM one of the following:
RT __ If the H-3 activity is greater than or equal to 100 Ci, INFORM the Operations and Chemistry that the entire requested volume cannot be released in a 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> period and cancel this release package.
_______ N/ASupervisor Notified Date Time __________________/__________/____________
If H-3 activity is less than 100 Ci then continue to next step.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 17 D RT 3. d. RECORD the appropriate information in the Liquid Release Tritium Tracking log for this release package: Release Number, H
-3 Concentration and Tank gallons. The Liquid Release Tritium Tracking Log is located at L:/Shared/8931/Liquid Release Information/Liquid Release Tritium Tracking Log.
NOTE Information required in Step D.3.e can be obtained from the Liquid Release Tritium Tracking Log or by contacting Radwaste Operations.
RT __ e. RECORD the following information for all liquid Rad Waste discharges completed in the last 24 hours1 days <br />0.143 weeks <br />0.0329 months <br />. (N/A this step if no releases in last 24 hours.) Release # ______ L-13-001 _________ Date & Time release stopped
__ yesterday @ 1700
______ Actual Gallons Released
_____9990 ___________
Tritium Activity (uCi/ml)
____13.6 Ci _____________
RT __ f. CALCULATE H
-3 activity released in last 24 hours1 days <br />0.143 weeks <br />0.0329 months <br />. (N/A this step if no releases in the last 24 hours.) 3.60E-1 Ci /ml X 3785 ml/gal x 9990 gal x 1E-06 Ci/Ci = ___13.6 __ Ci Performed by:
__ RT ___/___ todayInitials Date _ Verification
- ___ VT ____/_ todayInitials Date ___
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 18 D RT 3. g. PERFORM one of the following:
If there was a release in the last 24 hours, CALCULATE the total Tritium activity using the following equation:
__24.3__ Ci H-3 + __13.6__ Ci H-3 = __37.9(Step D.3.b.)
(Step D.3.f.)
_ Ci H-3 Performed by:
__ RT ____/__ todayInitials Date __
Verification
- __ VT ____/__ todayInitials Date __ IF no release in the last 24(Step D.3.b.)
hours, H-3 Activity = __________Ci H
-3. RT __ h. PERFORM one of the following (and INITIAL appropriate bullet):
Results of D.3.g are LESS than 100 Ci
- CONTINUE with discharge.
Results of D.3.g are GREATER than or EQUAL to 100 Ci
- INFORM Operations Field Supervisor that this release cannot start within 24 hours of the completion of the last release.
________ N/ASupervisor Notified Date Time __________________________/________/________
RECORD release start time (24 hours1 days <br />0.143 weeks <br />0.0329 months <br /> AFTER completion of last release.
__________
N/A ______________________
RT __ i. RECORD anticipated H
-3 activity from Step D.3.b. and the sum of the anticipated H
-3 activity plus the activity released in the last 24 hours1 days <br />0.143 weeks <br />0.0329 months <br /> from Step D.3.g. in the Liquid Release Tritium Tracking Log.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 19 NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated, Steps D.4.b
-c., are not required and may be marked N/A.
D. 4. PERFORM the following:
RT __ a. CALL the Assist NSO (x2207 or x2208).
RT __ b. REQUEST and RECORD the 3 most recent 10 minute average readings from RM-11 for the 0RE
-PR001 (0PS101).
- 1 __2.02E-7 _ Ci/ml #2 __2.02E-7 __ Ci/ml #3 __2.02E-7 _ Ci/ml RT __ c. RECORD the maximum background for 0RE
-PR001 obtained from 3 average readings in Step D.4.b. above = 2.02E-7 Ci/ml RT __ d. OBTAIN the current 0RE
-PR010 reading: ___8.12E-7 ______ Ci/ml RT __ e. RECORD the Time and Date the readings were obtained:
Time: _ Now ____ Date: _ today ___ ______ Joe OperatorOperator Contacted
_________________________________ RT __ 5. INDICATE which release path will be used for this release (refer to step B.2):
Low Flow (Maximum Release Rate =
50 gpm) Ultra Low Flow (Maximum Release Rate =
20 gpm)
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 20 NOTE If the RETDAS computerized release program is available, you may attach the printout to this form and indicate "see attached" in the calculation spaces in D.6.a below. If no quantifiable peaks are found in the radionuclide analysis, write "NQPF" in the Table in Step D.6.a. Actual release data will be completed in Section J.
D. 6. Radioactive Release Rate Determination:
RT __ a. To ensure compliance of the planned release with 10CFR20 limits, PERFORM one of the following:
RT __ IF using RETDAS computerized release program and the RETDAS data farmer link is operable, ENTER all data into the RETDAS software to complete the "Liquid Pre
-Release Permit Report". IF the data farmer link in the RETDAS computerized release program is operable, no verification of the Liquid Pre
-Release Permit Report is needed. IF any isotopes were MANUALLY entered into RETDAS, have another qualified individual VERIFY all MANUALLY entered isotopes are correct.
Isotopic data entered by: ____
RT ___ Date / Time: today /_ Now Isotopic data verified by: ___
N/A ___ Date / Time: _____/_____
REVIEW the "Limits Analysis" section of the Liquid Pre
-Release Permit Report.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 21 D N/A 6. a. IF using RETDAS computerized release program and the RETDAS data farmer link is not operable, ENTER all data into the RETDAS
software to complete the "Liquid Pre
-Release Permit Report" and MANUALLY enter the isotopic information into RETDAS. Have another qualified individual VERIFY all MANUALLY entered isotopes are correct.
REVIEW the "Limits Analysis" section of the Liquid Pre
-Release Permit Report.
Isotopic data entered by: __________ Date / Time: _____/_____
Isotopic data verified by: __________ Date / Time: _____/_____
N/A __ IF the RETDAS computerized release program is not operable, CONTACT Qualified R. P. Management individual to COMPLETE the following table. If an isotope is not present, you may leave the space blank.
NOTE DWC values are listed in 10CFR20, Appendix B Table 2, Column 2.
For ODCM Limit, take ten times the DWC value for each isotope listed for column 3. (i.e. the DWC value for Co
-58 is 2E-5 Ci/ml.) The ODCM Limit for noble gas isotopes is 2E
-4 Ci/ml per CY-BR-170-301, ODCM Chapter 12, Radioactive Effluent Technical Standard step 12.3.1.a.
NOTE Columns 5 and 6 cannot be completed until the mathematical operations in Step D.6.g are performed. The appropriate values can then be entered into the table.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 22 #1 Isotope #2 Undiluted Tank Activity (Ci/ml) #3 ODCM Limit (Ci/ml) #4 100% x #3Column #2Column #5 Diluted Activity (Ci/ml) #6 Unrestricted Area DWC Fraction Na-24 5.0 E-4 Cr-51 5.0 E-3 Mn-54 3.0 E-4 Co-57 6.0 E-4 Co-58 2.0 E-4 Fe-59 1.0 E-4 Co-60 3.0 E-5 Zn-65 5.0 E-5 Br-82 4.0 E-4 Kr-85 2.0 E-4 Sr-92 4.0 E-4 Nb-95 3.0 E-4 Zr-95 2.0 E-4 Zr-97 9.0 E-5 Ag-110m 6.0 E-5 Tc-99m 1.0 E-2 Sn-113 3.0 E-4 Sb-122 1.0 E-4 Sb-124 7.0 E-5 Sb-125 3.0 E-4 Sb-126 7.0 E-5 Cs-136 6.0 E-5 I-131 1.0 E-5 I-133 7.0 E-5 Xe-133 2.0 E-4 Xe-133m 2.0 E-4 Cs-134 9.0 E-6 Xe-135 2.0 E-4 Cs-137 1.0 E-5 Cs-138 4.0 E-3 Ba-140 8.0 E-5 La-140 9.0 E-5 Ce-144 3.0 E-5 H-3 1.0 E-2 Total Total (2) Sum of column #2 does NOT include Tritium (4) Sum of column #4 DOES include Tritium Completed by: _____________________________________________________ Date/Time: ______________
Print/Sign Data Calculations Verified by: _____________________________ Date/Time: ______________
Print/Sign
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 23 NOTE If the RETDAS computerized release program is available, the total tank curies, excluding noble gas and tritium, are less than the administrative limit if no warning is displayed in the Limits Analysis section of the prerelease permit.
D. 6. b. PERFORM one of the following:
RT __ The total tank curies excluding noble gas and tritium are less than the administrative limit. MARK the remainder of Step D.6.b N/A and PROCEED to Step D.6.c.
N/A __ The total tank curies excluding noble gas and tritium are equal to or greater than the administrative limit. CONTACT the Ops Field Supervisor to receive permission to release the tank.
Will the tank be released? YES / NO (Circle one.)
_________ N/ASupervisor Contacted Date Time _______________/__________/__________
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 24 NOTE If the RETDAS computerized release program is available, you may mark Step D.6.c N/A.
NOTE The value to be used for Circulating Water Blowdown Rate in the following step is 8,000 GPM. NOTE Release may be performed using the Low Flow release path or the Ultra Low Flow release path. When using the Ultra Low Flow release path, N/A step D.6.c
-e. If the Ultra Low Flow release path is used, 20 GPM will be used as the value of the maximum release rate. Use this value as applicable in steps D.6.f
-D.6.g.
D____ 6. c. When using the Low Flow release path, PERFORM the following calculation to DETERMINE the Radioactive Release Rate:
Performed by:
__________/__________
Initials Date Verification:
__________/__________
Initials Date 02.0 / 4 Column of Totalgpm) (8,000 Rate Blowdown Water gCirculatin
= Rate Release eRadioactiv(8000 GPM ÷ _______________) ÷ 0.02 = ________________ GPM (Total of Column 4)
(Release Rate)
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 25 NOTE If the RETDAS computerized release program is available, RECORD values for D.6.d. from the RETDAS permit.
D R T _ 6. d. Maximum Release Rate Determination:
- 1) RECORD the Chemistry Release Rate from step C.10.b. or RETDAS permit:
__50 ___ GPM 2) RECORD the Radioactive Release Rate from step D.6.c. or RETDAS permit:
__50 ___ GPM NOTE The maximum release rate SHALL NOT exceed 50 gpm. DO NOT record a value greater than 50 gpm in the following step.
RT __ e. RECORD the most limiting (smallest) value from step D.6.d. as the Maximum Release Rate below:
Maximum Release Rate = ___
50____ GPM ( 50 gpm)
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 26 NOTE If the RETDAS computerized release program is available, you may N/A steps D.6.f.1) and RECORD values for D.6.f.2) from the RETDAS permit.
D. 6. f. PERFORM the following:
N/A __ 1) Calculate the minimum release duration using formula below:
(___N/A ____ GA L - 3300 GAL)
÷ __ N/A ____ GPM = __
N/A (Step D.3.a.
) (Step D.6.e. or 20 GPM) (Min Release Duration
) _____MIN Performed by:
___ N/AInitials Date ___/__________
Verification:
___ N/AInitials Date ___/__________
RT __ 2) RECORD the Minimum Release Duration (from Step D.6.f.1) or the RETDAS permit:
___638 __________ MIN
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 27 NOTE If the RETDAS Computerized Release Program is available, steps D.6.g.1) - 4) may be marked N/A.
D. 6. g. Calculation of DILUTED ACTIVITY and UNRESTRICTED AREA DWC FRACTION (Verification):
N/A __ 1) COMPLETE columns #5 and #6 of Step D.6.a. using the following equations on a radionuclide basis:
gpm) (8,000 Rate Blowdown rCirc Wate
+ (gpm) Rate Release Max.(gpm) Rate Release Max. x 2) (Column Ci/ml)( Activity Tank Analyzed = Activity Diluted ) DWC Fraction = Diluted Activity (from above calculation) / Tech Spec Limit (Column 3)
N/A __ 2) RECORD the results of the previous step in the applicable rows of columns #5 and #6.
N/A __ 3) SUM the results of columns #5 and #6.
N/A __ 4) RECORD the values obtained on the appropriate TOTAL row of the table. RT __ 5) PERFORM one of the following
- IF RETDAS is not used, VERIFY that the sum of column # 6 of D.6.a is less than 0.5. IF not, NOTIFY the Ops Supervisor and CANCEL this release package.
______ N/AOps Supervisor Date Time ____________________/__________/__________
IF RETDAS is used, VERIFY that the sum of column # 6 labeled "Percent of 10 x EC" is less than 5.00 E + 1. IF not, NOTIFY the Ops Supervisor and CANCEL this release package.
_____ Joe Supervisor _________/____
today _/____nowOps Supervisor Date Time __
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 28 NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated, Step D.7. is not required and may be N/Ad. Step D.7.a is not required if the RETDAS release software is operational and may be N/A'd. Ops Shift Management personnel may request performance of step D.7 to facilitate post maintenance testing.
D. 7. RADWASTE EFFLUENT MONITOR SETPOINT:
- a. DETERMINE the Alert Alarm and High Alarm setpoints for the Liquid Radwaste Effluent Monitor (0RE
-PR001) using the following equation:
N/A _ 1) RECORD the 0RE
-PR001 maximum background from Step D.4.c.
_______________ Ci/ml N/A __ 2) PERFORM the following calculation:
(___________________Ci/ml x 1.5) + __________ Ci/ml = (Step D.6.a Col 2 Total)
(Step D.7.a.1)
__________ Ci/ml Calculated 0RE
-PR001 Setpoint
Performed by:
__________/__________
Initials Date Verification:
__________/__________
Initials Date N/A __ 3) RECORD the calculated 0RE
-PR001 setpoint:
_______________ Ci/ml (Step D.7.a.2 results)
N/A __ 4) COMPARE the calculated 0RE
-PR001 setpoint to each of the current 0RE
-PR001 monitor setpoints. These setpoints are:
8.64E-05 Ci/ml for the HIGH setpoint 4.32E-05 Ci/ml for the ALERT setpoint BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 29 D. 7. a. 5) PERFORM either of the following:
N/A __ If the calculated value is less than the current monitor HIGH setpoint, RECORD the current monitor setpoints as the Release setpoints.
N/A _ If the calculated value is greater than the current monitor HIGH setpoint, RECORD the calculated value as the Release HIGH setpoint, and 50% of the calculated HIGH setpoint as the ALERT setpoint.
- b. RECORD 0RE
-PR001 Monitor Liquid Release setpoints from RETDAS Permit or as calculated in D.7.a.5):
RT __ Chan Item 9 (HIGH Alarm Setpoint) ___1.31E-4 _ Ci/ml RT __ Chan Item 10 (ALERT Alarm Setpoint) ___6.56E-5____ Ci/ml BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 30 NOTE If 0RE-PR010 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated, Step D.8. is not required and may be N/Ad. Step D.8.a is not required if the RETDAS Release software is operational. Mark the step(s) N/A as necessary. Ops Shift Management personnel may request performance of step D.8. to facilitate post maintenance testing.
D. 8. STATION BLOWDOWN MONITOR SETPOINT:
N/A _ a. DETERMINE the Alert Alarm and High Alarm setpoints for the Station Blowdown Monitor (0RE
-PR010) using the following equation:
N/A __ 1) RECORD the current 0RE
-PR010 reading from Step D.4.d.:
_______________ Ci/ml N/A __ 2) PERFORM the following calculation:
(1.25 x __________ x __________ GPM) ÷ (8,000 + __________) (Total Col #2 Step D.6.a) (Step D.6.e or 20 GPM)
(Step D.6.e. or 20GPM.)
= _________ Ci/ml 0RE
-PR010 Calculated Setpoint Performed by:
__________/__________
Initials Date Verification:
__________/__________
Initials Date N/A __ 3) RECORD the Calculated 0RE
-PR010 setpoint:
_______________ Ci/ml (Step D.8.a.2. results)
N/A __ 4) COMPARE the calculated 0RE
-PR010 Setpoint to each of the current monitor setpoints. These setpoints are:
1.07E-06 Ci/ml for the HIGH setpoint 7.46E-07 Ci/ml for the ALERT setpoint BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 31 D. 8. a. 5) PERFORM either of the following:
N/A __ IF the calculated value is less than the current monitor HIGH setpoint, RECORD the current monitor setpoints as the Release setpoints.
N/A _ IF the calculated value is greater than the current monitor HIGH setpoint, RECORD the calculated value as the Release HIGH setpoint, and 70 % of the HIGH value for the ALERT setpoint.
- b. RECORD 0RE
-PR010 Monitor Liquid Release setpoints as determined in step D.8.a.5) or from the RETDAS release software:
RT __ Chan Item 9 (HIGH Alarm Setpoint) __8.19E-6 ____ Ci/ml RT __ Chan Item 10 (ALERT Alarm Setpoint) ___5.73E-6 ___ Ci/ml NOTE The following step is to ensure the permit number created for this release has been committed to the database.
- 9. PERFORM the following: (This step may be N/A if this package was not generated with RETDAS.)
RT __ b. REOPEN RETDAS and CLICK on release ID magnifying glass and select appropriate release tank. Then CLICK on permit number magnifying glass and VERIFY the permit number is in the database.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 32 NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated, verification is required for Step D.10.
D. 10. APPROVAL FOR RADIOLOGICAL RELEASE:
RT __ Radiation Protection: I have reviewed Part D and have verified it is accurate and complete.
Performed by ___
Rhonda Technician
______/ today/_Radiation Protection Date Time 1 hr ago Verified by: _____
Ralph Technician __/__ today/_ Date Time 1 hr ago RT __ 11. FORWARD to HPS/RPS for review.
RT __ 12. FORWARD Release Package to the OPS Supervisor or contact OPS Supervisor for instructions to forward this package.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 33 E. OPERATING/CHEMISTRY DEPARTMENT RESPONSIBILITY NOTE TSS is required for the first release of the week.
Oil and Grease is required for the first release of the month.
The week is defined as Monday thru Sunday.
- 1. Control Room Supervisor:
- a. Is this the first release for the week/month?
YES GO TO Step E.1.b NO N/A steps E.1.b thru E.5 then GO TO Section F.
- b. Are required analyses complete with results within the limits in step C.11?
YES N/A steps E.2 thru E.5 then GO TO Section F.
NO RETURN this release package to Chemistry to perform
St ep E.2 thru E.5.
N/A __ 2. ANALYZE sample as required by the NPDES Permit for Total Suspended Solids and Oil and Grease per appropriate procedures. RECORD the results from the completed analyses below and on the NPDES Weekly Data Sheet. N/A this step
and E.3 if NPDES sampling has been satisfied.
1st set 2nd set (If Required) 1st Sample 2nd Sample(If Required) 1st Sample 2nd Sample (If Required) Sampled by Date Sample Time PARAMETER FREQUENCY LIMIT RESULTS Total Suspended Solids Per Current NPDES Permit 30_________ ppm ppm Oil and Grease Per Current NPDES Permit 20_________ ppm ppm BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 34 E N/A 3. Is the Release Tank within all specified NPDES limits as determined in steps C.11 and E.2?
N/A __ YES The release tank is approved for Chemical Release, perform Step E.4, N/A __ NO a. IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY the OPS Supervisor.
- b. OPS Supervisor notified:
_________________________________/______/______
(Print Name)
Date Time c. RETURN this procedure to Operations for release cancellation.
- 4. Chemistry Department: I have reviewed Part E and have verified it is accurate and complete.
________________________________________/______/______
Chemistry Department Date Time
________________________________________/______/______
Verification Date Time 5. Promptly DELIVER this release package to the Control Room Supervisor for processing. (ENSURE receipt is acknowledged.)
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 35 NOTE A Check Source Check is a verification of Detector Response. Even if Detector response is immediately evident when a "Hot" Release Tank is first lined up to 0PR01J, ODCM RETS 2.1.B
-1 requires a Source Check. If a Check Source Test fails when High Activity is present, it is caused by the program function of 0PR01J. To pass the Check Source Test, the Activity has to stabilize or be missed, and repeated attempts may have to be performed until successful.
NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated Step F.1. is not required.
F. OPERATING DEPARTMENT RESPONSIBILITY US __ 1. Perform 0BwOS RETS 2.1.B
-1, "Unit Common Pre
-Release Source Check of Liquid Effluent Monitor 0PR01J." Time: 30 min ago Date: _ today _ 2. Control Room Supervisor: I have verified that either the 0BwOS RETS 2.1.B-1 Acceptance Criteria has been met, or 0RE
-PR001 is inoperable.
_____ Ulyses Supervisor
_______________
today /_25 min ago Control Room Supervisor Date Time
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 36 NOTE Two release path options are available. Generally, the Low Flow release would primarily be used when liquid radwaste inventory is high (i.e. outage). The Ultra Low Flow release rate is the preferred path and is correlated to the current river flow. This path would primarily be used when liquid radwaste inventory is normal. Contact Ops Supervisor for determination of which release flow path to use based on current liquid radwaste inventory, conditions, equipment availability, etc.
F JO 3. Before proceeding, VERIFY that no other liquid release packages are in progress which would interfere with this one (current releases, interlock checks, etc).
JO ___ 4. CONTACT OPS Supervisor for release flow rate path.
- 5. INDICATE which release flow rate path will be used (Ref. step B.2):
JO ___ Low Flow N/A __ Ultra Low Flow.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 37 NOTE If 0RE-PR010 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated, Step F.6. is not required.
F. 6. PERFORM the following from the RM
-11 Console to OBTAIN 0RE
-PR010 (0PS110) setpoints:
JO ___ a. DEPRESS Grid 1 key.
JO ___ b. KEY in 110.
JO ___ c. DEPRESS SEL key. JO ___ d. VERIFY 0PR10J (0PS110) selected
. JO ___ e. DEPRESS CHAN ITEMS key.
JO __ f. RECORD the following CHAN ITEMS:
JO ___ Chan Item 9 (HIGH Alarm Setpoint) __8.19-6 _____ Ci/ml JO ___ Chan Item 10 (ALERT Alarm Setpoint) __5.73-6_____ Ci/ml BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 38 NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1
-1a has been initiated, Step F.7. is not required.
F. 7. PERFORM the following from the RM
-11 Console to OBTAIN 0RE
-PR001 (0PS101) setpoints:
JO ___ a. DEPRESS Grid 1 key.
JO ___ b. KEY in 101.
JO ___ c. DEPRESS SEL key JO ___ d. VERIFY 0PR01J (0PS101) selected.
JO ___ e. DEPRESS CHAN ITEMS key.
JO ___ f. RECORD the following CHAN ITEMS:
JO ___ Chan Item 9 (HIGH Alarm Setpoint) ____1.31E-4 _____ Ci/ml JO ___ Chan Item 10 (ALERT Alarm Setpoint) ___6.56E-5_____ Ci/ml BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 39 F. 8. PERFORM the following to prepare for release.
- a. VERIFY 0BwOSR 0.1-0 daily channel check is complete on:
NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated, the following step is not required.
JO ___ Rad Monitor 0RE
-PR001: Liquid Radwaste Effluent. NOTE If 0RE-PR010 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated, the following step is not required.
JO ___ Rad Monitor 0RE
-PR010: Station Blowdown.
NOTE If 0UR-CW032 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated, the following step is not required.
JO ___ Station Blowdown Line Monitor Loop 0UR
-CW032. JO ___ b. OPEN 0WX354, Release Tk Dsch to Process Rad Mon System (TB 401' J-18 between tanks).
VERIFICATION JB ___
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 40 NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated, Steps F.9. and F.10. are not required.
NOTE For a release through the low flow rate path COMPLETE Step F.9.
and mark Step F.10. N/A. If a Ultra Low Flow rate release, GO TO Step F.10. and mark Step F.9. N/A
. NOTE If the 0PR01J is in High Alarm at this point in the procedure due to high background, it will be necessary to reset the HIGH alarm setpoint to a value higher than the background. This will allow the 0AOV-WX896 to open to test the interlock function. Otherwise, Step F.9.f. is not required.
NOTE Upon receipt of a high radiation signal at 0PR01J, the Release Tank Discharge Valves, 0WX353 and 0WX896 will remain closed until the high radiation signal seal
-in is reset at 0PL01J.
F. 9. VERIFY valve 0AOV
-WX896, Release Tank Disch Isolation Valve, automatically closes on high radiation by PERFORMING the following Steps:
RO/JO a. VERIFY/RESET CIRC WTR BLOWDOWN FLOW LOW annuciator 0PL01J-7-B6. RO/JO b. VERIFY/CLOSE 0AOV
-WX897, Flow Control Radwaste Effluent Discharge Valve.
RO/JO c. VERIFY/CLOSE 0AOV
-WX890, Release Tk Pp 0WX53P Dsch Isol.
RO/JO d. VERIFY/OPEN 0AOV
-WX889, Release Tk Pp 0WX01P Dsch Isol.
RO/JO e. VERIFY/START 0WX01P, Release Tank Pump.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 41 CAUTION Some actions possible in the Supervisor Mode may have serious detrimental effects on system operation.
Therefore use caution when in this mode and do not leave the RM
-11 console unattended when it is in this mode.
F. 9. f. IF the 0PR01J is in HIGH alarm, PERFORM the following CHANGE the HIGH alarm setpoint to a value higher than background. This will allow the RELEASE TANK 0WX01T DISCHARGE HEADER RADIATION HIGH alarm (Window 77B01 on 0PL01J) to be reset and, the 0AOV
-WX896 valve to be opened after its seal
-in has been reset. This can be accomplished as follows:
_____ 1) VERIFY/PLACE the RM
-11 Console in SUPERVISOR MODE.
_____ 2) DEPRESS Grid 1 key.
_____ 3) KEY in 101.
_____ 4) DEPRESS SEL key.
_____ 5) VERIFY 0PR01J (0PS101) selected.
_____ 6) DEPRESS CHAN ITEM key.
_____ 7) KEY in 9.
_____ 8) DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 9 should be displayed in reverse characters.)
_____ 9) KEY in a HIGH alarm setpoint USING the format XYZ +/- AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E
-10 would be entered as 376
-10).
_____ 10) DEPRESS the ENTER key. (The new value will be displayed after a short delay.)
RO/JO g. VERIFY/CLEAR RELEASE TANK 0WX01T DISCHARGE HEADER RADIATION HIGH Annunciator (Window 77B01 on 0PL01J).
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 42 NOTE Upon receipt of a high radiation signal at 0PR01J, the Release Tank Discharge Valves, 0WX353 and 0WX896 will remain closed until the high radiation signal seal
-in is reset at 0PL01J.
F JO 9. h. OPEN 0AOV-WX896, Release Tank Disch Isolation Valve.
- i. PERFORM the following to AUTO CLOSE valve 0AOV
-WX896, Release Tank Disch Isolation Valve, by LOWERING the Liquid Radwaste Effluent monitor 0RE
-PR001 HIGH alarm setpoint to a value below the current activity as follows:
JO ___ 1) VERIFY/PLACE the RM
-11 Console in SUPERVISOR MODE.
JO __ 2) DEPRESS Grid 1 key.
JO ___ 3) KEY in 101.
JO ___ 4) DEPRESS SEL key.
JO ___ 5) VERIFY 0PR01J (0PS101) selected. JO ___ 6) DEPRESS CHAN ITEM key.
JO ___ 7) KEY in 9. JO ___ 8) DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 9 should be displayed in reverse characters.)
JO ___ 9) RECORD the current activity reading:
____8.12E-7 ______ JO ___ 10) KEY in a HIGH alarm setpoint USING the format XYZ +/- AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E
-10 would be entered as 376
-10), below the current activity value (from the upper right corner of the display) USING the format XYZ +/-
AB for XYZ E +/- AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E-10 would be entered as 376
-10). JO ___ 11) RECORD the new HIGH alarm setpoint that was entered (channel item 9): __1.31E-7 ______ JO ___ 12) DEPRESS the ENTER key.
JO ___ 13) ACKNOWLEDGE the alarm at the RM
-11 console.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 43 F RO/JO 9. j. VERIFY 0AOV
-WX896, Release Tank Disch Isolation Valve, Auto Closes.
RO/JO k. VERIFY RELEASE TANK 0WX01T DISCHARGE HEADER RADIATION HIGH alarm (Window 77B01 at 0PL01J) annunciates at 0PL01J and ACKNOWLEDGE.
RO/JO l. PLACE key locked switch for 0AOV
-WX896, Release Tank Disch Isolation Valve, in CLOSE.
CAUTION Some actions possible in the Supervisor Mode may have serious detrimental effects on system operation.
Therefore use caution when in this mode and do not leave the RM
-11 console unattended when it is in this mode. JO ___ m. VERIFY/ADJUST the ALERT Alarm and HIGH Alarm setpoints for 0RE-PR001 (0PS101) to the values specified by Rad Protection in Step D.7.b. USING the instructions that follow.
JO ___ 1) VERIFY/PLACE the RM
-11 Console in SUPERVISOR MODE. JO ___ 2) DEPRESS Grid 1 key.
JO ___ 3) KEY in 101.
JO ___ 4) DEPRESS SEL key.
JO ___ 5) VERIFY 0PR01J (0PS101) selected. JO ___ 6) DEPRESS CHAN ITEM key.
JO ___ 7) KEY in 10.
JO ___ 8) DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 10 should be displayed in reverse characters.) JO ___ 9) KEY in the new ALERT alarm setpoint USING the format XYZ +/-
AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E
-10 would be entered as 376
-10) JO ___ 10) DEPRESS the ENTER key. (The new value will be displayed after a short delay.)
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 44 F JO 9. m. 11) VERIFY the new ALERT alarm setpoint is displayed.
VERIFICATION _
JH JO ___ 12) KEY in 9. JO ___ 13) DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 9 should be displayed in reverse characters.)
JO ___ 14) KEY in the new HIGH alarm setpoint USING the format XYZ +/-
AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E
-10 would be entered as 376
-10). JO __ 15) DEPRESS the ENTER key. (The new value will be displayed after a short delay.)
JO ___ 16) VERIFY the new HIGH alarm setpoint is displayed.
VERIFICATION _
JH JO ___ n. VERIFY/CLEAR RELEASE TANK 0WX01T DISCHARGE HEADE R RADIATION HIGH annunciator (Window 77B01 at 0PL01J).
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 45 NOTE If the 0PR01J is in High Alarm at this point in the procedure due to high background, it will be necessary to reset the HIGH alarm setpoint to a value higher than the background. This will allow the 0AOV-WX353 to open to test the interlock function. Otherwise, Step F.10.f. is not required.
F. 10. VERIFY valve 0AOV
-WX353, Release Tank Disch Isolation Valve, automatically closes on high radiation by PERFORMING the following Steps for a release through the Ultra Low Flow rate path:
_____ a. VERIFY sufficient blowdown flow is established.
_____ b. VERIFY/CLOSE 0AOV
-WX302, Flow Control Radwaste Effluent Discharge Valve.
_____ c. VERIFY/CLOSE 0AOV
-WX890, Release Tk Pp 0WX53P Dsch Isol.
_____ d. VERIFY/OPEN 0AOV-WX889, Release Tk Pp 0WX01P Dsch Isol.
_____ e. VERIFY/START 0WX01P, Release Tank Pump.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 46 CAUTION Some actions possible in the Supervisor Mode may have serious detrimental effects on system operation.
Therefore use caution when in this mode and do not leave the RM-11 console unattended when it is in this mode.
F. 10. f. IF the 0PR01J is in HIGH alarm, CHANGE the HIGH alarm setpoint to a value higher than background. This will allow the RELEASE TANK 0WX01T DISCHARGE HEADER RADIATION HIGH alarm (Window 77B01 on 0PL01J) to be reset, and the 0AOV
-WX353 valve to be opened after its seal
-in has been reset. This can be accomplished as follows (N/A if 0PR01J is not in alarm):
_____ 1) VERIFY/PLACE the RM
-11 Console in Supervisor Mode.
_____ 2) DEPRESS Grid 1 key.
_____ 3) KEY in 101.
_____ 4) DEPRESS SEL key.
_____ 5) VERIFY 0PR01J (0PS101) selected.
_____ 6) DEPRESS CHAN ITEM key.
_____ 7) KEY in 9.
_____ 8) DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 9 should be displayed in reverse characters).
_____ 9) KEY in a new HIGH alarm setpoint USING the format XYZ +/- AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E
-10 would be entered as 376
-10).
_____ 10) DEPRESS the ENTER key (The new value will be displayed after a short delay).
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 47 F ____ 10. g. VERIFY/CLEAR RELEASE TANK 0WX01T DISCHARGE HEADER RADIATION HIGH Annunciator (Window 77B01 on 0PL01J).
NOTE Upon receipt of a high radiation signal at 0PR01J, the Release Tank Discharge Valves, 0WX353 and 0WX896 will remain closed until the high radiation signal seal
-in is reset at 0PL01J.
_____ h. OPEN 0AOV-WX353, Release Tank Disch Isolation Valve. (The key to operate the 0AOV
-WX353 valve control switch must be obtained from the OPS Supervisor or Shift Manager.)
- i. PERFORM the following to AUTO CLOSE valve 0AOV
-WX353, Release Tank Disch Isolation Valve, by LOWERING the Liquid Radwaste Effluent monitor 0RE
-PR001 HIGH alarm setpoint to a value below the current activity as follows:
_____ 1) VERIFY/PLACE the RM
-11 Console in SUPERVISOR MODE.
_____ 2) DEPRESS the Grid 1 key.
_____ 3) KEY in 101.
_____ 4) DEPRESS SEL key.
_____ 5) VERIFY 0PR01J (0PS101) selected. _____ 6) DEPRESS CHAN ITEM key.
_____ 7) KEY in 9. _____ 8) DEPRESS SEL key CHAN ITEM 9 should be displayed in reverse characters.)
_____ 9) KEY in a new HIGH alarm setpoint below the current activity value (from the upper right corner of the display) USING the format XYZ
+/- AB for XYZ E +/- AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E
-10 would be entered as 376-10). _____ 10) RECORD the new HIGH alarm setpoint that was entered (channel item 9). ________________
_____ 11) DEPRESS the ENTER key.
_____ 12) ACKNOWLEDGE the alarm at the RM
-11 console.
_____ j. VERIFY 0AOV
-WX353, Release Tank Disch Isolation Valve, Auto Closes.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 48 F ____ 10. k. VERIFY RELEASE TANK 0WX01T DISCHARGE HEADER RADIATION HIGH alarm annunciates at 0PL01J and ACKNOWLEDGE.
(Window 77B01 on 0PL01J)
_____ l. PLACE key locked switch for 0AOV
-WX353, Release Tank Disch Isolation Valve, in CLOSE.
CAUTION Some actions possible in the Supervisor Mode may have serious detrimental effects on system operation.
Therefore use caution when in this mode and do not leave the RM-11 console unattended when it is in this mode.
_____ m. VERIFY/ADJUST the ALERT Alarm and HIGH Alarm setpoints for 0RE-PR001 (0PS101) to the values specified by Rad Protection in Step D.7.b. USING the instructions that follow.
_____ 1) VERIFY/PLACE the RM-11 Console in SUPERVISOR MODE.
_____ 2) DEPRESS the Grid 1 Key.
_____ 3) KEY in 101.
_____ 4) DEPRESS SEL key.
_____ 5) VERIFY 0PR01J (0PS101) selected. _____ 6) DEPRESS CHAN ITEMS.
_____ 7) KEY in 10.
_____ 8) DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 10 should be displayed in reverse characters.)
_____ 9) KEY in the new ALERT alarm setpoint USING the format XYZ +/-
AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E
-10 would be entered as 376
-10). _____ 10) DEPRESS the ENTER key. The new value will be displayed after a short delay.
_____ 11) VERIFY the new ALERT alarm setpoint is displayed.
VERIFICATION _____
_____ 12) KEY in 9.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 49 F ____ 10. m. 13) DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 9 should be displayed in reverse characters.)
_____ 14) KEY in the new HIGH alarm setpoint USING the format XYZ +/- AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E
-10 would be entered as 376
-10). _____ 15) DEPRESS the ENTER key (The new value will be displayed after a short delay).
_____ 16) VERIFY the new HIGH alarm setpoint is displayed.
VERIFICATION _____
_____ n. VERIFY/CLEAR RELEASE TANK 0WX01T DISCHARGE HEADER RADIATION HIGH annunciator (Window 77B01 at 0PL01J).
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 50 NOTE Step F.11. is not required if 0RE
-PR010 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated or if ALERT ALARM AND HIGH ALARM setpoints have not changed from Step D.8.b.
F ____ 11. VERIFY/ADJUST the ALERT and HIGH setpoints for 0RE
-PR010 to the values specified by Rad Protection in Step D.8.b. using the instructions that follow.
_____ a. VERIFY/PLACE the RM
-11 Console in Supervisor Mode.
_____ b. DEPRESS the Grid 1 key.
_____ c. KEY in 110.
_____ d. DEPRESS SEL key. _____ e. VERIFY 0PR10J (0PS110) selected. _____ f. DEPRESS CHAN ITEM key.
_____ g. KEY in 10.
_____ h. DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 10 should be displayed in reverse characters.)
_____ i. KEY in the new ALERT alarm setpoint USING the format XYZ +/- AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E-10 would be entered as 376
-10). _____ j. DEPRESS the ENTER key (The new value will be displayed after a short delay). _____ k. VERIFY the new ALERT alarm setpoint is displayed.
VERIFICATION _____
_____ l. KEY in 9. _____ m. DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 9 should be displayed in reverse characters).
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 51 F ____ 11. n. KEY in the new HIGH alarm setpoint USING the format XYZ +/- AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E
-10 would be entered as 376
-10). _____ o. DEPRESS the ENTER key (The new value will be displayed after a short delay). _____ p. VERIFY the new HIGH alarm setpoint is displayed.
JO __ 12. PLACE the RM
-11 Console in the NORMAL MODE.
- 13. RECORD the following data in the space provided.
JO __ a. Circulating Water Blowdown Rate
___25400_____(0UR-CW032 at PNL 0PM01J, or computer Point F2400) gpm JO __ b. VERIFY CW BLOWDOWN RATE IS EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 8,000 gpm. 14. Control Room Supervisor: I have reviewed Part F and have verified it is accurate and complete.
______ Joe Supervisor __________________/
today/_Control Room Supervisor Date Time 15 min ago
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 52 G.
SHIFT MANAGER OR SRO RESPONSIBILITY SM __ 1. VERIFY that Steps B.3., C.13., D.10., E.4 (if applicable), and F.14 are signed.
NOTE Biocide treatment of CW requires isolation of CW blowdown, if the dechlorination skid is not operational. The expected time of release and release duration must be considered so that both biocide treatment and the release can be accommodated.
- 2. VERIFY that the actual Circulating Water Blowdown Rate is equal to or greater than 8,000 gpm (0UR-CW032 at PNL 0PM01J, or Computer Point F2400).
__ Shift Manager
__________________/_
todaySHIFT MANAGER or SRO Date _ SM __ 3. Have an NSO PERFORM the following to ESTABLISH the required conditions for liquid release:
- a. LOGIN to the alarm Agent website as follows: (N/A if already logged in.)
- 1) ACCESS the alarm Agent website at one of the following:
JO __ www.AlarmAgent.com
_____ BS0.ALARMAGENT.com JO __ 2) CLICK on 'User Login'.
JO __ 3) ENTER one of the following combinations of User/Passwords to login: USER: braidwoodops, Password: braidwoodops
USER: braidwoodops2, Password: braidwoodops2
USER: braidwoodops3, Password: braidwoodops3
USER: braidwoodops4, Password: braidwoodops4 JO __ 4) CLICK 'Submit'.
JO __ 5) VERIFY no active alarm in the Notification Groups for the Vacuum Breaker. (Verifies no vault level alarm.)
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 53 NOTE Some Vacuum Breaker Vaults may have duplicate entries for the RTUs. These entries always show OFFLINE when checking RTU status. If a duplicate entry is displayed and there is an online RTU in the Vacuum Breaker Vault, these duplicate entries may be ignored.
Select "Next RTU" tab to continue with Vacuum Breaker Vault check.
G JO 3. a. 6) SELECT "View RTU status".
JO __ 7) From "Select RTU" dropdown menu, SELECT Vacuum Bkr Vault 01. JO __ 8) CLICK "View Status".
- b. CHECK the following for the CW Blowdown Vacuum Breaker vault monitoring status RTUs status:
- 1) Under Last Know RTU STATE:
JO __ Last Contact with RTU within previous 24 hou rs JO __ RTU online
- Yes 2) Under Channel State:
JO __ Channel 1
- 'No water in vault, Normal" (N/A for Interim Remediation Pump) or water detected in Vault, Alarm, Now Normal JO __ AC Power - 'Power On' JO __ Battery - 'Battery OK
JO __ c. When the CW Blowdown Vacuum Breaker vault RTUs have been VERIFIED acceptable, CONTINUE with the procedure.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 54 G SM 4. PLACE a placard stating "Liquid Release in Progress" at 0PM01J.
- 5. APPROVAL FOR RELEASE:
___ Shift Manager
_____/_ today/SHIFT MANAGER or SRO Date Time 5 min ago 6. COMMENTS ______
none______________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 55 H. OPERATING DEPARTMENT RESPONSIBILITY
- Discharging Release Tank 0WX01T to Circulating Water Blowdown Line NOTE DO NOT release 0WX01T if Kankakee River Gage Height is 6.50 feet (flood stage).
NOTE If during the release, Circ Water Blowdown flow (Computer Point F2400) is reduced to <8,000 gpm, terminate the release. If during the release, Circ Water Blowdown flow is reduced to <7,000 gpm (low flow interlock setpoint), VERIFY the release is terminated. If Circ Water Blowdown flow can be re
-established 8,000 Shift Manager permission is obtained.
gpm, the release may be restarted at step G.2 provided that the following conditions are met:
All applicable Steps are re
-initialed/re
-verified as necessary.
No additions have been made to the Release Tank.
Release totalizers have not been reset and the original totalizer readings are used to calculate the gallons released.
NOTE If Station Blowdown Line Flow Monitor (CW
-032) is inoperable, effluent releases via this pathway may continue for up to 30 days provided the flow rate is estimated at least once per 4 hours0.167 days <br />0.0238 weeks <br />0.00548 months <br /> during actual releases.
NOTE If this procedure is aborted before any effluent is released, VERIFY/PERFORM Steps H.24 through Step I. before exiting this procedure.
NOTE The purpose of the release window is to minimize the interaction with the City of Wilmington Water Department intake periods. Release window is not applicable when using the Ultra Low Flow release path through the diffuser.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 56 NOTE Rad Protection or Operations is to notify Chemistry when a release package is cancelled prior to release so that the NPDES data sheets can be updated as required.
H. 1. Ops Supervisor performs the following:
NOTE Kankakee River Flow rate is normally obtained via the internet site for the U.S. Geological Survey (usgs.gov), WILMINGTON DAT A (from the appropriate Unit Supervisor). If data is unavailable, RECORD most recent data from the Unit Supervisor turnover.
- a. OBTAIN and RECORD current Kankakee River flow data:
USGS website;
_____ Stream Flow: __________ CFS
_____ At Date: _____/_____/_____
_____ At Time: __________
IF Kankakee River flow data is NOT available from the USGS website, CONTACT Chemistry/Environmental for concurrence to release using alternate river flow data provided by Chemistry/Environmental:
_____ a) River flow rate provided by Chemistry/Environmental
__________ CFS
_____ b) Chemistry/Environmental Personnel providing data:
Name: ___________________________________
Time: __________________
Date: __________________
_____ b. RECORD the Kankakee River flow rate and the source of the data obtained in step H.1.a. in the Unit Supervisor Turnover.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 57 NOTE Steps H.1.c and H.1.d can be marked N/A if the Ultra Low Flow Release Path is not being used.
H. 1. c. When using the Ultra Low flow path, CALCULATE Release flow Rate. 1) OBTAIN and RECORD the current lake blowdown flow from Plant Parameter Displays Trend ID BRW01V_F2400.
Lake Blowdown Flow: __________GPM
- 2) RECORD the release tank H
-3 concentration from step C.7:
Release tank H
-3 concentration: __________ uCi/ml
- 3) When using the Ultra Low Flow release path, PERFORM the following calculation to determine the maximum release rate.
Ultra Low Flow Path Release Rate
= River Flow (cfs) x Lake Blowdown Flow (gpm) x 2.15E
-08 Release Tank H
-3 Concentration (uCi/ml) Ultra Low Flow Path Release Rate
= _________ GPM
- d. VERIFY that the value calculated for the Ultra Low Flow Path Release Rate is less than 20 gpm. IF NOT, use 20 gpm as the maximum release rate.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 58 H. 1. e. DETERMINE the following:
_____ 1) Liquid Release Window per BwOP WX
-501T2, Liquid Release Window Determination. (Can be N/A if using the Ultra Low Flow Flowpath through the diffuser.)
- 2) Maximum Release Rate:
_____ a) RECORD the Chemistry Release Rate from step C.10.b. or RETDAS permit:
__________ GPM NOTE N/A step H.1.e.2)b) if using the Ultra Low Flow path through the diffuser.
N/A step H.1.e.2)c) if using the Low Flow Path.
_____ b) RECORD the Radioactive Release Rate from step D.6.c or RETDAS permit if using the Low Flow path:
__________ GPM
_____ c) RECORD the Radioactive Release Rate from step H.1.c if using the Ultra Low Flow path:
__________ GPM NOTE The maximum release rate SHALL NOT exceed 50 gpm for the Low Flow path or 20 gpm for the Ultra Low Flow path.
_____ d) RECORD the most limiting (smallest) value from step H.1.e.2) a)
-c) as the Maximum Release Rate below:
Maximum Release Rate = ________ GPM ( 50 gpm or 20 gpm)
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 59 H. 1. f. RECORD the Liquid Release Window times (N/A if using the Ultra Low Flow path through the diffuser):
_____ Target Start Time: __________
_____ Start After __________
_____ Start Before __________
_____ Start after time recorded in Step D.3.h.
(Applies to second bullet only if D.3.h. has a specified time, otherwise N/A.)
- g. EVALUATE the expected time of release so that both biocide treatment and the release can be accommodated considering:
_____ CW Biocide treatment requires associated Unit CW blowdown isolated, if the dechlorination skid is not operational.
_____ At least 8000 GPM CW blowdown flow is required for the Liquid release. NOTE Steps H.1.h and H.1.i can be marked N/A if the Ultra Low Flow Release Path through the diffuser is being used.
- h. VERIFY release will start within release start time window recorded in step H.1.f. If release cannot start within times recorded in step H.1.f. this step is N/A. GO TO step H.1.i.
_________________________________/_____/_____
OPS Supervisor Date Time
- i. To start release outside of release start time window recorded in step H.1.f. VERIFY Authorization to Release Outside of Release Window, BwOP WX-501T3, is completed and retained with this package.
_________________________________/_____/_____
OPS Supervisor Date Time
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 60 CAUTION Changes in CW Blowdown flow will affect the backpressure in the blowdown line. Lowering pressure or flow may result in exceeding the liquid release rate limit. H. 1. j. VERIFY the following:
BwOP CW-12 is NOT being performed.
CW Blowdown line backpressure has been established per
BwOP CW-12. (Backpressure is not required if CW Blowdown Booster Pumps are not in operation.)
_________________________________/_____/_____
OPS Supervisor Date Time NOTE If this procedure must be exited prior to its completion, the following
temporary alteration must be restored per Step H.26. prior to exit.
- 2. PERFORM the following if AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a is in effect for 0RE
-PR001 (refer to Step B.1.):
NOTE To comply with CC
-AA-112, Attachment A must be filled out during installation and removal of TCC.
- a. OBTAIN Shift Manager or designee permission to perform the following Temporary Electrical Alteration.
_________________________________/_____/_____
Shift Manager/Designee Date Time SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
_____ b. REMOVE Relay Block K1 at 0PR01J (inside the AC Power Panel) to allow opening of 0AOV
-WX896/353, Release Tank Disch Isolation Valve.
Supervisor Verification _____
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 61 H. 2 c. LOCALLY at 0PR01J place two placards stating "K1 RELAY REMOVED FOR LIQUID RELEASE":
_____ One on the AC Power Panel for 0PR01J
_____ One on the Rad Detector Cabinet for 0PR01J.
- 3. RECORD the following data in the space provided.
_____ a. Tank Level Start
__________ %
(0LR-WX028, 0WX01T Level Indication at PNL 0PL01J)
_____ b. VERIFY level in Step H.3.a. is +/-
5% OF LEVEL RECORDED IN STEP A.2, or receive Supervisor approval to continue.
- c. RESET the Batch Totalizer reading to zero at PNL 0PL01J for the flowpath being used (This step may be marked N/A if Batch Totalizer is inoperable):
_____ 0FQI-WX001A, Ultra Low Flow
_____ 0FQI-WX630A, Low Flow
- d. RESET the Cumulative Totalizer reading to zero at PNL 0PL01J for the flowpath being used (This step may be marked N/A if Cumulative Totalizer is inoperable):
_____ 0FQI-WX001B, Ultra Low Flow
_____ 0FQI-WX630B, Low Flow
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 62 CAUTION Failure to record and use the correct maximum permissible release rate may result in violation of NPDES and/or 10CFR20 release criteria.
NOTE When using the Low Flow release path, the MAXIMUM RELEASE RATE SHALL not exceed 50 gpm. Do NOT record a value greater than 50 gpm in the following step when using the Low Flow release path. When using the Ultra Low Flow release path, the MAXIMUM RELASE RATE SHALL NOT exceed 20 gpm. Do NOT record a value greater than 20 gpm in the following step when using the Ultra Low Flow release path.
H____ 3. e. Maximum Release Rate from H.1.e.2)d)
__________ GPM SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
_____ 4. STOP 0WX36M, Release Tank Mixer (if applicable).
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 63 NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1
-1a has been initiated, Step F.1 is not required.
H____ 5. VERIFY Steps F.1. and F.2. have been completed within the previous 24 hrs (IF NOT, RE-PERFORM Steps F.1 and F.2.).
NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a ha s been initiated, verification is required in steps H.6. through H.13.
NOTE If any CW Blowdown vault alarms while a release is in progress, immediately STOP the release.
_____ 6. VERIFY/CLOSE 0AOV
-WX834, Release Tank Inlet Isolation Valve for Release Tank 0WX01T.
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
_____ 7. VERIFY/CLOSE 0AOV
-WX017, Release Tank Recycle Valve (Release Tank Discharge to Turbine Building Equipment Drain Tank Isolation Valve).
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
_____ 8. VERIFY/CLOSE 0AOV
-WX910, Release Tank Pump Disch Valve (Release Tank Discharge to Regeneration Waste Drain Tank).
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
_____ 9. VERIFY/CLOSE 0AOV
-WX302, Release Tank Discharge Control Valve/( Ultra Low Flow Path).
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
_____ 10. VERIFY/CLOSE, 0AOV
-WX897, Release Tank Discharge Flow Control valve/(Low Flow Path).
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 64 H____ 11. VERIFY/OPEN 0AOV
-WX889, Release Tank Pump 0WX01P Discharge Isolation Valve. SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
NOTE The Release Tank Pump trips at approximately 15% tank level.
NOTE For releases through the low flow rate path, < 50 GPM or as specified by OPS Supervisor, COMPLETE step H.12 and mark Step H.13 "N/A". For releases through the Ultra Low Flow rate path, mark Step H.12 "N/A" and GO TO step H.13. NOTE While releasing from the 0WX01T, high radiation from the 0PR90J will not cause the Release Tank Discharge Valves (0WX353 and 0WX896) to auto
-close, because the 0PR90J is associated with the 0WX26T only.
CAUTION ALL Releases through the Low Flow flowpath SHALL be limited to <10,000 gallons. Secure the release prior to 10,000 gallons.
- 12. LOW FLOW RELEASE, PERFORM the following:
_____ a. VERIFY step F.9 has been completed. (N/A if 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1
-1a has been initiated.)
_____ b. OBTAIN the key for 0AOV
-WX896, Release Tank Outlet Valve.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 65 NOTE If Circ. Water Blowdown Flow Low and/or Release Tank Disch Header Radiation High alarms are lit, it may be necessary to reset the Rel. Tank Disch Header & Isolation Valves 0WX896 & 0WX353 by pressing their reset button prior to opening 0AOV
-WX896. NOTE Upon receipt of a high radiation signal at 0PR01J, the Release Tank Discharge Valves, 0WX353 and 0WX896 will remain closed until the high radiation signal seal
-in is reset at 0PL01J.
NOTE NOTIFY the Shift Manager/Emergency Director to evaluate for Emergency Plan conditions if the maximum release rate is exceeded.
H____ 12. c. OPEN 0AOV-WX896, Release Tank Outlet Isolation Valve.
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
_____ d. VERIFY/CLOSE 0AOV
-WX015, Release Tank 0WX01T Pump Recirc Valve. SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 66 CAUTION The release rate shall NOT exceed 50 gpm.
H____ 12. e. THROTTLE OPEN 0AOV
-WX897, Release Tank Discharge Flow Control Valve, with controller 0 FK-WX630, TO OBTAIN a maximum discharge flowrate of less than the release rate specified in step H.3.e. ______ GPM by checking at least one of the following:
_____ Low Flow Totalizer accumulating (0FQ
-WX-630A, 0FIQ
-WX-630B).
_____ Low Flow Recorder rising (0FR-WX-630 Low Flow Indication).
_____ 0WX01T Level Recorder lowering (0LR
-WX028, 0WX01T Level Indication).
_____ Computer Point (F0002) for release rate rising.
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
- f. RECORD the following
_____ Release Start Time: ______:______
_____ Date: ______
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
_____ g. THROTTLE OPEN 0AOV
-WX897, Release Tank Discharge Flow Control Valve, with controller 0FK
-WX630, To OBTAIN a release rate NOT to exceed the maximum release rate specified in step H.3.e:
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 67 NOTE While releasing from the 0WX01T, high radiation from the 0PR90J will not cause the Release Tank Discharge Valves (0WX353 and 0WX896) to auto
-close, because the 0PR90J is associated with the 0WX26T only.
CAUTION Releases Not discharging via the Diffuser SHALL be limited to
<10,000 gallons. If releasing via the alternate (old) discharge, secure prior to reaching 10,000 gallons.
Releases through the Ultra
-Low Flow flowpath and the Diffuser do not have a total gallons release limit.
H. 13. ULTRA LOW FLOW RELEASE, PERFORM the following:
_____ a. VERIFY step F.10 has been completed. (N/A if 0RE
-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1
-1a has been initiated.)
_____ b. OBTAIN the key for 0AOV
-WX353, Release Tank Outlet Valve
.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 68 NOTE If Circ. Water Blowdown Flow Low and/or Release Tank Disch Header Radiation High alarms are lit, it may be necessary to reset the Rel. Tank Disch Header & Isolation Valves 0WX896 & 0WX353 by pressing their reset button prior to opening 0AOV
-WX353. NOTE Upon receipt of a high radiation signal at 0PR01J, the Release Tank Discharge Valves, 0WX353 and 0WX896 will remain closed until the high radiation signal seal
-in is reset at 0PL01J.
NOTE NOTIFY the Shift Manager/Emergency Director to evaluate for Emergency Plan conditions if the maximum release rate is exceeded.
H____ 13. c. OPEN 0AOV-WX353, Release Tank Outlet Isolation Valve.
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
_____ d. VERIFY/CLOSE 0AOV
-WX015, Release Tank 0WX01T Pump Recirc. Valve. SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 69 CAUTION The Ultra Low release rate shall NOT exceed 20 gpm. H____ 13. e. THROTTLE OPEN 0AOV
-WX302, Release Tank Discharge Flow Control Valve, with controller 0FK
-WX001, TO OBTAIN a maximum discharge flowrate of less than the release rate specified in step H.3.e. _____
_ GPM by checking at least one of the following:
_____ Ultra Low Flow Totalizer accumulating (0FQI
-WX001A, 0FQI-WX001B). _____ Ultra Low Flow Recorder rising (0FR
-WX630 Ultra Low Flow Indication).
_____ 0WX01T Level Recorder lowering (0LR
-WX028, 0WX01T Level Indication).
_____ Computer Point (F0001) for release rate rising.
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
- f. RECORD the following:
_____ Release Start Time: _____:_____
_____ Date: _____
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
_____ g. THROTTLE OPEN 0AOV
-WX302, Release Tank Discharge Flow Control Valve, with controller 0FK
-WX001, TO OBTAIN a release rate NOT to exceed the maximum release rate specified in step H.3.e.
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 70 H____ 14. RECORD the Release Rate from the applicable recorder:
0FR-WX630, Ultra Low Flow Indication _____ Gal/Min ( 20 gpm) 0FR-WX630, Low Flow Indication _____ Gal/Min ( 50 gpm) SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
(LESS THAN MAXIMUM RATE DETERMINED IN STEP H.3.e.)
NOTE Consider using a timer to calculate the end time of the release based on the flow recorded in step H.14. and the time recorded in H.12.f. or H.13.f. 15. VERIFY the following:
NOTE If Batch and cumulative Totalizers are not operable, Step H.15.a. is not required. Gallons released shall be determined per note prior to Step H.19.e. if both Totalizers are not operable.
- a. Batch Totalizer and/or Cumulative Totalizer readings accumulating. (It is acceptable, however, to observe no change in the readings at low releas e rates):
_____ 0FQI-WX001A, Batch Totalizer (Ultra Low Flow)
_____ 0FQI-WX001B, Cumulative Totalizer (Ultra Low Flow)
_____ 0FQI_WX630A, Batch Totalizer (Low Flow)
_____ 0FQI-WX630B, Cumulative Totalizer (Low Flow)
NOTE If 0FR-WX630 ULTRA LOW FLOW or 0F R-WX630 LOW FLOW, as applicable, is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1
-1a has been initiated, Step H.15.b is not required.
_____ b. PERFORM a Channel Check per 0BwOSR 0.1
-0 for 0FR-WX630 ULTRA LOW FLOW or 0FR
-WX630 LOW FLOW, as applicable, by OBSERVING indication at 0PL01J.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 71 NOTE If 0UR-CW032 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1
-1a has been initiated Step H.15.c. is not required.
H____ 15. c. PERFORM a channel check per 0BwOSR 0.1
-0 for the Station Blowdown Flow Monitor by observing 0UR
-CW032, indicated on Panel 0PM01J, or computer point F2400.
- d. RECORD Station Blowdown Flowrate during release:
_____ 0UR-CW032 __________ GPM
_____ Computer Point __________ GPM
_____ e. RECORD Station Blowdown Flowrate once per 24 Hr. on continuous release: _____ 0UR-CW032 __________ GPM
_____ Computer Point __________ GPM NOTE If the first attempt to notify the Control Room or the Shift Manager is unsuccessful, proceed with Step H.16 and continue to notify the Control Room and Shift Manager that the release is in progress.
_____ f. NOTIFY Control Room of release in progress.
_____ g. NOTIFY Shift Manager of release in progress.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 72 H. 16. PERFORM the following rate checks. REFER to Liquid Release Rate Chart on next page.
- a. For the Ultra Low Flow rate path check the flow rate by comparing a tank level (0LR
-WX028, 0WX01T Level Indication) calculation over a 10 minute interval against computer point F0001 or Flow Recorder (0FR
-WX-630 Ultra Low Flow Indication). PERFORM this check twice at the beginning of the release. Providing the flow rates are consistent and below the allowed release rate the release flow rate checks can be relaxed to once every 30 minutes. RECORD each flow rate obtained.
- b. For the low flow rate release path check the flow rate by comparing a tank
level (0LR-WX028, 0WX01T Level Indication) calculation over a 10 minute interval against computer point F0002 or Flow Recorder (0FR
-WX630 Low Flow Indication). PERFORM this check twice at the beginning of the release. Providing the flow rates are consistent and below the allowed release rate the release flow rate checks can be relaxed to once every
30 minutes. RECORD each flow rate obtained.
TIME Indicated Flow:
Computer Point F0001/F0002 or Flow Recorder 0WX630 Ultra Low Flow/Low Flow (circle o ne) 0LR-WX028 Tank LEVEL (%)
t l 329 X (l/t) = gpm OperatorStart
- Stop Start Stop _____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
Where: t = Stop Time
- Start TIME l = Stop LEVEL
- Start Level 329 = gallons per 1% tank level
- After each comparison of indicated flow vs. calculated flow, VERIFY the flowrate is less than the maximum release rate specified in step H.3.e., if not, IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY the OPS Supervisor.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 73 Liquid Release Rate Chart
%Level Change Time Change (Minutes) 5.00 10.00 15.00 20.00 25.00 30.00 35.00 40.00 0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.0 0 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 10.50 11.00 11.50 12.00 12.50 13.00 13.50 14.00 14.50 15.00 15.50 16.00 16.50 17.00 17.50 18.00 18.50 19.00 19.50 20.00 20.50 21.00 21.50 22.00 22.50 23.00 24.00 24.50 25.00 0.00 32.90 65.80 98.70 131.60 164.50 197.40 230.30 263.20 296.10 329.00 361.90 394.80 427.70 460.60 493.50 526.40 559.30 592.20 625.10 658.00 690.90 723.80 756.70 789.60 822.50 855.40 888.30 921.20 954.10 987.00 1019.90 1052.80 1085.70 1118.60 1151.50 1184.40 1217.30 1250.20 1283.10 1316.00 1348.90 1381.80 1414.70 1447.60 1480.50 1513.40 1579.20 1612.10 1645.00 0.00 16.45 32.90 49.35 65.80 82.25 98.70 115.15 131.60 148.05 164.50 180.95 197.40 213.85 230.30 246.75 263.20 279.65 296.10 312.55 329.00 345.45 361.90 378.35 394.80 411.25 427.70 444.15 460.60 477.05 493.50 509.95 526.40 542.85 559.30 575.75 592.20 608.65 625.10 641.55 658.00 674.45 690.90 707.35 723.80 740.25 756.70 789.60 806.05 822.50 0.00 10.97 21.9. 32.90 43.87 54.83 65.80 76.77 87.73 98.70 109.67 120.63 131.60 142.57 153.53 164.50 175.47 186.43 197.40 208.37 219.33 230.30 241.27 252.23 263.20 274.17 285.13 296.10 307.07 318.03 329.00 339.97 350.93 361.90 372.87 383.83 394.80 405.77 416.73 427.70 438.67 449.63 460.60 471.57 482.53 493.50 504.47 526.40 537.37 548.33 0.00 8.2 3 16.45 24.68 32.90 41.13 49.35 57.58 65.80 74.03 82.25 90.48 98.70 106.93 115.15 123.38 131.60 139.83 148.05 156.28 164.50 172.73 180.95 189.18 197.40 205.63 213.85 222.08 230.30 238.53 246.75 254.98 263.20 271.43 279.65 287.88 296.10 304.33 312.55 320.78 329.00 337.23 345.45 353.68 361.90 370.13 378.35 394.80 403.03 411.25 0.00 6.58 13.16 19.74 26.32 32.90 39.48 46.06 52.64 59.22 65.80 72.38 78.96 85.54 92.12 98.70 105.28 111.86 118.44 125.02 131.60 138.18 144.76 151.34 157.92 164.50 171.08 177.66 184.24 190.82 197.40 203.98 210.56 217.14 223.72 230.30 236.88 243.46 250.04 256.62 263.20 269.78 276.36 282.94 289.52 296.10 302.68 315.84 322.42 329.00 0.00 5.48 10.97 16.45 21.93 27.42 32.90 38.38 43.87 49.35 54.83 60.32 65.80 71.28 76.77 82.25 87.73 93.22 98.70 104.18 109.67 115.15 120.63 126.12 131.60 137.08 142.57 148.05 153.53 159.02 164.50 169.98 175.47 180.95 186.43 191.92 197.40 202.88 208.37 213.85 219.33 224.82 230.30 235.78 241.27 246.75 252.23 263.20 268.68 274.17 0.00 4.70 9.40 14.10 18.80 23.50 28.20 32.90 37.60 42.30 47.00 51.70 56.40 61.10 65.80 70.50 75.20 79.90 84.60 89.30 94.00 98.70 103.40 108.10 112.80 117.50 122.20 126.90 131.60 136.30 141.00 145.70 150.40 155.10 159.80 164.50 169.20 173.90 178.60 183.30 188.00 192.70 197.40 202.10 206.80 211.50 216.20 225.60 230.30 235.00 0.00 4.11 8.23 12.34 16.45 20.56 24.68 28.79 32.90 37.01 41.13 45.24 49.35 53.46 57.58 61.69 65.80 69.91 74.03 78.14 82.25 86.36 90.48 94.59 98.70 102.81 106.93 111.04 115.15 119.26 123.38 127.49 131.60 135.71 139.83 143.94 148.05 152.16 156.28 160.39 164.50 168.61 172.73 176.84 180.95 185.06 189.18 197.40 201.51 205.63 Enter % Change 10.00 Enter Time 10.00 Flow Rate 329.00 BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 74 NOTE Closing the 0AOV
-WX889 will NOT isolate sample flow to the 0RE-PR001.
H. 17. IF the release MUST be interrupted to provide the operator a break when a relief is unavailable, THEN perform the following:
_____ a. Receive permission from the Shift Manager to secure the release for no more than 30 minutes. _____ b. Make a log entry and an entry on the table in step H.16. denoting the time the release was stopped.
_____ c. OPEN 0AOV-WX015, Release Tank Pump 0WX01P Recirc Valve.
_____ d. NOTIFY Main Control Room of the following 0AOV
-WX889 will be closed, suspending the release.
_____ e. CLOSE 0AOV
-WX889, Release Tank Pump 0WX01P Discharge Isol Valve.
_____ f. VERIFY that the release has been stopped.
_____ g. MINIMIZE the pause in the release.
_____ h. NOTIFY Shift Manager that release will be started again.
_____ i. MAKE a log entry and an entry on the table in Step H.16. denoting the time which the release was restarted.
_____ j. OPEN 0AOV-WX889, Release Tank Pump 0WX01T Discharge Isol Valve.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 75 H____ 17. k. VERIFY/OPEN 0AOV
-WX353/896, Release Tank Discharge Isolation Valve, for the flow path being used.
_____ l. CLOSE 0AOV-WX015, Release Tank 0WX01T Pump Recirc Valve.
NOTE Tripping the release tank pump and Closing the Release Tank Discharge Flow Control Valve will stop sample flow to the 0PR01J, thus causing it to interlock. Both actions should be performed with minimal delay to prevent reverse flow from the CW header through 0PR01J into the Release Tank.
_____ 18. WHEN the desired volume of water has been released from Release Tank 0WX01T, PERFORM the following:
- a. NOTIFY the Main Control Room of the following:
_____ 1) The 0WX01T release will be complete.
_____ 2) 0PR01J will alarm due to loss of flow.
_____ b. TRIP Release Tank Pump 0WX01P.
NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated, verification is required for step H.18.c.
_____ c. CLOSE 0AOV
-WX302/897, Release Tank Discharge Flow Control Valve.
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 76 H. 19. RECORD the following:
_____ a. Release Stop Time: ______:______
_____ b. Date: ______
_____ c. Tank Level Final
_____________% (0LR
-WX028, 0WX01T Level Indication)
NOTE If Batch and Cumulative Totalizers are inoperable, GO TO step H.19.e and mark H.19.d as N/A.
- d. Determine the volume of liquid released from the totalizers by performing the following:
_____ 1) RECORD the appropriate Batch Totalizer final reading:
_____ 0FQI-WX630A (Low Flow) _______________ (if operable)
_____ 0FQI-WX001A (Ultra Low Flow) _______________ (if operable)
_____ MULTIPLY the Low Flow reading obtained by 10 (if applicable):
__________ x 10 = __________ Gallons Released (H.19.d.1)
_____ DIVIDE the Ultra Low Flow reading obtained by 10 (if applicable).
__________
÷ 10 = __________ Gallons Released (H.19.d.1)
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 77 H____ 19. d. 2) RECORD the appropriate CUMULATIVE TOTALIZER final reading:
_____ 0FQI-WX630B (Low Flow) _______________ (if operable)
_____ 0FQI-WX001B (Ultra Low Flow) _______________ (if operable)
_____ MULTIPLY the reading obtained by 10 (if applicable).
__________ x 10 = __________ Gallons Released (H.19.d.2)
_____ DIVIDE the Ultra Low Flow reading obtained by 10 (if applicable).
__________ ÷ 10 = __________ Gallons Released (H.19.d.2)
_____ 3) RECORD the Time and Date of the volume released calculation:
Time: __________
Date: __________
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 78 NOTE The next step is only required if the Batch and Cumulative Totalizers are inoperable. (Otherwise, mark the next step N/A)
H. 19. e. Determine the volume of liquid released by performing a calculation based on the change in tank level by performing the following:
_____ 1) RECORD the value from step A.2:
__________ Percent
_____ 2) RECORD the value from step H.19.c:
__________ Percent
_____ 3) SUBTRACT step H.19.e.2) from H.19.e.1) and RECORD the Percent Level Change in the space below:
__________ Percent Level Change
_____ 4) MULTIPLY the Percent Change above by 329 to obtain the total number of gallons released and RECORD below:
__________ x 329 = __________ Gallons Released (H.19.e.3)
_____ 5) RECORD the Time and Date of the volume released calculation:
Time: __________
Date: __________
_____ f. NOTIFY the Shift Manager that the release is complete.
_____ g. NOTIFY the Control Room that the release is complete.
_____ h. LOG in Radwaste Operators Log the following:
Release #
Gallons released Date and Time release stopped BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 79 NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated, verification is required for steps H.20. and H.22.
H____ 20. VERIFY 0AOV
-WX353, Release Tank Discharge Valve to Circ. Water Blowdown, LOCKED CLOSED.
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
_____ 21. RECORD time when key was removed from key lock switch for 0AOV-WX353, Release Tank Discharge Valve to Circ. Water Blowdown.
______:______
(N/A if the Ultra Low Flow Flowpath was not used.)
_____ 22. VERIFY the 0AOV
-WX896, Release Tank Discharge Valve to Circ. Water Blowdown, LOCKED CLOSED.
SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
_____ 23. RECORD time when key was removed from key lock switch for 0AOV
-WX896, Release Tank Discharge Valve to Circ. Water Blowdown. ______:______
(N/A if the Low Flow flowpath was not used.)
_____ 24. CLOSE 0AOV
-WX889 Release Tank Pp 0WX01P Discharge Isolation Valve.
_____ 25. CLOSE 0WX354, Release Tk Disch to Process Rad Mon System (TB 401' J
-18 between tanks).
VERIFICATION _____
NOTE Complete Attachment A to ensure compliance with CC
-AA-112. 26. IF Relay Block K1 at 0PR01J was removed in step H.2., then:
_____ a. NOTIFY Shift Manager that the temporary Electrical Alteration is being restored.
_____ b. REPLACE Relay Block K1 at 0PR01J, SUPERVISOR VERIFICATION _____
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 80 H____ 26. c. REMOVE the two placards stating "K1 RELAY REMOVED FOR LIQUID RELEASE", that were placed in Step H.2.c.
_____ d. If the Electrical Alteration cannot be restored, process a Temporary Configuration Change.
NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is INOPERABLE and AAR BwOS RETS 2.1
-1a has been initiated, steps H.27.a through H.27.q. may be omitted at Ops Supervisor discretion.
- 27. Backflush the 0PR01J radiation monitor as follows:
_____ a. VERIFY release tank 0WX01T is less than 96 % (0LR-WX028, 0WX01T Level Indication).
_____ b. VERIFY/OPEN "NO EPN", 0PR01J return to 0WX01T.
_____ c. VERIFY/CLOSE "NO EPN", 0PR01J return to 0WX26T.
CAUTION Do not back flush the Radiation Monitor for a period of time such that the Release Tank level exceeds 97 % (0LR-WX028, 0WX01T Level Indication).
- d. NOTIFY the Main Control Room of the following:
_____ 0PR01J will be flushed
.
_____ 0PR01J will alarm on the RM
-11.
_____ e. VERIFY/OPEN 0WM897, WM Header Isolation Valve.
_____ f. VERIFY/CLOSE 0WX354, Release Tank Discharge to Process Rad Monitor System. N/A if performed in step H.25.
VERIFICATION _____
_____ g. OPEN 0PR052, Rad Mon 0PR01J Bypass Valve.
_____ h. OPEN 0PR050, 0PR01J Backflush Isolation Valve.
_____ i. OPEN 0WM898, 0PR01J WM Supply Header Valve.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 81 H____ 27. j. WAIT 1 minute.
_____ k. CLOSE 0PR5004, Skid 0PR01J Flow Isolation Valve.
NOTE Expect Release Tank level to rise approximately 3% per hour.
_____ l. FLUSH 0PR01J, Radiation Monitor:
For 15 minutes after release.
Until the desired Release Tank level is obtained.
_____ m. CLOSE 0PR050, 0PR01J Backflush Isolation Valve.
_____ n. CLOSE 0WM898, 0PR01J WM Supply Header Valve.
_____ o. OPEN 0PR5004, Skid 0PR01J Flow Isolation Valve.
_____ p. CLOSE 0PR052, Rad Mon 0PR01J Bypass Valve.
_____ 28. OPS Supervisor: Update the Liquid Release Tritium Tracking Log columns for Date/Time Discharge complete, Actual Tritium Activity and Gallons Actual. (Log located at L:/Shared/8931/Liquid Release Information/Liquid release Tritium Tracking Log). IF the release was not performed, ENTER "CANCELLED" in the appropriate blanks.
NOTE Step H.29 is not applicable if performing an extended purge to fill the Release Tank.
- 29. OPS Supervisor: I have reviewed Part H and have verified it is accurate and complete.
________________________________________/______/______
OPS Supervisor Date Time BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 82 I. OPERATING DEPARTMENT RESPONSIBILITY NOTE If the current activity level recorded in step I.1. is greater than 1.31E-4 Ci/ml, INITIATE a work request to decontaminate the 0RE-PR001 sample chamber. If 0PR01J is in RETS, step I.1 may be N/Ad at Supervisor's discretion.
- 1. OBTAIN the current reading for 0RE
-PR001 (0PS101) at the RM
-11:
_____ a. VERIFY/SELECT Grid 1.
_____ b. KEY in 101.
_____ c. DEPRESS SEL key.
_____ d. DEPRESS CHAN ITEMS key.
_____ e. RECORD the current 0PR01J (0PS101) reading:
_______________ Ci/ml Date: ______
NOTE If 0RE-PR001 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1-1a has been initiated or if ALERT AND HIGH ALARM setpoints have not changed from Step D.7.a.4), Step I.2. is not required
- 2. SET the Rad Monitor 0RE
-PR001 (0PS101) to the original setpoints as follows:
_____ a. VERIFY/PLACE the RM
-11 Console in SUPERVISOR MODE.
_____ b. DEPRESS the Grid 1 Key.
_____ c. KEY in 101.
_____ d. DEPRESS SEL key.
_____ e. VERIFY 0PR01J (0PS101) selected.
_____ f. DEPRESS CHAN ITEMS.
_____ g. KEY in 10.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 83 I ____ 2. h. DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 10 should be displayed in reverse characters).
_____ i. KEY in the new ALERT alarm setpoint of 4.32E
-5 Ci/ml USING the format XYZ +/-
AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E
-10 would be entered as 376
-10). _____ j. DEPRESS the ENTER key. The new value will be displayed after a short delay. _____ k. VERIFY the new ALERT alarm setpoint of 4.32E
-05 Ci/ml is displayed.
VERIFICATION _____
_____ l. KEY in 9. _____ m. DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 9 should be displayed in reverse characters).
_____ n. KEY in the new HIGH alarm setpoint of 8.64E
-5 Ci/ml USING the format XYZ +/- AB (i.e. a value of 3.
76E-10 would be entered as 376
-10). _____ o. DEPRESS the ENTER key (The new value will be displayed after a short delay). _____ p. VERIFY the new HIGH alarm setpoint of 8.64E
-5 Ci/ml is displayed.
VERIFICATION _____
_____ q. PLACE the RM
-11 Console in the NORMAL MODE. NOTE If 0RE-PR010 is inoperable and AAR 0BwOS RETS 2.1
-1a has been initiated or if ALERT AND HIGH ALARM setpoints have not changed from Step D.8.a.4), Step I.3. is not required
- 3. SET the Rad Monitor 0RE
-PR010 (0PS110) to the original setpoints as follows:
_____ a. PLACE the RM
-11 Console in SUPERVISOR MODE.
_____ b. DEPRESS the Grid 1 key.
_____ c. KEY in 110.
_____ d. DEPRESS SEL key.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 84 I ____ 3. e. VERIFY 0PR10J (0PS110) selected.
_____ f. DEPRESS CHAN ITEM key.
_____ g. KEY in 10.
_____ h. DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 10 should be displayed in reverse characters).
_____ i. KEY in the new ALERT alarm setpoint of 7.46E
-7 Ci/ml USING the format XYZ +/- AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E
-10 would be entered as 376
-10). _____ j. DEPRESS the ENTER key (The new value will be displayed after a short delay). _____ k. VERIFY the new ALERT alarm setpoint of 7.46E
-7 Ci/ml is displayed.
VERIFICATION _____
_____ l. KEY in 9. _____ m. DEPRESS SEL key (CHAN ITEM 9 should be displayed in reverse characters).
_____ n. KEY in the new HIGH alarm setpoint of 1.07E
-6 Ci/ml USING the format XYZ +/- AB (i.e. a value of 3.76E
-10 would be entered as 376
-10). _____ o. DEPRESS the ENTER key (The new value will be displayed after a short delay). _____ p. VERIFY the new HIGH alarm setpoint of 1.07E
-6 Ci/ml is displayed.
VERIFICATION _____ _____ q. PLACE the RM
-11 Console in the NORMAL MODE.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 85 NOTE DO NOT isolate Circulating Water Blowdown until at least three and
one-half (3.5 ) hours after the release stop time recorded in step H.19.a. to ensure the entire release tank effluent has passed through the Circulating Water Blowdown pipe to the Kankakee River.
Control of Circulating Water Blowdown Flow Limitations may be transferred to an Equipment Status Tag for the purpose of completing this package. The Equipment Status Tag must specify the time and date for completion of the 3.5 hour5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> flush requirement.
This method is most applicable when performing multiple releases in one day. If control is transferred to an Equipment Status Tag, Step I.4. may be marked as "Condition Met".
I. 4. 3.5 hours or more after the time recorded in Step H.19.a., PERFORM the following:
_____ a. REMOVE the placard stating "Liquid Release in Progress" at 0PM01J.
- b. RECORD the following for "Liquid Release in Progress" placard is removal at 0PM01J:
_____ Time: ______:______
_____ Date: ______
_____ c. RESTORE CW Blowdown to desired flow.
_____ 5. FORWARD this form to Chemistry to complete Section J.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 86 J. CHEMISTRY DEPARTMENT RESPONSIBILITY NOTE If a computerized release program is available, you may attach the printout to this form and indicate "see attached" in the calculation spaces in step J.1. below.
_____ 1. COMPLETE the table below for each isotope identified in step D.6.a.:
Isotope Total Activity Released (Ci)
- Isotope Total Activity Released (Ci) Sum of activities above = ___________________________
- OBTAIN by multiplying each number in column #2 of table in step D.6.a. by total volume released from step H.19.d. or H.19.e. (in ml)(ml=gal x 3785)
_____ Total ml released = _____________________ ml
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 87 J. 2. VERIFY compliance with 10CFR50 dose limits, as specified in the ODCM:
_____ a. ENTER the final release into the RETDAS program to close the permit associated with this release.
_____ b. PRINT the closed permit for retention with this release package.
_____ c. REVIEW the closed permit to VERIFY compliance with 10CFR50 dose limits.
BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 88 ATTACHMENT A TCCP TRACKING LOG SHEET
Description:
REMOVE Relay Block K1 at 0PR01J (inside the AC Power Panel) to allow opening of 0AOV
-WX896/353, Release Tank Discharge Isolation Valve.
This TCC does not affect the Critical Control Room Drawings.
Installation/Removal functional test is not required.
This Procedurally Controlled TCC was implemented prior to 5/29/2001. Per the Fleet's Change Management Decision, this procedure does not need a Technical Evaluation.
(only one TCC/EPN per tracking sheet)
TCC INSTALLATION TCC Expected Installation Date:
____________________
TCC Expected Removal Date:
____________________
Applicable Plant Mode Limitations:
____________________
Tech Eval Number:
___ N/A______________
MR90 Applicable:
NO Expiration date (one refueling cycle):
____________________
Extension Allowed (per CC
-AA-112, Attach 2):
____________________
Shift Manager Approval
__________________________________
____________
Signature Date BwOP WX-501T1 Revision 66 Continuous Use 89 ATTACHMENT A (Cont.)
TCCP TRACKING LOG SHEET
TCC Installed by:
_______________________________
______/______ Print Name Initial Date Independent Verification by:
_______________________________
______/______
Print Name Initial Date Placards Installed per step H.2.c:
_______________________________
______/______
Print Name Initial Date Logged in TCCP Log
- _______________________________
______/______
Print Name Initial Date LCO/RETS Entered if applicable:
_______________________________
______/______
Print Name Initial Date TCC REMOVAL Shift Manager Approval
__________________________________
____________ Signature Date TCC Removed by:
_______________________________
______/______
Print Name Initial Date Independent Verification by:
_______________________________
______/______
Print Name Initial Date Placards Removed per step H.26.c:___________________________ ______/______
Print Name Initial Date Logged out of TCCP Log:
_______________________________
______/______
Print Name Initial Date LCO/RETS Exited if applicable:
_______________________________
______/______
Print Name Initial Date (if not removed by governing procedure)
TCC TRANSFER OF ACCOUNTABILITY to CC
-AA-112 Method used for accountability (EST, Clearance Order, etc.)
___________________________________________________________________________
Shift Manager Approval
__________________________________
____________
Signature Date (Final)
BwOP WX-501T2 Revision 6 Continuous Use 1 LIQUID RELEASE WINDOW DETERMINATION NOTE Kankakee River Flow rate is normally obtained via the internet site for the U.S. Geological Survey (usgs.gov), WILMINGTON DATA (from the appropriate Unit Supervisor). If data is unavailable, RECORD most recent data from the Unit Supervisor turnover.
- 1. RECORD Liquid Release Number from BwOP WX
-501T1: L - __________
- __________
- 2. OBTAIN and RECORD current (within last 24 hrs.) Kankakee River flow data:
_______________ CFS at Date: ______/_____/_____ at Time: _____
- 3. RECORD CW blowdown flow F2400 _______________ GPM OUR-CW032 _______________ GPM
- 4. PERFORM either of the following to determine the liquid release window:
IF the Liquid Release Window Spreadsheet is available, GO TO Step 5.
IF a manual Liquid Release Window calculation is to be performed, GO TO Step 6.
BwOP WX-501T2 Revision 6 Continuous Use 2 5. PERFORM the following to determine the Liquid Release Window using the Liquid Release Window Spreadsheet:
- a. ACCESS the Liquid Release Window spreadsheet at k:/shift/excel/liquid release.
- b. ENTER the following data in the appropriate sections of the spreadsheet:
Arrive Wilmington (This is normally the day AFTER the release will occur but may be on the second day after the release will occur if Blowdown Peak time to Wilmington intake exceeds 24 hours1 days <br />0.143 weeks <br />0.0329 months <br />.)
River Flow rate recorded in Step 2.
Release duration:
From BwOP WX
-501T1.
As directed by the Shift Manager.
CW Blowdown flow recorded in Step 3.
- c. GO TO Step 7.
- 6. PERFORM the following to manually calculate the Liquid Release Window:
- a. DETERMINE the length of time for CW blowdown to traverse the CW Blowdown piping: 2,640,329 GALS (Volume of CW B/D Piping) ___________GPM
=_______ MIN (Step 3 CW B/D flow)
- b. DETERMINE the time for the liquid release to travel from the outfall structure to the Wilmington Intake:
40523 x (_________________)
-0.5286 = _______________ MINUTES (Step 2 cfs)
- c. RECORD the release duration in minutes:
From BwOP WX
-501T1.
As directed by the Shift Manager.
_______________ MINUTES BwOP WX-501T2 Revision 6 Continuous Use 3 6. d. DETERMINE the travel time from source to mid peak at Wilmington:
_______________ + _______________ + (______________ 2) = (Step 6.a)
(Step 6.b)
(Step 6.c)
_______________ MINUTES NOTE If the liquid release duration is within the range of 480 - 600 minutes, set the margin at 60 minutes. Always record the margin as a positive value.
- e. DETERMINE the margin for start of the release:
540 min - _______________
= ____________MINUTES (Step 6.c)
- f. DETERMINE the target start time of the liquid release (results in the mid peak of the release reaching Wilmington at about 02:30 AM):
02:30 AM - _______________________
= _______ : _______
(Step 6.d)
(round to nearest 1/4 hour)
- g. DETERMINE the Start After Time:
_______ : _______
- [______________
÷ 2] = _______ : _______
(Step 6.f)
(Step 6.e)
(round to nearest 1/4 hour)
- h. DETERMINE the Start Before Time:
_______ : _______ + [______________
÷ 2] = _______ : _______
(Step 6.f)
(Step 6.e)
(round to nearest 1/4 hour)
- 7. RECORD the following in BwOP WX
-501T1 as applicable:
Target start time.
Start After Time.
Start Before Time.
(Final)
BwOP WX-501T3 Revision 1 Reference Use 1 AUTHORIZATION TO RELEASE OUTSIDE OF RELEASE WINDOW Time/Date _____/_____
Release Number: ____________________
Process Tank Levels:
Release Tanks 0WX01T __________%
0WX26T __________%
HUTs 0A __________%
0B __________%
AB Monitor Tanks 1AB02T __________% 2AB02T __________%
WX Monitor Tanks 0A __________%
0B __________%
WF Tanks 0A __________%
0B __________%
WE Tanks 0A __________%
0B __________%
Chem Drain Tank 0WZ01T __________%
Chem/Regen Waste Drain Tank 0WX08T __________%
Regen Waste Drain Tank 0WX25T __________%
Describe conditions/evolutions in progress or expected (give time frame) that prevent releasing this tank within appropriate release time window:
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Operations Supervisor: ___________________________
Time/Date: _________/________
Shift Manager: _________________________________
Time/Date: _________/________
Station Duty Officer: _____________________________
Time/Date: _________/________
Include this form with liquid release package. Forward copy of this form to RW Coordinator for trending purposes.
(Final)
S-409 Page 1 of 6 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Station Emergency Director.
- 4. An EO has received a life threatening injury and is incapacitated in the Unit 2 364' Curved Wall Area.
- 5. A rescue attempt must be made to rescue the injured person.
- 6. The estimated dose to an individual attempting the rescue is 50 Rem.
- 7. Joe Radworker, age 28, Employee ID Number 123456, has volunteered to rescue the injured person. Joe Radworker's current annual exposure is 24 mRem.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. Authorize rescue of the injured person.
- 2. Notify the examiner when you have completed authorization of the injured person.
S-409 Page 2 of 6 TASK TITLE:
Emergency Dose Authorization JPM No.: S-409 REV: 2013 NRC Task No.: S-ZP-010 K/A No.: 2.4.38 Objective No.:
7F.ZP-010-A K/A IMP: 4.4 EXAMINEE: SRO EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 2, 4, 5 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 15 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME:
N/A EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM X IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. EP-AA-113, PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE ACTIONS, REV 11.
- 2. EP-AA-113-F-02, AUTHORIZATION FOR EMERGENCY EXPOSURE, R EV B. MATERIALS:
- 1. EP-AA-113, PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE ACTIONS, REV 11.
- 2. EP-AA-113-F-02, AUTHORIZATION FOR EMERGENCY EXPOSURE, REV B.
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Determine emergency exposure is required to rescue injured worker.
- 2. Brief affected personnel of possible health effects of emergency exposure.
- 3. Authorize personnel exposure in excess of 10CFR20 limits.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Station Emergency Director.
- 4. An EO has received a life threatening injury and is incapacitated in the Unit 2 364' Curved Wall Area. 5. A rescue attempt must be made to rescue the injured person.
- 6. The estimated dose to an individual attempting the rescue is 50 Rem.
- 7. Joe Radworker, age 28, Employee ID Number 123456, has volunteered to rescue the injured person. Joe Radworker's current annual exposure is 24 mRem.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. Authorize rescue of the injured person.
- 2. Notify the examiner when you have completed authorization of the injured person.
S-409 Page 3 of 6 RECORD START TIME:
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 1. Refer to EP
-AA-113, PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE ACTIONS. CUE: Provide examinee copy of EP-AA-113. Refer to EP
-AA-113: Determines section 4.3 needs to be performed.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *2. Determine emergency exposure is required.
Determines emergency exposure is required per EP
-AA-113, step 4.3.2:
From initiating cue, estimated dose during rescue is 50 Rem.
Determines 50 Rem is above 5 Rem limit.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: EVALUATOR NOTE: Page 6 contains a key of a correctly completed EP
-AA-113-F-02 form. 3. Complete EP
-AA-113-F-02, AUTHORIZATION FOR EMERGENCY EXPOSURE:
CUE: Provide examinee copy of EP-AA-113-F-02. CUE: If asked, Joe Radworker has NOT had a previous emergency exposure.
Authorizes radiation exposure greater than 10CFR20 limits:
Complete EP
-AA-113-F-02, AUTHORIZATION FOR EMERGENCY EXPOSURE:
Name: Joe Radworker Date/Time: Today/Current Time Social Security Number:
123-45-6789 Current Annual Exposure: 24 mRem Reason for request:
Rescue of injured worker. Requesting authorization to exceed:
25 Rem TEDE box checked. Emergency worker signature.
Rad Protection Management Review complete. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
S-409 Page 4 of 6 PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 4. Inform emergency personnel before the fact of possible health effects of anticipated exposure. CUE: Joe Radworker has understood healh risks and has signed EP
-AA-113-F-02. CUE: Rad Protection Manager has reviewed and signed EP-AA-113-F-02. Informs emergency personnel before the fact of possible health effects of anticipated exposure. Determines emergency exposure risks per EP
-AA-113, Attachment 1:
Determines health affects associated with whole body absorbed doses received within a few house per EP
-A A-113: 2% of populations affected by prodromal effects.
Determines risk of premature death based on workers age: (28 years old from initiating cue) 9.1 deaths/1000 persons Determines average years of life lost if premature death occurs based on workers age: (28 years old from initiating cue) 24 years Briefs personnel on emergency exposure.
Ensures emergency worker acknowledges risks and signs EP-AA-113-F-02. Ensures Rad Protection Management signs EP
-AA-113-F-02. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *5 Authorize exposure in excess of 10CFR20 limits.
Authorizes exposure in excess of 10CFR20 limits:
Sign and date/time Station Emergency Director block on EP-AA-113-F-02. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME:
COMMENTS:
S-409 Page 5 of 6 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS Verify/perform TQ
-BR-201-0113, BRAIDWOOD TRAINING DEPARTMENT SIMULATOR EXAMINATION SECURITY ACTIONS CHECKLIST.
Complete items on Simulator Ready for Training Checklist.
COMMENTS Provide copy of EP
-AA-113, PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE ACTIONS, REV 11.
Provide copy of EP
-AA-113-F-02, AUTHORIZATION FOR EMERGENCY EXPOSURE, REV B.
EP-AA-113-F-02 Revision A Page 1 of 1 S-409 Page 6 of 6 AUTHORIZATION FOR EMERGENCY EXPOSURE Name: Joe Radworker____________________
Date / Time: Today _Current Time Employee ID Number: 123456 Current Annual Exposure: _24_______ mRem Reason For Request:
Rescue of injured worker REQUESTING AUTHORIZATION TO EXCEED
5 Rem TEDE (Authorized to receive greater than 5 Rem TEDE but less than 10 Rem TEDE)
10 Rem TEDE (Authorized to receive greater than 10 Rem TEDE but less than 25 Rem TEDE) 25 Rem TEDE (Authorized to receive greater than 25 Rem TEDE)
_Joe Radworker_________________________________
__Today/Now___
- Emergency Worker Signature Date / Time
- Emergency Worker Exposure Limits and Associated Risks (EP
-AA-113 Attachment 1) have been reviewed and the potential health affects are understood.
___Rad Protection_Manager_____________________________
__Today/Now___
Rad. Protection Management (Review)
Date / Time
____Examinee________________________________________
_ Today/Now __ # Station Emergency Director (Authorization)
Date / Time
- The Shift Manager (Shift Emergency Director) may approve prior to transferring Command and Control to the Station Emergency Director. KEY - DO NOT GIVE TO EXAMINEE KEY - DO NOT GIVE TO EXAMINEE
EP-AA-113-F-02 Revision B Page 1 of 1 Document Retention SRRS ID - 5B.100 AUTHORIZATION FOR EMERGENCY EXPOSURE Name: ___________________________ Date / Ti me: ____/____/____ ____:____
Employee ID Number: ________________ Current Annual Exposure: __________ mRem Reason For Request:
REQUESTING AUTHORIZATION TO EXCEED
- 5 Rem TEDE (Authorized to receive gr eater than 5 Rem TEDE but less than 10 Rem TEDE) 10 Rem TEDE (Authorized to receive gr eater than 10 Rem TEDE but less than 25 Rem TEDE) 25 Rem TEDE (Authorized to re ceive greater than 25 Rem TEDE)
________________________
_________________________ ______________
- Emergency Worker Signature Date / Time
- Emergency Worker Exposure Limits and Associated Risks (EP-AA-113 Attachment 1) have been reviewed and the potential health affects are understood.
________________________
_________________________ ______________ Rad. Protection Management (Review) Date / Time
________________________
_________________________ ______________
- Station Emergency Director (Authorization) Date / Time # The Shift Manager (Shift Emergency Director) may approve prior to transferring Command and Control to the Stati on Emergency Director.
SIM-102 Page 1 of 6 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 1 NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 is at 100% power.
- 3. Maintenance was performed last shift to repair shutdown bank C rod control.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit 1 Unit Supervisor has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, Unit One Movable Control Assemblies Surveillance, for shutdown bank C rods.
- 2. All Prerequisites Precautions, Limitations & Actions of 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 have been met.
- 3. Another NSO will monitor the remainder of the Main Control Board panels and address alarms a s necessary.
- 4. Inform the Unit 1 Unit Supervisor when you have completed 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 for shutdown bank C rods.
SIM-102 Page 2 of 6 TASK TITLE:
Perform Movable Control Assemblies Surveillance JPM No.: SIM-102 Rev: 2013 NRC Task No.: R-RD-004 K&A No.: 00100A4.03 Objective:
4.C.GP-04 K&A IMP: 4.0/3.7
EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 APPROX COMPLETION TIME:
30 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME:
NA EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES QUARTERLY SURVEILLANCE, Rev 23.
MATERIALS:
- 1. 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES QUARTERLY SURVEILLANCE, Rev 23.
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Perform rod movement verification of shutdown bank C rods.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 1 NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 is at 100% power.
- 3. Maintenance was performed last shift to repair shutdown bank C rod control.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit 1 Unit Supervisor has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, Unit One Movable Control Assemblies Surveillance, for shutdown bank C rods.
CUE: Hand examinee copy of 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2.
- 2. All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations & Actions of 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 have been met.
- 3. Another NSO will monitor the remainder of the Main Control Board panels and address alarms as necessary.
- 4. Inform the Unit 1 Unit Supervisor when you have completed 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 for shutdown bank C rods.
SIM-102 Page 3 of 6 RECORD START TIME:
NOTE: As examiner, role play peer check and concur with any recommendations from the examinee.
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 1. Refer to 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2.
VERIFY all applicable Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions are satisfactorily addressed (step F.2.1).
CUE: All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions have been met. Refer to 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2.
VERIFY all applicable Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions are satisfactorily addressed.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. Transfer Rod Control to Manual and Verify Tave is matched to Tref (step F.2.2).
Perform the following at 1PM05J: Place the Rod Bank Select switch to the MAN position.
Verify Tave matched to Tref. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *3. Select Shutdown Bank C with Rod Bank Select Switch.
Place rod bank select switch in SBC.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 4. Record initial rod data.
Record initial group step counter readings (ARO park 228) and DRPI readings (228) for SBC on Table 1 (Page D
-2). SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *5. Insert SBC one step CUE: As Unit Supervisor, acknowledge reports of annunciators due to rod motion as they occur.
(Failure: if examinee moves any other bank)
Place rod motion control switch to in and insert SBC to
(ARO park 228 -1 = 227) steps on group step counter.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *6. Withdraw SBC to step 231 Place rod motion control switch to out and withdraw SBC to 231 steps on group step counter.
o Verify DRPI indicates
>222. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
SIM-102 Page 4 of 6 PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 7 Insert SBC 10
-15 steps (Failure criteria: DRPI 210 light lit)
Place rod motion control switch to in and insert SBC
10-15 steps as indicated on the group step counter (far enough to cause a DRPI change of
> 10 steps). o Record the group step counter reading and the DRPI readings for SBC on Table 1 (Page D
-2). o Verify each rod in SBC indicates movement
> 10 steps and record by checking the appropriate box. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *8 Withdraw SBC to original position Place rod motion control switch to out and withdraw SBC to ARO park 228 steps on group step counter. o Record the final group step counter reading (ARO park 228) and DRPI readings (228) for SBC on Table 1 (Page D-2). o Verify SBC DRPI
> 222 steps. o Verify that all rods of SBC are at the initial position recorded on Table 1 (Page D-2). o Verify the SBC is within the limits specified in the COLR. o Complete Table 1 for the SBC within the insertion limits of the COLR by checking the appropriate box. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
SIM-102 Page 5 of 6 PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 9. Rod Control Restoration. (step F.4). CUE: If asked, the Bank Overlap Counter has not changed since commencing this surveillance.
NOTE: If asked to perform independent verifications in the following steps, provide the following cue as asked: CUE: Verification has been provided. NOTE: If asked for desired alignment of rod control systems, provide the following cue:
CUE: Unit Supervisor desires automatic rod control.
CUE: All ductwork has been reinstalled.
Restore Rod Control as follows: Verify controlling Control Bank is in its original position. Place the Rod Bank Select Switch to MANUAL.
Verify Low Power Interlock
C-5 NOT LIT.
Obtain Independent Verification of C
-5 NOT LIT. Verify Tave/Tref deviation
< 1 F. Verify the following Annunciators are clear:
1-10-A6, ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT. 1-10-A7, ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT.
1-10-B6, ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT. Obtain Independent Verification that the above annunciators are clear.
Place the Rod Bank Select Switch to AUTO.
Obtain Independent Verification of Rod Bank Select Switch in AUTO.
Verify all required RD cabinet ductwork has been reinstalled.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 10. Acknowledge completion of surveillance, and terminate the JPM. Inform the Unit 1 Unit Supervisor that you have completed 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 for shutdown bank C rods CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME:
COMMENTS:
SIM-102 Page 6 of 6 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS Verify/perform TQ
-BR-201-0113, BRAIDWOOD TRAINING DEPARTMENT SIMULATOR EXAMINATION SECURITY ACTIONS CHECKLIST.
Establish the conditions of IC 21, 100% power, steady state, equilibrium xenon.
Complete items on Simulator Ready for Training Checklist.
Place simulator in RUN.
Verify CBD at 220 steps.
Record ARO park position in body JPM where ARO park ___ designated (see JPM steps 4, 5, 8) IF NOT ALREADY FILLED IN FOR THE JPM.
COMMENTS Provide examinee copy of 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES SURVEILLANCE.
(Final)
WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61 ATTACHMENT 10 SURVEILLANCE WO DISPOSITION SHEET (APPLICABLE TO MID
-WEST SITES ONLY)
Page 1 of 1 Unit: _1__ Procedure: PMID/RQ: ______1BwOSR 3.1.4.2____
123456____ Work Order #:
__ N/APMID/RQ Title: ____________
MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLY SURVIELLANCE PMID/RQ Due Date: ___________ N/A________ PMID/RQ Late Date: N/A Signature/Authorization Approval Review:
Name Date Shift Authorization to Start Work:
__Time _Joe Supervisor
______ Today Work Started
__________________________
________ ________ 5 min ago Work Stopped:
__________________________
________ ________ Supv Review of Work Completion:
__________________________
________ ________ ANI Review of work package:
__________________________
________ ________ Surveillance Found Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO Surveillance Left Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO ("Work Started" date (above shall beComplete one of the following:
the credit date unless otherwise explained)
Verify Credit Surveillance Credit Date per another WO# Below: If crediting 'per another WO', verify credit date
_______ is 'Work Started' date of referenced WO.
_________ Complete Sat
- Credit Surveillance Complete w/ Portions Unsat
- Credit Surveillance No Work Performed
- Credit Surveillance Failed - Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)
No Work Performed
- Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)
Comments (partial surveillance) PMT for Shutdown Bank C ADDITIONAL REVIEW OF RESULTS (IF REQUIRED)
____________________
____________________________________
________ ____________________
____________________________________
________ ____________________
____________________________________
________ Title Signature Date WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61
BRAIDWOOD STATION PROCEDURE NO.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 UNIT NO. 1 REVISION NO.
23 PROCEDURE TITLE:
UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES SURVEILLANCE Rev Summary IR# / EC# (if applicable) 23 Remove EC 368959 requirements from procedure (EC was closed but procedure revisions never reflected the removal of the EC.)
PCRA 1230957
-30 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 1 UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES SURVEILLANCE
A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY This procedure outlines the steps necessary to verify the OPERABILITY of each Movable Control Assembly by movement of at least 10 steps in any one direction and is applicable in MODES 1 and 2. This procedure SHALL be performed either:
- 1. As scheduled,
- 2. Non-routinely in conjunction with a Reactor Startup or Rod Malfunction or,
- 3. To align the rods to a new ARO park position as determined by Reactor Engineering.
B. REFERENCES
- 1. Tech Spec LCOs:
- a. 3.1.4.
- b. 3.1.5.
- c. 3.1.6. 2. Tech Spec Surveillance Requirement: 3.1.4.2.
- 3. Station Procedures:
- a. 1BwGP 100-2, Reactor Startup
- b. 1BwGP 100-8, Generic Reactor Control Guidance
- c. 1BwOL 3.1.4, LCOAR
- Reactivity Control Systems
- Movable Control Assemblies
- Group Height
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 2 C. PREREQUISITES
- 1. Receive permission to perform this surveillance from the Shift Manager or designee prior to performance by having the Data Package Cover Sheet signed and dated.
NOTE The following Prerequisite may require MMD support to remove and
re-install interfering ductwork at the RD Power Supply Cabinets.
- 2. A visual inspection inside of all 5 RD power cabinets has been performed ensuring no blown fuse indicators tripped (reference Attachment D for blown fuse illustration).
- 3. The Reactor is operating in steady state conditions, if this surveillance is being performed with the Unit in Mode 1.
- 4. BwCB-1 Table 4-1 has been revised to indicate the ARO park position, if necessary.
- 5. A visual inspection outside of all 5 RD power cabinets indicates that one GROUP SELECT light is LIT per cabinet.
- 6. Prior to initiating rod motion, refer to the Rod Control Operation section of 1BwGP 100-8.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 3 D. PRECAUTIONS NOTE All of the following precautions are only applicable for performance of Subsection 2.0.
- 1. Prior to transferring Rod Control to the automatic MODE, VERIFY:
- a. Permissive C-5 is extinguished.
- b. VERIFY Tave/Tref deviation 1 F.
- 2. Avoid variations in plant load, Reactor Coolant temperature, and Boron concentration.
- 3. DO NOT allow Tave changes of greater than
-4F or +1F. Compensate by intermittent rod movement to match Tave/Tref. 4. If any control rod group (except Control Bank D) is withdrawn past 231 steps, STOP the surveillance. PERFORM Attachment A, Rod Bank Realignment to return the affected bank to the ARO position and resume testing of the remaining
rods as required. If Control Bank D is withdrawn past 231, STOP the surveillance. PERFORM Attachment A, Rod Bank Realignment, to return Control Bank D to initial position.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 4 E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS
- 1. As stated in Tech Spec LCOs 3.1.4, 3.1.5 and 3.1.
- 6.
- 2. If the Acceptance Criteria (¢) is not met during the performance of this surveillance, IMMEDIATELY notify the Shift Manager or designee to initiate LCOAR 1BwOL 3.1.4 if in MODES 1 or 2.
- 3. Each Rod Bank tested must be returned to the rod insertion limits specified in the COLR (for Shutdown Rods) and to its original or new ARO park position (for Control Rods) to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.5 and 3.1.6 are not exceeded prior to proceeding to the next Rod Bank (N/A if performing Subsection 1.0).
- 4. Annunciators 1 A6, "ROD BANK LO
-2 INSERTION LIMIT", 1 B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT", and 1 C1, "PZR PRESS CONT DEV LOW HTRS ON", may alarm during movement of the Control Banks.
- 5. Annunciator 1 A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT" may alarm during movement of the Shutdown Banks or Control Banks.
- 6. It is permissible to place DRPI in Half Accuracy MODE, as required, if data failures prohibit performing this surveillance. Prior to placing DRPI in Half Accuracy, an evaluation shall be performed to verify loss of both A & B Channels to individual rods will not occur. (Sections 1.0 and 2.0 only)
- 7. Annunciator 1 A7, SER point 2153, should be considered inoperable during the performance of Section 3.0. If this section can not be completed, the computer points reset and the alarm cleared within 4 hours0.167 days <br />0.0238 weeks <br />0.00548 months <br />, then 1BwOS RD
-2 should be completed within 4 hours0.167 days <br />0.0238 weeks <br />0.00548 months <br /> of the alarm condition.
- 8. Westinghouse has suggested that performing an insertion step, as opposed to a withdraw step, as the first step may minimize the probability of a dropped rod during rod movement.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 5 F. MAIN BODY NOTE Initial each step in the space provided adjacent to the procedure step number AFTER the step has been successfully completed.
Person(s) performing VERIFICATIONS SHALL initial in the space provided following the step.
0.0 SURVEILLANCE
OVERVIEW
0.1 Parallel
Subsections 1.0, 2.0, and 3.0 are independent of one another so that either Subsection may be performed.
0.2 Performance
of either Subsection 1.0, or 2.0 fully satisfies the surveillance requirement.
0.3 Performance
of the steps in either Subsections 1.0 or 2.0 for less than all Movable Control Assemblies is acceptable if a partial surveillance is required. The Shift Manager or designee SHALL determine the steps to be performed. The Data Package Cover Sheet must indicate that a partial surveillance was performed, which rod(s) were exercised, and the reason(s) why stated in the comments section.
0.4 Subsection
3.0 will establish a new ARO park position. This subsection may be performed after the rods have been exercised in Subsection 2.0 or independently to establish a new ARO park position. Performance of this Subsection is optional.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 6 F. 0.5 The Subsections perform the following:
F.1.0 Takes credit for the movement of the Shutdown and Control Banks during a Reactor Startup.
F.2.0 Actually moves the Shutdown and Control Banks when the UNIT is at power and restores the rods to their original position.
F.3.0 Established a new ARO park position.
F.4.0 Restores rod control and must always be performed after Subsections F.2.0 or F.3.0.
Rod Movement Verification During Startup Restoration Establishes a new ARO Park Position Rod Movement Verification During Operation START 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 EN D 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 7 F. 1.0 ROD MOVEMENT VERIFICATION DURING STARTUP
_____ 1.1 VERIFY all applicable PREREQUISITES, PRECAUTIONS, and LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS are satisfactorily addressed.
¢ ____ 1.2 During the withdrawal of the Shutdown Banks as directed in 1BwGP 100-2, VERIFY each rod moved at least 10 steps. ¢ ____ 1.3 During the withdrawal of the Control Banks as directed in 1BwGP 100-2, VERIFY each rod moved at least 10 steps. NOTE The following step may be marked N/A at the discretion of the SM/Designee if the RD cabinet ductwork is required to remain removed for additional surveillances of other RD work.
_____ 1.4 VERIFY all required RD cabinet ductwork has been re
-installed.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 8 F. 2.0 ROD MOVEMENT VERIFICATION DURING OPERATION
_____ 2.1 VERIFY all applicable PREREQUISITES, PRECAUTIONS, and LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS are satisfactorily addressed.
2.2 VERIFY/TRANSFER rod control to MANUAL and ESTABLISH Tave/Tref match: _____ a. VERIFY/PLACE the Rod Bank Select switch to the MAN position.
_____ b. MAINTAIN Tave matched with Tref. NOTE As long as the Shutdown Bank is above 224 steps, as indicated by the bank demand step counters and verified by DRPI, indicating 222 steps, the rod insertion limits are met as specified in the COLR. Westinghouse has suggested that performing an insertion step, as opposed to a withdraw step, as the first step may minimize the probability of a dropped rod during rod movement.
2.3 PERFORM
the rod movement verification for the Shutdown Rods as follows:
NOTE The Bank order of the Shutdown Rod movement verifications may be done in any order. The preferred order is Shutdown Bank E, D, C, B, A. Shutdown Bank E
- 1) SELECT Shutdown Bank E on the Rod Bank Select.
- 2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 1.
- 3) INSERT Shutdown Bank E one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 Shutdown Bank E. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps
). NOTE Annunciator 1 A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT", may alarm in the following step.
- 4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank E to 231 steps on the Group Step Counter.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 9 F. 2.3 5) RECORD the "withdrawn to 231" Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank E on Table 1.
- 6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.
- 7) INSERT Shutdown Bank E 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).
- 8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 1.
¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank E indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.
- 10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank E to the initial Group Step Counter reading.
- 11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 1.
- 12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank E DRPI reading 222 steps. NOT E DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.
- 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank E are at the initial position recorded TABLE 1.
- 14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank E is within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.
- 15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank E.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 10 F. 2.3 Shutdown Bank D
- 1) SELECT Shutdown Bank D on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 1.
- 3) INSERT Shutdown Bank D one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank D. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps). NOTE Annunciator 1 A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT", may alarm in the following step.
- 4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank D to 231 steps on the Group Step Counter.
- 5) RECORD the "withdrawn to 231" Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank D on Table 1.
- 6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.
- 7) INSERT Shutdown Bank D 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).
- 8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 1.
¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank D indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.
- 10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank D to the initial Group Step Counter reading.
- 11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 1.
- 12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank D DRPI reading 222 steps.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 11 NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.
F. 2.3 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank D are at the initial position recorded TABLE 1.
- 14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank D is within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.
- 15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank D.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 12 F. 2.3 Shutdown Bank C
- 1) SELECT Shutdown Bank C on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 1.
- 3) INSERT Shutdown Bank C one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank C. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).
NOTE Annunciator 1 A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT", may alarm in the following step.
- 4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank C to 231 steps on the Group Step Counter.
- 5) RECORD the "withdrawn to 231" Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank C on Table 1.
- 6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.
- 7) INSERT Shutdown Bank C 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).
- 8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 1.
¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank C indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.
- 10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank C to the initial Group Step Counter reading.
- 11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 1.
- 12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank C DRPI reading 222 steps.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 13 NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.
F. 2.3 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank C are at the initial
position recorded TABLE 1.
- 14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank C is within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.
- 15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank C.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 14 F. 2.3 Shutdown Bank B
- 1) SELECT Shutdown Bank B on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 1.
- 3) INSERT Shutdown Bank B one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank B. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).
NOTE Annunciator 1 A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT", may alarm in the following step.
- 4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank B to 231 steps on the Group Step Counters.
- 5) RECORD the "withdrawn to 231" Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank B on Table 1.
- 6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.
- 7) INSERT Shutdown Bank B 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).
- 8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 1.
¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank B indicates movement greater than or equal to
10 steps.
- 10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank B to the initial Group Step Counter reading.
- 11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 1.
- 12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank B DRPI reading 222 steps.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 15 NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.
F. 2.3 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank B are at the initial position recorded TABLE 1.
- 14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank B is within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.
- 15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank B.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 16 F. 2.3 Shutdown Bank A
- 1) SELECT Shutdown Bank A on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 1.
- 3) INSERT Shutdown Bank A one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank A. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).
NOTE Annunciator 1 A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT", may alarm in the following step.
- 4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank A to 231 steps on the Group Step Counters.
- 5) RECORD the "withdrawn to 231" Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank A on Table 1.
- 6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.
- 7) INSERT Shutdown Bank A 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).
- 8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 1.
¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank A indicates movement greater than or equal to
10 steps.
- 10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank A to the initial Group Step Counter reading.
- 11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 1.
- 12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank A DRPI reading 222 steps.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 17 NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.
F. 2.3 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank A are at the initial position recorded TABLE 1.
- 14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank A is within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.
- 15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank A.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 18 F. 2.4 PERFORM the rod movement verification for the Control Rods as follows:
NOTE The Control Banks may be moved in or out at the discretion of the Shift Manager or Designee to meet the requirements of this surveillance. Monitor Tave and Rx Power closely and correct as needed to minimize plant transients.
NOTE If a Control Bank is fully inserted, RECORD only the Group 1 & 2 Initial Step Counter readings and MARK any other columns on the Data Table for the fully inserted Control Bank "N/A". DO NOT perform the rod exercise for that Bank. The surveillance is still considered "Complete" as Tech Specs require testing only those rods NOT fully inserted in the core.
NOTE The Bank order of the Control Rod movement verifications may be done in any order. The preferred order is Control Bank A, B, C, D to facilitate final Tave adjustment.
NOTE Based on the RIL figure in the COLR the sequence, overlap, and rod insertion limits are satisfied as long as the Control Bank is above 224 steps as indicated by the bank demand step counters and verified by DRPI. Westinghouse has suggested that performing an insertion step, as opposed to a withdraw step, as the first step may minimize the probability of a dropped rod during rod movement.
Control Bank A
- 1) SELECT Control Bank A on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 2.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 19 NOTE Annunciators 1 A6, "ROD BANK LO
-2 INSERTION LIMIT", and 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT", may alarm in the following steps.
NOTE If failures associated with DRPI do not allow verification of 10 steps indicated movement, insertion up to 21 steps is allowed, provided DRPI vs. demanded position remains within +/-
12 steps. F. 2.4 3) INSERT Control Bank A one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 2 for Control Bank A. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps.)
- 4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Control Bank A to 231 steps on the Group Step Counters.
- 5) RECORD the "withdrawn to 231" Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the selected Control Bank on TABLE 2.
- 6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 20 F. 2.4 7) INSERT Control Bank A 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).
- 8) RECORD the Inserted Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 2.
¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Control Bank A indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.
- 10) WITHDRAW Control Bank A to the Initial Group Step Counter reading. 11) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 2.
- 12) VERIFY Control Bank A DRPI reading 222 steps. NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.
- 13) VERIFY that all rods in Control Bank A are at the initial position recorded on TABLE 2.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 21 F. 2.4 14) PERFORM the following:
a) VERIFY/RECORD that the following annunciators are CLEAR: 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO
-2 INSERTION LIMIT" 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT" 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT" b) IF one or more of the annunciators listed above have not cleared, PERFORM the following corrective actions, (otherwise N/A):
(1) With Reactor Engineering concurrence, WITHDRAW rods a maximum of 2 additional steps, not to exceed 231 steps, in an attempt to clear the alarm(s).
(2) RESTORE rods to the Initial Group Step Counter reading. 15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 2 for Control Bank A.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 22 F. 2.4 Control Bank B
- 1) SELECT Control Bank B on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 2.
NOTE Annunciators 1 A6, "ROD BANK LO
-2 INSERTION LIMIT", and 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT", may alarm in the following steps.
NOTE If failures associated with DRPI do not allow verification of 10 steps indicated movement, insertion up to 21 steps is allowed, provided DRPI vs. demanded position remains within +/-
12 steps. 3) INSERT Control Bank B one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 2 for Control Bank B. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps.)
- 4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Control Bank B to 231 steps on the Group Step Counters.
- 5) RECORD the "withdrawn to 231" Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the selected Control Bank on TABLE 2.
- 6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.
- 7) INSERT Control Bank B 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).
- 8) RECORD the Inserted Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 2.
¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Control Bank B indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 23 F. 2.4 10) WITHDRAW Control Bank B to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.
- 11) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 2.
- 12) VERIFY Control Bank B DRPI reading 222 steps. NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.
- 13) VERIFY that all rods in Control Bank B are at the initial position recorded on TABLE 2.
- 14) PERFORM the following:
a) VERIFY/RECORD that the following annunciators are CLEAR: 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO
-2 INSERTION LIMIT" 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT" 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT" b) IF one or more of the annunciators listed above have not cleared, PERFORM the following corrective actions, (otherwise N/A):
(1) With Reactor Engineering concurrence, WITHDRAW rods a maximum of 2 additional steps, not to exceed 231 steps, in an attempt to clear the alarm(s).
(2) RESTORE rods to the Initial Group Step Counter reading. 15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 2 for Control Bank B.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 24 F. 2.4 Control Bank C
- 1) SELECT Control Bank C on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 2.
NOTE Annunciators 1 A6, "ROD BANK LO
-2 INSERTION LIMIT", and 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT", may alarm in the following steps.
NOTE If failures associated with DRPI do not allow verification of 10 steps indicated movement, insertion up to 21 steps is allowed, provided DRPI vs. demanded position remains within +/-
12 steps. 3) INSERT Control Bank C one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 2 for Control Bank C. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps.)
- 4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Control Bank C to 231 steps on the Group Step Counters.
- 5) RECORD the "withdrawn to 231" Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the selected Control Bank on TABLE 2.
- 6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.
- 7) INSERT Control Bank C 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).
- 8) RECORD the Inserted Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 2.
¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Control Bank C indicates movement greater than or equal to
10 steps.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 25 F. 2.4 10) WITHDRAW Control Bank C to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.
- 11) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 2.
- 12) VERIFY Control Bank C DRPI reading 222 steps. NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.
- 13) VERIFY that all rods in Control Bank C are at the initial position recorded on TABLE 2.
- 14) PERFORM the following:
a) VERIFY/RECORD that the following annunciators are CLEAR: 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO
-2 INSERTION LIMIT" 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT" 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT" b) IF one or more of the annunciators listed above have not cleared, PERFORM the following corrective actions, (otherwise N/A):
(1) With Reactor Engineering concurrence, WITHDRAW rods a maximum of 2 additional steps, not to exceed 231 steps, in an attempt to clear the alarm(s).
(2) RESTORE rods to the Initial Group Step Counter reading. 15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 2 for Control Bank C.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 26 F. 2.4 Control Bank D
- 1) SELECT Control Bank D on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank D on TABLE 2.
NOTE Annunciators 1 A6, "ROD BANK LO
-2 INSERTION LIMIT", and 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT", may alarm in the following steps.
NOTE If failures associated with DRPI do not allow verification of 10 steps indicated movement, insertion up to 21 steps is allowed, provided DRPI vs. demanded position remains within +/-
12 steps. 3) INSERT Control Bank D one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 2 for Control Bank D. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps.)
NOTE Control Bank D should NOT be withdrawn past 231 steps. It is desired to withdraw Control Bank D 10 to 15 steps, if possible.
- 4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Control Bank D 10 to 15 steps, not to exceed 231 steps on the Group Step Counters.
a) RECORD the target CBD position _________ for withdrawal.
b) WITHDRAW Control Bank D to the target value.
- 5) RECORD the "withdrawn" Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the selected Control Bank on TABLE 2.
- 6) INSERT Control Bank D 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).
- 7) RECORD the Inserted Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank D on TABLE 2.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 27 ¢ F. 2.4 8) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Control Bank D indicates movement greater than or equal to
10 steps.
- 9) WITHDRAW Control Bank D to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.
- 10) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank D on TABLE 2.
NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.
- 11) VERIFY that all rods in Control Bank D are at the initial position recorded on TABLE 2.
- 12) PERFORM the following:
a) VERIFY/RECORD that the following annunciators are CLEAR: 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO
-2 INSERTION LIMIT" 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT" 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT" b) IF one or more of the annunciators listed above have not cleared, PERFORM the following corrective actions, (otherwise N/A):
(1) With Reactor Engineering concurrence, WITHDRAW rods a maximum of 2 additional steps, not to exceed 231 steps, in an attempt to clear the alarm(s).
(2) RESTORE rods to the Initial Group Step Counter reading. 13) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 2 for Control Bank D.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 28 F. 3.0 ESTABLISHING NEW ARO PARK POSITION
_____ 3.1 VERIFY all applicable PREREQUISITES, PRECAUTIONS, and LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS are satisfactorily addressed.
3.2 VERIFY/TRANSFER rod control to MANUAL and ESTABLISH Average Tave/Tref within 1 F: _____ a. VERIFY/PLACE the Rod Bank Select switch to the MAN position.
_____ b. ESTABLISH Tave within 1°F of Tref using control rods, as needed.
_____ c. RECORD the new ARO park position from BwCB
-1, Table 4
-1 or Reactor Engineering _______________ steps.
3.3 PERFORM
the following to establish the ARO park position for the Shutdown Rods: NOTE Annunciator 1 A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT", may alarm in the following steps.
NOTE The Bank order of the Shutdown Rod movement verifications may be done in any order. The preferred order is Shutdown Bank E, D, C, B, A.
Shutdown Bank E:
- 1) SELECT Shutdown Bank E on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 3.
- 3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Shutdown Bank E one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank E.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 29 F. 3.3 4) MOVE Shutdown Bank E to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4
-1 on the Group Step Counter.
- 5) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.
- 6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 3.
- 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Shutdown Bank E are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3.
- 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank E.
Shutdown Bank D:
- 1) SELECT Shutdown Bank D on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 3.
- 3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Shutdown Bank D one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded per TABLE 3.
- 4) MOVE Shutdown Bank D to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1 on the Group Step Counter.
- 5) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.
- 6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 3.
- 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Shutdown Bank D are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3.
- 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank D.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 30 F. 3.3 Shutdown Bank C:
- 1) SELECT Shutdown Bank C on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI
readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 3.
- 3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Shutdown Bank C one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 3.
- 4) MOVE Shutdown Bank C to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4
-1 on the Group Step Counter.
- 5) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.
- 6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 3.
- 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Shutdown Bank C are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3.
- 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank C.
Shutdown Bank B:
- 1) SELECT Shutdown Bank B on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 3.
- 3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Shutdown Bank B one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 3.
- 4) MOVE Shutdown Bank B to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4
-1 on the Group Step Counters.
- 5) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.
- 6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 3.
- 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Shutdown Bank B are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3.
- 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank B.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 31 F. 3.3 Shutdown Bank A:
- 1) SELECT Shutdown Bank A on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 3.
- 3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Shutdown Bank A one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 3.
- 4) MOVE Shutdown Bank A to the ARO park position listed in BwCB
-1, Table 4
-1 on the Group Step Counters.
- 5) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.
- 6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 3.
- 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Shutdown Bank A are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3.
- 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank A.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 32 F. 3.4 PERFORM the following to establish the new ARO park position for the Control Rods: NOTE The Bank order to establish the ARO park position should be Control Bank A, B, and then C (if at the ARO position).
Control Bank A
- 1) SELECT Control Bank A on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 4.
- 3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Control Bank A one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 4.
- 4) MOVE Control Bank A to the ARO park position listed in BwCB
-1, Table 4-1.
- 5) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 4.
- 6) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.
- 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Control Bank A are at the ARO position.
- 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 4 for Control Bank A.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 33 F. 3.4 Control Bank B
- 1) SELECT Control Bank B on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 4.
- 3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Control Bank B one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 4.
- 4) MOVE Control Bank B to the ARO park position listed in BwCB
-1, Table 4-1.
- 5) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 4.
- 6) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.
- 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Control Bank B are at the ARO position.
- 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 4 for Control Bank B.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 34 F. 3.4 Control Bank C
- 1) SELECT Control Bank C on the Rod Bank Select switch.
- 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 4.
- 3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Control Bank C one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 4.
- 4) MOVE Control Bank C to the ARO park position listed in BwCB
-1, Table 4-1.
- 5) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 4.
- 6) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.
- 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Control Bank C are at the ARO position.
- 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 4 for Control Bank C.
_____ 3.5 VERIFY/PLACE the Rod Bank Select switch in MANUAL.
_____ 3.6 PERFORM Attachment B, Thumbwheel Switch Setting and Checkout for the new ARO park position:
_____ 3.7 NOTIFY Site IT to ADJUST the computer points as required for the new ARO position.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 35 F. 4.0 ROD CONTROL RESTORATION NOTE The following step is performed to ensure that the Bank Overlap Unit reflects the proper control bank position. If the controlling bank cannot be restored to its original position due to plant conditions, then RESET the Bank Overlap Unit to match the present controlling bank position prior to continuing with step 4.1
_____ 4.1 VERIFY the controlling Control Bank has been returned to its original position, using any of the following methods (N/A if rods cannot be restored due to plant conditions):
Tave within 1°F of Tref , no adjustment required.
Boration.
Dilution.
Turbine load changes.
_____ 4.2 VERIFY/PLACE Rod Bank Select switch to the MANUAL position.
_____ 4.3 VERIFY Low Power Interlock C
-5 NOT LIT.
VERIFICATION _____
_____ 4.4. VERIFY Tave/Tref deviation 1F, if returning Rod Bank Select switch to AUTO.
4.5 VERIFY
the following annunciators are CLEAR:
_____ a. 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO
-2 INSERTION LIMIT".
VERIFICATION _____
_____ b. 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT".
VERIFICATION _____
_____ c. 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT".
VERIFICATION _____
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 36 F ____ 4.6 VERIFY/PLACE the Rod Bank Select switch to the AUTO or MANUAL position as directed by Shift Manager or designee based on plant conditions.
AUTO/MANUAL VERIFICATION _____
NOTE The following step may be marked N/A at the discretion of the SM/Designee if the RD cabinet ductwork is required to remain removed for additional surveillances of other RD work.
_____ 4.7 VERIFY all required RD cabinet ductwork has been reinstalled.
G. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
- 1. For a complete surveillance, all Rods required to be tested have been determined OPERABLE by movement of at least 10 steps in any one direction.
- 2. For a partial surveillance, each Rod tested has been determined OPERABLE by movement of at least 10 steps in any one direction.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 37 ATTACHMENT A ROD BANK REALIGNMENT NOTE The following steps are to be used in the event a group of control rods is withdrawn past 231 steps. If the affected rod is in Shutdow n Banks C, D, or E, GO TO Step 10.
- 1. RECORD the following information:
Affected Bank:
________________________
Group 1 step counter reading:
________________________
Group 2 step counter reading:
________________________
- 2. RECORD the As Found condition of the Master Cycler (Card A 105 1RD07J):
DS1 light status:
ON/OFF (circle status)
DS2 light status:
ON/OFF (circle status)
DS3 light status:
ON/OFF (circle status)
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 38 ATTACHMENT A (cont.)
ROD BANK REALIGNMENT
NOTE DS 1 and DS 2 light status is irrelevant in the following step. DS 3 light lit is sufficient to VERIFY Master Cycler Status.
- 3. PERFORM either of the following:
VERIFY the Master Cycler is set for Group 2 to move inward next.
DS 3 light LIT on Card A 105 at 1RD07J ADJUST the Master Cycler using the MC+1 pushbutton so that Group 2 will move inward next.
DS 3 light LIT on Card A 105 at 1RD07J
- 4. RECORD the As Left condition of the Master Cycler:
DS1 light status:
ON/OFF (circle status)
DS2 light status:
ON/OFF (circle status)
DS3 light status:
ON/OFF (circle status)
- 5. SET both group step counters for the affected Bank to 231 steps.
- 6. RECORD the following information:
Affected Bank:
______________________
Group 1 step counter reading:
______________________
steps Group 2 step counter reading:
______________________ steps
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 39 ATTACHMENT A (cont.)
ROD BANK REALIGNMENT
- 7. VERIFY/ADJUST the affected bank computer point to match the affected bank step counters: Rod Bank Step Counter on 1PM05J Computer Point CONT A Grp 1 ______________
Grp 2 ______________
U0049 _______________
CONT B Grp 1 ______________
Grp 2 ______________
U0050 _______________
CONT C Grp 1 ______________
Grp 2 ______________
U0051 _______________
CONT D Grp 1 ______________
Gr p 2 ______________
U0052 _______________
SHUTDOWN A Grp 1 ______________
Grp 2 ______________
U0053 _______________
SHUTDOWN B Grp 1 ______________
Grp 2 ______________
U0054 _______________
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 40 ATTACHMENT A (cont.)
ROD BANK REALIGNMENT
- 8. PERFORM the following:
- a. MANUALLY insert the affected bank to 228 steps.
- b. VERIFY Group 2 of the affected bank inserts before Group 1.
- c. MAUALLY INSERT/WITHDRAW the affected bank to the ARO position (BwCB-1 Table 4-1) 9. IF the affected group was in a control bank, PERFORM the following at 1RD08J:
- a. PLACE the P/A Display switch to the affected bank position.
- b. IF required, ADJUST the setting for the affected bank to actual rod position:
- 1) HOLD the MANUAL/AUTO switch in the MANUAL position.
- 2) MOMENTARILY DEPRESS the UP/DOWN pushbutton to match the actual position of the affected bank.
- 3) RELEASE the MANUAL/AUTO switch.
- 4) RETURN to Main Body step in effect.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 41 ATTACHMENT A (cont.)
ROD BANK REALIGNMENT
NOTE The following steps are used to align Shutdown Banks C, D, or E only.
- 10. RECORD the following As Found information:
Affected Bank:
______________________
Step counter reading:
______________________ steps
- 11. VERIFY the affected bank step counter greater than 231 steps.
- 12. SET the step counter to 231 steps for the affected bank.
- 13. MANUALLY insert the affected bank to 228 steps.
- 14. VERIFY proper operation of the affected bank.
- 15. MANUALLY INSERT/WITHDRAW the affected bank to the ARO position (BwCB-1 Table 4-1). 16. RECORD the following As Left information:
Affected Bank:
______________________
Step counter reading:
______________________ steps
- 17. RETURN to Main Body step in effect.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 42 ATTACHMENT B THUMBWHEEL SWITCH SETTING AND CHECKOUT
This section sets the thumbwheel switches to the desired full out axial park position.
This section also verifies the correct setting of these switches by simulation Bank Overlap.
- 1. The REM or designee will RECORD the desired full out axial park position of the control rods and the desired As Left thumbwheel switch settings below. See Attachment C as a guide for required switch settings.
Full out axial park position: _________ steps.
S1- _______ S2- _______ S3- _______ S4- _______ S5- _______ S6- _______ ________/________
Initial Date
- 2. RECORD the As Found thumbwheel switch settings for the Bank Overlap in 1RD07J.
S1- _______ S2- _______ S3- _______ S4- _______ S5- _______ S6- _______ ________/________
Initial Date
- 3. SELECT/ENSURE the Bank Selector Switch is in MANUAL (to allow Bank Overlap to function).
________/________
Initial Date CAUTION The thumbwheel switches are designed for best operation by rotating the switches down.
4 CYCLE the thumbwheel switches S1 through S6 through complete rotation.
This should include the units, tens, and hundreds positions for all switches.
________/________
Initial Date 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 43 ATTACHMENT B (cont.)
THUMBWHEEL SWITCH SETTING AND CHECKOUT
- 5. SET the thumbwheel switches S1 through S6 to the positions listed in step 1.
________/________ Initial Date
- 6. RECORD the As Found value of Bank Overlap step counter in Logic Cabinet.
AS FOUND ______________
________/________
Initial Date
- 7. RESET the Step Counter in the Logic Cabinet by DEPRESSING the reset button on the Bank Overlap Panel. ________/________
Initial Date a. OBSERVE the step position indication resets to '000'.
________/________
Initial Date NOTE Steps 8 and 9 are performed simultaneously.
- 8. Using the "+1 Step" pushbutton in the Logic Cabinet, SIMULATE the rods being stepped out by DEPRESSING the "+1 Step" pushbutton as needed.
________/________
Initial Date 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 44 ATTACHMENT B (cont.)
THUMBWHEEL SWITCH SETTING AND CHECKOUT
- 9. OBSERVE the indications of proper bank start and step positions. This may be done by
observing DS1, DS2, DS3, and DS4 indicators on the Bank Overlap Decoder card A206 in the Logic Cabinet
- a. The control bank select lights on the Bank Overlap Display (BOD) card (A206 in 1RD07J show proper selection.
0 BOU S1 DS1 only S1 BOU S2 DS1 and DS2 S2 BOU S3 DS2 only S3 BOU S4 DS2 and DS3 S4 BOU S5 DS3 only S5 BOU S6 DS3 and DS4
S6 BOU DS4 only ________/________
Initial Date 10. RETURN the step counter in the Logic Cabinet to its As Found value from step 6 using the "+1 step" push button.
AS FOUND ___________
AS LEFT ___________
________/________
Initial Date 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 45 ATTACHMENT C ROD WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION BANK OVERLAP SEQUENCE
225 Step Full Out Axial Park Position S1 - 115 S2
- 225 S3
- 230 S4 - 340 S5
- 345 S6
- 455 (Bank Overlap
- 110 steps Bank Separation
- 115 steps)
226 Step Full Out Axial Park Position S1 - 115 S2
- 226 S3
- 230 S4 - 341 S5
- 345 S6
- 456 (Bank Overlap
- 111 steps Bank Separation
- 115 steps)
227 Step Full Out Axial Park Position
S1 - 115 S2
- 227 S3
- 230 S4 - 342 S5
- 345 S6
- 457 (Bank Overlap
- 112 steps Bank Separation
- 115 steps)
228 Step Full Out Axial Park Position S1 - 115 S2
- 228 S3
- 230 S4 - 343 S5
- 345 S6
- 458 (Bank Overlap
- 113 steps Bank Separation
- 115 steps)
229 Step Full Out Axial Park Position S1 - 115 S2
- 229 S3
- 230 S4 - 344 S5
- 345 S6
- 459 (Bank Overlap
- 114 steps Bank Separation
- 115 steps)
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 46 ATTACHMENT C (cont.)
ROD WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION BANK OVERLAP SEQUENCE
Directions and Formulas for calculating Bank Overlap unit Switch Settings:
- 1. Obtain the desired Bank Separation and Bank Overlap values from Reactivity/Nuclear Engineering, as supported in the applicable COLR.
- 2. Bank Separation must be at least one greater than Bank Overlap; these values may never be equal.
- 3. Bank Separation must be at least (Full out axial park position)/2+1).
- 4. S1 (CBB start) = Bank Separation value.
- 5. S2 (CBA stop) = S1 + Bank Overlap value = Full out axial park position.
- 6. S3 (CBC start) = 2(S1).
- 7. S4 (CBB stop) = S1 + S2.
- 8. S5 (CBD start) = 3(S1)
- 9. S6 (CBC stop) = S1 + S4
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 47 ATTACHMENT C (cont.)
ROD WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION BANK OVERLAP SEQUENCE
231 Step Full Out Axial Park Position S1 - 116 S2
- 231 S3
- 232 S4 - 347 S5
- 348 S6
- 463 (Bank Overlap
- 115 steps Bank Separation
- 116 steps)
Thumbwheel Switch Setting/Function CBA CBB CBC CBD WITHDRAW -- - 000 Start CBA Out 0 0 0 0 S1 - 116 Start CBB Out 116 0 0 0 S2 - 231 Stop CBA Out 231 115 0 0 S3 - 232 Start CBC Out 231 116 0 0 S4 - 347 Stop CBB Out 231 231 115 0 S5 - 348 Start CBD Out 231 231 116 0 S6 - 463 Stop CBC Out 231 231 231 115 -- - 464 Movin g CBD 116 steps 231 231 231 116 INSERT S6 - 463 Start CBC In 231 231 231 115 S5 - 348 Stop CBD In 231 231 116 0 S4 - 347 Start CBB In 231 231 115 0 S3 - 232 Stop CBC In 231 116 0 0 S2 - 231 Start CBA In 231 115 0 0 S1 - 116 Stop CBB In 116 0 0 0 -- - 000 Stop CBA at 0 steps 0 0 0 0
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use 48 ATTACHMENT D Blown Fuse Illustration
Blown Fuse Indicator pictured on the left provides an indication of a blown fuse (indicator is extended).
Blown Fuse Indicator pictured on the right provides a normal view (indicator is not extended, fuse is not blown).
(Final) 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use D-2 TABLE 1 - SHUTDOWN ROD BANKS ROD BANK ROD NO. Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Inserted DRPI
> 10 Steps Final Position GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI S/D E H4 ________ E-1 ________ E-1 ________ E-1 ________ E-1 D8 H12 M8 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS?
Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ##
¢ Y N ## Y N ROD BANK ROD NO. Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Inserted DRPI
> 10 Steps Final Position GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI S/D D C5 _____ D-1 _____ D-1 _____ D-1 _____ D-1 E13 N11 L3 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS?
Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ##
¢ Y N ## Y N ROD BANK ROD NO. Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Inserted DRPI > 10 Steps Final Position GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI S/D C E3 _____ C-1 _____ C-1 _____ C-1 _____ C-1 C11 L13 N5 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ##
¢ Y N ## Y N ROD BANK ROD NO. Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Inserted DRPI
> 10 Steps Final Position GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STE P COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI S/D B G3 _____ B-1 _____ B-1 _____ B-1 _____ B-1 C9 J13 N7 C7 _____ B-2 _____ B-2 _____ B-2 _____ B-2 G13 N9 J3 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS
? Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ##
¢ Y N ## Y N ## "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Shutdown Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.
Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.5 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use D-3 TABLE 1 - SHUTDOWN ROD BANKS (Cont.)
ROD BANK ROD NO. Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Inserted DRPI
> 10 Steps Final Position GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI S/D A D2 _____ A-1 _____ A-1 ______ A-1 _____ A-1 B12 M14 P4 B4 _____ A-2 _____ A-2 _____ A-2 _____ A-2 D14 P12 M2 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS?
Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ##
¢ Y N ## Y N ## "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Shutdown Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position. Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.5 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use D-4 TABLE 2 - CONTROL ROD BANKS ROD BANK ROD NO. Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Inserted DRPI
> 10 Steps Final Position GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI CONT A H6 ________ A-1 ________ A-1 ________ A-1 ________ A-1 H10 F8 ________ A-2 ________ A-2 ________ A-2 ________ A-2 K8 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS?
RODS RETURNED TO ORIGINAL POSITION?
¢ Y N ** ## Y N ANNUNCIATORS 1 A6, 1-10-A7 and 1-10-B6 ARE CLEAR?
Or corrective action taken?
Y N N/A Y N ROD BANK ROD NO. Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Inserted DRPI
> 10 Steps Final Position GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI CONT B F2 _____ B-1 _____ B-1 _____ B-1 _____ B-1 B10 K14 P6 B6 _____ B-2 _____ B-2 _____ B-2 _____ B-2 F14 P10 K2 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS?
RODS RETURNED TO ORIGINAL POSITION?
¢ Y N ** ## Y N ANNUNCIATORS 1 A6, 1-10-A7 and 1-10-B6 ARE CLEAR?
Or corrective action taken?
Y N N/A Y N ROD BANK ROD NO. Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Inserted DRPI
> 10 Steps Final Position GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI CONT C H2 _____ C-1 _____ C-1 ______ C-1 _____ C-1 B8 H14 P8 F6 _____ C-2 _____ C-2 _____ C-2 _____ C-2 F10 K10 K6 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS?
RODS RETURNED TO ORIGINAL POSITION?
¢ Y N ** ## Y N ANNUNCIATORS 1 A6, 1-10-A7 and 1-10-B6 ARE CLEAR?
Or corrective action taken?
Y N N/A Y N ## "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Control Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position. Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.
- Not Required if this is the controlling Control Rod Bank. Ensure the Rod insertion limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied.
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use D-5 TABLE 2 - CONTROL ROD BANKS (Cont.)
ROD BANK ROD NO. Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Inserted DRPI
> 10 Steps Final Position GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI GROUP STEP COUNTER DRPI CONT D D4 _____ D-1 _____ D-1 _____ D-1 _____ D-1 M12 D12 M4 _____ D-2 _____ D-2 _____ D-2 _____ D-2 H 8 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS?
RODS RETURNED TO ORIGINAL POSITION?
¢ Y N ## Y N ANNUNCIATORS 1 A6, 1-10-A7 and 1-10-B6 ARE CLEAR?
Or corrective action taken?
Y N N/A Y N ## "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Control Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position. Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.
- Not Required if this is the controlling Control Rod Bank. Ensure the Rod insertion limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied.
COMMENTS:
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use D-6 TABLE 3 - SHUTDOWN ROD BANKS ROD BANK ROD NO. INITIAL POSITION FINAL POSITION GROUP DEMAND DRPI GROUP DEMAND DRPI Shutdown E H4 _____ E-1 _____ E-1 D8 H12 M8 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB
-1, Table 4
-1? ¢ Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ##
- ## Y N Shutdown D C5 _____ D-1 _____ D-1 E13 N11 L3 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB
-1, Table 4
-1? ¢ Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR?
- ** ## Y N Shutdown C E3 _____ C-1 _____ C-1 C11 L13 N5 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB
-1, Table 4
-1? ¢ Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ##
- ## Y N Shutdown B G3 _____ B-1 _____ B-1 C9 J13 N7 C7 _____ B-2 _____ B-2 G13 N9 J3 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB
-1, Table 4
-1? ¢ Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ##
- ## Y N Shutdown A D2 _____ A-1 _____ A-1 B12 M14 P4 B4 _____ A-2 _____ A-2 D14 P12 M2 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB
-1, Table 4
-1? ¢ Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ##
- ## Y N ## "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Shutdown Rod Bank or completing this surveillance.
DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.
Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.5 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response. COMMENTS:
1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use D-7 TABLE 4 - CONTROL ROD BANKS ROD BANK ROD NO. INITIAL POSITION FINAL POSITION GROUP DEMAND DRPI GROUP DEMAND DRP I CONT A H6 _____ A-1 _____ A-1 H10 F8 _____ A-2 _____ A-2 K8 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB
-1 Table 4-1? ## Y N CONT B F2 _____ B-1 _____ B-1 B10 K14 P6 B6 _____ B-2 _____ B-2 F14 P10 K2 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB
-1 Table 4-1? ** ## Y N CONT C H2 _____ C-1 _____ C-1 B8 H14 P8 F6 _____ C-2 _____ C-2 F10 K10 K6 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1 Table 4-1? ** ## Y N (N/A if a controlling bank.)
- "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Control Rod Bank or completing this surveillance.
DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position. Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.
- Not Required if this is the controlling Control Rod Bank. Ensure the Rod insertion limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied.
COMMENTS:
(Final)
SIM-223 1 TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an Assist NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 is in Mode 4.
. 4. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 is required to be performed to verify operability of 1SI8806.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit 1 US has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5, SVAG Valve Stroke Surveillance for 1SI8806, steps F.1 and F.3.
- 2. Inform the Unit 1 US when you have completed the surveillance.
- 3. Applicable LCOs have been entered. BwOP SI
-100 has been completed.
SIM-223 2 TASK TITLE: 1SI8806 SVAG Valve Stroke Surveillance JPM No.: SIM
-223 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4E.AM
-23 K&A No.: 006000A4.07 TASK No.: R
-AM-068 K&A IMP: 4.4/4.4 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)
EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 3, 4, 5 JPM TIME:
___
MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 15 MINUTES ALTERNATE PATH: YES
EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5, Rev. 5 MATERIALS:
- 1. Marked up copy of 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5, Rev 5. 2. Digital stopwatch.
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. 1SI8806 stroke tested per surveillance.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an Assist NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 is in Mode 4.
- 3. Maintenance has recently completed packing adjustment of 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv. 4. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 is required to be performed to verify operability of 1SI8806.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit 1 US has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5, SVAG Valve Stroke Surveillance for 1SI8806, steps F.1 and F.3. (Cue: Hand examinee copy of surveillance).
- 2. Inform the Unit 1 US when you have completed the surveillance.
- 3. Applicable LCOs have been entered. BwOP SI
-100 has been completed.
SIM-223 3 RECORD START TIME_____________
Note: Stroke times are determined using the dual valve indications on the MCB. PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 1. Verify initial conditions (steps F.1.1 through F.1.3)
CUE: If asked, it is not desired to perform 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-6 Review Prerequisites Precautions Limitations and Actions.
Verify IST coordinator
listed on cover sheet Obtain digital stopwatch.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. Record as found position of 1SI8806 (step F.3.1)
Determines and records 1SI8806 as Open SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *3. Perform CLOSED stroke of 1SI8806 (in accordance with steps outlined in Attachment B).
Note: Close stroke time for 1SI8806 during this JPM should be within the alert and operable limits, (i.e. 6.9
-
11.5 sec.). If the examinee determines a stroke time outside this band then give the following cue.
Cue: Display stopwatch cue #1, JPM stopwatch at 00:10.00 (10.00 seconds). Cue: If asked, the Unit Supervisor directs you to perform the Open Stroke Timing Step when opening 1SI8806. Perform the following:
o Verify open 1SI8806 Simultaneously start the
stopwatch and close 1SI8806. Stop the stopwatch when 1SI8806 indicates closed. Record the Stroke Closed Test Time.
o Record 1SI8806 MLB status light indication.
o Verify 1SI8806 indicates closed on 1PM06J. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
SIM-223 4 *4. Perform OPEN stroke of 1SI8806 (in accordance with steps outlined in Attachment A).
Note: First open stroke time for 1SI8806 during this JPM should be between the alert and operable limits, (i.e. 11.8
-14.1 sec.). If the examinee determines a stroke time outside this band then give the following cue.
Cue: Display stopwatch cue #2, JPM stopwatch at 00:13.00 (13.00 seconds). Cue: When informed as US, acknowledge valve stroke time exceeds alert limit (when informed) Perform the following:
o Verify close 1SI8806 Simultaneously start the stopwatch and open 1SI8806. Stop the stopwatch when 1SI8806 indicates open. Record the Stroke Open Test Time.
o Record 1SI8806 MLB status light indication.
o Verify 1SI8806 indicates open on 1PM06J. Determine the open test time is within the OPERABLE Limits.
o Check the YES block in the VER OPER section to indicate that 1SI8806 has been verified operable. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
Note: Alternate path begins here
- 5. Determine 1SI8806 open stroke time is NOT within alert limit and
perform valve stroke retest.
Cue: When informed as US, acknowledge valve stroke time exceeds alert limit (when informed) Note: Second open stroke time for 1SI8806 during this JPM should be within the alert and operable limits, (i.e. 6.9-11.5 sec.). If the examinee determines a stroke time outside this band then give the following cue.
Cue: Display stopwatch cue #3, JPM stopwatch at 00:10.00 (10.00 seconds). Cue : As US acknowledge need for generating IR and ER
-AA-321 to document first open stoke test
time. Perform the following:
Determine the opening test time is within the operability limits, but not within ALERT for min time limit o May inform US of problem at this point.
Re-CLOSES valve.
Simultaneously starts the stopwatch and opens 1SI8806.
Stop the stopwatch when 1SI8806 indicates
open. Record the stroke open retest time.
Determine the open retest time is within the alert and operability (OPER) Limits.
o Inform US that an IR needs to be generated to the IST coordinator documenting the initial open test results. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 6. Acknowledge completion of surveillance.
Inform the Unit 1 US when you have completed the surveillance.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
SIM-200 5 (CUE:) THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME ___
_____________
SIM-223 6 SIMULATOR SETUP GUIDE:
Verify/perform TQ
-BR-201-0113, BRAIDWOOD TRAINING DEPARTMENT SIMULATOR EXAMINATION SECURITY ACTIONS CHECKLIST.
Establish the conditions of IC 26, mode 4.
Close SVAG valve MCC Feed Breakers
Copy file "sim223.cae" to s:\opensim\monitor\examadmin (this must be done since the "cae" file will not run properly from a pen drive)
Run "sim223setup.cae" from disk
Complete items on Simulator Ready for Training Checklist
Place simulator in RUN.
COMMENTS: Provide copy of 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Ensure stop watch is available (Final)
WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61 ATTACHMENT 10 SURVEILLANCE WO DISPOSITION SHEET (APPLICABLE TO MID
-WEST SITES ONLY)
Page 1 of 1 Unit: _1__ Procedure: PMID/RQ: ______1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5____ 123456____ Work Order #:
__ N/APMID/RQ Title: ____________
UNIT ONE SAFETY INJECTION SYSTEM SVAG VALVE STROKE SURVPMID/RQ Due Date: _______ N/A________ PMID/RQ Late Date: N/A Signature/Authorization Approval Review:
Name Date Shift Authorization to Start Work:
__Time _Joe Supervisor
______ Today Work Start ed __________________________
________ ________ 5 min ago Work Stopped:
__________________________
________ ________ Supv Review of Work Completion:
__________________________
________ ________ ANI Review of work package:
__________________________
________ ________ Surveillance Found Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO Surveillance Left Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO ("Work Started" date (above shall beComplete one of the following:
the credit date unless otherwise explained)
Verify Credit Surveillance Credit Date per another WO# Below: If crediting 'per another WO', verify credit date
_______ is 'Work Started' date of referenced WO.
_________ Complete Sat
- Credit Surveillance Complete w/ Portions Unsat
- Credit Surveillance No Work Performed
- Credit Surveillance Failed - Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)
No Work Performed
- Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)
Comments (partial surveillance) PMT 1SI8806 ADDITIONAL REVIEW OF RESULTS (IF REQUIRED)
__ IST Coordinator
____________________
____________________________________
________ __ ____________________________________
________ ____________________
____________________________________
________ Title Signature Date WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 1 COMMON TRAIN UNIT ONE SAFETY INJECTION SYSTEM SVAG VALVE STROKE SURVEILLANCE A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY The purpose of this procedure is to verify that the Safety Injection System (SVAG) valves stroke within their specified time when tested pursuant to Tech Spec 5.5.8. Testing will be performed after any maintenance affecting valve operability and is applicable for MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
B. REFERENCES
- 1. Tech Spec LCOs:
- a. 3.4.6 d. 3.4.3
- b. 3.4.7 e. 3.5.2
- c. 3.4.8 f. 3.5.3 2. Tech Spec Surveillance Requirement: 5.5.8
- 3. Station Procedures:
- a. BwOP RH-6, Placing the RH System in Shutdown Cooling.
- b. ER-AA-321, Administrative Requirements for Inservice Testing.
- c. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-3A, Unit One SI System SVAG Valve Stroke Surveillance.
- d. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-6, Common Train SI System Isolation Valve Indication Surveillance.
- e. BwOP SI-100, Energizing and De
-Energizing SVAG Valve MCCs and SI Accumulator Outlet Valves in Modes One Through Four
- 4. Station Drawings: M
-61
- 5. In Service Testing Program Plan for Valves (IST Program).
- 6. EC350458, LCOAR Entry During Testing of 1SI8804B and 1CV8804A during surveillance testing.
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 2 B. 7. AT 562197-03, Regulatory Commitment (Regarding the implementation of administrative controls to ensure that one complete ECCS train can be actuated automatically must be maintained when a logic train is INOPERABLE.)
C. PREREQUISITES
- 1. Receive permission to perform the surveillance from the Shift Manager or designee prior to performance by having the Data Package Cover sheet signed and dated.
- 2. This surveillance must be performed in MODE 5, 6 or defueled. A partial surveillance may be performed in any MODE per the discretion of the Shift Manager or designee.
- 3. A digital stopwatch will be necessary to perform this surveillance.
- 4. The applicable Safety Injection Pump must not be operating.
- 5. Execution of this procedure in Modes 1
-4 may require the use of BwOP SI
-100. SVAG valve MCCs will be energized/de
-energized per BwOP SI
-100. 6. If the Unit is in Mode 4, the 1CV8804A cannot be stroked.
- 7. If the Unit is in Modes 1
-3, both trains of ECCS pumps (SI, CV, and RH) must be operable prior to testing the 1CV8804A.
- 8. If the Unit is in Modes 1
-4, THEN the OPPOSITE train of SSPS and Reactor Trip Breaker (RTB) train must be OPERABLE prior to performing any actions that renders an ECCS train INOPERABLE in order to ensure the regulatory commitments of License Amendment No. 148 are maintained.
D. PRECAUTIONS
- 1. VERIFY that all requirements of the applicable RWP have been met.
- 2. Monitor for potential leak/sneak paths prior to stroking valves.
- 3. If the Unit is in Modes 1
-3, OPENING 1CV8804A renders both trains of ECCS inoperable due to the potential impact on RH pump ECCS flow.
E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS
- 1. As stated in Tech Spec LCOs 3.4.6, 3.4.7, 3.4.8, 3.4.3, 3.5.2, and 3.5.3.
- 2. In the event a valve fails to change position, or the stroke time exceeds the Operability (Oper) Limit during surveillance performance, IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY the Shift Manager or designee to declare the valve inoperable and initiate corrective actions.
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 3 E. 3. In the event a valve stroke time exceeds the Alert Limit, but is less than the Operability (Oper) Limit, the following should be performed:
- a. The Shift Manager or designee must be notified
- b. The valve should be stroked a second time.
- c. INITIATE an IR for the IST Coordinator to analyze and document the initial stroke and the cause of the deviation (per ER
-AA-321). d. If the second stroke time exceeds the Alert Limit, but is less than the Operability (Oper) Limit, then INITIATE an IR for the IST Coordinator to perform a valve evaluation with a 96 hour0.00111 days <br />0.0267 hours <br />1.587302e-4 weeks <br />3.6528e-5 months <br /> time clock per ER
-AA-321. N/A if second stroke is within Alert Limits. The valve is considered operable until the evaluation is complete. The Dequip program is an acceptable tracking method.
- 4. For any valve declared inoperable demonstrate acceptable operation after required corrective action has been taken but before returning the valve to service.
- 5. IF ALARA concerns permit, THEN local stroke timing and local examination of the valve should be performed if Operability Acceptance Criteria (Oper Limit) is not met.
- 6. Per the requirements of the IST Program, Tech Spec 5.5.8, valve stroke time limits SHALL be set up which accurately reflect the way the valve strokes. These times, in some instances, may be more limiting than other Tech Spec values.
Per the IST Program requirements, Tech Spec 5.5.8, these stroke times SHALL be the basis on which the valve is declared inoperable.
- 7. If possible, PERFORM 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-6 (when required) concurrently with this procedure to obtain both valve stroke timing data and indication check documentation.
- 8. EM Department assistance will be required to install jumpers during performance of this surveillance. (Section F.2)
- 9. EC 350458 has determined that 1SI8804B should not be opened if the Unit is in Mode 4 due to the potential impact on the RH train that is operable for LCO 3.5.3. Therefore, the 1SI8804B SHALL not be tested when the Unit is in Mode 4.
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 4 F. MAIN BODY 0.0 SURVEILLANCE OVERVIEW 0.1 The parallel subsection strings are independent of one another so that they may be performed in any order or individually if performance of a partial surveillance is required.
0.2 Parallel
subsections SHALL NOT be performed simultaneously without the permission of the Shift Manager or designee.
0.3 Steps
for timing the valve strokes (Attachments A and B) are repeated for each valve being stroked. Record data from the valve strokes in the appropriate blocks of the table.
0.4 The timing valve strokes may be performed in any order to minimize the number of needless valve strokes.
0.5 The subsections of this surveillance perform the following.
F.1.0 Establish Initial Conditions F.2.0 Stroke test of 1CV8804A, RH Hx 1A PPs Isol Vlv.
F.3.0 Stroke test of 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv.
F.4.0 Stroke test of 1SI8813, SI PPs Miniflow Isol Vlv.
F.5.0 Stroke test of 1SI8835, SI PP to Cold Lets Isol Vlv.
F.6.0 Stroke test of 1SI8840, RH to Hot Legs Isol Vlv.
START 1.0 2.0 3.0 END 5.0 6.0 4.0 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 5 F. 1.0 INITIAL CONDITIONS NOTE Initial each step in the space provided adjacent to the procedure step number AFTER the step has been SUCCESSFULLY completed. Person(s) performing VERIFICATIONS SHALL initial in the space provided following the step.
NOTE "Valve stroke time" is defined as the time duration from the instant of handswitch (or manual relay) actuation until the instant of indication of the valve's intended final position.
_____ 1.1 VERIFY all applicable PREREQUISITES, PRECAUTIONS, and LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS are satisfactorily addressed.
_____ 1.2 VERIFY the IST Coordinator is listed on the Data Package Cover Sheet to review the results.
_____ 1.3 OBTAIN a digital stopwatch.
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 6 F. 2.0 STROKE TEST OF 1CV8804A, RH HX 1A TO CV PPS ISOL VLV.
NOTE VERIFY the 1A RH Pump discharge pressure is below 220 psig to prevent lifting the CV pump suction relief while stroking 1CV8804A.
2.1 RECORD
the "AS FOUND" position of the following equipment (CIRCLE as appropriate):
_____ 1CV8804A, RH HX 1A to CV PPs Isol Vlv.
OPEN/CLOSED
_____ 1SI8811A, Cnmt Sump Isol Vlv.
OPEN/CLOSED
_____ 1RH8701A, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.
OPEN/CLOSED
_____ 1RH8701B, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.
OPEN/CLOSED
_____ 1SI8809A, RH to Cold Legs A & D Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J. OPEN/CLOSED
_____ 1RH8716A, RH Discharge Hdr X
-Tie Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.
OPEN/CLOSED
_____ 1RH01PA, 1A RHR Pump NAC/NAT/PTL NOTE Verify the 1A RH Pump discharge pressure is below 200 psig to prevent lifting the CV pump suction relief while stroking 1CV8804A.
_____ 2.2 VERIFY/PLACE the Train B Residual Heat Removal System in operation to fulfill the shutdown cooling function as requested by the Shift Manager (N/A if shutdown cooling is not required).
_____ 2.3 VERIFY/STOP 1RH01PA, 1A Residual Heat Removal Pum
- p. 2.4 IF the Unit is in Modes 5, 6, or DEFUELED, perform the following:
_____ a. VERIFY the 1A RH Train is NOT REQUIRED to be OPERABLE.
_____ b. PLACE 1RH01PA C/S in PTL.
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 7 NOTE Closing 1RH8701A or 1RH8701B will isolate the "A" Train RH suction relief valve.
PRIOR to performing this action in Modes 4, 5, and 6, with the reactor head installed, verify the requirements of Tech Spec 3.4.9.3 are met
F. 2.5 VERIFY/CLOSE the following:
_____ 1SI8811A, Cnmt Sump Isol Vlv.
One of the following: (Mark "N/A" for valve not manipulated)
_____ 1RH8701A, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.
_____ 1RH8701B, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.
_____ 1CV8804A, RH Hx 1A to CV PPs Isol Vlv.
NOTE The jumper PLACED in the next step will simulate the 1SI8811A OPEN and 1SI8813 CLOSED.
_____ 2.6 IF the Unit is in Modes 1, 2, or 3, ENTER LCO 3.5.2 Condition A.
_____ 2.7 NOTIFY EMD to PLACE a Jumper between Terminal 3 in the FRONT compartment of MCC 131X1 cub J5 and Terminal 28 in the REAR of compartment of MCC 131X1 cub J5.
INSTALLED BY ___________________ DATE/TIME _______/_______
VERIFICATION _____
DATE/TIME _______/_______
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 8 CAUTION Immediately CLOSE 1CV8804A in the event a safety injection actuates during the stroke test.
CAUTION Prior to opening 1CV8804A, verify there are no flow paths created to allow gravity fill of the RWST or VCT to the cavity. (i.e.; RH Discharge Lines)
F ____ 2.8 IF the Unit is in Modes 1, 2, or 3, ENTER LCO 3.5.2 Condition B.
NOTE 1SI8809A is REQUIRED to remain OPEN and DEENERGIZED in MODES 1-4. NOTE Mark Step 2.9 N/A if BOTH RH Trains are REQUIRED to be OPERABLE and it is desired to stroke 1CV8804A with 1SI8809A and 1RH8716A open.
2.9 IF the Unit is in Modes 5, 6, or DEFUELED, perform the following:
_____ a. VERIFY BwOP RH
-6, Attachment A or Attachment B is NOT in progress.
_____ b. CLOSE 1RH8716A, RH Discharge Hdr X
-Tie Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.
_____ c. CLOSE 1SI8809A, RH to Cold Legs A and D Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.
_____ 2.10 PERFORM an OPEN Valve Stroke Test of 1CV8804A at 1PM05J. (PERFORM in accordance with steps outlined in Attachment A, and RECORD in Data Table).
Valve: 1CV8804A Panel: 1PM05J Stroke @ Oper Limits ¢ @ Alert Limits ¢ Status Lights @ Test Time ¢ @ Retest Time ¢ Ver Oper Init OPEN Max 10.0 Min 7.0 Max N/A LIT DARK YES NO
@ All limits and times are in seconds.
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 9 F. 2.11 RESTORE the following to the "AS FOUND" position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate):
_____ 1CV8804A, RH HX 1A to CV PPs Isol Vlv.
OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____
_____ 1SI8809A, RH to Cold Legs A & D Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.
OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____
_____ 1RH8716A, RH Discharge Hdr X
-Tie Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.
OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____
_____ 1SI8811A, Cnmt Sump Isol Vlv.
OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____
_____ 1RH8701A, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.
OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____
_____ 1RH8701B, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.
OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____
_____ 1RH01PA, 1A RHR Pump NAC/NAT/PTL VERIFICATION _____
_____ 2.12 EXIT LCO 3.5.2 Condition B, if entered due to the performance of this procedure.
_____ 2.13 NOTIFY EMD to REMOVE the Jumper that was installed between Terminal 3 in the FRONT compartment of MCC 131X1 cub J5 and Terminal 28 in the REAR of compartment of MCC 131X1 cub J5.
REMOVED BY ___________________
DATE/TIME _______/_______
VERIFICATION _____
DATE/TIME _______/_______
_____ 2.14 EXIT LCO 3.5.2 Condition A, if entered due to the performance of this procedure.
_____ 2.15 RETURN the Residual Heat Removal System to operation as requested by the Shift Manager.
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 10 F. 3.0 STROKE TEST OF 1SI8806, SI PPS SUC FROM RWST ISOL VLV.
Valve: 1SI8806 Panel: 1PM06J Stroke @ Oper Limits ¢ @ Alert Limits ¢ Status Lights @ Test Time ¢ @ Retest Time ¢ Ver Oper Init OPEN Max 14.1 Min 7.1 Max 11.8 LIT DARK YES NO CLOSE Max 13.8 Min 6.9 Max 11.5 LIT DARK YES NO _____ 3.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, (Circle as appropriate):
OPEN/CLOSED
_____ 3.2 PERFORM an OPEN and CLOSED Valve Stroke Test of 1SI8806 at 1PM06J.
(PERFORM in accordance with steps outlined in Attachments A and B and RECORD in the Data Table).
_____ 3.3 RESTORE 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, to the "AS FOUND" position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate).
OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____
4.0 STROKE
TEST OF 1SI8813, SI PPS MINIFLOW ISOL VLV.
Valve: 1SI8813 Panel: 1PM06J Stroke @ Oper Limits ¢ @ Alert Limits ¢ Status Lights @ Test Time ¢ @ Retest Time ¢ Ver Oper Init CLOSE Max 10.0 Min 6.4 Max N/A LIT DARK YES NO
_____ 4.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of 1SI8813, SI PPs Miniflow Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, (Circle as appropriate):
OPEN/CLOSED
_____ 4.2 VERIFY/OPEN 1SI8813 (verify OPEN light indication).
_____ 4.3 PERFORM a CLOSED Valve Stroke Test of 1SI8813 at 1PM06J. (PERFORM in accordance with steps outlined in Attachment B and RECORD in the Data Table).
_____ 4.4 RESTORE 1SI8813, SI PPs Miniflow Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, to the "AS FOUND" position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate).
OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____
@ All limits and times are in seconds.
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 11 F. 5.0 STROKE TEST OF 1SI8835, SI PP TO COLD LEGS ISOL VLV.
Valve: 1SI8835 Panel: 1PM06J Stroke @ Oper Limits ¢ @ Alert Limits ¢ Status Lights @ Test Time ¢ @ Retest Time ¢ Ver Ope r Init OPEN Max 9.9 Min 5.0 Max 8.3 LIT DARK YES NO CLOSE Max 9.5 Min 4.7 Max 7.9 LIT DARK YES NO _____ 5.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of 1SI8835, SI PP to Cold Legs Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, (Circle as appropriate):
OPEN/CLOSED
_____ 5.2 PERFORM an OPEN and CLOSED Valve Stroke Test of 1SI8835 at 1PM06J. (PERFORM in accordance with steps outlined in Attachments A and B and RECORD in the Data Table).
_____ 5.3 RESTORE 1SI8835, SI PP to Cold Legs Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, to the "AS FOUND" position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate).
OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____
6.0 STROKE
TEST OF 1SI8840, RH TO HOT LEGS ISOL VLV.
Valve: 1SI8840 Panel: 1PM06J Stroke @ Oper Limits ¢ @ Alert Limits ¢ Status Lights @ Test Time ¢ @ Retest Time ¢ Ver Oper Init OPEN Max 15.0 Min 10.5 Max 14.3 LIT DARK YES NO CLOSE Max 14.2 Min 9.6 Max 13.0 LIT DARK YES NO _____ 6.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of 1SI8840, RH to Hot Legs Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, (Circle as appropriate): OPEN/CLOSED
_____ 6.2 PERFORM an OPEN and CLOSED Valve Stroke Test of 1SI8840 at 1PM06J.
(PERFORM in accordance with steps outlined in Attachments A and B and RECORD in the Data Table).
_____ 6.3 RESTORE 1SI8840, RH to Hot Legs Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, to the "AS FOUND" position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate).
OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____
@ All limits and times are in seconds.
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 12 G. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
- 1. Each valve must have been verified to stroke within the Operability (OPER) Limits. 2. Each valve must have been verified in accordance with one of the following:
- a. The valve stroke time was within the Alert Limits.
- b. The valve stroke time exceeded the Alert Limits, but was within the Operability (Oper) Limits and the following criteria have been met:
- 1) The valve was stroked a second time.
- 2) The IST Coordinator has been NOTIFIED to PERFORM an evaluation to document valve operability per ER
-AA-321 and attach it to this surveillance.
- 3) The second valve stroke time exceeded the Alert Limits, but was within the Operability (Oper) Limits and the valve is being tracked with a 96 hour0.00111 days <br />0.0267 hours <br />1.587302e-4 weeks <br />3.6528e-5 months <br /> clock to complete the ER
-AA-321 evaluation. (Valve is considered operable until evaluation is complete.) (The Dequip program is an acceptable tracking method.)
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 13 ATTACHMENT A TIMING VALVES IN THE OPEN DIRECTION
- 1. VERIFY/CLOSE the valve.
- 2. SIMULTANEOUSLY START the stopwatch and OPEN the valve with its handswitch.
- 3. STOP the stopwatch when the valve indicates OPEN.
¢ 4. RECORD the stroke OPEN TEST TIME.
- 5. RECORD the MLB status light indication associated with the valve.
- 6. VERIFY the valve indicates OPEN on the control panel.
¢ 7. VERIFY the OPEN TEST TIME is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS. (If not, DECLARE the valve INOPERABLE and initiate appropriate actions.)
- 8. If the valve is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS, but is not within ALERT LIMITS, PERFORM the following (otherwise N/A):
- a. VERIFY/CLOSE the valve (May be performed in conjunction with a close stroke timing step).
- b. SIMULTANEOUSLY START the stopwatch and OPEN the valve with its handswitch.
- c. STOP the stopwatch when the valve indicates OPEN.
¢ d. RECORD the stroke OPEN RETEST TIME.
¢ e. VERIFY the OPEN RETEST TIME is within the OPERABILITY (OPER)
LIMITS. (If not, DECLARE the valve INOPERABLE and initiate appropriate actions.)
- g. If the second stroke time exceeds the Alert Limit, but is less than the Operability (Oper) Limit, then TRACK the valve with a 96 hour0.00111 days <br />0.0267 hours <br />1.587302e-4 weeks <br />3.6528e-5 months <br /> clock to complete the ER
-AA-321 evaluation. (Valve is considered operable until evaluation is complete.)
- 9. RETURN the valve to the "AS FOUND" position or as designated by the Shift Manager or designee (May be performed in conjunction with a close stroke timing step).
1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI
-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use 14 ATTACHMENT B TIMING VALVES IN THE CLOSE DIRECTION
- 1. VERIFY/OPEN the valve.
- 2. SIMULTANEOUSLY START the stopwatch and CLOSE the valve with its handswitch.
- 3. STOP the stopwatch when the valve indicates CLOSED.
¢ 4. RECORD the stroke CLOSED TEST TIME.
- 5. RECORD the MLB status light indication associated with the valve.
- 6. VERIFY the valve indicates CLOSED on the control panel.
¢ 7. VERIFY the CLOSED TEST TIME is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS. (If not, DECLARE the valve INOPERABLE and initiate appropriate actions.)
- 8. If the valve is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS, but is not within ALERT LIMITS, PERFORM the following (otherwise N/A):
- a. VERIFY/OPEN the valve (May be performed in conjunction with an open stroke timing step).
- b. SIMULTANEOUSLY START the stopwatch and CLOSE the valve with its handswitch.
- c. STOP the stopwatch when the valve indicates CLOSED.
¢ d. RECORD the CLOSED RETEST TIME.
¢ e. VERIFY the CLOSED RETEST TIME is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS. (If not, DECLARE the valve INOPERABLE and initiate appropriate actions.)
- g. If the second stroke time exceeds the Alert Limit, but is less than the Operability (Oper) Limit, then TRACK the valve with a 96 hour0.00111 days <br />0.0267 hours <br />1.587302e-4 weeks <br />3.6528e-5 months <br /> clock to complete the ER
-AA-321 evaluation. (Valve is considered operable until evaluation is complete.)
- 9. RETURN the valve to the "AS FOUND" position or as designated by the Shift Manager or designee (May be performed in conjunction with an open stroke timing step).
(Final)
SIM-305A 1 TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 1 NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 has recently returned to full power following power ascension.
- 3. PRZ B/U HTR GRP A was placed in "ON" to facilitate proper chemical mixing in the pressurizer during the unit ramp.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The US has directed you to place the PRZ B/U HTR GRP A to "AUTO" per BwOP RY
-11. 2. Inform the US when the evolution is complete.
SIM-305A 2 TASK TITLE: Place PZR B/U Heater Group from "ON" to "AUTO"
JPM No.: SIM 305A REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4E.AM
-18 K&A No.: 010000A4.02 TASK No.: R
-AM-022, Use Operating Department Procedures K&A IMP: 3.6/3.4
ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 4, 5, 6 JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL TIME:
NA APPROX COMPLETION TIME:
20 MINUTES EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. BwOP RY-11, Rev. 2, PRESSURIZER HEATER OPERATION
. MATERIALS:
- 1. BwOP RY-11 TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Place PRZ B/U heater group in auto per BwOP RY
-11. 2. Recognize inability of variable heaters to maintain pressurizer pressure 3. Re-energize B/U heater group.
TASK CONDITIONS:
SIM-305A 3 1. You are the Unit 1 NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 has recently returned to full power following power ascension.
- 3. PRZ B/U HTR GRP A was placed in "ON" to facilitate proper chemical mixing in the pressurizer during the unit ramp.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The US has directed you to place the PRZ B/U HTR GRP A to "AUTO" per BwOP RY
-11. 2. Inform the US when the evolution is complete.
SIM-305A 4 RECORD START TIME
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 1. Refer to BwOP RY
-11. CUE: Prerequisites, precautions, limitations and actions are met. CUE: Another NSO will monitor the computer points in step 2. Pressurizer Pressure is 2235 psig on lowest computer point.
CUE: If asked, the SM and System Engineer have concurred with performance of this evolution.
(see caution prior to step 3)
Refer to BwOP RY
-11. Verify all applicable prerequisites, precautions limitations and actions are addressed.
Verify Pressurizer Pressure is approximately 2235 psig from the lowest
computer point indication P0480, P0481, P0482, P0483.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. At 1PM05J, places 1PK
-455A in "Manual" Depresses "Manual" pushbutton on 1PK
-455A. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 3. Raise PZR pressure to approx. 2250 psig. Perform the following:
Lower 1PK-455A demand until pressurizer pressure is approx. 2250 psig. (2245-2260) SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
- 4. Place B/U HTR GRP A to "AUTO" Perform the following:
Place control switch for B/U HTR GRP "A" CONTACTOR in "AUTO" SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
- ALTERNATE PATH BEGINS*
SIM-305A 5 PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 5. Maintain RY pressure in desired band by manually controlling PZR pressure controller.
CUE: (provide cue after examinee has stabilized PZR pressure to his/her satisfaction and is waiting for 10 minutes to elapse) 10 minutes has elapsed.
Perform the following:
Adjust 1PK
-455A o Monitor pressurizer pressure. o Maintains pressure between 2235 and 2250 psig by adjusting the master PZR pressure controller in manual. STABILIZE PZR pressure at approximately 2235 psig (2230-2240 psig). o IF PZR spray valve demand > 0, or variable heater load < 100 amps, THEN take other backup heaters to the AUTO position, by repeating step 3.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: NOTE: The auto portion of the master pressurizer pressure controller failed when the controller was placed in manual. The controller output will cause sprays to open and lower PZR pressure. Additionally, lowering controller demand at this point will activate alarm 1 C1, PZR PRESS CONT DEV LOW HTRS ON. Critical step successful completion requires stabilizing RCS pressure without allowing pressure to drop below 2209 psig.
SIM-305A 6 *6. Determines PZR Master Pressure Controller does not function in AUTO and maintains manual PZR pressure control.
Place the PZR Master Pressure Controller in AUTO as follows:
o VERIFY/SET the PZR Master Pressure Controller, 1PK
-455A, potentiometer to maintain 2235 psig.
VERIFY/PLACE the PZR Master Pressure Controller, 1PK
-455A, in AUTO. VERIFY that the PZR Master Pressure Controller, 1PK
-455A, is controlling PZR pressure at approximately 2235 psig in Auto.
Examinee notes that the controller is causing reduced PZR Pressure and places the controller back in manual and stabilizes PZR pressure at 2235 psig (2230-2240 psig). SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
(CUE:) THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME
__________
COMMENTS:
SIM-305A 7 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM
-305 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE(S): 100% power steady state.
Place B/U HTRS GRP A CONTACTOR to "ON" Insert malfunction below Allow pressurizer pressure to stabilize in auto.
MALFUNCTION #'S:
Activate CAE sim305A and verify the following:
trgset 1 "ZLO1PK455A(2)==1" IMF RX15 (1 0) 2270 to trigger Malfunction RX15 to 2270 psig when the controller is placed in manual. This fails the auto portion of the controller to a higher output value.
COMMENTS:
BwOP RY-11 Revision 2 Continuous Use 1 PRESSURIZER HEATER OPERATION
A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY The purpose of this procedure is to provide direction for operating with the least amount of PZR heaters required to maintain pressure and provide adequate mixing of the Pressurizer in MODES 1, 2, and 3. B. REFERENCES
- 1. Tech Spec LCO 3.4.9 and 3.4.1.
- 2. Tech Spec Surveillance Requirement: SR 3.4.9.2
- 3. Station Procedure:
BwOL 3.4.9, LCOAR, Reactor Coolant System
-Pressurizer.
- 4. UFSAR 15.0.1.1 Condition 1 Normal Operation and Operational Transients, and 4.4.2.2.1 Departure from Nucleate Boiling Technology C. PREREQUISITES
- 1. Receive permission from the Shift Manager or designee prior to performing this procedure.
- 2. Perform a pre
-job briefing with all personnel involved covering the performance of this procedure and expected results.
- 3. The Unit is stable at Normal Operating Pressure and Normal Operating Temperature.
D. PRECAUTIONS
- 1. At least 2 groups of Pressurizer heaters shall be operable, each with a capacity of at least 150 KW, in Modes 1
-3. 2. If PZR pressure starts to drop below 2229 psig on the lowest reading channel/computer point with both PZR spray valves indicating ZERO demand, IMMEDIATELY turn on Back
-up Heaters as necessary to avoid PZR pressure decreasing below 2209 psig.
BwOP RY-11 Revision 2 Continuous Use 2 E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS
- 1. As stated in Tech Spec LCO 3.4.9
- 2. Do NOT exceed Pressurizer Pressure of 2260 PSIG.
- 3. Do NOT allow Pressurizer Pressure to drop below 2209 PSIG. If Pressurizer Pressure decreases below 2209 PSIG, then LCOAR
_BwOL 3.4.1 must be entered. 4. If any primary or secondary manipulations need to be performed, do NOT proceed with this procedure until all Unit conditions are stable. Do NOT perform any primary or secondary manipulations while this procedure is in progress
.
BwOP RY-11 Revision 2 Continuous Use 3 CAUTION If any primary or secondary manipulations need to be performed, do NOT proceed with this procedure until all unit conditions are stable. Do NOT perform any primary or secondary manipulations while this procedure is in progress.
F. MAIN BODY 1. VERIFY Pressurizer pressure is at approximately 2235 psig from the lowest computer point indication P0480, P0481, P0482, P0483.
- 2. VERIFY the following computer points can be monitored:
PZR Pressure P0480 PZR Pressure P0481 PZR Pressu re P0482 PZR Pressure P0483 PZR Spray Water A Inlet Temp T0483 PZR Spray Water B Inlet Temp T0484 PZR Spray Cont 1 F0483 PZR Spray Cont 2 F0484
PZR Steam Temp T0481
BwOP RY-11 Revision 2 Continuous Use 4 CAUTION If PZR spray demand is zero, and the variable heaters are drawing current less than 100 amps, cautiously perform the next step with the concurrence of the Shift Manager and System Engineer. If PZR spray demand is zero and the variable heaters are drawing current greater than 100 amps, then Step 3 is N/A.
NO TE Perform the following step while monitoring PZR pressure. The NSO may make any adjustments to the PZR and/or unit to stabilize parameters.
F. 3. To place a B/U HTRS GRP_ CONTACTOR in the AUTO position from the ON position, PERFORM the following:
- a. VERIFY/PLACE in MANUAL Master PZR Pressure Controller, _PK
-455A.
- b. SLOWLY DECREASE the Master PZR Pressure Controller, _PK 455A, demand until PZR pressure increases to approximately 2250 psig.
CAUTION If PZR pressure starts to drop below 2229 psig on the lowest reading channel/computer point with both PZR spray valves indicating zero demand, immediately turn on back-up heaters as necessary to avoid PZR pressure decreasing below 2209 psig.
- c. PLACE the desired B/U HTRS GRP_ CONTACTOR C/S into AUTO.
- d. MAINTAIN pressure between 2235 and 2250 psig by adjusting master PZR pressure controller _PK
-455A as required until variable heaters energize and/or spray valves are closed.
BwOP RY-11 Revision 2 Continuous Use 5 CAUTION When a B/U heater is deenergized, it will take some time to dissipate it's latent heat. PZR pressure should be monitored at least 10 minutes before the pressure is considered stable.
F. 3. e. STABILIZE PZR pressure at approximately 2235 psig.
- f. IF PZR spray valve demand is greater than zero, or variable heater load is less than 100 amps, THEN CONTINUE to take other backup heaters to the AUTO position as directed by Unit Supervisor, by repeating Step 3 for the other desired B/U HTRS GRP_ CONTACTORS (Otherwise proceed to next Step).
- 4. VERIFY/SET the PZR Master Pressure Controller, _PK
-455A, potentiometer to maintain 2235 psig.
- 5. VERIFY/PLACE the PZR Master Pressure Controller, _PK
-455A , in AUTO.
- 6. VERIFY that the PZR Master Pressure Controller, _PK
-455A, is controlling PZR pressure at approximately 2235 psig in Auto.
(Final)
SIM-410 S Page 1 of 5 TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 1 Assist NSO.
- 2. Both Units are in Mode 4.
-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBLITY.
- 4. The fire is now extinguished. Individual systems and components are being evaluated by Engineering and then released to Operations to transfer control to the MCR from the RSDP. Engineering has just released the 1B SX pump for transfer of control back to the MCR.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit 1 Unit Supervisor has directed you to coordinate with the NSO at the RSDP for Unit 1 to restore remote control of the 1B SX pump from the MCR per 1BwOA PRI
-5 Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM step 5.
- 2. NO switches were repositioned at the Fire Hazards Panel for the event.
SIM-410 S Page 2 of 5 TASK TITLE:
Restore Remote Control of 1B SX Pump from MCR JPM No.: SIM-410S REV: NRC 13-1 TPO No.: 4C.SX-03 K&A No.: 076000A4.01 TASK No.: R-SX-002/003, Startup/shutdown an Essential K&A IMP: 2.9/2.9 Service Water pump
EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Trainee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*)4, 6 COMPLETION TIME: 22 MINUTES
CRITICAL TIME:
N/A ALTERNATE PATH: YES
EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR CONTROL ROOM GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Rev. 106.
MATERIALS:
- 1. 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Rev. 106 Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM.
- 2. 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Rev. 106 Attachment A, REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP.
- 3. BwAR 1-2-A1 SX PUMP TRIP, Rev. 7.
TASK STANDARDS:
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Assist NSO.
- 2. Both Units are in Mode 4.
-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBLITY.
- 4. The fire is now extinguished. Individual systems and components are being evaluated by Engineering and then released to Operations to transfer control to the MCR from the RSDP.
Engineering has just released the 1B SX pump for transfer of control back to the MCR.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit 1 Unit Supervisor has directed you to coordinate with the NSO at the RSDP for Unit 1 to restore remote control of the 1B SX pump from the MCR per 1BwOA PRI
-5 Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM step 5.
- 2. NO switches were repositioned at the Fire Hazards Panel for the event.
(Examiner hand trainee copy of Attachments A and D of 1BwOA PRI
-5)
SIM-410 S Page 3 of 5 RECORD START TIME:
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 1. Refer to 1BwOA PRI
-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM.
Copy of 1BwOA PRI
-5 Attachments A and D provided with initiating cue.
Refer to 1BwOA PRI
-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. Review logs for all local actions taken.
CUE: Logs were previously reviewed and there are no issues related to the pump control transfer.
Review logs for all local actions taken.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 3. Restore indications to MCR by placing Fire Hazards Panel switches to
- NORMAL. INITIATING CUE:
No switches were repositioned at the Fire Hazards Panel.
Restore indications to MCR by placing Fire Hazards Panel switches to
- NORMAL.
Switches are in normal
. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *4. Transfer controls listed in Attachment A back to the MCR one at a time.
CUE: When asked, report 1B SX pump control switch position at RSP is after
-start.
CUE: Acknowledge as the NSO at the remote shutdown panel to place the LOCAL/REMOTE switch for 1B SX pump to remote.
NOTE: Cue the Simulator operator to initiate the pre-established commands to model placing the LOCAL/REMOTE switch in remote. Shortly after restoring control to the MCR, the 1B SX pump will trip.
Transfer controls listed in Attachment A back to the MCR one at a time.
At 1PM06J places C/S for 1SX01PB in normal after
-close. Place LOCAL/REMOTE switch at RSP in remote.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
SIM-410 S Page 4 of 5 **ALTERNATE PATH START**
- 5. Respond to 1B SX pump Trip Respond to 1B SX pump trip using BwAR 1-2-A1 At 1PM06J pulls BwAR SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *6. Verify/Align SX flowpath to meet 1A SX pump start interlocks and Start 1A SX Pump Perform the following at 1PM06J: o Verify/OPEN 1SX001A (is OPEN). o Verify/OPEN 1SX016A (is open) Verify/O PEN 1SX027A (currently closed) (must be performed, valve is CLOSED, examinee must OPEN the valve)
Places C/S for 1A SX pump to START and starts pump (initially in standby, RUNNING at completion of action).
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 7. Verify voltage on ALL 3 phases of 4KV bus > 3990 volts.
CUE: ALL 3 phases are > 3990 Volts. Verify voltage on ALL 3 phases of 4KV bus (141) >
3990 volts.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME
COMMENTS:
SIM-410 S Page 5 of 5 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM
-410S REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE (S): Any mode with SX available.
MALFUNCTION #'S:
- 2. Secure the 1A and 1C RCFCs completely.
- 3. CLOSE 1SX027A.
Perform Items 4
-6 or run CAE SIM
-410S SETUP then continue with item 7.
- 4. Override Annunciator 1 E1 SX PUMP LOCAL CONT IMF PB2271 ON
. 5. Override the 1B SX pump control switch to Normal After
-close IOR ZDI1SX01PB NAC.
- 6. Override the lights for the 1B SX Pump off using the following:
- a. IOR ZLO1SX01PB1 OFF (overrides STOP light to off)
- b. IOR ZLO1SX01PB3 OFF (overrides RUN light off)
The simulator is now ready for the start of the JPM. You (Simulator Operator) will be required to monitor the progress of the JPM, and when cued by the examiner to perform the NSO action at the RSDP to place the LOCAL/REMOTE switch for the 1B SX pump in REMOTE, perform the following:
Perform the following (set on a trigger or run CAE SIM
-410S RSDP switch to REMOTE):
- 8. DMF PB2271 (clears Annunciator 1 E1) 9. DOR ZDI1SX01PB (restores control of 1B SX C/S to the physical switch)
- 10. DOR ZLO1SX01PB1 (restores STOP light indication)
- 11. DOR ZLO1SX01PB3 (restores RUN light indication)
- 12. IMF SW01B 3 (trips 1B SX pump with 3 second delay)
COMMENTS: 1. This JPM requires that the Simulator Operator be available to perform action as the NSO at the Unit 1 RSDP in restoring control of the 1B SX pump to the MCR.
REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 A.A.PURPOSE PURPOSE This procedure provides actions required to take the plant to Cold This procedure provides actions required to take the plant to Cold Shutdown in the event that the Main Control Room must be evacuated.
Shutdown in the event that the Main Control Room must be evacuated.
B.B.SYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONS SYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONS This procedure is entered from 0BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM This procedure is entered from 0BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY when the MCR must be evacuated.
INACCESSIBILITY when the MCR must be evacuated.
Page 1 of 88 Page 1 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 (PG 1 OF 1) (PG 1 OF 1)
TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 11SECTION SECTION SECTION: TITLE:
- TITLE:
- TITLE:
MAIN BODY MAIN BODY ATTACHMENT A (Page 49) REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP ATTACHMENT A (Page 49) REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP ATTACHMENT B (Page 53) LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS ATTACHMENT B (Page 53) LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS ATTACHMENT C (Page 57) INSTALLATION OF RH SYSTEM PNEUMATIC ATTACHMENT C (Page 57) INSTALLATION OF RH SYSTEM PNEUMATIC JUMPERS JUMPERS ATTACHMENT D (Page 58) RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MCR ATTACHMENT D (Page 58) RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MCR ATTACHMENT E (Page 61) ESF MANUAL BLOCK ATTACHMENT E (Page 61) ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR OR RESET RESET ATTACHMENT F (Page 78) SI TERMINATION ATTACHMENT F (Page 78) SI TERMINATION ATTACHMENT G (Page 86) *MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI ATTACHMENT G (Page 86) *MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI
-END--END-Page 2 of 88 Page 2 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 1 11VERIFY REACTOR TRIP VERIFY REACTOR TRIP VERIFY REACTOR TRIP
- a.a.Trip Reactor Trip Reactor b.b.Check reactor trip and bypassCheck reactor trip and bypassb.b.Locally trip the breakers.
Locally trip the breakers.
breakers - breakers - OPEN OPEN::RTA and BYA RTA and BYARTB and BYB RTB and BYB c.c.Check rod bottom lights - Check rod bottom lights - LIT LIT c.c.IF IF TWO TWO OR OR more rods are more rods are NOT NOT fully inserted, fully inserted, THEN THEN initiate boration:
initiate boration:
1)1)Start the Boric Acid Start the Boric Acid transfer pump.
transfer pump.
2)2)Open the emergency Open the emergency boration valve, 1CV8104.
boration valve, 1CV8104.
d.d.Check Neutron Flux - Check Neutron Flux - DROPPPING DROPPPING 2 22CHECK IF IMMEDIATE MCR EVACUATION CHECK IF IMMEDIATE MCR EVACUATION CHECK IF IMMEDIATE MCR EVACUATION REQUIRED REQUIRED REQUIRED::: a.a.Fire in the MCR requires -Fire in the MCR requires -a.
a.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 3. Step 3.IMMEDIATE EVACUATION IMMEDIATE EVACUATION b.b.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 7 (Page 5)
Step 7 (Page 5) 3 33VERIFY TURBINE TRIPPED VERIFY TURBINE TRIPPED VERIFY TURBINE TRIPPED
- Manually trip the turbine.
Manually trip the turbine.All Turbine throttle valves -
All Turbine throttle valves -
IF IF any throttle any throttle AND AND any any CLOSED CLOSED governor valve are open, governor valve are open, THEN THEN locally trip the turbine locally trip the turbineAll Turbine governor valves -
All Turbine governor valves -
at the pedestal.
at the pedestal.
CLOSED CLOSED 4 44VERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSES VERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSES VERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSES
4KV ESF bus per:ESF buses - ESF buses - BOTH ENERGIZED BOTH ENERGIZED
- 1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV 1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KVBus 141Bus 141ESF BUS:
ESF BUS:Bus 142 Bus 142 ooATTACHMENT B (1A DG)
ATTACHMENT B (1A DG) ooATTACHMENT D (1B DG)
ATTACHMENT D (1B DG)
Page 3 of 88 Page 3 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 5 55VERIFY FEEDWATER ISOLATION VERIFY FEEDWATER ISOLATION VERIFY FEEDWATER ISOLATION
1FW006 valve.
b.b.Trip Feedwater pumps:Trip Feedwater pumps:b.b.Locally trip the pumps.
Locally trip the pumps.FW pump 1A FW pump 1AFW pump 1B FW pump 1BFW pump 1C FW pump 1CStartup Feedwater pump Startup Feedwater pump c.c.Trip HD pumps:Trip HD pumps:c.c.Locally trip the pumps.
Locally trip the pumps.HD pump 1A HD pump 1AHD pump 1B HD pump 1BHD pump 1C HD pump 1C Page 4 of 88 Page 4 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 6 66PREPARE FOR RSP OPERATIONS PREPARE FOR RSP OPERATIONS PREPARE FOR RSP OPERATIONS
- a.a.Verify letdown divert valve Verify letdown divert valve in - in - AUTO AUTO::1CV112A 1CV112A b.b.Establish - Establish - 45 GPM LETDOWN 45 GPM LETDOWN c.c.Place PZR PRESSURE CONTROL Place PZR PRESSURE CONTROL CHANNEL SELECTOR to - CHANNEL SELECTOR to - 457/458 457/458 d.d.Place PZR LEVEL CONTROL CHANNEL Place PZR LEVEL CONTROL CHANNEL SELECTOR to - SELECTOR to - 461/460 461/460 e.e.Pick up radio Pick up radio f.f.Open RCS loop sample Open RCS loop sample containment isolation valves:
containment isolation valves:1PS9356A (1PM11J) 1PS9356A (1PM11J)1PS9356B (1PM11J) 1PS9356B (1PM11J) g.g.Open PZR liquid sample Open PZR liquid sample containment isolation valves:
containment isolation valves:1PS9355A (1PM11J) 1PS9355A (1PM11J)1PS9355B (1PM11J) 1PS9355B (1PM11J) h.h.Open PZR steam sample Open PZR steam sample containment isolation valves:
containment isolation valves:1PS9354A (1PM11J) 1PS9354A (1PM11J)1PS9354B (1PM11J) 1PS9354B (1PM11J) 7 77DISPATCH OPERATOR TO PERFORM DISPATCH OPERATOR TO PERFORM DISPATCH OPERATOR TO PERFORM ATTACHMENT B (Page 53)
ATTACHMENT B (Page 53)
ATTACHMENT B (Page 53)
Page 5 of 88 Page 5 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5CAUTION CAUTIONTaking Taking ANY ANY control switch on the control switch on theFire Hazards Panel to the Fire Hazards Panel to the FIRE FIREposition: position: Removes Removes ALL ALL indications from the indications from the RSP and MCR.
RSP and MCR. Feeds a low signal to the Feeds a low signal to the affected loop.
affected loop. May cause ESF actuations if May cause ESF actuations if another channel is already another channel is already tripped tripped OR OR in test. in test.
8 88ACTIVATE RSP ACTIVATE RSP ACTIVATE RSP
- a.a.Unit Supervisor and NSO go to Unit Supervisor and NSO go to RSP RSP b.b.Align RSP per ATTACHMENT A Align RSP per ATTACHMENT A (Page 49)(Page 49)c.c.Check following indications -Check following indications -c.c.Dispatch an operator to Dispatch an operator to AVAILABLE AVAILABLE::the Fire Hazards Panel the Fire Hazards Panel (426' S12 CWA) to align (426' S12 CWA) to alignSource Range NISource Range NIneeded instrumentation.
needed instrumentation.Intermediate Range NI Intermediate Range NISG pressures SG pressuresSG wide range levels SG wide range levelsPZR pressure PZR pressurePZR level PZR levelRCS hot leg temperatures RCS hot leg temperaturesRCS cold leg temperatures RCS cold leg temperatures d.d.Maintain log of:
Maintain log of:All jumpers installed All jumpers installedAll local actions taken All local actions taken Page 6 of 88 Page 6 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 9 99MCR EVACUATED DUE TO FIRE MCR EVACUATED DUE TO FIRE MCR EVACUATED DUE TO FIRE
- GO TO GO TO GO TO STEP 10. STEP 10.a.a.Open the following breakers:
Open the following breakers:MCC 131X1 M3 (1SI8811A)
MCC 131X1 M3 (1SI8811A)MCC 132X4 H1 (1SI8811B)
MCC 132X4 H1 (1SI8811B) b.b.Locally check CNMT sumpLocally check CNMT sumpb.b.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
isolation valves - isolation valves - CLOSED CLOSED:: 1)1)Open the following Open the following1SI8811A (364' U13 CWA)1SI8811A (364' U13 CWA)breaker(s):
breaker(s):1SI8811B (364' X13 CWA) 1SI8811B (364' X13 CWA) ooMCC 131X1A Q1 MCC 131X1A Q1 (1SI8812A)
(1SI8812A) ooMCC 132X4A M2 MCC 132X4A M2 (1SI8812B)
(1SI8812B) 2)2)Locally close RH pump Locally close RH pump suction from RWST suction from RWST isolation valve(s):
isolation valve(s):
oo1SI8812A (1A CS Pump 1SI8812A (1A CS Pump Rm)Rm)oo1SI8812B (1B RH Pump 1SI8812B (1B RH Pump Rm)Rm)10 1010CHECK STEAM GENERATOR LEVELS CHECK STEAM GENERATOR LEVELS CHECK STEAM GENERATOR LEVELS
Start an AF pump per:
ooBwOP AF-5, MOTOR DRIVEN BwOP AF-5, MOTOR DRIVEN AUXILIARY FEEDWATER PUMP AUXILIARY FEEDWATER PUMP
_A STARTUP ON RECIRC
_A STARTUP ON RECIRC ooBwOP AF-7, AUXILIARY BwOP AF-7, AUXILIARY FEEDWATER PUMP _B FEEDWATER PUMP _B (DIESEL) STARTUP ON (DIESEL) STARTUP ON RECIRC RECIRC b.b.Control AF flow to maintain Control AF flow to maintain ALL ALL b.b.Locally fail air and Locally fail air and SG wide range levels - SG wide range levels - BETWEEN BETWEEN throttle the 1AF005 flow throttle the 1AF005 flow 65% AND 70%
65% AND 70%
control valves.
control valves.
(364' P10 HANDWHEEL)
(364' P10 HANDWHEEL)
Page 7 of 88 Page 7 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 11 1111CHECK SI STATUS CHECK SI STATUS CHECK SI STATUS
- a.a.Following equipment - Following equipment - NOT AUTO NOT AUTO a.a.Dispatch an operator to Dispatch an operator to STARTED STARTED::verify SI actuation by verify SI actuation by checking status of checking status of BOTH BOTH SI SICV Pumps - CV Pumps - ONLY ONE RUNNING ONLY ONE RUNNING pump breakers.
pump breakers.SX Pumps - SX Pumps - ONLY ONE RUNNING ONLY ONE RUNNING IF IF EITHER EITHER SI pump breaker SI pump breaker is CLOSED, is CLOSED, CC Pumps - CC Pumps - ONLY ONE RUNNING ONLY ONE RUNNING THEN THEN GO TO GO TO GO TO ATTACHMENT F ATTACHMENT F (Page 78).(Page 78).Diesel Generators - Diesel Generators - NONE NONE RUNNING RUNNING 12 1212CHECK MODE CHECK MODE CHECK MODE
- a.a.Unit in - Unit in - MODE 3 MODE 3 a.a.IF IF the unit is in Mode 4, the unit is in Mode 4, THEN THEN GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 31 Step 31 (Page 36).(Page 36).
IF IF the unit is in Mode 5 the unit is in Mode 5 or 6, or 6, THEN THEN GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 38b Step 38b (Page 45).(Page 45).
b.b.RCS cooldown - RCS cooldown - NOT PREVIOUSLY NOT PREVIOUSLY b.b.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 14 (Page 10).
Step 14 (Page 10).
IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS Page 8 of 88 Page 8 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 13 1313CHECK RCS AVERAGE TEMPERATURE CHECK RCS AVERAGE TEMPERATURE CHECK RCS AVERAGE TEMPERATURE
- a.a.Determine Tave using Determine Tave using EITHER EITHER of ofa.a.Calculate Tave using the Calculate Tave using the the following:the following:following:
following:
ooProcess computer points:Process computer points:ooSaturation temperature Saturation temperature for SG pressure in place for SG pressure in place ooT0400 RCL1 1 TAVGT0400 RCL1 1 TAVGof cold leg wide range of cold leg wide range ooT0420 RCL2 1 TAVGT0420 RCL2 1 TAVGtemperature.
temperature.
ooT0440 RCL3 1 TAVG T0440 RCL3 1 TAVG ooT0460 RCL4 1 TAVGT0460 RCL4 1 TAVGooRCS hot leg and cold leg RCS hot leg and cold leg temperatures from the temperatures from the-OR--OR-Fire Hazards Panel.
Fire Hazards Panel.
ooCalculate using hot leg and Calculate using hot leg and cold leg wide range cold leg wide range temperatures temperatures b.b.RCS Tave - RCS Tave - LESS THAN 561 LESS THAN 561F F b.b.Reduce Tave to Reduce Tave to 561 561F F:: ooManually open SG Manually open SG PORV(s).PORV(s).-OR--OR-ooLocally open SG PORV(s)
Locally open SG PORV(s) per BwOP MS-6, LOCAL per BwOP MS-6, LOCAL OPERATION OF THE SG OPERATION OF THE SG PORVs.PORVs.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 14 (Next Step 14 (Next Page).Page).c.c.RCS Tave - RCS Tave - STABLE STABLE c.c.IF IF RCS Tave drops less RCS Tave drops less than than 557 557F F , , THEN THEN perform the perform the following:
following:
1)1)Close Close ALL ALL MSIVs. MSIVs.2)2)IF IF cooldown continues, cooldown continues, THEN THEN control AF flow.
control AF flow.
Maintain flow greater Maintain flow greater than than 500 GPM 500 GPM until wide until wide range level is greater range level is greater than than 59%59% in at least in at least ONE ONE SG.SG.Page 9 of 88 Page 9 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5*****************************************
- NOTE NOTE****The jumpers installed in Step 14aThe jumpers installed in Step 14a*
- RNO also defeat the PZR heater levelRNO also defeat the PZR heater level*
- interlocks.interlocks.*
14 1414MONITOR PZR PRESSURE MONITOR PZR PRESSURE MONITOR PZR PRESSURE
- a.a.PZR pressure - PZR pressure - GREATER THAN GREATER THAN a.a.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
2220 PSIG 2220 PSIG 1)1)IF IF PZR pressure is PZR pressure is dropping, dropping, THEN THEN trip RCP(s) as trip RCP(s) as required to stop PZR required to stop PZR pressure drop:
pressure drop:RCP 1D RCP 1DRCP 1C RCP 1CRCP 1B RCP 1BRCP 1A RCP 1A 2)2)IF IF PZR pressure is still PZR pressure is still dropping, dropping, THEN THEN perform the perform the following:
following:
a)a)Place the Place the LOCAL/REMOTE switch LOCAL/REMOTE switch at the breaker in at the breaker in LOCAL: LOCAL:1RY8000A (1RY455A) 1RY8000A (1RY455A)
MCC 131X2B A5 MCC 131X2B A51RY8000B (1RY456) 1RY8000B (1RY456)
MCC 132X2 C4 MCC 132X2 C4 b)b)Locally close PORV Locally close PORV block valves:
block valves:1RY8000A (1RY455A) 1RY8000A (1RY455A)1RY8000B (1RY456) 1RY8000B (1RY456)
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 10 of 88 Page 10 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 14 (continued)
Step 14 (continued) 3)3)IF IF any PORV block valve any PORV block valve can can NOT NOT be closed, be closed, THEN THEN locally remove the locally remove the PORV control power fuses PORV control power fuses to fail its associated to fail its associated PORV closed:
PORV closed:
oo1RY455A (at 1DC10J):
1RY455A (at 1DC10J):FU-11 FU-11FU-12 FU-12 oo1RY456 (at 1DC11J):
1RY456 (at 1DC11J):FU-46 FU-46FU-47 FU-47 4)4)IF IF a controlled a controlled depressurization was in depressurization was in progress, progress, THEN THEN GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 15 Step 15 (Page 14).(Page 14).
5)5)Verify PZR backup Verify PZR backup heaters are ON:
heaters are ON:Group A Group AGroup B Group B Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 11 of 88 Page 11 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 14 (continued)
Step 14 (continued)
IF IF ANY backup heater can ANY backup heater can NOT NOT be energized be energized AND AND PZR PZR level is greater than level is greater than 17%17%, , THEN THEN jumper the control jumper the control contactor to energize contactor to energize the heater:
the heater:
ooGroup A contactor:
Group A contactor:Install jumper in Install jumper in 1PL06J from 1PL06J from Terminal Board 1, Terminal Board 1, point 104, to point 104, to Terminal Board 1, Terminal Board 1, point 99.point 99.ooGroup B contactor:
Group B contactor:Install jumper in Install jumper in 1PL06J from 1PL06J from Terminal Board 3, Terminal Board 3, point 113, to point 113, to Terminal Board 3, Terminal Board 3, point 107.
point 107.
b.b.PZR pressure - PZR pressure - LESS THAN LESS THAN b.b.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
2260 PSIG 2260 PSIG 1)1)Verify PZR heaters are Verify PZR heaters are OFF: OFF:Group A Group AGroup B Group B 2)2)Control pressure with Control pressure with the PZR aux spray valve:
the PZR aux spray valve:1CV8145 1CV8145 Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 12 of 88 Page 12 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 14 (continued)
Step 14 (continued) c.c.PZR pressure - PZR pressure - STABLE AT OR STABLE AT OR c.c.Manually control PZR Manually control PZR TRENDING TO 2235 PSIG TRENDING TO 2235 PSIG pressure with PZR heaters pressure with PZR heaters and the PZR aux spray and the PZR aux spray valve.valve.IF IF manual pressure control manual pressure control is is NOT NOT available, available, THEN THEN perform the following perform the following while continuing with this while continuing with this procedure:
procedure:
1)1)Fill the PZR solid.
Fill the PZR solid.
2)2)Control charging flow to Control charging flow to control PZR pressure.
control PZR pressure.
Page 13 of 88 Page 13 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 15 1515VERIFY RCP SEAL COOLING VERIFY RCP SEAL COOLING VERIFY RCP SEAL COOLING
- a.a.Check following computerCheck following computera.a.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
points - points - AVAILABLE AVAILABLE:: 1)1)Locally monitor RCP seal Locally monitor RCP sealSeal water outletSeal water outletinjection flow:
injection flow:
temperature:
temperature:1FIT-0145 (1A RCP) 1FIT-0145 (1A RCP)T0181 (RCP 1A)T0181 (RCP 1A)(383' V17)
(383' V17)T0182 (RCP 1B)
T0182 (RCP 1B)1FIT-0142 (1D RCP) 1FIT-0142 (1D RCP)T0183 (RCP 1C)T0183 (RCP 1C)(383' V17)
(383' V17)T0184 (RCP 1D)
T0184 (RCP 1D)1FIT-0144 (1B RCP) 1FIT-0144 (1B RCP)
(364' U17)
(364' U17)Lower bearing temperature:
Lower bearing temperature:1FIT-0143 (1C RCP) 1FIT-0143 (1C RCP)
(364' U17)
(364' U17)T0417 (RCP 1A)
T0417 (RCP 1A)T0437 (RCP 1B)T0437 (RCP 1B)2)2)IF IF seal injection flow seal injection flowT0457 (RCP 1C)T0457 (RCP 1C)is indicated on all RCPs, is indicated on all RCPs,T0477 (RCP 1D)T0477 (RCP 1D)THEN THEN GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 15d Step 15d (Page 17).(Page 17).
3)3)IF IF any RCP with no any RCP with no indicated seal injection indicated seal injection flow also has no flow also has no indication of seal indication of seal leakoff leakoff OR OR lower radial lower radial bearing temperature, bearing temperature, THEN THEN perform the perform the following:
following:
a)a)Trip affected RCP(s).
Trip affected RCP(s).
b)b)Close associated RCP Close associated RCP seal injection manual seal injection manual flow control valve:
flow control valve:
oo1CV8369A (391' CWA 1CV8369A (391' CWA P-33)P-33)oo1CV8369B (387' CWA 1CV8369B (387' CWA P-53)P-53)oo1CV8369C (387' CWA 1CV8369C (387' CWA P-53)P-53)oo1CV8369D (391' CWA 1CV8369D (391' CWA P-33)P-33)Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 14 of 88 Page 14 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 15 (continued)
Step 15 (continued) 4)4)Check CC flow to RCP Check CC flow to RCP thermal barriers between thermal barriers between 150 GPM 150 GPM and and 231 GPM 231 GPM::1FIS-685A (383' U18) 1FIS-685A (383' U18) 5)5)IF IF no CC flow is no CC flow is indicated to the RCP indicated to the RCP thermal barriers, thermal barriers, THEN THEN locally close CC locally close CC from RCPs thermal from RCPs thermal barrier isolation valve:
barrier isolation valve:1CC685 1CC685 (395' CWA P-24)
(395' CWA P-24) 6)6)IF IF no CC flow is no CC flow isindicated indicated AND AND a fire has a fire hasoccurred in the plant, occurred in the plant, THEN THEN locally close the locally close thefollowing valve to following valve toprovide double isolation provide double isolationof CC from the thermal of CC from the thermalbarrier: barrier:1CC9438 (395' R7) 1CC9438 (395' R7)7)7)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 15c (Next Step 15c (Next Page).Page).Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 15 of 88 Page 15 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 15 (continued)
Step 15 (continued) b.b.Check RCP temperatures - Check RCP temperatures - LESS LESS b.b.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
THAN LIMITS THAN LIMITS
- 1)1)Trip affected RCP(s).
Trip affected RCP(s).Seal water outlet Seal water outlet temperatures - temperatures - LESS THAN LESS THAN 2)2)Close associated RCP Close associated RCP 235 235F F seal injection manual seal injection manual flow control valve:
flow control valve:Lower bearing temperatures -
Lower bearing temperatures -
LESS THAN 225 LESS THAN 225F F oo1CV8369A (391' CWA 1CV8369A (391' CWA P-33)P-33)oo1CV8369B (387' CWA 1CV8369B (387' CWA P-53)P-53)oo1CV8369C (387' CWA 1CV8369C (387' CWA P-53)P-53)oo1CV8369D (391' CWA 1CV8369D (391' CWA P-33)P-33)3)3)Locally close CC from Locally close CC from RCPs thermal barrier RCPs thermal barrier isolation valve:
isolation valve:1CC685 1CC685 (395' CWA P-24)
(395' CWA P-24) 4)4)IF IF a fire has occured in a fire has occured inthe plant, the plant, THEN THEN locally close the locally close thefollowing valve to following valve toprovide double isolation provide double isolationof CC from the RCP of CC from the RCPthermal barriers:
thermal barriers:1CC9438 (395' R7) 1CC9438 (395' R7)c.c.Check CENT CHG pumps - Check CENT CHG pumps - AT LEAST AT LEAST c.c.WHEN WHEN CENT CHG pump suction CENT CHG pump suction ONE RUNNING ONE RUNNING has been aligned to the has been aligned to the RWST, RWST, THEN THEN start one CENT CHG start one CENT CHG pump.pump.Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 16 of 88 Page 16 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 15 (continued)
Step 15 (continued) d.d.Throttle 1CV121 to maintain Throttle 1CV121 to maintain seal injection flow - seal injection flow - BETWEEN BETWEEN 10 GPM AND 15 GPM PER PUMP 10 GPM AND 15 GPM PER PUMP (UNLESS PREVIOUSLY ISOLATED)(UNLESS PREVIOUSLY ISOLATED)
Monitor RCP seal status:
ooComputer points Computer points ooLocal seal injection flow Local seal injection flow Page 17 of 88 Page 17 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 16 1616CHECK PZR LEVEL CHECK PZR LEVEL CHECK PZR LEVEL
- a.a.Check charging flow - Check charging flow - INDICATED INDICATED::a.a.Establish charging flow Establish charging flow using 1CV121.
using 1CV121.
oo1FI-121B (1PL06J) 1FI-121B (1PL06J)
IF IF manual control of manual control of ooF0128 Charg Pump Disch HdrF0128 Charg Pump Disch Hdr1CV121 is 1CV121 is NOT NOT available, available, FlowFlowTHEN THEN locally bypass locally bypass 1CV121: 1CV121: 1)1)Open the charging header Open the charging header flow control bypass flow control bypass valve for the running CV valve for the running CV pump: pump: oo1CV8387A (364' U15 1CV8387A (364' U15 1A CV pump room) 1A CV pump room) oo1CV8387B (364' Y14 1CV8387B (364' Y14 1B CV pump room) 1B CV pump room) 2)2)Close at least Close at least ONE ONE charging header flow charging header flow control valve manual control valve manual isolation:
isolation:
oo1CV8483A (364' +10' 1CV8483A (364' +10' U13 CWA)U13 CWA)oo1CV8483B (364' +8' 1CV8483B (364' +8' U13 CWA)U13 CWA)3)3)Throttle the charging Throttle the charging header flow control header flow control bypass valve to maintain bypass valve to maintain PZR level.
PZR level.
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 18 of 88 Page 18 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 16 (continued)
Step 16 (continued) 4)4)IF IF charging flow can charging flow can NOT NOT be established with be established with 1CV121, 1CV121, THEN THEN perform the perform the following:
following:
a)a)Locally throttle open Locally throttle open one CENT CHG pump to one CENT CHG pump to cold leg isolation cold leg isolation valve: valve: oo1SI8801A 1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26)
(395' CWA P-26) oo1SI8801B 1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26)
(395' CWA P-26) b)b)IF IF the PZR is the PZR is NOT NOT being maintained being maintained water solid, water solid, THEN THEN maintain PZR maintain PZR level between level between 25%
25% and and 31%31%..c)c)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 17 Step 17 (Page 23).(Page 23).
b.b.Dispatch an operator to bypass Dispatch an operator to bypass 1CV182: 1CV182: 1)1)Throttle open charging header Throttle open charging header flow control bypass valve:
flow control bypass valve:1CV8403 (364' V13 CWA 1CV8403 (364' V13 CWA P-71)P-71)2)2)Close charging header flow Close charging header flow control manual isolation control manual isolation valves: valves:1CV8402A (364' V13 CWA 1CV8402A (364' V13 CWA P-71)P-71)1CV8402B (364' V13 CWA 1CV8402B (364' V13 CWA P-71)P-71)Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 19 of 88 Page 19 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 16 (continued)
Step 16 (continued) c.c.Check PZR level - Check PZR level - GREATER THAN GREATER THAN c.c.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
17%17%1)1)Verify letdown isolation Verify letdown isolation valves closed:
valves closed:1CV459 1CV4591CV460 1CV4601CV8149A 1CV8149A1CV8149B 1CV8149B1CV8149C 1CV8149C 2)2)Verify group A and B PZR Verify group A and B PZR heaters are OFF.
heaters are OFF.
3)3)Raise charging flow to Raise charging flow to restore PZR level to restore PZR level to greater than greater than 17%
17%..4)4)Continue with Step 17 Continue with Step 17 (Page 23), (Page 23), WHEN WHEN PZR level is PZR level is greater than greater than 17%
17%, , THEN THEN restore letdown per restore letdown per Step 16d RNO.
Step 16d RNO.
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 20 of 88 Page 20 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 16 (continued)
Step 16 (continued) d.d.Check letdown - Check letdown - IN SERVICE IN SERVICE
- d.d.IF IF normal charging is in normal charging is in service, service, ooLetdown orifice isolationLetdown orifice isolationTHEN THEN perform the following perform the following valves - valves - ANY OPEN ANY OPEN::to restore letdown:
to restore letdown:
oo1CV8149A1CV8149A1)1)Manually open the Manually open the oo1CV8149B1CV8149Bletdown isolation letdown isolation oo1CV8149C1CV8149Cvalves:
valves:-OR--OR-1CV459 1CV4591CV460 1CV460 ooF0134 Ltdn Hx Ltdn Outlet F0134 Ltdn Hx Ltdn Outlet FlowFlow2)2)Manually open the Manually open the letdown orifice letdown orifice isolation valve(s) to isolation valve(s) to establish establish 45 GPM 45 GPM:: oo1CV8149A 1CV8149A oo1CV8149B 1CV8149B oo1CV8149C 1CV8149C IF IF letdown can letdown can NOT NOT be be restored, restored, THEN THEN perform the perform the following:
following:
1)1)Verify CC flow to RCP Verify CC flow to RCP thermal barriers between thermal barriers between 150 GPM 150 GPM and and 231 GPM 231 GPM (unless previously (unless previously isolated):
isolated):1FIS-685A (383' U18) 1FIS-685A (383' U18) 2)2)Locally close charging Locally close charging header flow control header flow control bypass valve:
bypass valve:1CV8403 (364' V13 CWA 1CV8403 (364' V13 CWA P-71)P-71)Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 21 of 88 Page 21 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 16 (continued)
Step 16 (continued) 3)3)Throttle 1CV121 to Throttle 1CV121 to maintain seal injection maintain seal injection flow between flow between 6 GPM 6 GPM and and 8 GPM 8 GPM per pump to per pump to minimize PZR level rise minimize PZR level rise (unless PZR is being (unless PZR is being maintained water solid):
maintained water solid):F0131 RCP 1 Seal F0131 RCP 1 Seal Injection Wtr Flow Injection Wtr FlowF0129 RCP 2 Seal F0129 RCP 2 Seal Injection Wtr Flow Injection Wtr FlowF0127 RCP 3 Seal F0127 RCP 3 Seal Injection Wtr Flow Injection Wtr FlowF0125 RCP 4 Seal F0125 RCP 4 Seal Injection Wtr Flow Injection Wtr Flow 4)4)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 16f.
Step 16f.
e.e.Check letdown orifice isolationCheck letdown orifice isolatione.e.Establish at least Establish at least 45 GPM 45 GPM valves aligned to establish -valves aligned to establish -letdown.
letdown.45 GPM LETDOWN 45 GPM LETDOWN
- oo1CV8149A 1CV8149A oo1CV8149B 1CV8149B oo1CV8149C 1CV8149C f.f.Check PZR bubble - Check PZR bubble - BEING BEING f.f.IF IF pressure is being pressure is being MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL controlled with a solid controlled with a solid PZR, PZR, THEN THEN maintain the PZR maintain the PZR solid. solid. GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 17 (Next Step 17 (Next Page).Page).g.g.Adjust 1CV121 to maintain PZR Adjust 1CV121 to maintain PZR level - level - BETWEEN 25% AND 31%
BETWEEN 25% AND 31%
Page 22 of 88 Page 22 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 17 1717CHECK RCP STATUS CHECK RCP STATUS CHECK RCP STATUS
circulation:RCS subcooling RCS subcooling acceptable per:
acceptable per:
ooComputer point X0190, Computer point X0190, Degrees of Subcooling Degrees of Subcooling-OR--OR-ooIconic Display Iconic Display-OR--OR-ooFIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1 FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1 (Page 48) using: (Page 48) using:PZR pressure PZR pressureRCS temperature RCS temperature from RCS hot leg from RCS hot leg temperature temperature indication indicationSG pressure stable SG pressure stable OR OR dropping.dropping.RCS hot leg temperature RCS hot leg temperature stable stable OR OR dropping.
dropping.Average of ten highest Average of ten highest core exit TCs stable core exit TCs stable OR OR dropping per:
dropping per:
ooComputer point X0113, Computer point X0113, Core Exit T Avg 10 Core Exit T Avg 10 Hottest Hottest-OR--OR-ooIconic Display Iconic DisplayRCS cold leg temperature RCS cold leg temperature at saturation for SG at saturation for SG pressure.pressure.IF IF natural circulation can natural circulation can NOT NOT be verified, be verified, THEN THEN dump more steam from dump more steam from SGs.SGs.Page 23 of 88 Page 23 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 18 1818CHECK IF SOURCE RANGE DETECTORS CHECK IF SOURCE RANGE DETECTORS CHECK IF SOURCE RANGE DETECTORS SHOULD BE ENERGIZED SHOULD BE ENERGIZED SHOULD BE ENERGIZED
- a.a.IR current - IR current - LESS THAN LESS THAN a.a.Continue with Step 19 Continue with Step 19 10 10-10-10 AMPS AMPS::(Next Page), (Next Page), WHEN WHEN IR current is less IR current is less1NI-NR003 (N35)1NI-NR003 (N35)than than 10 10-10-10 AMPS AMPS , , 1NI-NR004 (N36)1NI-NR004 (N36)THEN THEN do Step 18b.
do Step 18b.
b.b.SR detectors - SR detectors - ENERGIZED ENERGIZED::b.b.Verify P10 Verify P10 AND AND P6 reset by P6 reset by checking the following checking the following1NI-NR001 (N31)1NI-NR001 (N31)computer points indicate computer points indicate1NI-NR002 (N32)1NI-NR002 (N32)RESET:
RESET:ND0011 Nucl Pwr 1 RE TR ND0011 Nucl Pwr 1 RE TR P10 Part Perm P10 Part PermND0012 Nucl Pwr 2 RE TR ND0012 Nucl Pwr 2 RE TR P10 Part Perm P10 Part PermND0013 Nucl Pwr 3 RE TR ND0013 Nucl Pwr 3 RE TR P10 Part Perm P10 Part PermND0014 Nucl Pwr 4 RE TR ND0014 Nucl Pwr 4 RE TR P10 Part Perm P10 Part PermND0032 Interm Rng 1 RE ND0032 Interm Rng 1 RE TR P6 Part Block TR P6 Part BlockND0033 Interm Rng 2 RE ND0033 Interm Rng 2 RE TR P6 Part Block TR P6 Part Block IF IF P10 P10 OR OR P6 are P6 are NOT NOT RESET, RESET, THEN THEN reset per reset per ATTACHMENT E (Page 61).
ATTACHMENT E (Page 61).
Page 24 of 88 Page 24 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 19 1919MAINTAIN STABLE PLANT MAINTAIN STABLE PLANT MAINTAIN STABLE PLANT CONDITIONS CONDITIONS CONDITIONS
- a.a.Check controlled cooldown andCheck controlled cooldown anda.
a.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 19c.
Step 19c.
depressurization - depressurization - NOT NOT PREVIOUSLY IN PROGRESS PREVIOUSLY IN PROGRESS b.b.Maintain RCS Tave - Maintain RCS Tave - BETWEEN BETWEEN 550 550F AND 561 F AND 561F F c.c.Check PZR bubble - Check PZR bubble - BEING BEING c.c.IF IF pressure is being pressure is being MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL controlled with a solid controlled with a solid PZR, PZR, THEN THEN throttle 1CV121 to throttle 1CV121 to control PZR pressure.
control PZR pressure.
GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 19f.
Step 19f.
d.d.Maintain PZR pressure - Maintain PZR pressure - BETWEEN BETWEEN 2220 PSIG AND 2260 PSIG 2220 PSIG AND 2260 PSIG e.e.Maintain PZR level - Maintain PZR level - BETWEEN BETWEEN 25% AND 31%
25% AND 31%
f.f.Maintain SG wide range levels -
Maintain SG wide range levels -
BETWEEN 65% AND 70%
BETWEEN 65% AND 70%
g.g.Check VCT level - Check VCT level - LESS THAN 95%
LESS THAN 95%
g.g.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
1)1)Verify primary water Verify primary water pump 0A and boric acid pump 0A and boric acid transfer pump are OFF.
transfer pump are OFF.
2)2)Contact Contact UNIT 2 UNIT 2 UNIT 2 to to verify primary water verify primary water pump 0B is OFF.
pump 0B is OFF.
h.h.Check current RCS boronCheck current RCS boronh.h.Borate until shutdown Borate until shutdown sample - sample - GREATER THAN SHUTDOWN GREATER THAN SHUTDOWN margin requirements are margin requirements are MARGIN REQUIREMENT MARGIN REQUIREMENT per: per:met.met.1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWN 1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWN MARGIN VERIFICATION DURING MARGIN VERIFICATION DURING SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN i.i.Complete applicable actions of Complete applicable actions of 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND COOLDOWN COOLDOWN Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 25 of 88 Page 25 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 19 (continued)
Step 19 (continued) j.j.Dispatch operators to complete Dispatch operators to complete shutdown procedures for tripped shutdown procedures for tripped FW pumps and HD pumps FW pumps and HD pumps k.k.Dispatch an operator to prop Dispatch an operator to prop open room door for running CENT open room door for running CENT CHG pump - CHG pump - IF NECESSARY TO IF NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN ROOM TEMPERATURE MAINTAIN ROOM TEMPERATURE NORMAL NORMAL l.l.STA implement Status Tree STA implement Status Tree monitoring for both units monitoring for both units 20 2020CHECK RCFC STATUS CHECK RCFC STATUS CHECK RCFC STATUS
- a.a.RCFCs - RCFCs - AT LEAST ONE RUNNING IN AT LEAST ONE RUNNING IN a.a.Manually start Manually start ONE ONE RCFC. RCFC.HI SPEED HI SPEED IF IF NO NO RCFCs can be RCFCs can be manually started, manually started, THEN THEN locally start at locally start at least least ONE ONE RCFC: RCFC: 1)1)Verify Verify ALL ALL RCFC LO speed RCFC LO speed breakers are breakers are OPEN OPEN::Bus 131X 4C (1A RCFC)
Bus 131X 4C (1A RCFC)Bus 131X 2C (1C RCFC)
Bus 131X 2C (1C RCFC)Bus 132X 4C (1B RCFC)
Bus 132X 4C (1B RCFC)Bus 132X 2C (1D RCFC)
Bus 132X 2C (1D RCFC) 2)2)Close the HI speed Close the HI speed breaker for at least breaker for at least ONE ONE RCFC: RCFC:Bus 131X 5C (1A RCFC)
Bus 131X 5C (1A RCFC)Bus 131X 3C (1C RCFC)
Bus 131X 3C (1C RCFC)Bus 132X 5C (1B RCFC)
Bus 132X 5C (1B RCFC)Bus 132X 3C (1D RCFC)
Bus 132X 3C (1D RCFC) 21 2121CHECK CRDM EXHAUST FANS CHECK CRDM EXHAUST FANS CHECK CRDM EXHAUST FANS
- a.a.Exhaust fans - Exhaust fans - RUNNING RUNNING::a.a.Manually start the fans.
Manually start the fans.1VP03CA 1VP03CA1VP03CB 1VP03CB1VP03CC 1VP03CC1VP03CD 1VP03CD Page 26 of 88 Page 26 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 22 2222CHECK CST LEVEL INDICATION CHECK CST LEVEL INDICATION CHECK CST LEVEL INDICATION
Perform the following:
AVAILABLE AVAILABLE:: 1)1)Crosstie U-1 CST to U-2 Crosstie U-1 CST to U-2 oo0PL01J RADWASTE ROOM0PL01J RADWASTE ROOMCST per BwOP CD-2, CST per BwOP CD-2, oo0PL11J MUDS0PL11J MUDSRAISING CST LEVEL WITH RAISING CST LEVEL WITH MAKEUP OR BY CROSSTYING MAKEUP OR BY CROSSTYING 2)2)Monitor U-1 CST level on Monitor U-1 CST level on U-2 CST level U-2 CST level indication:
indication:2LI-CD051B (0PL01J) 2LI-CD051B (0PL01J)2LI-CD051C (0PL11J) 2LI-CD051C (0PL11J) 23 2323DETERMINE LONG TERM PLANT DETERMINE LONG TERM PLANT DETERMINE LONG TERM PLANT STATUS STATUS STATUS::: a.a.Shift Manager determines:Shift Manager determines:a.
a.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 13 Step 13 (Page 9).(Page 9).ooHot Shutdown - Hot Shutdown - DESIRED DESIRED ooCold Shutdown - Cold Shutdown - DESIRED DESIRED Page 27 of 88 Page 27 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5CAUTION CAUTIONPZR pressure may drop rapidly during PZR pressure may drop rapidly duringcooldown if the RCS is water solid.
cooldown if the RCS is water solid.
- NOTE NOTE****SG wide range level is coldSG wide range level is cold*
- drops, wide range indicated leveldrops, wide range indicated level*
- must be raised to maintain actualmust be raised to maintain actual*
- level constant.level constant.*
24 2424INITIATE RCS COOLDOWN TO 350 INITIATE RCS COOLDOWN TO 350 INITIATE RCS COOLDOWN TO 350F F F::: a.a.Check Shutdown Margin -Check Shutdown Margin -a.a.Borate until Shutdown Borate until Shutdown ADEQUATE FOR HOT SHUTDOWN ADEQUATE FOR HOT SHUTDOWN per: per:Margin requirements are Margin requirements are met.met.1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWN1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWNWHEN WHEN shutdown margin shutdown margin MARGIN DAILY VERIFICATIONMARGIN DAILY VERIFICATIONrequirements are met, requirements are met, DURING SHUTDOWN.DURING SHUTDOWN.THEN THEN continue with continue with Step 24b.Step 24b.b.b.Stop all but one RCP Stop all but one RCP c.c.Maintain cooldown rate in RCS Maintain cooldown rate in RCS cold legs - cold legs - LESS THAN OR EQUAL LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 50 TO 50F IN ANY 1 HR PERIOD F IN ANY 1 HR PERIOD d.d.Maintain RCS temperature and Maintain RCS temperature and pressure per 1BwOSR 3.4.3.1, pressure per 1BwOSR 3.4.3.1, RCS PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMIT RCS PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMIT SURVEILLANCE SURVEILLANCE e.e.Dump steam using SG PORVsDump steam using SG PORVse.e.Locally open SG PORVs per Locally open SG PORVs per BwOP MS-6, LOCAL OPERATION BwOP MS-6, LOCAL OPERATION OF THE SG PORVs.
f.f.Control AF flow to maintain Control AF flow to maintain ALL ALL f.f.Locally fail air and Locally fail air and SG wide range levels - SG wide range levels - BETWEEN BETWEEN throttle the 1AF005 flow throttle the 1AF005 flow 65% AND 70%
65% AND 70%
control valves.
control valves.
(364' P10 HANDWHEELS)
(364' P10 HANDWHEELS)
Page 28 of 88 Page 28 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 25 2525DEPRESSURIZE RCS TO 1880 PSIG DEPRESSURIZE RCS TO 1880 PSIG DEPRESSURIZE RCS TO 1880 PSIG
- a.a.Turn Group A and B PZRTurn Group A and B PZRa.a.Locally open 480 volt feed Locally open 480 volt feed heaters - heaters - OFF OFF breaker(s):
breaker(s):
ooGroup A: Group A:Bus 1RY01EA Cub B2 Bus 1RY01EA Cub B2 (414' S12 CWA)
(414' S12 CWA) ooGroup B: Group B:Bus 1RY01EB Cub B2 Bus 1RY01EB Cub B2 (426' S12 CWA)
(426' S12 CWA) b.b.Locally open 480 volt feed Locally open 480 volt feed breakers to PZR heater breakers to PZR heater groups C and D:
groups C and D:Group C: Group C:Bus 1RY01EC Cub B2 (426' Bus 1RY01EC Cub B2 (426' S12 CWA)S12 CWA)Group D: Group D:Bus 1RY01ED Cub B2 (414' Bus 1RY01ED Cub B2 (414' S12 CWA)S12 CWA)c.c.Check PZR bubble - Check PZR bubble - BEING BEING c.c.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL 1)1)Depressurize by reducing Depressurize by reducing charging flow.
charging flow.
2)2)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 25f.
Step 25f.
d.d.Monitor PZR spray water Monitor PZR spray water temperature differential per temperature differential per 1BwOS TRM 3.4.c.1, PRESSURIZER 1BwOS TRM 3.4.c.1, PRESSURIZER TEMPERATURE LIMIT SURVEILLANCE TEMPERATURE LIMIT SURVEILLANCE Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 29 of 88 Page 29 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 25 (continued)
Step 25 (continued) e.e.Depressurize RCS using PZR auxDepressurize RCS using PZR auxe.e.IF IF PZR aux spray can PZR aux spray can NOT NOT spray:spray:be used, be used, THEN THEN depressurize using a depressurize using a 1)1)Check letdown - Check letdown - IN SERVICE IN SERVICE PZR PORV: PZR PORV: 2)2)Check PZR spray waterCheck PZR spray water1)1)Contact Electrical Contact Electrical differential - differential - LESS THAN LESS THAN Maintenance to repair a Maintenance to repair a 320 320F F::PZR PORV per PZR PORV per MA-BR-726-633, MA-BR-726-633,T0126 Regen HX Charg Out TT0126 Regen HX Charg Out TINSTALLATION OF INSTALLATION OFT0481 PZR Steam TT0481 PZR Steam TPOST-FIRE COLD SHUTDOWN POST-FIRE COLD SHUTDOWN EMERGENCY CABLE.
EMERGENCY CABLE.
3)3)Open PZR aux spray valve:
Open PZR aux spray valve:
2)2)Depressurize using the Depressurize using the1CV81451CV8145repaired PZR PORV:
repaired PZR PORV:
oo1RY455A 1RY455A oo1RY456 1RY456 f.f.Check RCS pressure - Check RCS pressure - LESS THAN LESS THAN f.f.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 25c Step 25c 1880 PSIG 1880 PSIG (Previous Page).(Previous Page).
g.g.Stop depressurization:
Stop depressurization:
ooClose PZR aux spray valve Close PZR aux spray valve ooClose PZR PORV Close PZR PORV h.h.Maintain Maintain 1880 PSIG 1880 PSIG using: using: ooPZR heaters PZR heaters ooPZR aux spray PZR aux spray ooCharging flow Charging flow ooPZR PORV PZR PORV Page 30 of 88 Page 30 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 26 2626BLOCK SI ACTUATIONS BLOCK SI ACTUATIONS BLOCK SI ACTUATIONS
- RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 22 (Page 27).
Step 22 (Page 27).
a.a.Block following SI signals per Block following SI signals per ATTACHMENT E (Page 61):
ATTACHMENT E (Page 61):PZR LOW PRESS SI PZR LOW PRESS SISTEAMLINE LOW PRESS SI STEAMLINE LOW PRESS SI b.b.Verify SI signals blocked:
Verify SI signals blocked:Computer points indicate -
Computer points indicate -
SET SET::PD0495 PZR LO P SI PD0495 PZR LO P SI TRN A Block TRN A BlockPD0496 PZR LO P SI PD0496 PZR LO P SI TRN B Block TRN B BlockPD0570 SG LO STM LINE P PD0570 SG LO STM LINE P SI TRN 1 BLOK SI TRN 1 BLOKPD0571 SG LO STM LINE P PD0571 SG LO STM LINE P SI TRN 2 BLOK SI TRN 2 BLOK Page 31 of 88 Page 31 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 27 2727CONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN AND CONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN AND CONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN AND DEPRESSURIZATION DEPRESSURIZATION DEPRESSURIZATION
the following:
ooP0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IV P0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IV ooP0492 RCS Wide Rng Ch IIP0492 RCS Wide Rng Ch IIooPZR steam sample line:
PZR steam sample line:
ooP0493 RCS Wide Rng Ch I P0493 RCS Wide Rng Ch I ooP0494 RCS Wide Rng Ch IIIP0494 RCS Wide Rng Ch IIIa)a)Open PZR steam inlet Open PZR steam inlet isolation valve:
isolation valve:1PS9350A (HRSS 1PS9350A (HRSS panel 1PS27J) panel 1PS27J) b)b)Open valve 1.1 (HRSS Open valve 1.1 (HRSS Panel 1PS25J)
Panel 1PS25J)-OR--OR-ooPZR liquid sample line:
PZR liquid sample line:
a)a)Open PZR liquid inlet Open PZR liquid inlet isolation valve:
isolation valve:1PS9350B (HRSS 1PS9350B (HRSS panel 1PS27J) panel 1PS27J) b)b)Open valve 1.2 (HRSS Open valve 1.2 (HRSS Panel 1PS25J)
Panel 1PS25J)
IF IF NO RCS pressure NO RCS pressure indication is available, indication is available, THEN THEN contact Electrical contact Electrical Maintenance to repair a Maintenance to repair a wide range RCS pressure wide range RCS pressure transmitter:
transmitter:
oo1PI-403 1PI-403 oo1PI-405 1PI-405 b.b.Maintain RCS cooldown rate -
Maintain RCS cooldown rate -
LESS THAN LESS THAN 50 50F IN ANY 1 HR PERIOD F IN ANY 1 HR PERIOD c.c.Verify Verify ALL ALL PZR heaters - PZR heaters - OFF OFF Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 32 of 88 Page 32 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 27 (continued)
Step 27 (continued) d.d.Continue depressurization:
Continue depressurization:
ooOpen PZR aux spray valve:
Open PZR aux spray valve:1CV8145 1CV8145 ooOpen repaired PZR PORV Open repaired PZR PORV e.e.Check PZR bubble - Check PZR bubble - BEING BEING e.e.IF IF pressure is being pressure is being MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL controlled with a solid controlled with a solid PZR, PZR, THEN THEN maintain the PZR maintain the PZR solid. solid. GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 27g.
Step 27g.
f.f.Maintain PZR level - Maintain PZR level - BETWEEN BETWEEN 25% AND 31%
25% AND 31%
g.g.Complete applicable actions of Complete applicable actions of 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND COOLDOWN COOLDOWN Page 33 of 88 Page 33 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5CAUTION CAUTIONSI accumulators should be isolated SI accumulators should be isolatedwhen RCS pressure is between when RCS pressure is between1000 PSIG 1000 PSIG and and 800 PSIG 800 PSIG..
28 2828CHECK IF SI ACCUMULATORS SHOULD CHECK IF SI ACCUMULATORS SHOULD CHECK IF SI ACCUMULATORS SHOULD BE ISOLATED BE ISOLATED BE ISOLATED
- a.a.RCS pressure - RCS pressure - LESS THAN LESS THAN a.a.Continue with Step 29 Continue with Step 29 1000 PSIG 1000 PSIG (Next Page), (Next Page), WHEN WHEN RCS pressure is less RCS pressure is less than than 1000 PSIG 1000 PSIG , , THEN THEN do Steps 28b do Steps 28b thru 28c.thru 28c.b.b.Close SI accumulator discharge Close SI accumulator discharge valves: valves:Train A (1SI8808A and D):
Train A (1SI8808A and D):
a)a)Energize SVAG VALVE MCC Energize SVAG VALVE MCC per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT b)b)Locally close SILocally close SIb)b)Close SI accumulator Close SI accumulator accumulator dischargeaccumulator dischargedischarge valve(s):
discharge valve(s):
valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5, valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFLOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFoo1SI8808A (412' R15 1SI8808A (412' R15 SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTSAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTOMB)
OMB)oo1SI8808D (412' R9 1SI8808D (412' R9MCC 131X2A A3 (1SI8808A)MCC 131X2A A3 (1SI8808A)OMB)
OMB)(414' S12 CWA)
(414' S12 CWA)MCC 131X2A A2 (1SI8808D)
MCC 131X2A A2 (1SI8808D)
(414' S12 CWA)
(414' S12 CWA)Train B (1SI8808B and C):
Train B (1SI8808B and C):
a)a)Energize SVAG VALVE MCC Energize SVAG VALVE MCC per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT b)b)Locally close SILocally close SIb)b)Close SI accumulator Close SI accumulator accumulator dischargeaccumulator dischargedischarge valve(s):
discharge valve(s):
valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5, valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFLOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFoo1SI8808B (412' R18 1SI8808B (412' R18 SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTSAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTOMB)
OMB)oo1SI8808C (412' R5 1SI8808C (412' R5MCC 132X2A A3 (1SI8808B)MCC 132X2A A3 (1SI8808B)OMB)
OMB)(426' S12 CWA)
(426' S12 CWA)MCC 132X2A A2 (1SI8808C)
MCC 132X2A A2 (1SI8808C)
(426' S12 CWA)
(426' S12 CWA)
Page 34 of 88 Page 34 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 29 2929CHECK IF COLD OVERPRESSURE CHECK IF COLD OVERPRESSURE CHECK IF COLD OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION CAN BE PLACED IN PROTECTION CAN BE PLACED IN PROTECTION CAN BE PLACED IN SERVICE SERVICE SERVICE::: a.a.RCS temperature - RCS temperature - LESS THAN LESS THAN a.a.Continue to cooldown, Continue to cooldown, 380 380F F WHEN WHEN RCS temperature is RCS temperature is less than less than 380 380F F , , THEN THEN do Step 29b.
do Step 29b.
b.b.Place Cold OverpressurePlace Cold Overpressureb.b.Refer to Tech Spec 3.4.12.
Refer to Tech Spec 3.4.12.
Protection in service per Protection in service per ATTACHMENT E (Page 61)
ATTACHMENT E (Page 61) 30 3030CHECK IF ECCS PUMPS SHOULD BE CHECK IF ECCS PUMPS SHOULD BE CHECK IF ECCS PUMPS SHOULD BE LOCKED OUT LOCKED OUT LOCKED OUT
b.b.Locally rack out breakers for Locally rack out breakers for the following ECCS equipment:
the following ECCS equipment:BOTH SI pumps:
BOTH SI pumps:Bus 141 Cub 3 Bus 141 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1A)(SI Pump 1A)Bus 142 Cub 3 Bus 142 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1B)(SI Pump 1B)Non-running CV pump:
Non-running CV pump:
ooBus 141 Cub 11 Bus 141 Cub 11 (CV pump 1A)(CV pump 1A) ooBus 142 Cub 10 Bus 142 Cub 10 (CV pump 1B)(CV pump 1B)
Page 35 of 88 Page 35 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 31 3131MAINTAIN STABLE PLANT MAINTAIN STABLE PLANT MAINTAIN STABLE PLANT CONDITIONS CONDITIONS CONDITIONS
- a.a.RCS average temperature - RCS average temperature - LESS LESS THAN 350 THAN 350F F b.b.RCS pressure - RCS pressure - BETWEEN 330 PSIG BETWEEN 330 PSIG AND 360 PSIG AND 360 PSIG c.c.Check PZR bubble - Check PZR bubble - BEING BEING c.c.IF IF pressure is being pressure is being MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL controlled with a solid controlled with a solid PZR, PZR, THEN THEN throttle 1CV121 to throttle 1CV121 to control PZR pressure.
control PZR pressure.
GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 31e.
Step 31e.
d.d.PZR level - PZR level - BETWEEN 25% AND 31%
BETWEEN 25% AND 31%
e.e.SG wide range levels - SG wide range levels - BETWEEN BETWEEN 65% AND 70%
65% AND 70%
f.f.Check VCT level - Check VCT level - LESS THAN 95%
LESS THAN 95%
f.f.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
1)1)Verify primary water Verify primary water pump 0A and boric acid pump 0A and boric acid transfer pump are OFF.
transfer pump are OFF.
2)2)Contact Contact UNIT 2 UNIT 2 UNIT 2 to to verify primary water verify primary water pump 0B is OFF.
pump 0B is OFF.
g.g.Complete applicable actions of Complete applicable actions of 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND COOLDOWN COOLDOWN 32 3232DETERMINE LONG TERM PLANT DETERMINE LONG TERM PLANT DETERMINE LONG TERM PLANT STATUS STATUS STATUS::: a.a.Shift Manager determines - Shift Manager determines - COLD COLD a.a.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 31. Step 31.SHUTDOWN DESIRED SHUTDOWN DESIRED Page 36 of 88 Page 36 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5*****************************************
- cooldown due to lack of RH controlscooldown due to lack of RH controls*
33 3333CONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN TO 200 CONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN TO 200 CONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN TO 200F F F::: a.a.Check Shutdown Margin -Check Shutdown Margin -a.a.Borate until Shutdown Borate until Shutdown ADEQUATE FOR COLD SHUTDOWN per ADEQUATE FOR COLD SHUTDOWN per
- Margin requirements are Margin requirements are met.met.1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWN1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWNWHEN WHEN shutdown margin shutdown margin MARGIN VERIFICATION DURINGMARGIN VERIFICATION DURINGrequirements are met, requirements are met, SHUTDOWNSHUTDOWNTHEN THEN continue with continue with Step 33b.Step 33b.b.b.Maintain RCS pressure - Maintain RCS pressure - BETWEEN BETWEEN 330 PSIG AND 360 PSIG 330 PSIG AND 360 PSIG c.c.Continue to cool down with SG Continue to cool down with SG PORVs PORVs d.d.Check RCS temperature -Check RCS temperature -d.d.Align SG blowdown to Align SG blowdown to DROPPING DROPPING control RCS temperature.
control RCS temperature.
IF IF sufficient cooldown can sufficient cooldown can NOT NOT be obtained with be obtained with SG PORVs SG PORVs AND AND SG blowdown, SG blowdown, THEN THEN GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 34 (Next Step 34 (Next Page).Page).e.e.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 32 (Previous Step 32 (Previous Page)Page)Page 37 of 88 Page 37 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 34 3434ALIGN RH SYSTEM FOR SAMPLING ALIGN RH SYSTEM FOR SAMPLING ALIGN RH SYSTEM FOR SAMPLING
- a.a.RH pumps - RH pumps - NONE RUNNING IN NONE RUNNING IN a.a.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 38b (Page 45).
Step 38b (Page 45).
SHUTDOWN COOLING MODE SHUTDOWN COOLING MODE b.b.Refer to BwOP RH-5, RH SYSTEM Refer to BwOP RH-5, RH SYSTEM STARTUP FOR RECIRC, for STARTUP FOR RECIRC, for applicable actions applicable actions c.c.Verify RH hot leg suctionsVerify RH hot leg suctionsc.c.Locally verify RH pump hot Locally verify RH pump hot isolated from RCS by checkingisolated from RCS by checkingleg suction valves are leg suction valves are RH suction pressure - RH suction pressure - AT LEAST AT LEAST CLOSED CLOSED:: 50 PSIG LESS THAN RCS WIDE 50 PSIG LESS THAN RCS WIDE RANGE PRESSURE RANGE PRESSURE
- 1RH8701A 1RH8701A (377' R7 OMB P-68)
(377' R7 OMB P-68)RH suction pressure:
RH suction pressure:1RH8702A 1RH8702A (377' R4 OMB P-75)
(377' R4 OMB P-75) ooComputer points:
Computer points:1RH8701B (377' R11 IMB 1RH8701B (377' R11 IMB near "D" loop against Rx near "D" loop against RxP0601 RH Pump 1A SuctP0601 RH Pump 1A Suctcavity wall) cavity wall)
Press Press1RH8702B (377' R3 IMB 1RH8702B (377' R3 IMBP0602 RH Pump 1B SuctP0602 RH Pump 1B Suctnear "C" loop against Rx near "C" loop against Rx Press Presscavity wall) cavity wall) ooLocal gauge pressure:
Local gauge pressure:1PI-0601 (RH Pump 1A) 1PI-0601 (RH Pump 1A)
(346' V16)
(346' V16)1PI-0602 (RH Pump 1B) 1PI-0602 (RH Pump 1B)
(346' W15)
(346' W15)-AND--AND-RCS wide range pressure:
RCS wide range pressure:
ooComputer points:
Computer points:
ooP0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IV P0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IV ooP0492 RCS Wide RnG Ch II P0492 RCS Wide RnG Ch II ooLocal gauge pressure:
Local gauge pressure:
oo1PI-402 (at Panel 1PI-402 (at Panel 1PL66J) (377' R1) 1PL66J) (377' R1) oo1PI-404 (at Panel 1PI-404 (at Panel 1PL54J) (377' R11) 1PL54J) (377' R11)
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 38 of 88 Page 38 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 34 (continued)
Step 34 (continued) d.d.Locally check RH pump miniflowLocally check RH pump miniflowd.d.Locally open any closed Locally open any closed valves - valves - OPEN OPEN::valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF1RH610 (357' S16 in NW corner1RH610 (357' S16 in NW cornerSAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
of 1A RH HX Room) of 1A RH HX Room)1RH611 (357' V16 in NW corner1RH611 (357' V16 in NW cornerooMCC 131X1 F2 (1RH610)
MCC 131X1 F2 (1RH610) of 1B RH HX Room)of 1B RH HX Room)ooMCC 132X1 C4 (1RH611)
MCC 132X1 C4 (1RH611) e.e.Locally check containmentLocally check containmente.e.Locally close any open Locally close any open recirc sump valves - recirc sump valves - CLOSED CLOSED::valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF1SI8811A (364' U13 CWA)1SI8811A (364' U13 CWA)SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:1SI8811B (364' X13 CWA) 1SI8811B (364' X13 CWA) ooMCC 131X1 M3 (1SI8811A)
MCC 131X1 M3 (1SI8811A) ooMCC 132X4 H1 (1SI8811B)
MCC 132X4 H1 (1SI8811B) f.f.Locally check RH HX to CV andLocally check RH HX to CV andf.f.Locally close any open Locally close any open SI pumps isolation valves -SI pumps isolation valves -valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, CLOSED CLOSED::LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:1CV8804A (364' S13 CWA) 1CV8804A (364' S13 CWA)1SI8804B (364' Y13 above 1B1SI8804B (364' Y13 above 1BooMCC 131X1 J5 (1CV8804A)
MCC 131X1 J5 (1CV8804A)
SI pump)SI pump)ooMCC 132X4 E1 (1SI8804B)
MCC 132X4 E1 (1SI8804B) g.g.Locally check CS sump suctionLocally check CS sump suctiong.g.Locally close any open Locally close any open valves - valves - CLOSED CLOSED::valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF1CS009A (1A CS pump room)1CS009A (1A CS pump room)SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:1CS009B (1B CS pump room) 1CS009B (1B CS pump room) ooMCC 131X1 C1 (1CS009A)
MCC 131X1 C1 (1CS009A) ooMCC 132X1 G1 (1CS009B)
MCC 132X1 G1 (1CS009B) h.h.Locally check RWST to RH pumpLocally check RWST to RH pumph.h.Locally open any closed Locally open any closed outlet isolation valves - outlet isolation valves - OPEN OPEN::valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF1SI8812A (1A CS Pump Rm)1SI8812A (1A CS Pump Rm)SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:1SI8812B (1B RH Pump Rm) 1SI8812B (1B RH Pump Rm) ooMCC 131X1A Q1 (1SI8812A)
MCC 131X1A Q1 (1SI8812A) ooMCC 132X4A M2 (1SI8812B)
MCC 132X4A M2 (1SI8812B)
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 39 of 88 Page 39 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 34 (continued)
Step 34 (continued) i.i.Install pneumaticInstall pneumatici.
i.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 32 Step 32 jumper/regulator to bypassjumper/regulator to bypass(Page 36).(Page 36).
signal converters for selected signal converters for selected RH flow control valves per RH flow control valves per ATTACHMENT C (Page 57):
ATTACHMENT C (Page 57):
ooRH Pump 1A:
RH Pump 1A:1RH606 1RH6061RH618 1RH618 ooRH Pump 1B:
RH Pump 1B:1RH607 1RH6071RH619 1RH619 j.j.Locally close selected RH trainLocally close selected RH trainj.
j.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 32 Step 32 HX flow control valve usingHX flow control valve using(Page 36).(Page 36).
pneumatic jumper/regulator:
pneumatic jumper/regulator:
oo1RH606 1RH606 oo1RH607 1RH607 k.k.Locally verify selected RHLocally verify selected RHk.k.Close valve using Close valve using train HX bypass flow controltrain HX bypass flow controlpneumatic pneumatic valve - valve - CLOSED CLOSED::jumper/regulator.
jumper/regulator.
oo1RH618 (357' +10' S16 1A RH 1RH618 (357' +10' S16 1A RH HX Room)HX Room)oo1RH619 (357' +10' V16 1B RH 1RH619 (357' +10' V16 1B RH HX Room)HX Room)l.l.Separate RH trains:
Separate RH trains:Locally close RH discharge Locally close RH dischargeOpen the breaker and Open the breaker and header crosstie valve usingheader crosstie valve usingseparate RH trains by separate RH trains by 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCYlocally closing using locally closing using CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNCONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNthe handwheel:
the handwheel:
EQUIPMENT, for train EQUIPMENT, for train NOT NOT being recirced:being recirced:oo1RH8716A 1RH8716A (364' +11' S14 CWA)
(364' +11' S14 CWA) ooMCC 131X1 F3 (1RH8716A)MCC 131X1 F3 (1RH8716A)oo1RH8716B 1RH8716B ooMCC 132X4 A4 (1RH8716B)MCC 132X4 A4 (1RH8716B)(364' +11' U14 CWA)
(364' +11' U14 CWA)
Page 40 of 88 Page 40 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 35 3535LOCALLY PLACE RH SYSTEM IN LOCALLY PLACE RH SYSTEM IN LOCALLY PLACE RH SYSTEM IN OPERATION FOR SAMPLING OPERATION FOR SAMPLING OPERATION FOR SAMPLING
- a.a.Start the selected RH pumpStart the selected RH pumpa.a.Continue cooldown on SG Continue cooldown on SG using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALusing 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALPORVs, PORVs, EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 33 Step 33 SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTSHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT(Page 37).(Page 37).
b.b.Shift Manager determines recirc Shift Manager determines recirc flowpath: flowpath: ooMiniflow:
Miniflow:Maintain RH flow - Maintain RH flow - GREATER GREATER THAN 500 GPM THAN 500 GPM
Back to RWST:
a)a)Obtain key for 1RH8735 Obtain key for 1RH8735 b)b)Unlock and open 1RH8735 Unlock and open 1RH8735 (364' +11' S13)
(364' +11' S13) c)c)Adjust RH bypass flow Adjust RH bypass flow control valve to obtain -
control valve to obtain -
3300 GPM 3300 GPM:: oo1RH618: 1RH618: F0626 RHX 1 Coolant F0626 RHX 1 Coolant Disch F Disch F oo1RH619: 1RH619:F0627 RHX 2 Coolant F0627 RHX 2 Coolant Disch F Disch F c.c.Contact Chemistry for boron Contact Chemistry for boron samples: samples:RCS RCSOperating RH train Operating RH train d.d.Locally stop running RH pump Locally stop running RH pump per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT Page 41 of 88 Page 41 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 36 3636ALIGN CC SYSTEM FOR SHUTDOWN ALIGN CC SYSTEM FOR SHUTDOWN ALIGN CC SYSTEM FOR SHUTDOWN COOLING COOLING COOLING::: a.a.Align CC for shutdown cooling Align CC for shutdown cooling per BwOP CC-8, ISOLATION OF CC per BwOP CC-8, ISOLATION OF CC BETWEEN UNITS 1 AND 2 BETWEEN UNITS 1 AND 2 b.b.Locally open RH HX CC returnLocally open RH HX CC returnb.b.Open the breaker and Open the breaker and valve for selected RH train pervalve for selected RH train perlocally open the valve locally open the valve 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCYusing the handwheel:
using the handwheel:
CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:EQUIPMENT:oo1CC9412A (364' +10' S17) 1CC9412A (364' +10' S17) oo1CC9412B (364' +12' V18) 1CC9412B (364' +12' V18) oo1MCC 131X1 K3 (1CC9412A) 1MCC 131X1 K3 (1CC9412A) oo1MCC 132X1 D4 (1CC9412B) 1MCC 132X1 D4 (1CC9412B)
Page 42 of 88 Page 42 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 37 3737ALIGN SELECTED RH TRAIN FOR ALIGN SELECTED RH TRAIN FOR ALIGN SELECTED RH TRAIN FOR SHUTDOWN COOLING SHUTDOWN COOLING SHUTDOWN COOLING
- a.a.Refer to BwOP RH-6, PLACING THE Refer to BwOP RH-6, PLACING THE RH SYSTEM IN SHUTDOWN COOLING, RH SYSTEM IN SHUTDOWN COOLING, for applicable actions for applicable actions b.b.Check RCS pressure - Check RCS pressure - LESS THAN LESS THAN b.b.Depressurize RCS to Depressurize RCS to 360 PSIG 360 PSIG::less than less than 360 PSIG 360 PSIG..ooComputer points:
Computer points:
ooP0498 RCL System WR LP 3 P P0498 RCL System WR LP 3 P ooP0499 RCL System WR LP 1 P P0499 RCL System WR LP 1 P ooLocal gauge pressure:
Local gauge pressure:
oo1PI-402 (at Panel 1PL66J) 1PI-402 (at Panel 1PL66J)
(377' R1)(377' R1)oo1PI-404 (at Panel 1PL54J) 1PI-404 (at Panel 1PL54J)
(377' R11)
(377' R11) c.c.Close RH pump suction from Close RH pump suction from RWST: RWST: 1)1)Energize SVAG VALVE MCC per Energize SVAG VALVE MCC per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT 2)2)Locally close RH pump suctionLocally close RH pump suction2)2)Open the breaker and Open the breaker and from RWST valve using 1BwOAfrom RWST valve using 1BwOAlocally close the valve locally close the valve ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCYELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCYusing the handwheel:
using the handwheel:
CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:EQUIPMENT:oo1SI8812A (1A CS Pump 1SI8812A (1A CS Pump Rm)Rm)ooMCC 131X1A Q1 (1SI8812A)MCC 131X1A Q1 (1SI8812A)oo1SI8812B (1B RH Pump 1SI8812B (1B RH Pump ooMCC 132X4A M2 (1SI8812B)MCC 132X4A M2 (1SI8812B)Rm)
Rm)Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 43 of 88 Page 43 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 37 (continued)
Step 37 (continued) d.d.Locally open RCS hot leg to RHLocally open RCS hot leg to RHd.d.Open the breaker and Open the breaker and pump suction valves using 1BwOApump suction valves using 1BwOAlocally open the valves locally open the valves ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROLELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROLusing the handwheels:
using the handwheels:
OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
ooRH Pump 1A:RH Pump 1A:ooRH Pump 1A:
RH Pump 1A:MCC 131X2 B1 (1RH8701A)
MCC 131X2 B1 (1RH8701A)1RH8701A 1RH8701AMCC 132X2 B3 (1RH8701B)MCC 132X2 B3 (1RH8701B)(377' R7 OMB P-68)
(377' R7 OMB P-68)1RH8701B 1RH8701B (377' R11 IMB near (377' R11 IMB near"D" loop against Rx"D" loop against Rx cavity wall) cavity wall) ooRH Pump 1B:RH Pump 1B:ooRH Pump 1B:
RH Pump 1B:MCC 131X2 B4 (1RH8702A)
MCC 131X2 B4 (1RH8702A)1RH8702A 1RH8702AMCC 132X2 B1 (1RH8702B)MCC 132X2 B1 (1RH8702B)(377' R4 OMB P-75)
(377' R4 OMB P-75)1RH8702B (377' R3 IMB 1RH8702B (377' R3 IMB near "C" loop against near "C" loop against Rx cavity wall)
Rx cavity wall) e.e.Locally verify RH pump miniflowLocally verify RH pump miniflowe.e.Locally open the valve Locally open the valve valve - valve - OPEN OPEN::using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE oo1RH610 (357' S16 in NW corner1RH610 (357' S16 in NW cornerSHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
of 1A RH HX Room) of 1A RH HX Room) oo1RH611 (357' V16 in NW corner1RH611 (357' V16 in NW cornerooMCC 131X1 F2 (1RH610)
MCC 131X1 F2 (1RH610) of 1B RH HX Room)of 1B RH HX Room)ooMCC 132X1 C4 (1RH611)
MCC 132X1 C4 (1RH611) f.f.Locally verify RH HX flowLocally verify RH HX flowf.f.Close the valve using Close the valve using control valve - control valve - CLOSED CLOSED::pneumatic pneumatic jumper/regulator.
jumper/regulator.
oo1RH606 (357' +10' S16 1A RH 1RH606 (357' +10' S16 1A RH HX Room)HX Room)oo1RH607 (357' +10' V16 1B RH 1RH607 (357' +10' V16 1B RH HX Room)HX Room)g.g.Locally verify RH HX bypassLocally verify RH HX bypassg.g.Close the valve using Close the valve using flow control valve - flow control valve - CLOSED CLOSED::pneumatic pneumatic jumper/regulator.
jumper/regulator.
oo1RH618 (357' +10' S16 1A RH 1RH618 (357' +10' S16 1A RH HX Room)HX Room)oo1RH619 (357' +10' V16 1B RH 1RH619 (357' +10' V16 1B RH HX Room)HX Room)Page 44 of 88 Page 44 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 38 3838PLACE SELECTED RH TRAIN IN PLACE SELECTED RH TRAIN IN PLACE SELECTED RH TRAIN IN OPERATION FOR COOLDOWN OPERATION FOR COOLDOWN OPERATION FOR COOLDOWN
- a.a.Locally start RH pump usingLocally start RH pump usinga.a.Continue cooldown using Continue cooldown using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCYSG PORVs, SG PORVs, CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 33 Step 33 EQUIPMENTEQUIPMENT(Page 37).(Page 37).
b.b.Locally establish cooldown:
Locally establish cooldown:Throttle RH HX bypass flow Throttle RH HX bypass flow control valve using temporary control valve using temporary regulator to maintain RH regulator to maintain RH flow - flow - GREATER THAN 3300 GPM GREATER THAN 3300 GPM
- oo1RH618: 1RH618:F0626 RHX 1 Coolant F0626 RHX 1 Coolant Disch F Disch F oo1RH619: 1RH619:F0627 RHX 2 Coolant F0627 RHX 2 Coolant Disch F Disch FThrottle RH HX flow control Throttle RH HX flow control valve using temporary valve using temporary regulator to maintain RCS regulator to maintain RCS cooldown rate - cooldown rate - LESS THAN LESS THAN 50 50F IN ANY 1 HR PERIOD F IN ANY 1 HR PERIOD
- oo1RH606 1RH606 oo1RH607 1RH607 Page 45 of 88 Page 45 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 39 3939ESTABLISH RH LETDOWN AT ESTABLISH RH LETDOWN AT ESTABLISH RH LETDOWN AT DISCRETION OF SHIFT MANAGER DISCRETION OF SHIFT MANAGER DISCRETION OF SHIFT MANAGER
- a.a.Refer to BwOP CV-17, Refer to BwOP CV-17, ESTABLISHING AND SECURING ESTABLISHING AND SECURING NORMAL AND RH LETDOWN FLOW, for NORMAL AND RH LETDOWN FLOW, for applicable actions applicable actions b.b.Check letdown isolationCheck letdown isolationb.b.Manually open the Manually open the valves - valves - OPEN OPEN::valve(s).
valve(s).1CV459 1CV4591CV460 1CV460 c.c.Check letdown orifice isolationCheck letdown orifice isolationc.c.Manually open the Manually open the valves - valves - OPEN OPEN::valve(s).
valve(s).1CV8149A 1CV8149A1CV8149B 1CV8149B1CV8149C 1CV8149C d.d.Obtain key from RSP and locally Obtain key from RSP and locally open RH HX outlet to CV letdown open RH HX outlet to CV letdown HX isolation valve for selected HX isolation valve for selected train: train: oo1RH8734A (364' S14 CWA 25' 1RH8734A (364' S14 CWA 25' West of door)
West of door) oo1RH8734B (364' V14 CWA 6' 1RH8734B (364' V14 CWA 6' East of door)
East of door) e.e.Locally open RH to CV letdown Locally open RH to CV letdown valve using a pneumatic jumper:
valve using a pneumatic jumper:1CV128 (383' U15 1B letdown 1CV128 (383' U15 1B letdown HX valve room)
HX valve room)
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 46 of 88 Page 46 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 Step 39 (continued)
Step 39 (continued) f.f.Locally adjust letdown to Locally adjust letdown to maintain PZR level:
maintain PZR level:
1)1)Monitor charging and letdown Monitor charging and letdown flow on computer points:
flow on computer points:
ooF0134 Letdown Hx Letdown F0134 Letdown Hx Letdown Outlet F Outlet F ooF0128 Charg Pmp Disch F0128 Charg Pmp Disch Hdr F Hdr F 2)2)Adjust 1CV131 manual bypass Adjust 1CV131 manual bypass as necessary when as necessary when establishing letdown:
establishing letdown:1CV8409 (364' +29' S13 1CV8409 (364' +29' S13 CWA)CWA)3)3)Locally isolate 1CV131 by Locally isolate 1CV131 by closing its manual isolation closing its manual isolation valves: valves: oo1CV8408A (364' +29' S13 1CV8408A (364' +29' S13 CWA)CWA)oo1CV8408B (364' +29' S13 1CV8408B (364' +29' S13 CWA)CWA)g.g.Locally close letdown line Locally close letdown line containment isolation valve:
containment isolation valve:Fail air to 1CV8152 (364' Fail air to 1CV8152 (364'
+27' X13 CWA P-41)
+27' X13 CWA P-41) 40 4040PROCEED TO COLD SHUTDOWN PROCEED TO COLD SHUTDOWN PROCEED TO COLD SHUTDOWN CONDITION PER CONDITION PER CONDITION PER
- 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND COOLDOWN COOLDOWN -END- -END-Page 47 of 88 Page 47 of 88 REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 RCS Temperature (°F)RCS Pressure (PSIG)
Normal---
Containment Conditions:
---Saturation NOT ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE Normal---
Containment
---Saturation NOT ACCEPTABLE
FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1 FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1 FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1 RCS SUBCOOLING MARGIN RCS SUBCOOLING MARGIN RCS SUBCOOLING MARGIN Page 48 of 88 Page 48 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT A (PG 1 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT A (PG 1 OF 4)
REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUPCAUTION CAUTIONSwitching control to LOCAL may Switching control to LOCAL mayresult in unwanted result in unwanted OR OR unexpected unexpectedequipment operation if RSP control equipment operation if RSP controlswitch positions do switch positions do NOT NOT match matchcurrent equipment conditions.
current equipment conditions.
1 11PLACE B TRAIN VC LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCHES IN LOCAL PLACE B TRAIN VC LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCHES IN LOCAL PLACE B TRAIN VC LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCHES IN LOCAL
- a.a.Dispatch an NSO with the key to 1PL05JA (364' M23) to place the Dispatch an NSO with the key to 1PL05JA (364' M23) to place the following switches in - following switches in - LOCAL LOCAL::
EPN EQUIPMENT EPN EQUIPMENT
0VC01CB MCR SUPPLY FAN 0B 0VC01CB MCR SUPPLY FAN 0B
- Check control switch position matches current component
- Check control switch position matches current component position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position.
position.
Page 49 of 88 Page 49 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT A (PG 2 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT A (PG 2 OF 4)
REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP 2 22PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL04J PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL04J PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL04J
EPN EPN EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
0VC01CA MCR SUPPLY FAN 0A 0VC01CA MCR SUPPLY FAN 0A
- Check control switch position matches current component
- Check control switch position matches current component position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position.
position.
Page 50 of 88 Page 50 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT A (PG 3 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT A (PG 3 OF 4)
REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP 3 33PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL05J PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL05J PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL05J
EPN EPN EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
- Check control switch position matches current component
- Check control switch position matches current component position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position.
position.
Page 51 of 88 Page 51 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT A (PG 4 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT A (PG 4 OF 4)
REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP 4 44PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL06J PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL06J PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL06J
EPN EPN EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
- **1CV8149A 45 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE 1CV8149A 45 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE
- **1CV460 LETDOWN LINE ISOL 1CV460 LETDOWN LINE ISOL 0PW02PA PW MAKEUP PUMP 0A 0PW02PA PW MAKEUP PUMP 0A
- **1CV8149B 75 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE 1CV8149B 75 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE
- **1CV459 LETDOWN LINE ISOL 1CV459 LETDOWN LINE ISOL
- Check control switch position matches current component
- Check control switch position matches current component position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position.
position.
- NOTE NOTE****When in "LOCAL" the charging flowWhen in "LOCAL" the charging flow*
- controller provides a direct aircontroller provides a direct air*
- signal to the 1CV121 valvesignal to the 1CV121 valve*
- controller.controller.*
5 55CONTROL CHARGING FLOW CONTROL CHARGING FLOW CONTROL CHARGING FLOW
- a.a.Place charging flow control in - Place charging flow control in - LOCAL LOCAL::1FHC-121 1FHC-121 6 66RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 8c (Page 6)
RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 8c (Page 6)
RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 8c (Page 6)-END--END-Page 52 of 88 Page 52 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 4)
LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS
- NOTE NOTE****Vital area keys will be available atVital area keys will be available at*
- the Remote Shutdown Panel for entrythe Remote Shutdown Panel for entry*
- through doors with disabled cardthrough doors with disabled card*
- readers.readers.*******************************************
1 11LOCALLY DEENERGIZE REACTOR HEAD LOCALLY DEENERGIZE REACTOR HEAD LOCALLY DEENERGIZE REACTOR HEAD VENT VALVES VENT VALVES VENT VALVES
Bus 113, Cub ER1:1RC014A 1RC014A1RC014C 1RC014COpen circuit breaker 10 on DC Open circuit breaker 10 on DC Bus 114, Cub ER1:
Bus 114, Cub ER1:1RC014B 1RC014B1RC014D 1RC014D 2 22LOCALLY VERIFY BOTH RX TRIP LOCALLY VERIFY BOTH RX TRIP LOCALLY VERIFY BOTH RX TRIP Open the breakers.
Open the breakers.
BREAKERS OPEN BREAKERS OPEN BREAKERS OPEN 3 33LOCALLY VERIFY ALL TURBINE VALVES LOCALLY VERIFY ALL TURBINE VALVES LOCALLY VERIFY ALL TURBINE VALVES CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED:::Governor valves Governor valvesThrottle valves Throttle valvesReheat stop valves Reheat stop valvesIntercept valves Intercept valves 4 44VERIFY PUMPS TRIPPED VERIFY PUMPS TRIPPED VERIFY PUMPS TRIPPED
- Locally open breaker(s).
Locally open breaker(s).HD Pump 1B (Bus 156 Cub 3)
HD Pump 1B (Bus 156 Cub 3)FW Pump 1A (Bus 156 Cub 4)
FW Pump 1A (Bus 156 Cub 4)HD Pump 1A (Bus 157 Cub 3)
HD Pump 1A (Bus 157 Cub 3)HD Pump 1C (Bus 157 Cub 5)
HD Pump 1C (Bus 157 Cub 5)Startup FW Pump (Bus 159 Cub 4)
Startup FW Pump (Bus 159 Cub 4)
Page 53 of 88 Page 53 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT B (PG 2 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT B (PG 2 OF 4)
LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS 5 55VERIFY MAIN GENERATOR TRIPPED VERIFY MAIN GENERATOR TRIPPED VERIFY MAIN GENERATOR TRIPPED
Open the breaker.
breaker - breaker - OPEN OPEN::41 breaker (426' J4 at 41 breaker (426' J4 at 1MP09E)1MP09E)6 66VERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSES VERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSES VERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSES
4KV ESF bus per:ESF buses - ESF buses - BOTH ENERGIZED BOTH ENERGIZED
- 1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV 1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KVBus 141Bus 141ESF BUS:
ESF BUS:Bus 142 Bus 142 ooATTACHMENT B (1A DG)
ATTACHMENT B (1A DG) ooATTACHMENT D (1B DG)
ATTACHMENT D (1B DG)
Page 54 of 88 Page 54 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT B (PG 3 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT B (PG 3 OF 4)
LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS
- NOTE NOTE****Bus status report should includeBus status report should include*
- breaker positions, control powerbreaker positions, control power*
- status, and any dropped relays.status, and any dropped relays.*
7 77DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 141 DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 141 DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 141 EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT::: a.a.Disable auto start of CS pump Disable auto start of CS pump 1A: 1A: 1)1)Pull control power fuses:
Pull control power fuses:Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A)
Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A) 2)2)Check CS pump breaker - Check CS pump breaker - OPEN OPEN::2)2)Open breakers with a Open breakers with a reach rod.
reach rod.Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A)
Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A) b.b.Report status of SI pump Report status of SI pump breakers and CS pump breakers breakers and CS pump breakers to RSP: to RSP:Bus 141 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1A)
Bus 141 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1A)Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A)
Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A) c.c.Report status of Train A 4KV Report status of Train A 4KV busses and breakers to RSP:
busses and breakers to RSP:Bus 141 Bus 141Bus 143 Bus 143 Page 55 of 88 Page 55 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT B (PG 4 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT B (PG 4 OF 4)
LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS 8 88DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 142 DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 142 DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 142 EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT::: a.a.Disable auto start of CS pump Disable auto start of CS pump 1B: 1B: 1)1)Pull control power fuses:
Pull control power fuses:Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B)
Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B) 2)2)Check CS pump breaker - Check CS pump breaker - OPEN OPEN::2)2)Open breakers with a Open breakers with a reach rod.
reach rod.Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B)
Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B) b.b.Report status of SI pump Report status of SI pump breakers and CS pump breakers breakers and CS pump breakers to RSP: to RSP:Bus 142 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1B)
Bus 142 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1B)Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B)
Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B) c.c.Report status of Train B 4KV Report status of Train B 4KV busses and breakers to RSP:
busses and breakers to RSP:Bus 142 Bus 142Bus 144 Bus 144 9 99VERIFY FW PUMPS TRIPPED VERIFY FW PUMPS TRIPPED VERIFY FW PUMPS TRIPPED
- Locally trip pump(s).
Locally trip pump(s).FW Pump 1B FW Pump 1BFW Pump 1C FW Pump 1C 10 1010LOCALLY VERIFY CLOSED ANY FW LOCALLY VERIFY CLOSED ANY FW LOCALLY VERIFY CLOSED ANY FW VALVES NOT PREVIOUSLY VERIFIED VALVES NOT PREVIOUSLY VERIFIED VALVES NOT PREVIOUSLY VERIFIED CLOSED FROM THE MCR CLOSED FROM THE MCR CLOSED FROM THE MCR 11 1111REPORT STATUS OF DIESEL REPORT STATUS OF DIESEL REPORT STATUS OF DIESEL GENERATORS TO RSP GENERATORS TO RSP GENERATORS TO RSP
- 1A DG 1A DG1B DG 1B DG-END--END-Page 56 of 88 Page 56 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 1)
ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 1)
INSTALLATION OF RH SYSTEM PNEUMATIC JUMPERS INSTALLATION OF RH SYSTEM PNEUMATIC JUMPERS 1 11INSTALLATION OF PNEUMATIC JUMPERS INSTALLATION OF PNEUMATIC JUMPERS INSTALLATION OF PNEUMATIC JUMPERS
Back regulator out to zero.
c.c.Isolate the instrument air supply to the installed regulator and Isolate the instrument air supply to the installed regulator and I/P converter.
I/P converter.
d.d.Connect temporary pneumatic jumper and regulator as shown in the Connect temporary pneumatic jumper and regulator as shown in the drawing below.
drawing below.
e.e.Unisolate instrument air supply and throttle valves as directed Unisolate instrument air supply and throttle valves as directed
-END--END-Page 57 of 88 Page 57 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT D (PG 1 OF 3)
ATTACHMENT D (PG 1 OF 3)
RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM 1 11VERIFY MCR HABITABLE VERIFY MCR HABITABLE VERIFY MCR HABITABLE
- RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect.
in effect.Contact brigade leader to Contact brigade leader to verify - verify - INITIATING CONDITION INITIATING CONDITION HAS CLEARED HAS CLEAREDContact Rad Protection to Contact Rad Protection to verify - verify - SAMPLES INDICATE MCR SAMPLES INDICATE MCR ATMOSPHERE SAFE FOR HABITATION ATMOSPHERE SAFE FOR HABITATION 2 22ESTABLISH NORMAL MCR MANNING ESTABLISH NORMAL MCR MANNING ESTABLISH NORMAL MCR MANNING
- a.a.Phone security shift supervisor Phone security shift supervisor at X-2829 to perform the at X-2829 to perform the following:
following:
1)1)Enable card readers into MCR:
Enable card readers into MCR:Door 505 Door 505Door 507 Door 507Door 511 Door 511Door 512 Door 512 2)2)Establish Main Security Establish Main Security Control Room manning Control Room manning b.b.Establish normal MCR manning Establish normal MCR manning using additional operators using additional operators while maintaining current while maintaining current remote control station manning remote control station manning 3 33ESTABLISH COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN ESTABLISH COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN ESTABLISH COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN MCR AND RSP MCR AND RSP MCR AND RSP 4 44EVALUATE MCR DAMAGE AND LOST EVALUATE MCR DAMAGE AND LOST EVALUATE MCR DAMAGE AND LOST CONTROLS CONTROLS CONTROLS::: a.a.Determine capability of MCR for Determine capability of MCR for plant control plant control b.b.Check MCR indications andCheck MCR indications andb.b.IF IF ANY ANY controls are controls are controls - controls - ALL AVAILABLE ALL AVAILABLE damaged, damaged, THEN THEN maintain remote maintain remote operation of that control.
operation of that control.
Page 58 of 88 Page 58 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT D (PG 2 OF 3)
ATTACHMENT D (PG 2 OF 3)
RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM 5 55TRANSFER CONTROL TO MCR TRANSFER CONTROL TO MCR TRANSFER CONTROL TO MCR
- a.a.Review logs for all local Review logs for all local actions taken actions taken b.b.Restore indications to MCR by Restore indications to MCR by placing Fire Hazards Panel placing Fire Hazards Panel switches to - switches to - NORMAL NORMAL c.c.Transfer controls listed in Transfer controls listed in ATTACHMENT A (Page 49) back to ATTACHMENT A (Page 49) back to MCR - MCR - ONE AT A TIME ONE AT A TIME
- 1)1)Verify MCR switch position -
Verify MCR switch position -
MATCHES RSP SWITCH POSITION MATCHES RSP SWITCH POSITION 2)2)Place LOCAL/REMOTE switch at Place LOCAL/REMOTE switch at RSP in - RSP in - REMOTE REMOTE d.d.Place charging flow controller Place charging flow controller in - in - REMOTE REMOTE::1FHC-121 1FHC-121 6 66CHECK JUMPER STATUS CHECK JUMPER STATUS CHECK JUMPER STATUS
- a.a.All jumpers - All jumpers - REMOVED REMOVED a.a.Initiate Temp Initiate Temp Configuration Change Configuration Change paperwork for jumpers paperwork for jumpers remaining installed.
remaining installed.
7 77LOCALLY REENERGIZE REACTOR HEAD LOCALLY REENERGIZE REACTOR HEAD LOCALLY REENERGIZE REACTOR HEAD VENT VALVES VENT VALVES VENT VALVES
Bus 113, Cub ER1:1RC014A 1RC014A1RC014C 1RC014CClose circuit breaker 10 on DC Close circuit breaker 10 on DC Bus 114, Cub ER1:
Bus 114, Cub ER1:1RC014B 1RC014B1RC014D 1RC014D Page 59 of 88 Page 59 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT D (PG 3 OF 3)
ATTACHMENT D (PG 3 OF 3)
RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM 8 88VERIFY APPLICABLE STEPS OF BwGPs VERIFY APPLICABLE STEPS OF BwGPs VERIFY APPLICABLE STEPS OF BwGPs COMPLETED COMPLETED COMPLETED::: oo1BwGP 100-4, POWER DESCENSION 1BwGP 100-4, POWER DESCENSION oo1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND COOLDOWN COOLDOWN-END--END-Page 60 of 88 Page 60 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 1 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 1 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET
- NOTE NOTE****Some jumpers will be left installed,Some jumpers will be left installed,*
- while other jumpers are onlywhile other jumpers are only*
- momentarily installed. Temporarymomentarily installed. Temporary*
- Configuration Change paperworkConfiguration Change paperwork*
- should be initiated for any jumpersshould be initiated for any jumpers*
- left installed.left installed.*
1 11DETERMINE IF AEER ACCESSIBLE DETERMINE IF AEER ACCESSIBLE DETERMINE IF AEER ACCESSIBLE
- a.a.Obtain status report:
Obtain status report:
ooFire Brigade Leader Fire Brigade Leader ooRad Protection Rad Protection b.b.AEER determined to be -AEER determined to be -b.b.Contact the Shift Manager Contact the Shift Manager ACCESSIBLE ACCESSIBLE for recovery options.
for recovery options.
RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and step effect.
step effect.
2 22OBTAIN NECESSARY EQUIPMENT OBTAIN NECESSARY EQUIPMENT OBTAIN NECESSARY EQUIPMENT
- Obtain keys to ESF cabinets:
Obtain keys to ESF cabinets:1PA09J Train A 1PA09J Train A1PA10J Train B 1PA10J Train B1PA27J Train A 1PA27J Train A1PA28J Train B 1PA28J Train BObtain jumpers from cabinet at Obtain jumpers from cabinet at Remote Shutdown Panel or MCR:
Remote Shutdown Panel or MCR:Determine from functions in Determine from functions in Step 3 (Next Page) the number Step 3 (Next Page) the number of jumpers required of jumpers requiredObtain necessary safety Obtain necessary safety equipment:
equipment:
ooSCBAs SCBAs ooLights Lights ooTurnout Gear Turnout Gear Page 61 of 88 Page 61 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 2 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 2 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 3 33PERFORM BLOCK/RESET FUNCTION(S)
PERFORM BLOCK/RESET FUNCTION(S)
PERFORM BLOCK/RESET FUNCTION(S)
Step 4 (Page 64) ooTo block PZR LOW PRESSURE SI, To block PZR LOW PRESSURE SI, GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 5 (Page 65)
Step 5 (Page 65) ooTo block STEAMLINE LOW PRESS SI, To block STEAMLINE LOW PRESS SI, GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 6 (Page 66)
Step 6 (Page 66) ooTo reset CONTAINMENT ISOLATION To reset CONTAINMENT ISOLATION PHASE A, PHASE A, GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 7 (Page 67)
Step 7 (Page 67) ooTo reset CONTAINMENT ISOLATION To reset CONTAINMENT ISOLATION PHASE B, PHASE B, GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 8 (Page 68)
Step 8 (Page 68) ooTo reset CONTAINMENT SPRAY To reset CONTAINMENT SPRAY actuation, actuation, GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 9 (Page 69)
Step 9 (Page 69) ooTo reset CONTAINMENT VENT To reset CONTAINMENT VENT ISOLATION, ISOLATION, GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 10 (Page 70)
Step 10 (Page 70) ooTo reset NUCLEAR AT POWER To reset NUCLEAR AT POWER PERMISSIVE P10, PERMISSIVE P10, GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 11 (Page 71)
Step 11 (Page 71) ooTo reset SOURCE RANGE To reset SOURCE RANGE PERMISSIVE P6, PERMISSIVE P6, GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 12 (Page 72)
Step 12 (Page 72)
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 62 of 88 Page 62 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 3 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 3 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET Step 3 (continued)
Step 3 (continued) ooTo place COLD OVERPRESSURE To place COLD OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION in service, PROTECTION in service, GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 13 (Page 73)
Step 13 (Page 73) ooTo reset SI RECIRC SUMPS, To reset SI RECIRC SUMPS, GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 14 (Page 74)
Step 14 (Page 74) ooTo reset CV MINIFLOW ISOLATIONS, To reset CV MINIFLOW ISOLATIONS, GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 15 (Page 75)
Step 15 (Page 75)
Page 63 of 88 Page 63 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 4 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 4 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 4 44RESET SI RESET SI RESET SI::: a.a.Verify Reactor Trip Breakers -
Verify Reactor Trip Breakers -
OPEN OPEN (P4 actuated) (P4 actuated) b.b.Install jumpers across terminal Install jumpers across terminal points listed below for Trains points listed below for Trains A and/or B:
A and/or B:Install Install TWO TWO jumpers per train jumpers per train to - to - RESET RESET: : TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB505 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB505 points 7 and 8 (Resets SI Signal, blocks Auto SI)
(Resets SI Signal, blocks Auto SI)
Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 9 and 10 Terminal Board TB644 points 9 and 10 (Unlatches slave relays)
(Unlatches slave relays) TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB505 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB505 points 7 and 8 (Resets SI Signal, blocks Auto SI)
(Resets SI Signal, blocks Auto SI)
Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 9 and 10 Terminal Board TB644 points 9 and 10 (Unlatches slave relays)
(Unlatches slave relays) c.c.Check relays on affectedCheck relays on affectedc.c.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
train(s) - train(s) - DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED
- 1)1)Remove jumper from Remove jumper fromK602K602TB644.
TB644.K603 K603K604K6042)2)Contact Maintenance to Contact Maintenance toK608K608manually reset any manually reset anyK609K609energized relays per energized relays perK610K610Step 16 (Page 76).
Step 16 (Page 76).K611 K611K630K6303)3)Remove jumper from Remove jumper from TB505.TB505.4)4)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 4e. Step 4e.d.d.Remove jumpers Remove jumpers e.e.Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manuale.
e.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and blocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIRED REQUIRED step in effect.
step in effect.
f.f.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)
Step 3 (Page 62)
Page 64 of 88 Page 64 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 5 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 5 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 5 55BLOCK PZR LOW PRESSURE SI BLOCK PZR LOW PRESSURE SI BLOCK PZR LOW PRESSURE SI
for Trains A and/or B:Install Install ONE ONE jumper per train jumper per train to - to - BLOCK BLOCK:: TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB509 points 1 and 2 Terminal Board TB509 points 1 and 2 TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB509 points 1 and 2 Terminal Board TB509 points 1 and 2 c.c.Check K628 relay(s) - Check K628 relay(s) - ENERGIZED ENERGIZED::c.c.Notify Maintenance to Notify Maintenance to jumper slave relay K628-6 jumper slave relay K628-6 ooTrain A (1PA09J)Train A (1PA09J)to cabinet ground.
to cabinet ground.
ooTrain B (1PA10J)
Train B (1PA10J) d.d.Leave jumper(s) - Leave jumper(s) - INSTALLED INSTALLED e.e.Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manuale.
e.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and blocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIRED REQUIRED step in effect.
step in effect.
f.f.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)
Step 3 (Page 62)
Page 65 of 88 Page 65 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 6 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 6 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 6 66BLOCK STEAMLINE LOW PRESSURE SI BLOCK STEAMLINE LOW PRESSURE SI BLOCK STEAMLINE LOW PRESSURE SI
for Trains A and/or B:Install Install ONE ONE jumper per train jumper per train to - to - BLOCK BLOCK:: TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB509 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB509 points 7 and 8 TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB509 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB509 points 7 and 8 c.c.Check K628 relay(s) - Check K628 relay(s) - ENERGIZED ENERGIZED::c.c.Notify Maintenance to Notify Maintenance to jumper slave relay K628-6 jumper slave relay K628-6 ooTrain A (1PA09J)Train A (1PA09J)to cabinet ground.
to cabinet ground.
ooTrain B (1PA10J)
Train B (1PA10J) d.d.Leave jumper(s) - Leave jumper(s) - INSTALLED INSTALLED e.e.Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manuale.
e.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and blocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIRED REQUIRED step in effect.
step in effect.
f.f.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)
Step 3 (Page 62)
Page 66 of 88 Page 66 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 7 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 7 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 7 77RESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATION RESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATION RESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATION PHASE A PHASE A PHASE A::: a.a.Install jumpers across terminal Install jumpers across terminal points listed below for Trains points listed below for Trains A and/or B:
A and/or B:Install Install TWO TWO jumpers per train jumpers per train to - to - RESET RESET:: TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB504 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB504 points 7 and 8 (Resets Cnmt Phase A signal)
(Resets Cnmt Phase A signal)
Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 3 and 4 Terminal Board TB644 points 3 and 4 (Unlatches slave relay)
(Unlatches slave relay) TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB504 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB504 points 7 and 8 (Resets Cnmt Phase A signal)
(Resets Cnmt Phase A signal)
Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 3 and 4 Terminal Board TB644 points 3 and 4 (Unlatches slave relay)
(Unlatches slave relay) b.b.Check relays on affectedCheck relays on affectedb.b.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
train(s) - train(s) - DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED
- 1)1)Remove jumper from Remove jumper fromK605K605TB644.
TB644.K606 K606K607K6072)2)Contact Maintenance to Contact Maintenance toK612K612manually reset any manually reset anyK613K613energized relays per energized relays perK614K614Step 16 (Page 76).
Step 16 (Page 76).
3)3)Remove jumper from Remove jumper from TB504.TB504.4)4)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 7d. Step 7d.c.c.Remove jumpers Remove jumpers d.d.Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manuald.
d.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and blocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIRED REQUIRED step in effect.
step in effect.
e.e.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)
Step 3 (Page 62)
Page 67 of 88 Page 67 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 8 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 8 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 8 88RESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATION RESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATION RESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATION PHASE B PHASE B PHASE B::: a.a.Install jumpers across terminal Install jumpers across terminal points listed below for Trains points listed below for Trains A and/or B:
A and/or B:Install Install TWO TWO jumpers per train jumpers per train to - to - RESET RESET:: TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB505 points 1 and 2 Terminal Board TB505 points 1 and 2 (Resets Cnmt Phase B signal)
(Resets Cnmt Phase B signal)
Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB644 points 7 and 8 (Unlatches slave relay)
(Unlatches slave relay) TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB505 points 1 and 2 Terminal Board TB505 points 1 and 2 (Resets Cnmt Phase B signal)
(Resets Cnmt Phase B signal)
Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB644 points 7 and 8 (Unlatches slave relay)
(Unlatches slave relay) b.b.Check relays on affectedCheck relays on affectedb.b.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
train(s) - train(s) - DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED
- 1)1)Remove jumper from Remove jumper fromK618K618TB644.
TB644.K626 K626 2)2)Contact Maintenance to Contact Maintenance to manually reset any manually reset any energized relays per energized relays per Step 16 (Page 76).
Step 16 (Page 76).
3)3)Remove jumper from Remove jumper from TB505.TB505.4)4)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 8d. Step 8d.c.c.Remove jumpers Remove jumpers d.d.Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manuald.
d.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and blocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIRED REQUIRED step in effect.
step in effect.
e.e.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)
Step 3 (Page 62)
Page 68 of 88 Page 68 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 9 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 9 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 9 99RESET CONTAINMENT SPRAY RESET CONTAINMENT SPRAY RESET CONTAINMENT SPRAY ACTUATION ACTUATION ACTUATION::: a.a.Install jumpers across terminal Install jumpers across terminal points listed below for Trains points listed below for Trains A and/or B:
A and/or B:Install Install TWO TWO jumpers per train jumpers per train to - to - RESET RESET:: TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB504 points 4 and 5 Terminal Board TB504 points 4 and 5 (Resets Cnmt spray signal)
(Resets Cnmt spray signal)
Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 1 and 2 Terminal Board TB644 points 1 and 2 (Unlatches slave relay)
(Unlatches slave relay) TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB504 points 4 and 5 Terminal Board TB504 points 4 and 5 (Resets Cnmt spray signal)
(Resets Cnmt spray signal)
Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 1 and 2 Terminal Board TB644 points 1 and 2 (Unlatches slave relay)
(Unlatches slave relay) b.b.Check relays on affectedCheck relays on affectedb.b.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
train(s) - train(s) - DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED
- 1)1)Remove jumper from Remove jumper fromK643K643TB644.
TB644.K644 K644 2)2)Contact Maintenance to Contact Maintenance to manually reset any manually reset any energized relays per energized relays per Step 16 (Page 76).
Step 16 (Page 76).
3)3)Remove jumper from Remove jumper from TB504.TB504.4)4)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 9d. Step 9d.c.c.Remove jumpers Remove jumpers d.d.Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manuald.
d.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and blocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIRED REQUIRED step in effect.
step in effect.
e.e.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)
Step 3 (Page 62)
Page 69 of 88 Page 69 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 10 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 10 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 10 1010RESET CONTAINMENT VENT RESET CONTAINMENT VENT RESET CONTAINMENT VENT ISOLATION ISOLATION ISOLATION::: a.a.Install jumpers across terminal Install jumpers across terminal points listed below for Trains points listed below for Trains A and/or B:
A and/or B:Install Install TWO TWO jumpers per train jumpers per train to - to - RESET RESET:: TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB504 points 10 and 11 Terminal Board TB504 points 10 and 11 (Resets Cnmt Vent signal)
(Resets Cnmt Vent signal)
Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 5 and 6 Terminal Board TB644 points 5 and 6 (Unlatches slave relay)
(Unlatches slave relay) TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB504 points 10 and 11 Terminal Board TB504 points 10 and 11 (Resets Cnmt Vent signal)
(Resets Cnmt Vent signal)
Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 5 and 6 Terminal Board TB644 points 5 and 6 (Unlatches slave relay)
(Unlatches slave relay) b.b.Check relays on affectedCheck relays on affectedb.b.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
train(s) - train(s) - DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED
- 1)1)Remove jumper from Remove jumper fromK615K615TB644.
TB644.K622 K622 2)2)Contact Maintenance to Contact Maintenance to manually reset any manually reset any energized relays per energized relays per Step 16 (Page 76).
Step 16 (Page 76).
3)3)Remove jumper from Remove jumper from TB504.TB504.4)4)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 10d.
Step 10d.
c.c.Remove jumpers Remove jumpers d.d.Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manuald.
d.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and blocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIRED REQUIRED step in effect.
step in effect.
e.e.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)
Step 3 (Page 62)
Page 70 of 88 Page 70 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 11 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 11 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 11 1111RESET NUCLEAR AT POWER RESET NUCLEAR AT POWER RESET NUCLEAR AT POWER PERMISSIVE P10 PERMISSIVE P10 PERMISSIVE P10
- a.a.Install jumpers across terminal Install jumpers across terminal points listed below for Trains points listed below for Trains A and/or B:
A and/or B:Install Install SIX SIX jumpers per train jumpers per train to - to - RESET RESET:: TRAIN A Front of Input Bay - 1PA09J TRAIN A Front of Input Bay - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB101 point 5 to TB111 point 3 Terminal Board TB101 point 5 to TB111 point 3 Terminal Board TB101 point 6 to TB111 point 9 Terminal Board TB101 point 6 to TB111 point 9 Terminal Board TB201 point 5 to TB211 point 3 Terminal Board TB201 point 5 to TB211 point 3 Terminal Board TB201 point 6 to TB211 point 9 Terminal Board TB201 point 6 to TB211 point 9 Terminal Board TB301 point 3 to TB311 point 3 Terminal Board TB301 point 3 to TB311 point 3 Terminal Board TB301 point 4 to TB311 point 9 Terminal Board TB301 point 4 to TB311 point 9 (Simulates three PR channels less than 10%)
(Simulates three PR channels less than 10%) TRAIN B Front of Input Bay - 1PA10J TRAIN B Front of Input Bay - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB101 point 5 to TB111 point 3 Terminal Board TB101 point 5 to TB111 point 3 Terminal Board TB101 point 6 to TB111 point 9 Terminal Board TB101 point 6 to TB111 point 9 Terminal Board TB201 point 5 to TB211 point 3 Terminal Board TB201 point 5 to TB211 point 3 Terminal Board TB201 point 6 to TB211 point 9 Terminal Board TB201 point 6 to TB211 point 9 Terminal Board TB301 point 3 to TB311 point 3 Terminal Board TB301 point 3 to TB311 point 3 Terminal Board TB301 point 4 to TB311 point 9 Terminal Board TB301 point 4 to TB311 point 9 (Simulates three PR channels less than 10%)
(Simulates three PR channels less than 10%)
b.b.Check K629 relay(s) -Check K629 relay(s) -b.b.Notify Maintenance to lift Notify Maintenance to lift DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED
- and tape slave relay and tape slave relay K629-6.K629-6.ooTrain A (1PA09J)
Train A (1PA09J) ooTrain B (1PA10J)
Train B (1PA10J) c.c.Leave jumpers - Leave jumpers - INSTALLED INSTALLED d.d.Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manuald.
d.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and blocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIRED REQUIRED step in effect.
step in effect.
e.e.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)
Step 3 (Page 62)
Page 71 of 88 Page 71 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 12 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 12 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 12 1212RESET SOURCE RANGE RESET SOURCE RANGE RESET SOURCE RANGE PERMISSIVE P6 PERMISSIVE P6 PERMISSIVE P6
- a.a.Check P10 - Check P10 - RESET RESET::a.a.Reset P10 per Step 11 Reset P10 per Step 11 (Previous Page).(Previous Page).Check relay K629 -
Check relay K629 -
DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED b.b.Lift Lift TWO TWO leads per train to -
leads per train to -
RESET RESET:: TRAIN A Front of Input Bay - 1PA09J TRAIN A Front of Input Bay - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB101 point 1 Terminal Board TB101 point 1 Terminal Board TB201 point 1 Terminal Board TB201 point 1 (Simulates N35 less than 5x10 (Simulates N35 less than 5x10 11 AMPS)
AMPS) TRAIN B Front of Input Bay - 1PA10J TRAIN B Front of Input Bay - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB101 point 1 Terminal Board TB101 point 1 Terminal Board TB201 point 1 Terminal Board TB201 point 1 (Simulates N36 less than 5x10 (Simulates N36 less than 5x10 11 AMPS)
AMPS) c.c.Re-land leads Re-land leads d.d.Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manuald.
d.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and blocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIRED REQUIRED step in effect.
step in effect.
e.e.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)
Step 3 (Page 62)
Page 72 of 88 Page 72 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 13 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 13 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 13 1313PLACE COLD OVERPRESSURE PLACE COLD OVERPRESSURE PLACE COLD OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION IN SERVICE PROTECTION IN SERVICE PROTECTION IN SERVICE
- a.a.Install jumper(s) across Install jumper(s) across terminal points listed below terminal points listed below for Trains A and/or B:
for Trains A and/or B:Install Install ONE ONE jumper per train jumper per train to - to - PLACE IN SERVICE PLACE IN SERVICE
- TRAIN A Rear of Cabinet - 1PA27J TRAIN A Rear of Cabinet - 1PA27J Terminal Board TB917 point 11 to Terminal Board TB917 point 11 to Terminal Board TB916 point 11 Terminal Board TB916 point 11 TRAIN B Rear of Cabinet - 1PA28J TRAIN B Rear of Cabinet - 1PA28J Terminal Board TB917 point 11 to Terminal Board TB917 point 11 to Terminal Board TB916 point 11 Terminal Board TB916 point 11 b.b.Leave jumper(s) - Leave jumper(s) - INSTALLED INSTALLED c.c.Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manualc.
c.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and blocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIRED REQUIRED step in effect.
step in effect.
d.d.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)
Step 3 (Page 62)
Page 73 of 88 Page 73 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 14 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 14 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 14 1414RESET SI RECIRC SUMPS ISOLATION RESET SI RECIRC SUMPS ISOLATION RESET SI RECIRC SUMPS ISOLATION VALVES VALVES VALVES::: a.a.Check SI signal - Check SI signal - RESET RESET::a.a.Reset SI per Step 4 Reset SI per Step 4 (Page 64).(Page 64).K602 relay - K602 relay - UNLATCHED UNLATCHED b.b.Install jumper(s) across Install jumper(s) across terminal points listed below terminal points listed below for Trains A and/or B:
for Trains A and/or B:Install Install ONE ONE jumper per train jumper per train to - to - RESET RESET:: TRAIN A Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB656 points 11 and 12 Terminal Board TB656 points 11 and 12 (1SI8811A will not Auto Open)
(1SI8811A will not Auto Open) (1CV8110 will not Auto Close)
(1CV8110 will not Auto Close) (Allows breaker 1411 closure)
(Allows breaker 1411 closure) TRAIN B Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB656 points 11 and 12 Terminal Board TB656 points 11 and 12 (1SI8811B will not Auto Open)
(1SI8811B will not Auto Open) (1CV8111 will not Auto Close)
(1CV8111 will not Auto Close) (Allows breaker 1421 closure)
(Allows breaker 1421 closure) c.c.Check K647 relay(s) -Check K647 relay(s) -c.c.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED
- 1)1)Remove jumper from Remove jumper from ooTrain A (1PA09J)Train A (1PA09J)TB656.
TB656.ooTrain B (1PA10J)
Train B (1PA10J) 2)2)Contact Maintenance to Contact Maintenance to manually reset any manually reset any energized relays per energized relays per Step 16 (Page 76).
Step 16 (Page 76).
3)3)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 14e.
Step 14e.
d.d.Remove jumper(s)
Remove jumper(s) e.e.Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manuale.
e.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and blocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIRED REQUIRED step in effect.
step in effect.
f.f.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)
Step 3 (Page 62)
Page 74 of 88 Page 74 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 15 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 15 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 15 1515RESET CV MINIFLOW ISOLATION RESET CV MINIFLOW ISOLATION RESET CV MINIFLOW ISOLATION VALVES VALVES VALVES::: a.a.Check SI signal- RESET:Check SI signal- RESET:a.a.Reset SI per Step 4 Reset SI per Step 4 (Page 64).(Page 64).K602 relay - K602 relay - UNLATCHED UNLATCHED b.b.Install Install ONE ONE jumper per train jumper per train to - to - RESET RESET:: TRAIN A Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB645 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB645 points 7 and 8 (1CV8114 will not Auto Close)
(1CV8114 will not Auto Close) TRAIN B Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB645 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB645 points 7 and 8 (1CV8116 will not Auto Close)
(1CV8116 will not Auto Close) c.c.Check K646 relay(s) -Check K646 relay(s) -c.c.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED
- 1)1)Remove jumper from Remove jumper from ooTrain A (1PA09J)Train A (1PA09J)TB645.
TB645.ooTrain B (1PA10J)
Train B (1PA10J) 2)2)Contact Maintenance to Contact Maintenance to manually reset any manually reset any energized relays per energized relays per Step 16 (Next Page).
Step 16 (Next Page).
3)3)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 15e.
Step 15e.
d.d.Remove jumper(s)
Remove jumper(s) e.e.Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manuale.
e.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and blocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIRED REQUIRED step in effect.
step in effect.
f.f.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)
Step 3 (Page 62)
Page 75 of 88 Page 75 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 16 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 16 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESETCAUTION CAUTIONAn insulated screwdriver and low An insulated screwdriver and lowvoltage gloves are required to voltage gloves are required toperform this step.
perform this step.
- NOTE NOTE****It is acceptable to remove daisyIt is acceptable to remove daisy*
- chained wires in this step.chained wires in this step.*
16 1616PERFORM THE FOLLOWING TO MANUALLY PERFORM THE FOLLOWING TO MANUALLY PERFORM THE FOLLOWING TO MANUALLY RESET SSPS SLAVE RELAYS RESET SSPS SLAVE RELAYS RESET SSPS SLAVE RELAYS
1)1)Tag/Remove wires from two Tag/Remove wires from two terminals (one will be terminals (one will be energized) on latch (topmost) energized) on latch (topmost) assembly assembly 2)2)Remove two screws that fasten Remove two screws that fasten latch assembly to relay latch assembly to relay 3)3)Separate latch assembly from Separate latch assembly from relay relay 4)4)Manually reset latch finger Manually reset latch finger to recessed position to recessed position 5)5)Reinstall latch assembly Reinstall latch assembly 6)6)Verify latch indicator button Verify latch indicator button is 'Out' (not latched) is 'Out' (not latched) 7)7)Restore wiring Restore wiring 8)8)RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect.
in effect.
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 76 of 88 Page 76 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT E (PG 17 OF 17)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 17 OF 17)
ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET Step 16 (continued)
Step 16 (continued) ooReset a Potter & Brumfield MDR Reset a Potter & Brumfield MDR (cylindrical shaped) relay as (cylindrical shaped) relay as follows: follows: 1)1)Locate armature screw in Locate armature screw in center of front face of relay center of front face of relay 2)2)Check screwdriver slot -Check screwdriver slot -2)2)Rotate armature screw Rotate armature screw ALIGNED WITH EMBOSSED MARKS ALIGNED WITH EMBOSSED MARKS approximately 30 DEGREES approximately 30 DEGREES ON RELAY (relay already ON RELAY (relay already until armature 'snaps' until armature 'snaps' deenergized) deenergized) into position with slot into position with slot aligned to embossed aligned to embossed marks.marks.3)3)RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect.
in effect.
ooReset a Cutler-Hammer relay as Reset a Cutler-Hammer relay as follows: follows: 1)1)Locate the release lever on Locate the release lever on the relay the relay 2)2)Manually move the release Manually move the release lever towards the front of lever towards the front of the relay the relay 3)3)Verify the relay plunger Verify the relay plunger moved in moved in 4)4)RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect.
in effect.-END--END-Page 77 of 88 Page 77 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT F (PG 1 OF 8)
ATTACHMENT F (PG 1 OF 8)
SI TERMINATION SI TERMINATION 1 11CHECK FOR LOW PZR PRESSURE SI CHECK FOR LOW PZR PRESSURE SI CHECK FOR LOW PZR PRESSURE SI
- a.a.PZR pressure - PZR pressure - LESS THAN LESS THAN a.a.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 2 (Next Page).
Step 2 (Next Page).
1829 PSIG 1829 PSIG b.b.PZR pressure - PZR pressure - DROPPING DROPPING b.b.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 2 (Next Page).
Step 2 (Next Page).
c.c.Trip RCP(s) as required to stop Trip RCP(s) as required to stop PZR pressure drop:
PZR pressure drop:
ooRCP 1D RCP 1D ooRCP 1C RCP 1C ooRCP 1B RCP 1B ooRCP 1A RCP 1A d.d.Check if PZR pressure - Check if PZR pressure - STILL STILL d.d.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 2 (Next Page).
Step 2 (Next Page).
DROPPING DROPPING e.e.Locally isolate PORV 1RY455A atLocally isolate PORV 1RY455A ate.e.Locally remove the control Locally remove the control MCC 131X2B A5 (414' S12 CWA):MCC 131X2B A5 (414' S12 CWA):power fuses at 1DC10J to power fuses at 1DC10J to fail PORV 1RY455A closed:
fail PORV 1RY455A closed:
1)1)Place 1RY8000A LOCAL/REMOTE Place 1RY8000A LOCAL/REMOTE switch in - switch in - LOCAL LOCALFU-11 FU-11FU-12 FU-12 2)2)Close 1RY8000A Close 1RY8000A f.f.Check if PZR pressure - Check if PZR pressure - STILL STILL f.f.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 2 (Next Page).
Step 2 (Next Page).
DROPPING DROPPING g.g.Locally isolate PORV 1RY456 atLocally isolate PORV 1RY456 atg.g.Locally remove the control Locally remove the control MCC 132X2 C4 (426' S12 CWA):MCC 132X2 C4 (426' S12 CWA):power fuses at 1DC11J to power fuses at 1DC11J to fail PORV 1RY456 closed:
fail PORV 1RY456 closed:
1)1)Place 1RY8000B LOCAL/REMOTE Place 1RY8000B LOCAL/REMOTE switch in - switch in - LOCAL LOCALFU-46 FU-46FU-47 FU-47 2)2)Close 1RY8000B Close 1RY8000B h.h.Locally restore PORV 1RY455A:
Locally restore PORV 1RY455A:
1)1)Place 1RY8000A LOCAL/REMOTE Place 1RY8000A LOCAL/REMOTE switch at MCC 131X2B A5 in -
switch at MCC 131X2B A5 in -
LOCAL LOCAL 2)2)Open 1RY8000A Open 1RY8000A Page 78 of 88 Page 78 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT F (PG 2 OF 8)
ATTACHMENT F (PG 2 OF 8)
SI TERMINATION SI TERMINATION 2 22OBTAIN WIDE RANGE PRESSURE OBTAIN WIDE RANGE PRESSURE OBTAIN WIDE RANGE PRESSURE
the following:
ooP0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IV P0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IV ooP0492 RCS Wide Rng Ch IIP0492 RCS Wide Rng Ch IIooPZR steam sample line:
PZR steam sample line:
ooP0493 RCS Wide Rng Ch I P0493 RCS Wide Rng Ch I ooP0494 RCS Wide Rng Ch IIIP0494 RCS Wide Rng Ch IIIa)a)Open PZR sample Open PZR sample containment isolation containment isolation valves using valves using pneumatic jumpers:
pneumatic jumpers:1PS9354A (377' +6' 1PS9354A (377' +6' R6 OMB P-70)
R6 OMB P-70)1PS9354B (364' +13' 1PS9354B (364' +13' V13 P-70 CWA)
V13 P-70 CWA) b)b)Open PZR steam inlet Open PZR steam inlet isolation valve:
isolation valve:1PS9350A (HRSS 1PS9350A (HRSS panel 1PS27J) panel 1PS27J) c)c)Open valve 1.1 (HRSS Open valve 1.1 (HRSS Panel 1PS25J)
Panel 1PS25J)-OR--OR-ooPZR liquid sample line:
PZR liquid sample line:
a)a)Open PZR sample Open PZR sample containment isolation containment isolation valves using valves using pneumatic jumpers:
pneumatic jumpers:1PS9355A (377' +6' 1PS9355A (377' +6' R6 OMB P-70)
R6 OMB P-70)1PS9355B (364' +13' 1PS9355B (364' +13' V13 P-70 CWA)
V13 P-70 CWA) b)b)Open PZR liquid inlet Open PZR liquid inlet isolation valve:
isolation valve:1PS9350B (HRSS 1PS9350B (HRSS panel 1PS27J) panel 1PS27J) c)c)Open valve 1.2 (HRSS Open valve 1.2 (HRSS Panel 1PS25J)
Panel 1PS25J)
Page 79 of 88 Page 79 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT F (PG 3 OF 8)
ATTACHMENT F (PG 3 OF 8)
SI TERMINATION SI TERMINATION 3 33CHECK IF ECCS FLOW SHOULD BE CHECK IF ECCS FLOW SHOULD BE CHECK IF ECCS FLOW SHOULD BE WHEN WHEN SI termination criteria SI termination criteria TERMINATED TERMINATED TERMINATED
- thru 17.thru 17.ooICONIC DISPLAY ICONIC DISPLAY-OR--OR-ooComputer point (greater than Computer point (greater than 30 30F F):):X0190 Degrees of X0190 Degrees of Subcooling Subcooling-OR--OR-ooFIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1 FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1 (Page 48) using: (Page 48) using:RCS pressure from Step 2 RCS pressure from Step 2 (Previous Page)(Previous Page)RCS temperature from RCS RCS temperature from RCS hot leg temperature hot leg temperature indication indicationRCS Pressure - RCS Pressure - STABLE OR RISING STABLE OR RISINGPZR level - PZR level - GREATER THAN 4%
GREATER THAN 4%
4 44CHECK SG LEVELS CHECK SG LEVELS CHECK SG LEVELS
59% in at in at least least ONE ONE SG. SG.b.b.Maintain wide range level -
Maintain wide range level -
BETWEEN 65% AND 70%
BETWEEN 65% AND 70%
Page 80 of 88 Page 80 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT F (PG 4 OF 8)
ATTACHMENT F (PG 4 OF 8)
SI TERMINATION SI TERMINATION 5 55RESET ACTUATIONS RESET ACTUATIONS RESET ACTUATIONS
- a.a.Check fire not occurring inCheck fire not occurring ina.
a.GO TO GO TO GO TO ATTACHMENT G ATTACHMENT G either of the following:either of the following:(Page 86).(Page 86).
ooMCR MCR ooAEER AEER b.b.Check AEER - Check AEER - ACCESSIBLE ACCESSIBLE b.b.GO TO GO TO GO TO ATTACHMENT G ATTACHMENT G (Page 86).(Page 86).
c.c.Reset functions per Reset functions per ATTACHMENT E (Page 61):
ATTACHMENT E (Page 61):SI SIContainment isolation Phase A Containment isolation Phase ACV Miniflows CV MiniflowsSI Recirc Sumps SI Recirc Sumps d.d.Check automatic SI relay onCheck automatic SI relay ond.
d.GO TO GO TO GO TO ATTACHMENT G ATTACHMENT G affected train(s) - affected train(s) - UNLATCHED UNLATCHED::(Page 86).(Page 86).K602 (1PA09J/10J)
K602 (1PA09J/10J) 6 66RESTORE INSTRUMENT AIR TO RESTORE INSTRUMENT AIR TO RESTORE INSTRUMENT AIR TO CONTAINMENT CONTAINMENT CONTAINMENT
- a.a.Dispatch operators to locally Dispatch operators to locally open Instrument Air containment open Instrument Air containment isolation valves using isolation valves using pneumatic jumpers:
pneumatic jumpers:1IA065 (391' CWA P-39) 1IA065 (391' CWA P-39)1IA066 (377' +12' R5 OMB 1IA066 (377' +12' R5 OMB P-39)P-39)7 77REALIGN CV SYSTEM PUMPS REALIGN CV SYSTEM PUMPS REALIGN CV SYSTEM PUMPS
- a.a.Stop all but Stop all but ONE ONE CV pump and CV pump and place in standby place in standby Page 81 of 88 Page 81 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT F (PG 5 OF 8)
ATTACHMENT F (PG 5 OF 8)
SI TERMINATION SI TERMINATION 8 88ESTABLISH CV PUMP MINIFLOW ESTABLISH CV PUMP MINIFLOW ESTABLISH CV PUMP MINIFLOW
- a.a.Locally check CV pumpLocally check CV pumpa.a.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
miniflow - miniflow - GREATER THAN 60 GPM GREATER THAN 60 GPM
- ooOpen motor operated Open motor operated1FI-CV048 (346' Q12)1FI-CV048 (346' Q12)miniflow valves per miniflow valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
ooMCC 131X1 M1 MCC 131X1 M1 (1CV8110):
(1CV8110):1CV8110 (364' S13 1CV8110 (364' S13 CWA)CWA)ooMCC 132X4 C4 MCC 132X4 C4 (1CV8111):
(1CV8111):1CV8111 (364' S13 1CV8111 (364' S13 CWA)CWA)ooOpen the solenoid valves Open the solenoid valves by pulling fuses:
by pulling fuses:
ooFuses 61 and 62 at Fuses 61 and 62 at 1PA27J (1CV8114) 1PA27J (1CV8114) ooFuses 61 and 62 at Fuses 61 and 62 at 1PA28J (1CV8116) 1PA28J (1CV8116) 9 99ESTABLISH NORMAL CHARGING ESTABLISH NORMAL CHARGING ESTABLISH NORMAL CHARGING
- a.a.Throttle 1CV121 to - Throttle 1CV121 to - 5% OPEN 5% OPEN b.b.Locally open charging lineLocally open charging lineb.b.Open the breaker(s) and Open the breaker(s) and containment isolation valvescontainment isolation valveslocally open valve(s) locally open valve(s) per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALper 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALusing the handwheel:
using the handwheel:
EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:oo1CV8105 (379' CWA P-71) 1CV8105 (379' CWA P-71) oo1CV8106 (379' CWA P-71) 1CV8106 (379' CWA P-71)1CV8105 (MCC 132X4 C3) 1CV8105 (MCC 132X4 C3)1CV8106 (MCC 131X1 K1) 1CV8106 (MCC 131X1 K1)
Page 82 of 88 Page 82 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT F (PG 6 OF 8)
ATTACHMENT F (PG 6 OF 8)
SI TERMINATION SI TERMINATION 10 1010ISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTION ISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTION ISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTION
- a.a.Locally close charging pumps toLocally close charging pumps toa.a.Open the breaker and Open the breaker and cold leg injection isolationcold leg injection isolationlocally close the valve(s) locally close the valve(s) valves using 1BwOA ELEC-5,valves using 1BwOA ELEC-5,using the handwheel:
using the handwheel:
LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:oo1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26) 1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26) oo1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26) 1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26)1SI8801A (MCC 131X1 F4) 1SI8801A (MCC 131X1 F4)1SI8801B (MCC 132X5 A4) 1SI8801B (MCC 132X5 A4) 11 1111CONTROL CHARGING FLOW TO MAINTAIN CONTROL CHARGING FLOW TO MAINTAIN CONTROL CHARGING FLOW TO MAINTAIN IF IF 1CV121 can 1CV121 can NOT NOT be be PZR LEVEL PZR LEVEL PZR LEVEL::: controlled, controlled, THEN THEN perform the following:
perform the following:Throttle 1CV121 to maintain PZR Throttle 1CV121 to maintain PZR level - level - BETWEEN 25% and 31%
BETWEEN 25% and 31%
a.a.Locally throttle open one Locally throttle open one CENT CHG pump to cold leg CENT CHG pump to cold leg isolation valve to isolation valve to maintain PZR level:
maintain PZR level:
oo1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26) 1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26) oo1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26) 1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26) b.b.Cycle PZR heater groups A Cycle PZR heater groups A and B to maintain pressure and B to maintain pressure stable.stable.c.c.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 14 (Page 85).
Step 14 (Page 85).
12 1212CONTROL PZR PRESSURE CONTROL PZR PRESSURE CONTROL PZR PRESSURE
- Cycle PZR heater groups A and B Cycle PZR heater groups A and B to maintain pressure - to maintain pressure - STABLE STABLE Page 83 of 88 Page 83 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT F (PG 7 OF 8)
ATTACHMENT F (PG 7 OF 8)
SI TERMINATION SI TERMINATION 13 1313CHECK IF LETDOWN CAN BE CHECK IF LETDOWN CAN BE CHECK IF LETDOWN CAN BE ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED
- a.a.PZR level - PZR level - GREATER THAN 17%
GREATER THAN 17%
a.a.Continue with Step 14 Continue with Step 14 (Next Page), (Next Page), WHEN WHEN PZR level is greater PZR level is greater than than 17%17%, , THEN THEN do Step 13b.
do Step 13b.
b.b.Establish letdown:Establish letdown:b.b.IF IF letdown can letdown can NOT NOT be be restored, restored, 1)1)Open letdown isolationOpen letdown isolationTHEN THEN perform the perform the valves:valves:following:
following:1CV4591CV4591)1)Verify CC flow to RCP Verify CC flow to RCP1CV4601CV460thermal barriers between thermal barriers between 150 GPM 150 GPM and and 231 GPM 231 GPM:: 2)2)Locally open letdown line Locally open letdown line containment isolation valves containment isolation valves1FIS-685A (383' U18) 1FIS-685A (383' U18) using pneumatic jumpers:
using pneumatic jumpers:
2)2)Close at least Close at least ONE ONE1CV8152 (364' +27' X13 CWA1CV8152 (364' +27' X13 CWAcharging line charging line P-41)P-41)containment isolation containment isolation1CV8160 (377' +15' R5 OMB1CV8160 (377' +15' R5 OMBvalve using 1BwOA valve using 1BwOA P-41)P-41)ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN 3)3)Open letdown orificeOpen letdown orificeEQUIPMENT:
EQUIPMENT:
isolation valves - isolation valves - NOT TO NOT TO EXCEED 120 GPM EXCEED 120 GPM
- ooMCC 132X4 C3 MCC 132X4 C3 (1CV8105):
(1CV8105):
oo1CV8149A 1CV8149A oo1CV8149B 1CV8149B1CV8105 (379' CWA 1CV8105 (379' CWA oo1CV8149C1CV8149CP-71)
P-71)ooMCC 131X1 K1 MCC 131X1 K1 (1CV8106):
(1CV8106):1CV8106 (379' CWA 1CV8106 (379' CWA P-71)P-71)3)3)Throttle 1CV121 to Throttle 1CV121 to control injection flow control injection flow while maintaining PZR while maintaining PZR level less than level less than 90%
90%::F0131 RCP 1A Seal Inj F0131 RCP 1A Seal Inj Flow FlowF0129 RCP 1B Seal Inj F0129 RCP 1B Seal Inj Flow FlowF0127 RCP 1C Seal Inj F0127 RCP 1C Seal Inj Flow FlowF0125 RCP 1D Seal Inj F0125 RCP 1D Seal Inj Flow Flow Page 84 of 88 Page 84 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT F (PG 8 OF 8)
ATTACHMENT F (PG 8 OF 8)
SI TERMINATION SI TERMINATION 14 1414DISPATCH OPERATOR TO LOCALLY STOP DISPATCH OPERATOR TO LOCALLY STOP DISPATCH OPERATOR TO LOCALLY STOP ECCS PUMPS ECCS PUMPS ECCS PUMPS
- a.a.Stop ECCS pumps using 1BwOA Stop ECCS pumps using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
ooSI Pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 3)
SI Pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 3) ooRH Pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 4)
RH Pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 4) ooSI Pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 3)
SI Pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 3) ooRH Pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 4)
RH Pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 4) 15 1515RESTORE SEAL RETURN RESTORE SEAL RETURN RESTORE SEAL RETURN
- a.a.Locally open seal water returnLocally open seal water returna.a.Open the breaker and Open the breaker and containment isolation valvescontainment isolation valveslocally open the valve(s) locally open the valve(s) using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALusing 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALusing the handwheel:
using the handwheel:
EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:oo1CV8100 (395' CWA P-28) 1CV8100 (395' CWA P-28) oo1CV8112 (395' R5 OMB 1CV8112 (395' R5 OMBMCC 131X4 A5 (1CV8100)MCC 131X4 A5 (1CV8100)P-28)
P-28)MCC 132X2 B4 (1CV8112)
MCC 132X2 B4 (1CV8112) 16 1616CHECK IF DIESEL GENERATORS SHOULD CHECK IF DIESEL GENERATORS SHOULD CHECK IF DIESEL GENERATORS SHOULD BE STOPPED BE STOPPED BE STOPPED
- power to ESF buses.
power to ESF buses.ACB 1412 - ACB 1412 - CLOSED CLOSED IF IF offsite power can offsite power can NOT NOTACB 1422 - ACB 1422 - CLOSED CLOSED be restored, be restored, THEN THEN notify Transmission notify Transmission System Operator to System Operator to initiate an emergency AC initiate an emergency AC restoration program.
restoration program.
GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 17. Step 17.b.b.Dispatch operators to stop any Dispatch operators to stop any unloaded DG and place in unloaded DG and place in standby per BwOP DG-12, DIESEL standby per BwOP DG-12, DIESEL GENERATOR SHUTDOWN GENERATOR SHUTDOWN 17 1717RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 12 RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 12 RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 12 (Page 8)(Page 8)(Page 8)-END--END-Page 85 of 88 Page 85 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT G (PG 1 OF 3)
ATTACHMENT G (PG 1 OF 3)
- MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI
- MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI 1 11STOP ALL BUT ONE CV PUMP STOP ALL BUT ONE CV PUMP STOP ALL BUT ONE CV PUMP
- Stop selected pump using Stop selected pump using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT 2 22CHECK RCP STATUS CHECK RCP STATUS CHECK RCP STATUS
- a.a.Locally check CV pumpLocally check CV pumpa.a.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
miniflow - miniflow - GREATER THAN 60 GPM GREATER THAN 60 GPM
- ooOpen motor operated Open motor operated1FI-CV048 (346' Q12)1FI-CV048 (346' Q12)miniflow valves per miniflow valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:
ooMCC 131X1 M1 MCC 131X1 M1 (1CV8110):
(1CV8110):1CV8110 (364' S13 1CV8110 (364' S13 CWA)CWA)ooMCC 132X4 C4 MCC 132X4 C4 (1CV8111):
(1CV8111):1CV8111 (364' S13 1CV8111 (364' S13 CWA)CWA)ooOpen the solenoid valves Open the solenoid valves by pulling fuses:
by pulling fuses:
ooFuses 61 and 62 at Fuses 61 and 62 at 1PA27J (1CV8114) 1PA27J (1CV8114) ooFuses 61 and 62 at Fuses 61 and 62 at 1PA28J (1CV8116) 1PA28J (1CV8116)
Page 86 of 88 Page 86 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT G (PG 2 OF 3)
ATTACHMENT G (PG 2 OF 3)
- MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI
- MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI 4 44ISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTION ISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTION ISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTION
to RCP thermal barriers:
231 GPM 231 GPM:: 1)1)Open the breaker for Open the breaker for1FIS-685A (383' U18)1FIS-685A (383' U18)1CC685:
1CC685:MCC 132X4 D4 MCC 132X4 D4 2)2)SLOWLY throttle open CC SLOWLY throttle open CC from RCPs thermal from RCPs thermal barrier isolation valve:
barrier isolation valve:1CC685 1CC685 (395' CWA P-24)
(395' CWA P-24) 3)3)Maintain CC flow from Maintain CC flow from RCP thermal barriers RCP thermal barriers between between 150 GPM 150 GPM and and 231 GPM 231 GPM::1FIS-685A (383' U18) 1FIS-685A (383' U18) b.b.Deenergize charging pump(s) to Deenergize charging pump(s) to RCS cold leg injection RCS cold leg injection isolation valves:
isolation valves:1SI8801A (MCC 131X1 F4) 1SI8801A (MCC 131X1 F4)1SI8801B (MCC 132X5 A4) 1SI8801B (MCC 132X5 A4) c.c.Locally close charging pump(s)
Locally close charging pump(s) to RCS cold leg injection to RCS cold leg injection isolation valves using the isolation valves using the handwheel:
handwheel:1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26) 1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26)1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26) 1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26)
Page 87 of 88 Page 87 of 88 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1PRI-5 PRI-5 PRI-5 ATTACHMENT G (PG 3 OF 3)
ATTACHMENT G (PG 3 OF 3)
- MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI
- MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI 5 55MAINTAIN PZR LEVEL MAINTAIN PZR LEVEL MAINTAIN PZR LEVEL
- a.a.Locally bypass 1CV121:
Locally bypass 1CV121:
1)1)Open charging header flow Open charging header flow control bypass valve for control bypass valve for running CV pump:
running CV pump:
oo1CV8387A (364' U15 1A CV 1CV8387A (364' U15 1A CV pump room) pump room) oo1CV8387B (364' Y14 1B CV 1CV8387B (364' Y14 1B CV pump room) pump room) 2)2)Close at least Close at least ONE ONE charging charging header flow control valve header flow control valve manual isolation:
manual isolation:
oo1CV8483A (364' +10' U13 1CV8483A (364' +10' U13 CWA)CWA)oo1CV8483B (364' +8' U13 1CV8483B (364' +8' U13 CWA)CWA)b.b.Control charging header flowControl charging header flowb.b.IF IF charging flow can charging flow can NOT NOT control bypass valve tocontrol bypass valve tobe reduced with the 1CV121, be reduced with the 1CV121, maintain - maintain - STABLE STABLE::THEN THEN reduce charging reduce charging through the RCP seals to through the RCP seals toPZR levelPZR level3 GPM PER PUMP 3 GPM PER PUMP using the using the RCP seal injection manual RCP seal injection manualPZR pressurePZR pressureflow control valves:
flow control valves:1CV8369A (391' CWA P-33) 1CV8369A (391' CWA P-33)F0131 RCP 1 Seal F0131 RCP 1 Seal Injection Wtr Flow Injection Wtr Flow1CV8369D (391' CWA P-33) 1CV8369D (391' CWA P-33)F0125 RCP 4 Seal F0125 RCP 4 Seal Injection Wtr Flow Injection Wtr Flow1CV8369B (387' CWA P-53) 1CV8369B (387' CWA P-53)F0129 RCP 2 Seal F0129 RCP 2 Seal Injection Wtr Flow Injection Wtr Flow1CV8369C (387' CWA P-53) 1CV8369C (387' CWA P-53)F0127 RCP 3 Seal F0127 RCP 3 Seal Injection Wtr Flow Injection Wtr Flow 6 66RETURN TO ATTACHMENT F, Step 14 RETURN TO ATTACHMENT F, Step 14 RETURN TO ATTACHMENT F, Step 14 (Page 85)(Page 85)(Page 85)-END--END-Page 88 of 88 Page 88 of 88
REV. 106 REV. 106REV. 106OPERATOR ACTION
SUMMARY
OPERATOR ACTION
SUMMARY
OPERATOR ACTION
SUMMARY
1BwOA PRI-F:5 1BwOA PRI-F:5 1BwOA PRI-F:5
FOR 1BwOA PRI-5 FOR 1BwOA PRI-5 FOR 1BwOA PRI-5 IF SI ACTUATES AFTER STEP 9 IF SI ACTUATES AFTER STEP 9 IF SI ACTUATES AFTER STEP 9
- AF PUMP DAY TANK LEVEL <50%
AF PUMP DAY TANK LEVEL <50%
AF PUMP DAY TANK LEVEL <50%
TERMINATION (Page 78)
IF MCR BECOMES HABITABLE IF MCR BECOMES HABITABLE IF MCR BECOMES HABITABLE
- GO TO ATTACHMENT D, RESTORING GO TO ATTACHMENT D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MCR (Page 58)
OPERATIONS FROM MCR (Page 58)
USE INDICATIONS AT FIRE HAZARDS USE INDICATIONS AT FIRE HAZARDS USE INDICATIONS AT FIRE HAZARDS PANEL IF NOT AVAILABLE AT REMOTE PANEL IF NOT AVAILABLE AT REMOTE PANEL IF NOT AVAILABLE AT REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL SHUTDOWN PANEL SHUTDOWN PANEL
- Source Range NI Source Range NI Intermediate Range NI Intermediate Range NI SG pressures SG pressures SG wide range levels SG wide range levels PZR pressure PZR pressure PZR level PZR level RCS Hot Leg temperatures RCS Hot Leg temperatures RCS Cold Leg temperatures RCS Cold Leg temperatures PERFORM MAIN BODY STEP 15b RNO IF PERFORM MAIN BODY STEP 15b RNO IF PERFORM MAIN BODY STEP 15b RNO IF
- o RCP seal outlet temperature o RCP seal outlet temperature rises to greater than or rises to greater than or equal to equal to 235 235F F-OR--OR-o o RCP lower radial bearing RCP lower radial bearing temperature rises to greater temperature rises to greater than or equal to than or equal to 225 225F F--OR OR--ooNo seal injection flow is No seal injection flow is indicated to RCPs having no indicated to RCPs having no seal or radial bearing seal or radial bearing temperature indication temperature indication IF FLOW IS LOST/ISOLATED TO ANY SG IF FLOW IS LOST/ISOLATED TO ANY SG IF FLOW IS LOST/ISOLATED TO ANY SG AND NR SG LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 45%
AND NR SG LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 45%
AND NR SG LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 45%
FOR GREATER THAN 75 MINUTES, THEN:
FOR GREATER THAN 75 MINUTES, THEN:
FOR GREATER THAN 75 MINUTES, THEN:
Feed affected SG(s) between Feed affected SG(s) between 60 GPM 60 GPM and and 80 GPM 80 GPM for for 10 MINUTES 10 MINUTES prior to prior to restoring desired feedwater flow.
restoring desired feedwater flow.
(Final)
(Final)
SIM-508 Page 1 of 5 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 1 Assist NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 had an automatic Safety Injection Actuation. The 1B and 1D RCFCs are out of service.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit Supervisor directs you to perform 1BwEP
-0, Step 7 to Verify RCFC's are running in Accident Mode.
SIM-508 Page 2 of 5 TASK TITLE: Start RCFC's in Accident Mode.
JPM No.: SIM-508 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No: 4C.VP-06 K/A No.: 022000A4.01 TASK No.: R-VP-007 Start-up a RCFC K/A IMP: 3.6/3.6 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)
ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATOR:
DATE: The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME:
MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 3, 4, 5, 8 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 10 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME:
NA EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM _ IN PLANT
_ SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. 1BwEP-0, Rev. 204, REACTOR TRIP OR SI MATERIALS:
- 1. 1BwEP-0, Step 7 TASK STANDARDS:
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are the Unit 1 Assist NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 had an automatic Safety Injection Actuation. The 1B and 1D RCFCs are out of service.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit Supervisor directs you to perform 1BwEP
-0, Step 7 to Verify RCFC's are running in Accident Mode.
SIM-508 Page 3 of 5 RECORD START TIME:
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 1. Refer to 1BwEP
-0, Reactor Trip or Safety Injection.
LOCATE and refer to 1BwEP-0, Reactor Trip or Safety Injection SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. Check Group 2 RCFC Accident Mode Status Lights.
Group 2 RCFC Accident Mode Status Lights are NOT lit SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: **ALTERNATE PATH START**
- 3. Stop any RCFC running in High Speed. Stop all RCFC's running in High Speed (the two running must be stopped) 1VP01CA 1VP01CC SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *4. Close CNMT chiller inlet and outlet valves.
Close 1SX112A & 1SX114A SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *5. Open CNMT chiller bypass valves. Open 1SX147A.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 6. Verify/Open RCFC inlet valves.
1SX016A is OPEN.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 7. Verify RCFC outlet valves are OPEN. 1SX027A is OPEN.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *8. Start all RCFC's in Low Speed.
Start all RCFC's in Low Speed (for each, after a 20 second delay).
1VP01CA 1VP01CC SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
SIM-508 Page 4 of 5 CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME:
________
COMMENTS:
SIM-508 Page 5 of 5 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS Verify/perform TQ
-BR-201-0113, BRAIDWOOD TRAINING DEPARTMENT SIMULATOR EXAMINATION SECURITY ACTIONS CHECKLIST.
Reset to IC
-21 Shut down the operating containment chiller (to prevent nuisance trip during JPM)
Place high and low switches for 1B and 1D RCFCs in PTL and place clearance order cards on them.
COMMENTS:
A.A.PURPOSEPURPOSEThis procedure provides actions to verify proper response of theThis procedure provides actions to verify proper response of theautomatic protection systems following manual or automaticautomatic protection systems following manual or automaticactuation of a Reactor Trip or Safety Injection, to assess plantactuation of a Reactor Trip or Safety Injection, to assess plantconditions, and to identify the appropriate recovery procedure.conditions, and to identify the appropriate recovery procedure.B.B.SYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONSSYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONS1)1)The following are symptoms that may require a Reactor Trip, ifThe following are symptoms that may require a Reactor Trip, ifone has not occurred:one has not occurred:ooSource range high level Source range high level 101055 CPS CPSooIntermediate range high level Intermediate range high level 25%25% power powerooPower range lo-level Power range lo-level 25%25% power powerooPower range hi-level Power range hi-level 109%109% power powerooPower range positive rate Power range positive rate +5%+5% power change in 2 seconds power change in 2 secondsooOvertemperature Delta T Overtemperature Delta T 132.5%132.5% penalties penaltiesooOverpower Delta T Overpower Delta T 107.2%107.2% - penalties - penaltiesooHigh PZR pressure High PZR pressure 2385 PSIG2385 PSIGooLow PZR pressure Low PZR pressure 1885 PSIG1885 PSIGooHigh PZR level High PZR level 92%92%ooSingle loop loss of flow Single loop loss of flow 90%90% loop flow loop flowooTwo loop loss of flow Two loop loss of flow 90%90% loop flow in 2/4 loops loop flow in 2/4 loopsooRCP breakers RCP breakers OPENOPENooRCP bus low frequency RCP bus low frequency 57.0 HZ57.0 HZooRCP bus undervoltage RCP bus undervoltage 5268 VOLTS5268 VOLTSooTurbine trip emergency trip header Turbine trip emergency trip header 1000 PSIG1000 PSIG oil pressure oil pressureor Turbine throttle valves shutor Turbine throttle valves shutooSI manual actuationSI manual actuationooCNMT high pressure SI CNMT high pressure SI 3.4 PSIG3.4 PSIGooLow PZR pressure SI Low PZR pressure SI 1829 PSIG1829 PSIGooLow steamline pressure SI Low steamline pressure SI 640 PSIG640 PSIG (rate sensitive) (rate sensitive)ooSteam Generator water level low-low Steam Generator water level low-low 18%18% of narrow range of narrow rangespanspan2)2)The following are symptoms of a reactor trip:The following are symptoms of a reactor trip:ooAny Reactor Trip first out annunciator lit.Any Reactor Trip first out annunciator lit.ooRapid drop in neutron level indicated by nuclearRapid drop in neutron level indicated by nuclearinstrumentation.instrumentation.ooAll shutdown and control rods fully inserted and rod bottomAll shutdown and control rods fully inserted and rod bottomlights lit.lights lit.ooRapid drop in Unit load to zero power.Rapid drop in Unit load to zero power.Page 1 of 42Page 1 of 42 Step 2 (continued)Step 2 (continued)3)3)The following may be symptoms that require a Reactor Trip andThe following may be symptoms that require a Reactor Trip andSafety Injection, if one has not occurred:Safety Injection, if one has not occurred:ooLow PZR pressure Low PZR pressure 1829 PSIG1829 PSIG..ooLow steamline pressure Low steamline pressure 640 PSIG640 PSIG (rate sensitive). (rate sensitive).ooCNMT high pressure CNMT high pressure 3.4 PSIG3.4 PSIG..4)4)The following may be symptoms of a Reactor Trip and SafetyThe following may be symptoms of a Reactor Trip and SafetyInjection:Injection:ooAny SI first out annunciator lit.Any SI first out annunciator lit.ooAll Group 2 cold leg injection monitor lights lit.All Group 2 cold leg injection monitor lights lit.ooESF equipment actuated.ESF equipment actuated.ooSI actuated BYPASS-PERMISSIVE light lit.SI actuated BYPASS-PERMISSIVE light lit.5)5)This procedure may also be entered:This procedure may also be entered:ooAnytime a manual reactor trip or safety injection isAnytime a manual reactor trip or safety injection isactuated.actuated.ooAnytime an SI is actuated or required while in Mode 3.Anytime an SI is actuated or required while in Mode 3.Page 2 of 42Page 2 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINED************************************************************************************NOTENOTE****With this procedure in effect, theWith this procedure in effect, the****Emergency Director shall evaluateEmergency Director shall evaluate****for Emergency Plan conditions.for Emergency Plan conditions.************************************************************************************************************************************************************************NOTENOTE****"ADVERSE CNMT" is defined as:"ADVERSE CNMT" is defined as:********ooCNMT pressure CNMT pressure GREATER THAN 5 PSIGGREATER THAN 5 PSIG********-OR--OR-********ooCNMT radiation level CNMT radiation level GREATER THANGREATER THAN****101055 R/HR R/HR::********oo1RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS1201RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS120****oo1RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS1211RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS121************************************************************************************Manually trip the Reactor:Manually trip the Reactor:Rod bottom lights - Rod bottom lights - ALL LITALL LIT1PM05J1PM05J1PM06J1PM06JReactor trip and bypassReactor trip and bypassbreakers - breakers - OPENOPENIFIF PR channels are greater PR channels are greaterthan than 5%5%Neutron flux - Neutron flux - DROPPINGDROPPINGOROR IR SUR is positive, IR SUR is positive, THENTHEN 1BwFR-S.1, 1BwFR-S.1,RESPONSE TO NUCLEAR POWERRESPONSE TO NUCLEAR POWERGENERATION/ATWS, Step 1.GENERATION/ATWS, Step 1.Page 3 of 42Page 3 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDManually trip the turbine:Manually trip the turbine:All Turbine throttle valves -All Turbine throttle valves -ooTrip pushbuttonTrip pushbuttonCLOSEDCLOSEDooOWS graphic 5512OWS graphic 5512All Turbine governor valves -All Turbine governor valves -CLOSEDCLOSEDIFIF any throttle any throttle ANDAND any anygovernor valve are open, governor valve are open, THENTHEN isolate the steam isolate the steamsupply:supply:ooManually run back theManually run back theturbine at maximum rate atturbine at maximum rate atOWS graphic 5501:OWS graphic 5501:1)1)Select turbine MANUAL.Select turbine MANUAL.2)2)Select RAPID.Select RAPID.3)3)Select and HOLD GV lowerSelect and HOLD GV lowerarrow.arrow.ooManually actuate MainManually actuate MainSteamline Isolation Steamline Isolation ANDANDverify MSIV bypass valvesverify MSIV bypass valvesare CLOSED.are CLOSED.a.a.ESF busses - ESF busses - AT LEAST ONEAT LEAST ONEa.a. 1BwCA-0.0, LOSS OF 1BwCA-0.0, LOSS OFENERGIZEDENERGIZED::ALL AC POWER, Step 1.ALL AC POWER, Step 1.ooBus 141Bus 141ooBus 142Bus 142b.b.ESF busses - ESF busses - BOTH ENERGIZEDBOTH ENERGIZED::b.b.WHENWHEN time permits, time permits, THENTHEN try to restore power try to restore powerBus 141Bus 141to deenergized ESF bus perto deenergized ESF bus perBus 142Bus 1421BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KVESF BUS.ESF BUS.Page 4 of 42Page 4 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.Check if SI - Check if SI - ACTUATEDACTUATED::a.a.Check if SI is required:Check if SI is required:ooAny SI first outAny SI first outooPZR pressure less thanPZR pressure less thanannunciator - annunciator - LITLITor equal to or equal to 1829 PSIG1829 PSIG..-OR--OR-ooSteamline pressure lessSteamline pressure lessthan or equal tothan or equal toooSI ACTUATED permissiveSI ACTUATED permissive640 PSIG640 PSIG..light - light - LITLITooCNMT pressure greaterCNMT pressure greater-OR--OR-than or equal tothan or equal to3.4 PSIG3.4 PSIG..ooSI equipment - SI equipment - AUTOMATICALLYAUTOMATICALLYACTUATEDACTUATED::IFIF SI is required, SI is required, THENTHEN manually actuate SI. manually actuate SI.ooEither SI pump - Either SI pump - RUNNINGRUNNINGIFIF SI is SI is NOTNOT required, required, ooEither CENT CHG pump toEither CENT CHG pump toTHENTHEN 1BwEP ES-0.1, 1BwEP ES-0.1,cold leg injection isolcold leg injection isolREACTOR TRIP RESPONSE,REACTOR TRIP RESPONSE,valve - valve - OPENOPEN::Step 1.Step 1.oo1SI8801A1SI8801Aoo1SI8801B1SI8801Bb.b.* Manually actuate SI:* Manually actuate SI:1PM05J1PM05J1PM06J1PM06J~~~(((Manually start pump(s).Manually start pump(s).CENT CHG pumps - CENT CHG pumps - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNINGRH pumps - RH pumps - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNINGSI pumps - SI pumps - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNINGPage 5 of 42Page 5 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINED)))a.a.Group 2 RCFC Accident ModeGroup 2 RCFC Accident Modea.a.Manually align RCFCs inManually align RCFCs instatus lights - status lights - LITLITaccident mode asaccident mode asnecessary:necessary:1)1)Stop any RCFC running inStop any RCFC running inhigh speed.high speed.2)2)Close CNMT chiller inletClose CNMT chiller inletand outlet valves:and outlet valves:oo1SX112A1SX112Aoo1SX114A1SX114Aoo1SX112B1SX112Boo1SX114B1SX114B3)3)Open CNMT chiller bypassOpen CNMT chiller bypassvalves:valves:oo1SX147A1SX147Aoo1SX147B1SX147B4)4)Open RCFC inlet andOpen RCFC inlet andoutlet valves:outlet valves:oo1SX016A1SX016Aoo1SX016B1SX016Boo1SX027A1SX027Aoo1SX027B1SX027B5)5)Start all RCFCs in lowStart all RCFCs in lowspeed.speed.Page 6 of 42Page 6 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINED+++a.a.Group 3 CNMT Isol monitorGroup 3 CNMT Isol monitora.a.Manually actuate CNMTManually actuate CNMTlights - lights - LITLITIsolation Phase A.Isolation Phase A.IFIF any Phase A valve will any Phase A valve willNOTNOT close, close, THENTHEN manually close manually closevalve(s).valve(s).IFIF any valve(s) located any valve(s) locatedoutside of CNMT can outside of CNMT can NOTNOT be beclosed manually, closed manually, THENTHEN locally close the locally close thevalve(s) while continuingvalve(s) while continuingwith Step 9.with Step 9.,,,a.a.Group 6 CNMT Vent Isol monitorGroup 6 CNMT Vent Isol monitora.a.Perform the following:Perform the following:lights - lights - LITLIT1)1)Stop any running VQStop any running VQfans.fans.2)2)Manually close VQ isolManually close VQ isolvalve(s) as necessary.valve(s) as necessary.Page 7 of 42Page 7 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.AF pumps - AF pumps - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNINGa.a.Manually start pump(s).Manually start pump(s).b.b.AF isol valves - AF isol valves - OPENOPEN::b.b.Manually open valve(s) asManually open valve(s) asnecessary.necessary.1AF013A1AF013A1AF013B1AF013B1AF013C1AF013C1AF013D1AF013D1AF013E1AF013E1AF013F1AF013F1AF013G1AF013G1AF013H1AF013Hc.c.AF flow control valves -AF flow control valves -c.c.Manually throttle valve(s)Manually throttle valve(s)THROTTLEDTHROTTLED::open as necessary.open as necessary.1AF005A1AF005A1AF005B1AF005B1AF005C1AF005C1AF005D1AF005D1AF005E1AF005E1AF005F1AF005F1AF005G1AF005G1AF005H1AF005Ha.a.CC pumps - CC pumps - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNINGa.a.Manually start pump(s).Manually start pump(s).a.a.SX pumps - SX pumps - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNINGa.a.Manually start pump(s).Manually start pump(s).Page 8 of 42Page 8 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.Check for either of theCheck for either of thea.a. Step 14 (Next Step 14 (Nextfollowing:following:Page).Page).ooAny SG pressure - Any SG pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN640 PSIG640 PSIG-OR--OR-ooCNMT pressure (1PR-937 orCNMT pressure (1PR-937 or1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) -1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) -GREATER THAN 8.2 PSIGGREATER THAN 8.2 PSIGb.b.Verify the following:Verify the following:b.b.Perform the following:Perform the following:MSIVs - MSIVs - CLOSEDCLOSED1)1)Manually actuate MainManually actuate MainSteamline Isolation.Steamline Isolation.MSIV bypass valves - MSIV bypass valves - CLOSEDCLOSED2)2)Verify MSIV and MSIVVerify MSIV and MSIVbypass valves arebypass valves areclosed.closed.IFIF any valve will any valve will NOTNOTclose, close, THENTHEN manually close manually closevalve(s).valve(s).Page 9 of 42Page 9 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.CNMT pressure (1PR-937 orCNMT pressure (1PR-937 ora.a.Continue with Step 15Continue with Step 151PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) - 1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) - HASHAS(Page 12).(Page 12).RISEN TO GREATER THAN 20 PSIGRISEN TO GREATER THAN 20 PSIGIFIF CNMT pressure rises to CNMT pressure rises togreater than greater than 20 PSIG20 PSIG, , THENTHEN do Steps 14b do Steps 14bthru 14f.thru 14f.b.b.Group 6 CS monitor lights - Group 6 CS monitor lights - LITLITb.b.Manually actuate CS andManually actuate CS andPhase B Isolation.Phase B Isolation.IFIF Group 6 CS monitor Group 6 CS monitorlights are lights are NOTNOT LITLIT, , THENTHEN ATTACHMENT C, ATTACHMENT C,Step 1 (Page 41).Step 1 (Page 41).c.c.Group 6 Phase B IsolationGroup 6 Phase B Isolationc.c.Manually actuate CS andManually actuate CS andmonitor lights - monitor lights - LITLITPhase B Isolation.Phase B Isolation.IFIF Group 6 Phase B Group 6 Phase Bisolation monitor lightsisolation monitor lightsare are NOTNOT LITLIT, , THENTHEN manually close manually closePhase B isolation valves.Phase B isolation valves.d.d.Stop all RCPsStop all RCPse.e.Check CS eductor suction flowCheck CS eductor suction flowe.e.Dispatch an operator withDispatch an operator withon running pump(s) - on running pump(s) - GREATERGREATERkeys to verify valve(s)keys to verify valve(s)THAN 15 GPMTHAN 15 GPM::are OPEN:are OPEN:oo1FI-CS0131FI-CS013oo1CS035A (1A CS Pump Rm)1CS035A (1A CS Pump Rm)oo1FI-CS0141FI-CS014oo1CS035B (1B CS Pump Rm)1CS035B (1B CS Pump Rm)Step continued on next pageStep continued on next pagePage 10 of 42Page 10 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDStep 14 (continued)Step 14 (continued)f.f.Check CS eductor additive flowCheck CS eductor additive flowf.f.Dispatch operator(s) withDispatch operator(s) withon running pump(s) - on running pump(s) - GREATERGREATERkeys to verify valves arekeys to verify valves areTHAN 5 GPMTHAN 5 GPM::OPEN:OPEN:oo1FI-CS0151FI-CS015ooTrain A:Train A:oo1FI-CS0161FI-CS0161CS017A (364' U13)1CS017A (364' U13)1CS018A (364' U13)1CS018A (364' U13)1CS040A (364' U13)1CS040A (364' U13)1CS021A (1A CS Pump1CS021A (1A CS PumpRm) [Throttled]Rm) [Throttled]1CS046A (1A CS Pump1CS046A (1A CS PumpRm)Rm)ooTrain B:Train B:1CS017B (364' U13)1CS017B (364' U13)1CS018B (364' U13)1CS018B (364' U13)1CS040B (364' U13)1CS040B (364' U13)1CS021B (1B CS Pump1CS021B (1B CS PumpRm) [Throttled]Rm) [Throttled]1CS046B (1B CS Pump1CS046B (1B CS PumpRm)Rm)Page 11 of 42Page 11 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.AF flow - AF flow - GREATER THAN 500 GPMGREATER THAN 500 GPMa.a.IFIF SG narrow range level SG narrow range levelis greater than is greater than 10%10% ( (31%31%ADVERSE CNMT) in any SG, ADVERSE CNMT) in any SG, THENTHEN control feed flow to control feed flow tomaintain narrow rangemaintain narrow rangelevel.level.IFIF SG narrow range level SG narrow range levelis less than is less than 10%10% ( (31%31%ADVERSE CNMT) in all SGs, ADVERSE CNMT) in all SGs, THENTHEN perform the perform thefollowing:following:a)a)Manually start pump(s)Manually start pump(s)and align valve(s) asand align valve(s) asnecessary.necessary.b)b)IFIF feed flow greater feed flow greaterthan than 500 GPM500 GPM can can NOTNOT be beestablished, established, THENTHEN 1BwFR-H.1, 1BwFR-H.1,RESPONSE TO LOSS OFRESPONSE TO LOSS OFSECONDARY HEAT SINK,SECONDARY HEAT SINK,Step 1.Step 1.b.b.Check SG narrow range levels -Check SG narrow range levels -b.b.IFIF ruptured SG is ruptured SG isNOT RISING IN AN UNCONTROLLEDNOT RISING IN AN UNCONTROLLEDidentified identified ANDAND affected SG affected SGMANNERMANNERnarrow range level isnarrow range level isgreater than greater than 10%10% ( (31%31%ADVERSE CNMT), ADVERSE CNMT), THENTHEN manually close its AF manually close its AFisol valves:isol valves:ooSG 1A:SG 1A:1AF013A1AF013A1AF013E1AF013EooSG 1B:SG 1B:1AF013B1AF013B1AF013F1AF013FooSG 1C:SG 1C:1AF013C1AF013C1AF013G1AF013GooSG 1D:SG 1D:1AF013D1AF013D1AF013H1AF013HPage 12 of 42Page 12 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.Group 2 Cold Leg InjectionGroup 2 Cold Leg Injectiona.a.Manually align valve(s) asManually align valve(s) asmonitor lights required formonitor lights required fornecessary.necessary.ECCS valve alignment - ECCS valve alignment - LITLITa.a.High head SI flow (1FI-917) -High head SI flow (1FI-917) -a.a.Manually start CENT CHGManually start CENT CHGGREATER THAN 100 GPMGREATER THAN 100 GPMpumps and align valves aspumps and align valves asnecessary.necessary.b.b.RCS pressure (1PI-403A/405) -RCS pressure (1PI-403A/405) -b.b. Step 18 (Next Step 18 (NextLESS THAN 1700 PSIGLESS THAN 1700 PSIGPage).Page).c.c.SI pump discharge flowSI pump discharge flowc.c.Manually start SI pumpsManually start SI pumps(1FI-918/922) - (1FI-918/922) - GREATER THANGREATER THANand align valves asand align valves as200 GPM200 GPMnecessary.necessary.d.d.RCS pressure - RCS pressure - LESS THANLESS THANd.d. Step 18 (Next Step 18 (Next325 PSIG325 PSIGPage).Page).e.e.RH pump discharge flowRH pump discharge flowe.e.Manually start RH pumpsManually start RH pumps(1FI-618/619) - (1FI-618/619) - GREATER THANGREATER THANand align valves asand align valves as1000 GPM1000 GPMnecessary.necessary.f.f.Check two CENT CHG pumps -Check two CENT CHG pumps -f.f.IFIF only one CENT CHG pump only one CENT CHG pumpRUNNINGRUNNINGis running, is running, THENTHEN perform the perform thefollowing:following:1)1)Verify head SI flowVerify head SI flow(1FI-917) greater than(1FI-917) greater than100 GPM100 GPM or SI pump or SI pumpdischarge flow greaterdischarge flow greaterthan than 200 GPM200 GPM..2)2)Trip all RCPs.Trip all RCPs.3)3)WHENWHEN the RCS is the RCS isdepressurized, depressurized, THENTHEN manually close RCP manually close RCPseal injection isolationseal injection isolationvalves:valves:1CV8355A1CV8355A1CV8355B1CV8355B1CV8355C1CV8355C1CV8355D1CV8355DPage 13 of 42Page 13 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.PORVs - PORVs - CLOSEDCLOSED::a.a.IFIF PZR pressure is less PZR pressure is lessthan than 2315 PSIG2315 PSIG, , 1RY455A1RY455ATHENTHEN manually close PORVs. manually close PORVs.1RY4561RY456IFIF any PORV can any PORV can NOTNOT be beclosed, closed, THENTHEN manually or locally manually or locallyclose its isol valve:close its isol valve:oo1RY8000A (1RY455A)1RY8000A (1RY455A)MCC 131X2B A5 MCC 131X2B A5 (414' S12 CWA)(414' S12 CWA)oo1RY8000B (1RY456) 1RY8000B (1RY456) MCC 132X2 C4 MCC 132X2 C4 (426' S12 CWA)(426' S12 CWA)IFIF PORV isol valve can PORV isol valve can NOTNOTbe closed, be closed, THENTHEN 1BwEP-1, 1BwEP-1,LOSS OF REACTOR ORLOSS OF REACTOR ORSECONDARY COOLANT, Step 1.SECONDARY COOLANT, Step 1.b.b.* PORV isol valves -
- PORV isol valves - AT LEASTAT LEASTb.b. Step 18d. Step 18d.ONE ENERGIZEDONE ENERGIZEDc.c.* PORV relief path -
- PORV relief path - AT LEASTAT LEASTc.c.Perform the following toPerform the following toONE AVAILABLEONE AVAILABLE::establish a PORV reliefestablish a PORV reliefpath for any PORV path for any PORV NOTNOTPORV in - PORV in - AUTOAUTOfailed open:failed open:Associated isol valve - Associated isol valve - OPENOPEN1)1)Place the PORV in AUTO.Place the PORV in AUTO.2)2)Open the associated PORVOpen the associated PORVisol valve.isol valve.d.d.Normal PZR spray valves -Normal PZR spray valves -d.d.IFIF PZR pressure is less PZR pressure is lessCLOSEDCLOSED::than than 2260 PSIG2260 PSIG, , THENTHEN manually close spray manually close spray1RY455B1RY455Bvalve(s).valve(s).1RY455C1RY455CIFIF any spray valve(s) can any spray valve(s) cannot be closed, not be closed, THENTHEN stop RCP(s) as stop RCP(s) asnecessary to stop spraynecessary to stop sprayflow:flow:ooRCP 1DRCP 1DooRCP 1CRCP 1CooRCP 1BRCP 1BooRCP 1ARCP 1APage 14 of 42Page 14 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDIFIF temperature is less than temperature is less than557557FF and dropping, and dropping, ooRCPs - RCPs - ANY RUNNINGANY RUNNING::THENTHEN perform the following: perform the following:RCS average temperature -RCS average temperature -a.a.Stop dumping steam.Stop dumping steam.STABLE AT OR TRENDING TOSTABLE AT OR TRENDING TO557557FFb.b.IFIF cooldown continues, cooldown continues, THENTHEN control total feed control total feed-OR--OR-flow:flow:ooRCPs - RCPs - NONE RUNNINGNONE RUNNING::Maintain total feed flowMaintain total feed flowgreater than greater than 500 GPM500 GPMRCS cold leg temperature -RCS cold leg temperature -until SG narrow rangeuntil SG narrow rangeSTABLE AT OR TRENDING TOSTABLE AT OR TRENDING TOlevel is greater thanlevel is greater than557557FF10%10% ( (31%31% ADVERSE CNMT) ADVERSE CNMT)in at least one SG.in at least one SG.c.c.IFIF cooldown continues, cooldown continues, THENTHEN close MSIV and MSIV close MSIV and MSIVbypass valves.bypass valves.IFIF temperature is greater temperature is greaterthan than 557557FF and rising, and rising, THENTHEN perform the following: perform the following:ooIFIF the C-9 permissive the C-9 permissivelight is light is NOTNOT LIT LIT ANDAND the theMSIV(s) or MSIV bypassMSIV(s) or MSIV bypassvalve(s) are open, valve(s) are open, THENTHEN dump steam to dump steam tocondenser:condenser:1)1)Place MS header pressurePlace MS header pressurecontroller in MANUAL andcontroller in MANUAL andreduce demand signal toreduce demand signal tozero.zero.2)2)Place steam dump modePlace steam dump modeselector switch in STMselector switch in STMPRESS mode.PRESS mode.3)3)Adjust MS headerAdjust MS headerpressure controller inpressure controller inmanual or auto.manual or auto.-OR--OR-ooDump steam using SG PORVs.Dump steam using SG PORVs.Page 15 of 42Page 15 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINED************************************************************************************NOTENOTE****Seal injection flow should beSeal injection flow should be****maintained to all RCPs to preventmaintained to all RCPs to prevent****seal damage due to overheating.seal damage due to overheating.************************************************************************************a.a.RCPs - RCPs - ANY RUNNINGANY RUNNINGa.a. Step 21. Step 21.b.b.ECCS flow:ECCS flow:b.b. Step 21. Step 21.ooHigh head SI flow (1FI-917) -High head SI flow (1FI-917) -GREATER THAN 100 GPMGREATER THAN 100 GPM-OR--OR-ooSI pump discharge flowSI pump discharge flow(1FI-918/922) - (1FI-918/922) - GREATER THANGREATER THAN200 GPM200 GPMc.c.RCS pressure - RCS pressure - LESS THANLESS THANc.c. Step 21. Step 21.1425 PSIG1425 PSIGd.d.Stop all RCPsStop all RCPsa.a.Check pressure in all SGs:Check pressure in all SGs:a.a. 1BwEP-2, 1BwEP-2,FAULTED STEAM GENERATORFAULTED STEAM GENERATORNO SG PRESSURE DROPPING IN ANNO SG PRESSURE DROPPING IN ANISOLATION, Step 1.ISOLATION, Step 1.UNCONTROLLED MANNERUNCONTROLLED MANNERNO SG COMPLETELYNO SG COMPLETELYDEPRESSURIZEDDEPRESSURIZEDPage 16 of 42Page 16 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 1BwEP-3, 1BwEP-3,STEAM GENERATOR TUBE RUPTURE,STEAM GENERATOR TUBE RUPTURE,SJAE/Gland Steam Exhaust GasSJAE/Gland Steam Exhaust GasStep 1.Step 1.radiation - radiation - HAS REMAINED LESSHAS REMAINED LESSTHAN ALERT ALARM SETPOINTTHAN ALERT ALARM SETPOINT::1PR27J Grid 1 1PS1271PR27J Grid 1 1PS127SG Blowdown Liquid radiation -SG Blowdown Liquid radiation -HAS REMAINED LESS THAN ALERTHAS REMAINED LESS THAN ALERTALARM SETPOINTALARM SETPOINT::1PR08J Grid 1 1PS1081PR08J Grid 1 1PS108Main Steamline radiation - Main Steamline radiation - HASHASREMAINED LESS THAN ALERT ALARMREMAINED LESS THAN ALERT ALARMSETPOINTSETPOINT::Main Steamline 1A, MSIV Rm:Main Steamline 1A, MSIV Rm:1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AA1221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AA1221RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AA1231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AA123Main Steamline 1B, MSIV Rm:Main Steamline 1B, MSIV Rm:1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AB2221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AB2221RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AB2231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AB223Main Steamline 1C, MSIV Rm:Main Steamline 1C, MSIV Rm:1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AC3221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AC3221RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AC3231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AC323Main Steamline 1D, MSIV Rm:Main Steamline 1D, MSIV Rm:1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AD4221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AD4221RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AD4231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AD423Page 17 of 42Page 17 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 1BwEP-1, LOSS OF 1BwEP-1, LOSS OFREACTOR OR SECONDARY COOLANT,REACTOR OR SECONDARY COOLANT,CNMT area radiation monitors -CNMT area radiation monitors -Step 1.Step 1.HAVE REMAINED LESS THAN ALERTHAVE REMAINED LESS THAN ALERTALARM SETPOINTSALARM SETPOINTS::1RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS1011RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS1011RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS2021RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS2021RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS3031RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS3031RT-AR011 Grid 4 4AS1111RT-AR011 Grid 4 4AS1111RT-AR012 Grid 4 4AS1121RT-AR012 Grid 4 4AS1121RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS1201RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS1201RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS1211RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS121CNMT pressure - CNMT pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN3.4 PSIG3.4 PSIGCNMT floor drain sump level -CNMT floor drain sump level -LESS THAN 46 INCHESLESS THAN 46 INCHES::1LI-PC0021LI-PC0021LI-PC0031LI-PC003Page 18 of 42Page 18 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.RCS subcooling - RCS subcooling - ACCEPTABLEACCEPTABLE::a.a. Step 25. Step 25.ooICONIC DISPLAYICONIC DISPLAY-OR--OR-ooATTACHMENT A (Page 31)ATTACHMENT A (Page 31)b.b.Secondary heat sink:Secondary heat sink:b.b.IFIF neither condition is neither condition issatisfied, satisfied, ooTotal feed flow to SGs -Total feed flow to SGs -THENTHEN Step 25. Step 25.GREATER THAN 500 GPMGREATER THAN 500 GPM-OR--OR-ooNarrow range level in atNarrow range level in atleast one SG - least one SG - GREATER THANGREATER THAN10%10%c.c.RCS pressure - RCS pressure - STABLE OR RISINGSTABLE OR RISINGc.c. Step 25. Step 25.d.d.PZR level - PZR level - GREATER THAN 14%GREATER THAN 14%d.d.Perform the following:Perform the following:1)1)IFIF normal PZR spray is normal PZR spray isavailable, available, THENTHEN try to stabilize try to stabilizeRCS pressure.RCS pressure.2)2) Step 24a. Step 24a.e.e. 1BwEP ES-1.1, 1BwEP ES-1.1,SI TERMINATION, Step 1SI TERMINATION, Step 1Page 19 of 42Page 19 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.Narrow range levels - Narrow range levels - GREATERGREATERa.a.Maintain total feed flowMaintain total feed flowTHAN 10%THAN 10%greater than greater than 500 GPM500 GPM until untilnarrow range level isnarrow range level isgreater than greater than 10%10% in at in atleast one SG.least one SG.b.b.Control feed flow to maintainControl feed flow to maintainb.b.IFIF narrow range level in narrow range level innarrow range levels - narrow range levels - BETWEENBETWEENany SG continues to riseany SG continues to rise10% AND 50%10% AND 50%in an uncontrolled manner, in an uncontrolled manner, THENTHEN 1BwEP-3, 1BwEP-3,STEAM GENERATOR TUBESTEAM GENERATOR TUBERUPTURE, Step 1.RUPTURE, Step 1.CAUTIONCAUTIONIf offsite power is lost after SIIf offsite power is lost after SIreset, manual action may be requiredreset, manual action may be requiredto restart RH and SI pumps.to restart RH and SI pumps.IFIF bypass permissive panel is bypass permissive panel isenergized and SI has energized and SI has NOTNOTa.a.Depress both SI resetDepress both SI resetreset, reset, pushbuttonspushbuttonsTHENTHEN reset SI per reset SI per 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOMb.b.Verify SI ACTUATED permissiveVerify SI ACTUATED permissiveINACCESSIBILITY, ATTACHMENTINACCESSIBILITY, ATTACHMENTlight - light - NOT LITNOT LITE.E.c.c.Verify AUTO SI BLOCKEDVerify AUTO SI BLOCKEDpermissive light - permissive light - LITLITReset per 1BwOA PRI-5,Reset per 1BwOA PRI-5,CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY,CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY,Phase APhase AATTACHMENT E.ATTACHMENT E.Phase B if necessaryPhase B if necessaryPage 20 of 42Page 20 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.Check SACs - Check SACs - ANY RUNNINGANY RUNNINGa.a.Dispatch an operator toDispatch an operator tostart one SAC per BwOPstart one SAC per BwOPSA-1, STARTUP ANDSA-1, STARTUP ANDOPERATION OF A STATION AIROPERATION OF A STATION AIRCOMPRESSOR.COMPRESSOR.Continue with Step 30Continue with Step 30(Next Page). OBSERVE(Next Page). OBSERVECAUTION PRIOR TO STEP 30.CAUTION PRIOR TO STEP 30.WHENWHEN a SAC is running, a SAC is running, THENTHEN do Step 29b. do Step 29b.b.b.Open instrument air CNMT isolOpen instrument air CNMT isolvalves:valves:1)1)1IA0651IA0651)1)Locally open the valveLocally open the valveusing a pneumatic jumperusing a pneumatic jumper(391' CWA P-39).(391' CWA P-39).Continue with Step 30Continue with Step 30(Next Page). OBSERVE(Next Page). OBSERVECAUTION PRIOR TOCAUTION PRIOR TOSTEP 30.STEP 30.WHENWHEN 1IA065 is open, 1IA065 is open, THENTHEN open 1IA066. open 1IA066.2)2)1IA0661IA066Page 21 of 42Page 21 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDCAUTIONCAUTIONRCS pressure should be monitored. RCS pressure should be monitored. If RCS pressure drops in anIf RCS pressure drops in anuncontrolled manner to less thanuncontrolled manner to less than325 PSIG325 PSIG, the RH pumps must be, the RH pumps must bemanually restarted to supply watermanually restarted to supply waterto the RCS.to the RCS.a.a.Check RCS pressure:Check RCS pressure:1)1)Pressure - Pressure - GREATER THANGREATER THAN1)1) 1BwEP-1, LOSS OF 1BwEP-1, LOSS OF325 PSIG325 PSIGREACTOR OR SECONDARYREACTOR OR SECONDARYCOOLANT, Step 1.COOLANT, Step 1.2)2)Pressure - Pressure - STABLE OR RISINGSTABLE OR RISING2)2) Step 31 (Next Step 31 (NextPage).Page).b.b.Stop RH pumps and place inStop RH pumps and place instandbystandbyPage 22 of 42Page 22 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.Sample all SGs for activity:Sample all SGs for activity:1)1)Open SG Blowdown Sample IsolOpen SG Blowdown Sample Isolvalves:valves:1SD005A (SG 1A)1SD005A (SG 1A)1SD005C (SG 1B)1SD005C (SG 1B)1SD005D (SG 1C)1SD005D (SG 1C)1SD005B (SG 1D)1SD005B (SG 1D)2)2)Request Chem Dept to sampleRequest Chem Dept to sampleall SGs for activityall SGs for activityb.b.Check secondary radiationCheck secondary radiationb.b. 1BwEP-3, 1BwEP-3,trends (PPC or RM-11) - trends (PPC or RM-11) - NORMALNORMALSTEAM GENERATOR TUBESTEAM GENERATOR TUBEFOR PLANT CONDITIONSFOR PLANT CONDITIONS::RUPTURE, Step 1.RUPTURE, Step 1.SJAE/Gland Steam Exhaust GasSJAE/Gland Steam Exhaust Gasradiation:radiation:1PR27J Grid 1 1PS1271PR27J Grid 1 1PS127SG Blowdown Liquid radiation:SG Blowdown Liquid radiation:1PR08J Grid 1 1PS1081PR08J Grid 1 1PS108Main Steamline radiation:Main Steamline radiation:Main Steamline 1A, MSIVMain Steamline 1A, MSIVRm:Rm:1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AA1221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AA1221RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AA1231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AA123Main Steamline 1B, MSIVMain Steamline 1B, MSIVRm:Rm:1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AB2221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AB2221RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AB2231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AB223Main Steamline 1C, MSIVMain Steamline 1C, MSIVRm:Rm:1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AC3221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AC3221RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AC3231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AC323Main Steamline 1D, MSIVMain Steamline 1D, MSIVRm:Rm:1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AD4221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AD4221RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AD4231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AD423c.c.Secondary activity samples -Secondary activity samples -c.c. 1BwEP-3, 1BwEP-3,NORMAL (WHEN AVAILABLE)NORMAL (WHEN AVAILABLE)STEAM GENERATOR TUBESTEAM GENERATOR TUBERUPTURE, Step 1.RUPTURE, Step 1.Page 23 of 42Page 23 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.Check Aux Bldg radiation trendsCheck Aux Bldg radiation trendsa.a.Evaluate cause of abnormalEvaluate cause of abnormal(PPC or RM-11) - (PPC or RM-11) - NORMAL FORNORMAL FORconditions.conditions.PLANT CONDITIONSPLANT CONDITIONS::IFIF cause is loss of RCS cause is loss of RCSUnit 1 Aux Bldg vent stackUnit 1 Aux Bldg vent stackinventory outside CNMT, inventory outside CNMT, effluent (1PR28J):effluent (1PR28J):THENTHEN 1BwCA-1.2, 1BwCA-1.2,LOCA OUTSIDE CONTAINMENT,LOCA OUTSIDE CONTAINMENT,Grid 2 Beta 1PA228Grid 2 Beta 1PA228Step 1.Step 1.Grid 2 Gas Low 1PB128Grid 2 Gas Low 1PB128Grid 2 Iodine 1PC328Grid 2 Iodine 1PC328Grid 2 Gas High 1PD428Grid 2 Gas High 1PD428Unit 1 Aux Bldg vent stackUnit 1 Aux Bldg vent stackeffluent (1PR30J):effluent (1PR30J):Grid 2 Gas Low 1PA130Grid 2 Gas Low 1PA130Grid 2 Gas Med 1PB230Grid 2 Gas Med 1PB230Grid 2 Gas High 1PC330Grid 2 Gas High 1PC330Grid 2 Effluent 1PF430Grid 2 Effluent 1PF430Unit 2 Aux Bldg vent stackUnit 2 Aux Bldg vent stackeffluent (2PR28J):effluent (2PR28J):Grid 2 Beta 2PA228Grid 2 Beta 2PA228Grid 2 Gas Low 2PB128Grid 2 Gas Low 2PB128Grid 2 Iodine 2PC328Grid 2 Iodine 2PC328Grid 2 Gas High 2PD428Grid 2 Gas High 2PD428Unit 2 Aux Bldg vent stackUnit 2 Aux Bldg vent stackeffluent (2PR30J):effluent (2PR30J):Grid 2 Gas Low 2PA130Grid 2 Gas Low 2PA130Grid 2 Gas Med 2PB230Grid 2 Gas Med 2PB230Grid 2 Gas High 2PC330Grid 2 Gas High 2PC330Grid 2 Effluent 2PF430Grid 2 Effluent 2PF430Step continued on next pageStep continued on next pagePage 24 of 42Page 24 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDStep 32a (continued)Step 32a (continued)ECCS cubicles:ECCS cubicles:RH/CS pump 1A CubicleRH/CS pump 1A Cubicle(1PR13J):(1PR13J):Grid 2 Beta 1PA213Grid 2 Beta 1PA213Grid 2 Gas 1PB113Grid 2 Gas 1PB113RH/CS pump 1B CubicleRH/CS pump 1B Cubicle(1PR14J):(1PR14J):Grid 2 Beta 1PA214Grid 2 Beta 1PA214Grid 2 Gas 1PB114Grid 2 Gas 1PB114RH HX 1A Cubicle (1PR15J):RH HX 1A Cubicle (1PR15J):Grid 2 Beta 1PA215Grid 2 Beta 1PA215Grid 2 Gas 1PB115Grid 2 Gas 1PB115RH HX 1B Cubicle (1PR16J):RH HX 1B Cubicle (1PR16J):Grid 2 Beta 1PA216Grid 2 Beta 1PA216Grid 2 Gas 1PB116Grid 2 Gas 1PB116CENT CHG pump 1A CubicleCENT CHG pump 1A Cubicle(1PR17J):(1PR17J):Grid 2 Beta 1PA217Grid 2 Beta 1PA217Grid 2 Gas 1PB117Grid 2 Gas 1PB117CENT CHG pump 1B CubicleCENT CHG pump 1B Cubicle(1PR18J):(1PR18J):Grid 2 Beta 1PA218Grid 2 Beta 1PA218Grid 2 Gas 1PB118Grid 2 Gas 1PB118Grid 4 Aux Bldg areaGrid 4 Aux Bldg arearadiationradiationEvaluate cause of abnormalEvaluate cause of abnormalconditions.conditions.PRT Pressure - PRT Pressure - LESS THAN 6 PSIGLESS THAN 6 PSIGPRT Level - PRT Level - LESS THAN 88%LESS THAN 88%PRT Temperature - PRT Temperature - LESS THANLESS THAN125125FFPage 25 of 42Page 25 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDa.a.4KV busses - 4KV busses - ENERGIZED BYENERGIZED BYa.a.Try to restore offsiteTry to restore offsiteOFFSITE POWEROFFSITE POWER::power to 4KV busses:power to 4KV busses:Bus 141Bus 1411)1)Consult TSO for statusConsult TSO for statusBus 142Bus 142of offsite powerof offsite powerrestoration.restoration.Bus 143Bus 143Bus 144Bus 144IFIF offsite power is offsite power isavailable, available, THENTHEN perform the perform thefollowing:following:1)1)Restore offsite power toRestore offsite power to4KV ESF busses per BwOP4KV ESF busses per BwOPAP-32, SYNCHRONIZING AAP-32, SYNCHRONIZING ASAT TO A BUS BEING FEDSAT TO A BUS BEING FEDBY A DG.BY A DG.2)2)Sync and closeSync and closeassociated 4KV NON-ESFassociated 4KV NON-ESFSAT feed breakers:SAT feed breakers:ACB 1432ACB 1432ACB 1442 ACB 1442 Step continued on next pageStep continued on next pagePage 26 of 42Page 26 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDStep 34 (continued)Step 34 (continued)IFIF offsite power can offsite power can NOTNOTbe restored to 4KV NON-ESFbe restored to 4KV NON-ESFbus(es), bus(es), THENTHEN crosstie the NON-ESF crosstie the NON-ESFbus(es) to the ESF bus(es)bus(es) to the ESF bus(es)as follows:as follows:1)1)Dispatch an operator toDispatch an operator toplace the followingplace the followingswitch in PULL OUTswitch in PULL OUT(Panel 0VS03J, 3rd floor(Panel 0VS03J, 3rd floorHVAC room):HVAC room):Service Bldg chillerService Bldg chiller0A (Bus 144 only)0A (Bus 144 only)2)2)Place feeder breakersPlace feeder breakersfor affected 4KV NON-ESFfor affected 4KV NON-ESFbus(es) in PULL OUT:bus(es) in PULL OUT:ooBus 143:Bus 143:ACB 1431ACB 1431ACB 1432ACB 1432ooBus 144:Bus 144:ACB 1441ACB 1441ACB 1442ACB 14423)3)Open all 480 voltOpen all 480 volttransformer HIGH sidetransformer HIGH sideand LOW side breakersand LOW side breakersfor affected bus(es).for affected bus(es).4)4)Open all 480 volt PZROpen all 480 volt PZRheater transformer LOWheater transformer LOWside breakers at 1PM05Jside breakers at 1PM05Jfor affected bus(es).for affected bus(es).5)5)Reset SI recirc sumpReset SI recirc sumpisol valves ifisol valves ifnecessary:necessary:1SI8811A1SI8811A1SI8811B1SI8811BStep continued on next pageStep continued on next pagePage 27 of 42Page 27 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDStep 34 (continued)Step 34 (continued)6)6)Place non-runningPlace non-runningequipment in PULL OUT onequipment in PULL OUT onaffected bus(es):affected bus(es):Cnmt chillersCnmt chillersWS pumpsWS pumpsSACsSACs7)7)Close affected bus(es)Close affected bus(es)NON-ESF to ESF crosstieNON-ESF to ESF crosstiebreaker:breaker:ooACB 1411ACB 1411ooACB 1421 ACB 1421 Load equipment asLoad equipment asnecessary while continuingnecessary while continuingwith Step 34b (Page 29):with Step 34b (Page 29):1)1)Restore PZR heaters:Restore PZR heaters:a)a)Close 4KV PZR heaterClose 4KV PZR heatertransformer HIGH sidetransformer HIGH sidebreakers.breakers.b)b)Close 480 volt PZRClose 480 volt PZRheater transformerheater transformerLOW side breakers atLOW side breakers at1PM05J.1PM05J.2)2)Energize Unit 1 480 voltEnergize Unit 1 480 voltbusses.busses.3)3)Start a WS pump per Start a WS pump per BwOP WS-1, STARTUP ANDBwOP WS-1, STARTUP ANDOPERATION OF WS SYSTEM,OPERATION OF WS SYSTEM,if necessary.if necessary.Step continued on next pageStep continued on next pagePage 28 of 42Page 28 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDStep 34 (continued)Step 34 (continued)4)4)Restore air, ifRestore air, ifnecessary:necessary:a)a)Start a SAC per BwOPStart a SAC per BwOPSA-1, STARTUP ANDSA-1, STARTUP ANDOPERATION OF AOPERATION OF ASTATION AIRSTATION AIRCOMPRESSOR.COMPRESSOR.b)b)Restore IA to CNMT:Restore IA to CNMT:1)1)Open 1IA065.Open 1IA065.2)2)Open 1IA066.Open 1IA066.5)5)Start other NON-ESFStart other NON-ESFloads as necessary:loads as necessary:ooBoric acid transferBoric acid transferpumppumpooSFP cooling pumpSFP cooling pumpooAir side seal oilAir side seal oilpumppumpooHydrogen side sealHydrogen side sealoil pumpoil pumpIFIF any 4KV ESF bus is any 4KV ESF bus is NOTNOTenergized, energized, THENTHEN perform 1BwOA ELEC-3, perform 1BwOA ELEC-3,LOSS OF 4KV ESF BUS asLOSS OF 4KV ESF BUS astime permits.time permits.b.b.Stop any unloaded DG and placeStop any unloaded DG and placein standby per BwOP DG-12,in standby per BwOP DG-12,DIESEL GENERATOR SHUTDOWNDIESEL GENERATOR SHUTDOWN
~~~ -END- -END-Page 29 of 42Page 29 of 42 (NORMAL)(NORMAL)(NORMAL)
Page 30 of 42Page 30 of 42 ATTACHMENT AATTACHMENT AA.A.Determination of Post-Accident RCS SubcoolingDetermination of Post-Accident RCS Subcooling::1)1)Check CNMT for Check CNMT for ADVERSEADVERSE conditions: conditions:ooCNMT pressure greater than CNMT pressure greater than 5 PSIG5 PSIG..-OR--OR-ooCNMT radiation greater than CNMT radiation greater than 101055 R/HR R/HR::oo1RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS1201RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS120oo1RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS1211RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS1212)2)Check RCS pressure on wide range pressure instrumentsCheck RCS pressure on wide range pressure instruments(1PI-403A/405).(1PI-403A/405).3)3)Determine temperature for RCS pressure using Determine temperature for RCS pressure using NORMALNORMAL or or ADVERSEADVERSECNMT curves per FIGURE 1BwEP 0-1 (Previous Page).CNMT curves per FIGURE 1BwEP 0-1 (Previous Page).4)4)Check average of ten highest core exit TCs from ICONIC DISPLAYCheck average of ten highest core exit TCs from ICONIC DISPLAYOROR MCB indicators (1TI-IT001/IT002). MCB indicators (1TI-IT001/IT002).5)5)If average of ten highest core exit TCs is less than temperatureIf average of ten highest core exit TCs is less than temperaturefor RCS pressure, then acceptable subcooling exists.for RCS pressure, then acceptable subcooling exists.Page 31 of 42Page 31 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 9)ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 9)BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONBALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONManually trip pump(s) andManually trip pump(s) andclose valve(s) as necessary.close valve(s) as necessary.FW pumps - FW pumps - TRIPPEDTRIPPEDIFIF any FW reg valve can any FW reg valve can NOTNOTFW isolation monitor lights -FW isolation monitor lights -be closed, be closed, LITLITTHENTHEN manually close its manually close itsassociated FW shutoff valve:associated FW shutoff valve:FW pumps discharge valves -FW pumps discharge valves -CLOSEDCLOSED::oo1FW006A (1FW510)1FW006A (1FW510)oo1FW006B (1FW520)1FW006B (1FW520)1FW002A1FW002Aoo1FW006C (1FW530)1FW006C (1FW530)1FW002B1FW002Boo1FW006D (1FW540)1FW006D (1FW540)1FW002C1FW002Ca.a.DGs - DGs - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNINGa.a.Manually start DG(s).Manually start DG(s).b.b.DGs SX valve - DGs SX valve - OPENOPEN::b.b.Manually open valve(s).Manually open valve(s).1SX169A1SX169A1SX169B1SX169Bc.c.Dispatch operator to checkDispatch operator to checkDGs operationDGs operationa.a.Unit 1 Main Transformer outputUnit 1 Main Transformer outputa.a.Manually open breaker(s).Manually open breaker(s).breakers - breakers - OPENOPEN::OCB 1-8OCB 1-8OCB 7-8OCB 7-8b.b.PMG output breaker - PMG output breaker - OPENOPENb.b.Manually open PMG outputManually open PMG outputbreaker.breaker.Page 32 of 42Page 32 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDATTACHMENT B (PG 2 OF 9)ATTACHMENT B (PG 2 OF 9)BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONBALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONa.a.Control Room outside air intakeControl Room outside air intakea.a.Locally verify theLocally verify theradiation - radiation - LESS THAN HIGHLESS THAN HIGHfollowing fans arefollowing fans areALARM SETPOINTALARM SETPOINT::TRIPPED:TRIPPED:Control Room Outside AirControl Room Outside Air1)1)Control Room officesControl Room officesIntake 0A:Intake 0A:HVAC Panel 0VV01JHVAC Panel 0VV01J(451' K24):(451' K24):0PR31J Grid 2 0PA2310PR31J Grid 2 0PA2310PR31J Grid 2 0PB1310PR31J Grid 2 0PB1310VV01CA, Supply Fan0VV01CA, Supply Fan0PR31J Grid 2 0PC3310PR31J Grid 2 0PC331OAOA0PR32J Grid 2 0PA2320PR32J Grid 2 0PA2320VV01CB, Supply Fan0VV01CB, Supply Fan0PR32J Grid 2 0PB1320PR32J Grid 2 0PB132OBOB0PR32J Grid 2 0PC3320PR32J Grid 2 0PC3322)2)Laboratory HVAC PanelLaboratory HVAC PanelControl Room Outside AirControl Room Outside Air0VL01J (426' M10):0VL01J (426' M10):Intake 0B:Intake 0B:0VL02CA, Fume Hood0VL02CA, Fume Hood0PR33J Grid 2 0PA2330PR33J Grid 2 0PA233Exhaust Fan OAExhaust Fan OA0PR33J Grid 2 0PB1330PR33J Grid 2 0PB1330VL02CB, Fume Hood0VL02CB, Fume Hood0PR33J Grid 2 0PC3330PR33J Grid 2 0PC333Exhaust Fan OBExhaust Fan OB0PR34J Grid 2 0PA2340PR34J Grid 2 0PA2340PR34J Grid 2 0PB1340PR34J Grid 2 0PB1343)3)Radwaste Building HVACRadwaste Building HVAC0PR34J Grid 2 0PC3340PR34J Grid 2 0PC334Panel 0VW01JPanel 0VW01J(433' J45 SB):(433' J45 SB):0VW03CA, Exhaust Fan0VW03CA, Exhaust FanOAOA0VW03CB, Exhaust Fan0VW03CB, Exhaust FanOBOBStep continued on next pageStep continued on next pagePage 33 of 42Page 33 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDATTACHMENT B (PG 3 OF 9)ATTACHMENT B (PG 3 OF 9)BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONBALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONStep 4 (continued)Step 4 (continued)b.b.Operating VC train equipment -Operating VC train equipment -b.b.Manually start equipmentManually start equipmentRUNNINGRUNNING::for VC train in operation.for VC train in operation.ooTrain A:Train A:IFIF equipment can equipment can NOTNOT be bestarted, started, Supply fan 0ASupply fan 0ATHENTHEN perform the following perform the followingunless attempts haveunless attempts haveReturn fan 0AReturn fan 0Aalready failed to startalready failed to startboth trains:both trains:M/U fan 0AM/U fan 0Aa)a)Reset Control Room VentReset Control Room VentChilled water pump 0AChilled water pump 0AIsolation.Isolation.MCR chiller 0AMCR chiller 0Ab)b)Stop inoperable VC trainStop inoperable VC trainequipment.equipment.ooTrain B:Train B:c)c)Start opposite VC trainStart opposite VC trainSupply fan 0BSupply fan 0Bequipment.equipment.Return fan 0BReturn fan 0Bd)d) Step 4b. Step 4b.M/U fan 0BM/U fan 0BChilled water pump 0BChilled water pump 0BMCR chiller 0BMCR chiller 0Bc.c.Operating VC train dampers -Operating VC train dampers -c.c.Perform the followingPerform the followingALIGNEDALIGNED::unless attempts haveunless attempts havealready failed to startalready failed to startM/U fan outlet damper - M/U fan outlet damper - NOTNOTand align both trains:and align both trains:FULLY CLOSEDFULLY CLOSED::1)1)Reset Control Room VentReset Control Room Ventoo0VC24Y (Train A)0VC24Y (Train A)Isolation.Isolation.oo0VC08Y (Train B)0VC08Y (Train B)2)2)Stop inoperable VC trainStop inoperable VC trainVC train M/U filter light -VC train M/U filter light -equipment.equipment.LITLIT3)3)Start opposite VC trainStart opposite VC trainequipment.equipment.4)4) Step 4b. Step 4b.Step continued on next pageStep continued on next pagePage 34 of 42Page 34 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDATTACHMENT B (PG 4 OF 9)ATTACHMENT B (PG 4 OF 9)BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONBALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONStep 4 (continued)Step 4 (continued)d.d.Operating VC train M/U filterOperating VC train M/U filterd.d.Place M/U Fltr InletPlace M/U Fltr Inletaligned to - aligned to - NORMAL TBNORMAL TB::Select switch to Select switch to NORMAL TBNORMAL TBposition.position.ooTrain A:Train A:0VC25Y - 0VC25Y - OPENOPEN0VC312Y - 0VC312Y - CLOSEDCLOSEDooTrain B:Train B:0VC09Y - 0VC09Y - OPENOPEN0VC313Y - 0VC313Y - CLOSEDCLOSEDe.e.* Operating VC train Charcoal* Operating VC train Charcoale.e.Place RECIRC CharcoalPlace RECIRC CharcoalAbsorber - Absorber - ALIGNEDALIGNED::Absorber selector switchAbsorber selector switchto the to the ABSORBABSORB position. position.ooTrain A:Train A:IFIF Charcoal Absorber is Charcoal Absorber is0VC43Y bypass damper -0VC43Y bypass damper -still still NOTNOT aligned, aligned, CLOSEDCLOSEDTHENTHEN perform the following perform the followingunless attempts haveunless attempts have0VC21Y inlet damper - 0VC21Y inlet damper - OPENOPENalready failed to startalready failed to startand align both trains:and align both trains:0VC22Y outlet damper -0VC22Y outlet damper -OPENOPEN1)1)Reset Control Room VentReset Control Room VentIsolation.Isolation.-OR--OR-2)2)Stop inoperable VC trainStop inoperable VC trainooTrain B:Train B:equipment.equipment.0VC044Y bypass damper -0VC044Y bypass damper -3)3)Start opposite VC trainStart opposite VC trainCLOSEDCLOSEDequipment.equipment.0VC05Y inlet damper - 0VC05Y inlet damper - OPENOPEN4)4) Step 4b Step 4b(Previous Page).(Previous Page).0VC06Y outlet damper -0VC06Y outlet damper -OPENOPENf.f.Control Room pressure Control Room pressure f.f.Restore MCR pressure perRestore MCR pressure per(MCR/TB DP, OPDI-VC038) -(MCR/TB DP, OPDI-VC038) -BwOP VC-14, MAIN CONTROLBwOP VC-14, MAIN CONTROLGREATER THAN +0.125" HGREATER THAN +0.125" H22OOROOM PRESSURE LOW, whileROOM PRESSURE LOW, whilecontinuing with thiscontinuing with thisprocedure.procedure.Page 35 of 42Page 35 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDATTACHMENT B (PG 5 OF 9)ATTACHMENT B (PG 5 OF 9)BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONBALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION~~~a.a.* Inaccessible Filter Plenums -* Inaccessible Filter Plenums -a.a.Align plenums and startAlign plenums and startTWO PLENUMS ALIGNED WITHTWO PLENUMS ALIGNED WITHfans as necessary per fans as necessary per CHARCOAL ABSORBERS ON-LINECHARCOAL ABSORBERS ON-LINE::BwOP VA-5, AUX BLDGBwOP VA-5, AUX BLDGCHARCOAL BOOSTER FANCHARCOAL BOOSTER FANooPlenum A:Plenum A:OPERATION.OPERATION.ooFan 0VA03CA - Fan 0VA03CA - RUNNINGRUNNING::0VA022Y Flow Cont0VA022Y Flow Contdamper - damper - NOT FULLYNOT FULLYCLOSEDCLOSED0VA020Y Byp Isol0VA020Y Byp Isoldamper - damper - CLOSEDCLOSED-OR--OR-ooFan 0VA03CB - Fan 0VA03CB - RUNNINGRUNNING::0VA023Y Flow Cont0VA023Y Flow Contdamper - damper - NOT FULLYNOT FULLYCLOSEDCLOSED0VA436Y Byp Isol0VA436Y Byp Isoldamper - damper - CLOSEDCLOSEDStep continued on next pageStep continued on next pagePage 36 of 42Page 36 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDATTACHMENT B (PG 6 OF 9)ATTACHMENT B (PG 6 OF 9)BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONBALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONStep 5a (continued)Step 5a (continued)ooPlenum B:Plenum B:ooFan 0VA03CC - Fan 0VA03CC - RUNNINGRUNNING::0VA024Y Flow Cont0VA024Y Flow Contdamper - damper - NOT FULLYNOT FULLYCLOSEDCLOSED0VA021Y Byp Isol0VA021Y Byp Isoldamper - damper - CLOSEDCLOSED-OR--OR-ooFan 0VA03CD - Fan 0VA03CD - RUNNINGRUNNING::0VA025Y Flow Cont0VA025Y Flow Contdamper - damper - NOT FULLYNOT FULLYCLOSEDCLOSED0VA437Y Byp Isol0VA437Y Byp Isoldamper - damper - CLOSEDCLOSEDooPlenum C:Plenum C:ooFan 0VA03CE - Fan 0VA03CE - RUNNINGRUNNING::0VA067Y Flow Cont0VA067Y Flow Contdamper - damper - NOT FULLYNOT FULLYCLOSEDCLOSED0VA052Y Byp Isol0VA052Y Byp Isoldamper - damper - CLOSEDCLOSED-OR--OR-ooFan 0VA03CF - Fan 0VA03CF - RUNNINGRUNNING::0VA072Y Flow Cont0VA072Y Flow Contdamper - damper - NOT FULLYNOT FULLYCLOSEDCLOSED0VA438Y Byp Isol0VA438Y Byp Isoldamper - damper - CLOSEDCLOSEDPage 37 of 42Page 37 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDATTACHMENT B (PG 7 OF 9)ATTACHMENT B (PG 7 OF 9)BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONBALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION(((a.a.FHB Charcoal Absorbers - FHB Charcoal Absorbers - ONEONEa.a.Align one train per Align one train per TRAIN ALIGNEDTRAIN ALIGNED::BwOP VA-6, FUEL HANDLINGBwOP VA-6, FUEL HANDLINGBLDG CHARCOAL BOOSTER FANBLDG CHARCOAL BOOSTER FANooTrain A:Train A:OPERATION.OPERATION.Fan 0VA04CA - Fan 0VA04CA - RUNNINGRUNNING0VA060Y Charcoal Absorber0VA060Y Charcoal AbsorberInlet Isol damper - Inlet Isol damper - OPENOPEN0VA057Y Filter Flow0VA057Y Filter FlowControl damper - Control damper - NOT FULLYNOT FULLYCLOSEDCLOSED0VA051Y Charcoal Absorber0VA051Y Charcoal AbsorberBypass Isolation damper -Bypass Isolation damper -CLOSEDCLOSED-OR--OR-ooTrain B:Train B:Fan 0VA04CB - Fan 0VA04CB - RUNNINGRUNNING0VA055Y Charcoal Absorber0VA055Y Charcoal AbsorberInlet Isolation damper -Inlet Isolation damper -OPENOPEN0VA062Y Filter Flow0VA062Y Filter FlowControl damper - Control damper - NOT FULLYNOT FULLYCLOSEDCLOSED0VA435Y Charcoal Absorber0VA435Y Charcoal AbsorberBypass Isolation damper -Bypass Isolation damper -CLOSEDCLOSEDPage 38 of 42Page 38 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDATTACHMENT B (PG 8 OF 9)ATTACHMENT B (PG 8 OF 9)BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONBALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION)))Trip all running HD pumpsTrip all running HD pumpsShutdown FW pumps as necessaryShutdown FW pumps as necessaryper:per:ooBwOP FW-2, SHUTDOWN OF ABwOP FW-2, SHUTDOWN OF ATURBINE DRIVEN MAIN FEEDWATERTURBINE DRIVEN MAIN FEEDWATERPUMPPUMPooBwOP FW-8, SHUTDOWN OF ABwOP FW-8, SHUTDOWN OF AMOTOR DRIVEN MAIN FEEDWATERMOTOR DRIVEN MAIN FEEDWATERPUMPPUMPShutdown all unnecessary CD/CBShutdown all unnecessary CD/CBpumps per BwOP CD/CB-2,pumps per BwOP CD/CB-2,CONDENSATE/CONDENSATE BOOSTERCONDENSATE/CONDENSATE BOOSTERSYSTEM SHUTDOWNSYSTEM SHUTDOWNShutdown all unnecessary CWShutdown all unnecessary CWpumps per BwOP CW-2,pumps per BwOP CW-2,CIRCULATING WATER PUMP/SYSTEMCIRCULATING WATER PUMP/SYSTEMSHUTDOWNSHUTDOWNPage 39 of 42Page 39 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDATTACHMENT B (PG 9 OF 9)ATTACHMENT B (PG 9 OF 9)BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONBALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION+++a.a.Locally verify SFP level isLocally verify SFP level isa.a.IFIF SFP level drops to the SFP level drops to thegreater than 420' ELEV (20 FTgreater than 420' ELEV (20 FT420' ELEV, 420' ELEV, above top of fuel)above top of fuel)THENTHEN makeup to the SFP per makeup to the SFP per::ooBwOP FC-11, SPENT FUELBwOP FC-11, SPENT FUELPOOL LEVEL ADJUSTMENTPOOL LEVEL ADJUSTMENToo1BwOA REFUEL-2, REACTOR1BwOA REFUEL-2, REACTORCAVITY OR SPENT FUELCAVITY OR SPENT FUELPOOL UNCONTROLLED LEVELPOOL UNCONTROLLED LEVELLOSSLOSSb.b.Locally verify SFPLocally verify SFPb.b.IFIF SFP temperature is SFP temperature istemperature - temperature - STABLESTABLErising, rising, THENTHEN restore cooling: restore cooling:0BwOA REFUEL-3, LOSS OF0BwOA REFUEL-3, LOSS OFSPENT FUEL COOLINGSPENT FUEL COOLINGc.c.NOTIFY the STA of SFP coolingNOTIFY the STA of SFP coolingStatusStatus,,,Manual actions takenManual actions takenFailed Equipment statusFailed Equipment statusATTACHMENT B completedATTACHMENT B completed-END--END-Page 40 of 42Page 40 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 2)ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 2)MANUAL CS ACTUATIONMANUAL CS ACTUATIONa.a.CS pump RWST suction valves -CS pump RWST suction valves -a.a.Manually open valve(s).Manually open valve(s).OPENOPEN::1CS001A1CS001A1CS001B1CS001Bb.b.CS pump header isol valves -CS pump header isol valves -b.b.IFIF associated CS pump is associated CS pump isOPENOPEN::NOTNOT running, running, THENTHEN manually open the manually open the1CS007A1CS007Avalve(s).valve(s).1CS007B1CS007B IFIF associated CS pump is associated CS pump isrunning, running, THENTHEN perform the following perform the followingto open the affectedto open the affectedvalve(s):valve(s):1)1)Place CS pump(s) inPlace CS pump(s) inPULL OUT.PULL OUT.2)2)Verify CS pump(s) testVerify CS pump(s) testswitch is in NORMAL.switch is in NORMAL.3)3)Manually open theManually open thevalve(s) after thevalve(s) after the30 SECOND30 SECOND time delay. time delay.4)4)Restart CS pump(s).Restart CS pump(s).c.c.CS eductor spray additiveCS eductor spray additivec.c.Perform the following forPerform the following forvalves - valves - OPENOPEN::the affected train(s):the affected train(s):1CS019A1CS019A1)1)Place CS pump(s) testPlace CS pump(s) test1CS019B1CS019Bswitch in TEST.switch in TEST.2)2)Manually open theManually open thevalve(s).valve(s).3)3)Place CS pump(s) testPlace CS pump(s) testswitch in NORMAL.switch in NORMAL.d.d.CS eductor inlet flow controlCS eductor inlet flow controld.d.Manually open theManually open thevalves - valves - OPENOPEN::valve(s).valve(s).1CS010A1CS010A1CS010B1CS010BPage 41 of 42Page 41 of 42 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDATTACHMENT C (PG 2 OF 2)ATTACHMENT C (PG 2 OF 2)MANUAL CS ACTUATIONMANUAL CS ACTUATIONa.a.CS pumps - CS pumps - AT LEAST ONE RUNNINGAT LEAST ONE RUNNINGa.a.Locally start ONE CS pumpLocally start ONE CS pumpper 1BwOA ELEC-5,per 1BwOA ELEC-5,LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFLOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFSAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT,SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT,while continuing with thiswhile continuing with thisprocedure.procedure.-END--END-Page 42 of 42Page 42 of 42 ooCC water to RCP lostCC water to RCP lostRWST level <46%RWST level <46%(affected pumps only)(affected pumps only)-OR--OR-ooCNMT Phase B actuatedCNMT Phase B actuated-OR--OR-ooBOTH of the following conditionsBOTH of the following conditionsooCrosstie unit CSTs perCrosstie unit CSTs perexist:exist:BwOP CD-2, RAISING CSTBwOP CD-2, RAISING CST LEVEL WITH MAKEUP OR BYLEVEL WITH MAKEUP OR BYRCS pressure RCS pressure <1425 PSIG<1425 PSIGCROSSTYINGCROSSTYING -AND- -AND-ooReduce cooldown rateReduce cooldown rateHigh head SI flow indicatorHigh head SI flow indicator (1FI-917) (1FI-917) >100 GPM>100 GPM or SI or SIpump discharge flow pump discharge flow >200 GPM>200 GPM Verify operating AF pumpsVerify operating AF pumpsSX suction valves open:SX suction valves open:oo1AF006A and 1AF017A1AF006A and 1AF017A oo1AF006B and 1AF017B1AF006B and 1AF017B 666ooLevel rising in an Level rising in an Refill the day tankRefill the day tankuncontrolled manner uncontrolled manner -OR- -OR- ooAbnormal secondary radiationAbnormal secondary radiationFeed affected SG(s) betweenFeed affected SG(s) between 60 GPM60 GPM and and 80 GPM80 GPM for for10 MINUTES10 MINUTES prior to restoring prior to restoringdesired feedwater flowdesired feedwater flow IF CNMT pressure (1PR-937 or 1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) IF CNMT pressure (1PR-937 or 1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) HAS RISEN TO GREATER THAN HAS RISEN TO GREATER THAN 20 PSIG20 PSIG, THEN:, THEN: 1) Stop all RCPs1) Stop all RCPs2) Verify Group 6 CS monitor lights - 2) Verify Group 6 CS monitor lights - LITLIT3) Verify Group 6 Phase B isolation monitor lights - 3) Verify Group 6 Phase B isolation monitor lights - LITLIT4) Verify CS eductor suction flow on running pump(s) - 4) Verify CS eductor suction flow on running pump(s) - GREATER THAN 15 GPMGREATER THAN 15 GPM:: 5) Verify CS eductor additive flow on running pump(s) - 5) Verify CS eductor additive flow on running pump(s) - GREATER THAN 5 GPMGREATER THAN 5 GPM:: o Any RCP running - o Any RCP running - RCS AVERAGE TEMPERATURERCS AVERAGE TEMPERATURE STABLE AT OR TRENDING TO 557STABLE AT OR TRENDING TO 557FF -OR- -OR- o NO RCPs running - o NO RCPs running - RCS COLD LEG TEMPERATURESRCS COLD LEG TEMPERATURES STABLE AT OR TRENDING TO 557STABLE AT OR TRENDING TO 557FFMaintain total feed flow greater than Maintain total feed flow greater than 500 GPM500 GPM until narrow until narrow range level is greater than range level is greater than 10%10% in at least one SG. in at least one SG.Control feed flow to maintain narrow range levels - Control feed flow to maintain narrow range levels - BETWEEN 10% AND 50%BETWEEN 10% AND 50%IF narrow range level in any SG continues to rise in an IF narrow range level in any SG continues to rise in an uncontrolled manner, THEN GO TO 1BwEP-3. uncontrolled manner, THEN GO TO 1BwEP-3. IF RCS pressure is less than IF RCS pressure is less than 325 PSIG325 PSIG, , THEN GO TO 1BwEP-1. THEN GO TO 1BwEP-1. Stop RH pumps and place in standby if:Stop RH pumps and place in standby if: 1) RCS pressure - 1) RCS pressure - GREATER THAN 325 PSIGGREATER THAN 325 PSIG ANDAND2) RCS pressure - 2) RCS pressure - STABLE OR RISINGSTABLE OR RISING SIM-601 Page 1 of 5 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an assist NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 is in Mode 1.
- 3. The 1B D/G was manually started, and is currently supplying bus 142 (DG is only source currently feeding bus 142) for a special engineering test. The test is now complete. 4. Breaker 1424 is closed to prevent equipment sequencing onto bus 142 INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The US has directed you to synchronize SAT 142
-2 back to the 1B D/G per BwOP AP
-32. 2. Do NOT place the 1B EDG in the Manual Emergency Mode.
SIM-601 Page 2 of 5 TASK TITLE:
Synchronize a SAT to a Bus Being Fed by an Emergency Diesel Generator JPM No.: SIM-601 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4D.AP-03 K&A No.: 062000A4.07 TASK No.: R-AP-013, Sync. SAT to bus fed by D/G K&A IMP: 3.1/3.1
EVALUATOR:
DAT E:
The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 5, 6 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 19 MINUTES
CRITICAL TIME:
NA EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
MATERIALS:
- 1. BwOP AP-32, Rev. 5.
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Correctly synchronize SAT 142
-2 to a bus being fed by the 1B D/G.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an assist NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 is in Mode 1.
- 3. The 1B D/G was manually started, and is currently supplying bus 142 (DG is only source currently feeding bus 142) for a special engineering test. The test is now complete.
- 4. Breaker 1424 is closed to prevent equipment sequencing onto bus 142
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The US has directed you to synchronize SAT 142
-2 back to the 1B D/G per BwOP AP
-32. 2. Do NOT place the 1B EDG in the Manual Emergency Mode.
SIM-601 Page 3 of 5 RECORD START TIME Note: Provide a copy of BwOP AP
-32 to the examinee.
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 1. Refer to BwOP AP
-32. CUE: All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions have been met.
Open BwOP AP
-32. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. Place the 1B D/G in the "Manual Emergency Mode".
Note: This step is optional per the note prior to step 1 of the procedure.
VERIFY/PLACE the 1B D/G in the "Manual Emergency Mode" as follows:
o PLACE the Emergency Mode Control Switch to the MAN EMERG position.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 3. Verify the 1B D/G is in the Droop mode of operation.
CUE: When asked, breaker 2424 C/S is in the PULL TO LOCK position.
VERIFY/PLACE 1B D/G in the Droop Mode of operation as follows:
VERIFY ACB 2424 Control switch is in PULL to LOCK position. o TURN the ACB 1424 Synchroscope Switch to ON.
o CLOSE ACB 1424 to place the 1B D/G in the Droop
Mode. o TURN the ACB 1424 Synchroscope Switch to OFF.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 4. Verify 1B D/G is operating properly.
VERIFY 1B D/G is operatin g
properly as follows:
1B D/G frequency is approximately 60 hz.
1B D/G voltage is approximately 4160 volts.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
SIM-601 Page 4 of 5 *5. Prepare 1B D/G for parallel operation with SAT 142
-2. Prepare 1B D/G for parallel operations as follows:
TURN ACB 1422 Synchroscope Switch ON.
USING the 1B D/G voltage adjust control, adjust the "RUNNING" voltage slightly HIGHER than the "INCOMING" voltage (0
-4 volts). o VERIFY the same voltage on
'AB', 'BC', and 'CA' with the 1B D/G Voltmeter selector switch. USING the 1B D/G governor adjust control, ADJUST generator speed such that the synchroscope is rotating slowly in the SLOW direction.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *6. Parallel the 1B D/G to SAT 142
-2. Parallel the 1B D/G to SAT 142
-2 as follows:
When the synchroscope is slightly before the 12 o'clock position, CLOSE ACB 1422.
o VERIFY the synchroscope has LOCKED IN at the 12 o'clock position.
o TURN the synchroscope switch for ACB 1422 to OFF.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 7. Restore breaker positions.
CUE: When asked, ACB 2424 is in after trip.
Restore breaker positions as follows:
OPEN ACB 1424 PLACE ACB 2424 in AFTER TRIP. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 8. Unload 1B D/G per BwOP DG
-12.
CUE: The US will direct another NSO to unload the 1B D/G. Refer to BwOP DG
-12 to unload 1B D/G. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME
COMMENTS:
SIM-601 Page 5 of 5 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM
-601 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE(S): Any 'At Power' IC.
MALFUNCTION #'S: N/A COMMENTS: 1. Swap to 1B SX pump to put load on Bus 142.
- 2. Place 1B D/G auto recluse circuit arm switch in SURV TEST.
- 3. Start 1B D/G and sync to grid.
- 4. Load 1B D/G until SAT feed amps = 0.
- 5. Close 1424.
- 6. Open 1422.
- 7. Turn on 1422 synchroscope and adjust 1B D/G speed until the synchroscope is rotating in the FAST direction.
- 8. Adjust 1B D/G voltage so "running" voltage is LOWER than "incoming" voltage.
- 9. Turn off 1422 synchroscope. Leave Synchroscope Key Switch in 1423 but OFF.
- 10. Ensure the Governor Adjuster and the Voltage Adjuster are not "set" at values that happen to be exactly what the examinee needs (i.e. the intent is to force the examinee to manipulate the controls).
BwOP AP-32 Revision 5 Continuous Use 1 SYNCHRONIZING A SAT TO A BUS BEING FED BY A DG
A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY This procedure outlines the steps necessary to parallel a SAT to a BUS being fed by a Diesel Generator.
B. REFERENCES
- 1. Station Procedures:
- a. BwOP DG-12, Diesel Generator Shutdown.
- b. BwOP DG-13, Trouble Shooting Diesel Generators.
- 2. Station Drawings:
- a. 20E-0-4001
- b. 20E-0-4000B 3. Station Commitment: 456
-103-84-0690051 Step D.5.
C. PREREQUISITES
- 1. The diesel generator is running and feeding its respective bus.
- 2. Diesel generator control MODE switch in REMOTE.
- 3. Notify Security one hour prior to energizing/de
-energizing overhead lines that intersect the PA boundary.
BwOP AP-32 Revision 5 Continuous Use 2 D. PRECAUTIONS
- 1. Continuous rating of generator is 5500 Kw.
- 2. Short term maximum (2 hours0.0833 days <br />0.0119 weeks <br />0.00274 months <br />) rating of generator is 6050 Kw.
- 3. Minimum continuous steady
-state loading on the diesel generator is 3000 Kw.
- 4. When a Diesel Generator is in the Emergency MODE and paralleled to the grid DO NOT return the Emergency MODE Speed Voltage C/S to Auto if it is currently in the Manual Emergency position. This will prevent Isochronous operation while in parallel.
- 5. Operate only ONE Emergency Diesel Generator in parallel with offsite power at any one time. This will prevent damage to more than one Diesel Generator if a fault condition develops on the grid.
E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS
- 1. Adhere to the following Generator load limits when DG is in parallel with offsite power: a. Continuous rating
- 5500 KW and 1000 KVAR. b. 2000 Hour Rating
- 5935 KW and 1000 KVAR. c. Two Hour Rating
- 6050 KW and 1000 KVAR. 2. Refer to BwOP DG-13 if diesel generator trip/trouble occurs.
BwOP AP-32 Revision 5 Continuous Use 3 F. MAIN BODY CAUTION if the Diesel Generator started due to a loss of off site power, the Diesel Generator Output Breaker may trip if the Mode Control Switch is placed in "MANUAL TEST MODE". NOTE If the diesel generator was started manually, Step 1 is not necessary. The MODE control switch may be left in auto.
NOTE Do not close in SAT Feed Breaker if a Degraded Voltage Condition
(<3990 VAC) exists on the off site power source (switchyard).
- 1. VERIFY/PLACE the Diesel Generator in "Manual Emerg MODE" to enable speed and voltage control.
- a. VERIFY/PLACE ACB 2414/2424 CONTROL Switch in the PULL TO LOCK position.
- b. TURN the ACB 1414/1424 Synchroscope Switch to "
ON ". NOTE The following step will cause the DG to shift to DROOP mode. The engine may run slower as noted by a drop in RPM and Frequency.
- c. CLOSE ACB 1414/1424 to place the Diesel Generator in the DROOP MODE.
- d. TURN the ACB 1414/1424 Synchroscope Switch to "OFF ".
BwOP AP-32 Revision 5 Continuous Use 4 F. 3. If synchronizing the SAT to the UNIT 2 ESF Bus perform the following:
- a. VERIFY/PLACE ACB 1414/1424 CONTROL Switch in the PULL TO LOCK position.
- b. TURN the ACB 2414/2424 Synchroscope Switch to "
ON ". NOTE The following step will cause the DG to shift to DROOP mode. The engine may run slower as noted by a drop in RPM and Frequency.
- c. CLOSE ACB 2414/2424 to place the Diesel Generator in the DROOP MODE. d. TURN the ACB 2414/2424 Synchroscope Switch to "OFF ". 4. VERIFY/ADJUST the diesel generator frequency to approximately 60 hz and voltage to approximately 4160 volts. 5. TURN the SAT Feed Bkr Synchroscope Switch to " ON ". 6. USING the diesel generator voltage adjust control, adjust the "RUNNING" voltage slightly HIGHER than the "INCOMING" voltage (0-4 volts). 7. VERIFY the same voltage on "AB", "BC", and "CA" with Diesel Gen Voltmeter selector switch.
- 8. USING the diesel generator governor adjust control, ADJUST generator speed such that the synchroscope is rotating slowly in the SLOW direction.
- 9. When the synchroscope is slightly before the "12 o'clock" position, CLOSE the SAT Feed Breaker.
- 10. VERIFY the synchroscope has LOCKED IN at the "12 o'clock" position.
- 11. TURN the SAT Feed Breaker Synchroscope Switch to "OFF ". 12. OPEN the ACB that was closed in step F.2.c./3.c.
- 13. VERIFY/PLACE ACB CONTROL Switches for all breakers in steps F.2.a. and F.3.a. to the AFTER TRIP position.
- 14. UNLOAD the diesel generator per BwOP DG-12. (Final)
SIM-707 Page 1 of 4 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an extra NSO.
- 2. Both units are at full power with all systems normal for current plant conditions.
- 3. System Engineering is preparing to perform the incore detector operability surveillance, and needs the
Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor audible alarm disabled.
INITIATING CUES:
The US has directed you to disable the audible alarm of the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor for Unit 1 per BwOP IC
-9, step F.1.a.
SIM-707 Page 2 of 4 TASK TITLE:
Operate a Rad Monitor (Disable Incore Seal Table Monitor Audible Alarm)
JPM No.: SIM-707 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4C.AR-03 K&A No.: 073000A4.02 TASK No.: R-AR-001, Operate the RM
-11 Rad K&A IMP: 3.7/3.7 Monitoring System
EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 2, 3 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 9 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME:
NA EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. BwOP IC-9, Rev. 21, Movable Incore Detector Operation
- 2. TRM 3.3.a. Movable Incore Detectors
MATERIALS:
- 1. BwOP IC-9, Rev. 21
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Disable the audible alarm of the Incore Seal Table Radiation Monitor.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an extra NSO.
- 2. Both units are at full power with all systems normal for current plant conditions.
- 3. System Engineering is preparing to perform the incore detector operability surveillance and needs the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor audible alarm disabled.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The US has directed you to disable the audible alarm of the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor for Unit 1 per BwOP IC-9, step F.1.a.
SIM-707 Page 3 of 4 RECORD START TIME PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 1. Refer to BwOP I C-9 CUE: After the student locates correct procedure, provide a copy. All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions have been met.
Locate and open the following:
BwOP IC-9, Step F.1.a SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *2. Select 1AR014J skid on RM-11.
Channel 4303 is entered.
1AR014J has white cursor surrounding it.
-
11 keyboard as follows:
PLACE the RM
-11 in Supervisor mode.
SELECT grid 4 on the RM
-11. DEPRESS, in order, 4, 3, 0,
- 3. DEPRESS SEL.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *3. Disable the audible alarm for the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor.
Channel Item button pushed.
16 inserted, Select pushbutton pushed.
CUE: As US and Unit NSOs, acknowledge notification of expected RM
-11 alarm.
0 inserted, Enter button pushed.
RM-11 in Normal mode.
CUE: As US/NSO acknowledge report of audible alarm disabled. Disable the audible alarm for the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor as follows:
Push the CHANNEL ITEM button.
On the keypad, TYPE 16 and push the SELECT pushbutton.
o Notify US and both Unit NSOs of expected alarm on the RM
-
11 due to next step.
On the keypad, TYPE 0 and PUSH the ENTER pushbutton.
o PLACE the RM
-11 to NORMAL mode.
o Inform US/NSO audible Alarm for Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor is disabled.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME
COMMENTS:
SIM-707 Page 4 of 4 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS
JPM NO: SIM
-707 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE (S): At power with RM
-11 operating.
MALFUNCTION #'S: N/A
COMMENTS: 1. Ensure Seal Table Rad Monitor (Grid 4, 4303), is enabled by selecting Channel Item 16 and entering a '1'.
- 2. Place RM-11 on Grid 1.
- 3. Ensure RM-11 NOT in supervisory mode.
SIM-805 Page 1 of 5 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an extra NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 is in Mode 5.
- 4. A Unit 1 containment release is scheduled in anticipation of the 1PR01J outage.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit Supervisor has handed you a Containment release package G 001, completed through section D, and has directed you to perform Section E using the containment mini
-purge exhaust fan and BwOP VQ
-6 to reduce Containment pressure to between 0.0 and 0.1 psig. All previous sections of the release package have been successfully completed.
- 2. An Equipment Operator is standing by to obtain the 1FI
-VQ009 flowrate
SIM-805 Page 2 of 5 TASK TITLE:
Perform a Containment Mini
-Purge Release JPM No.: SIM-80 5 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4C.VQ-02 K&A No.: 029000 A2.03 TASK No.: R-VQ-006, Start the containment mini
-purge sys.
K&A IMP: 2.7/3.1
EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 6, 8 APPROX COMPLETION TIME:
15 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME:
NA EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. BwOP VQ-6 Rev. 21, Containment Mini Purge System Operation
- 2. RP-BR-980, Rev 12, Containment Vent And Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents
MATERIALS:
- 1. BwOP VQ-6 Containment Mini Purge System Operation
- 2. RP-BR-980, Rev 12, Containment Vent And Mini Purge Gaseous Effluen ts TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Complete Section E.2. a
-f of Containment Release Form in accordance with RP
-BR-980. 2. Correctly align and start containment mini purge system.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an extra NSO.
- 2. Unit 1 is in Mode 1.
- 4. A Unit 1 containment release is scheduled in anticipation of the 1PR01J outage.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit Supervisor has handed you a Containment release package G 001, completed through section D, and has directed you to perform Section E using the containment mini purge exhaust fan and BwOP VQ
-6 to reduce Containment pressure to between 0.0 and 0.1 psig. All previous sections of the release package have been successfully completed.
- 2. An Equipment Operator is standing by to obtain the 1FI
-VQ009 flowrate
SIM-805 Page 3 of 5 RECORD START TIME Note: Provide the examinee with a copy of RP
-BR-980 through Step D and BwOP VQ
-6. When requested by the examinee, Independent Verification has been completed.
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 1. Refer to partially completed RP
-BR-980, Section E.2 CUE: Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions are met.
Open RP-BR-980 REVIEW the applicable Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. RECORD the affected containment number.
CUE: US has initialed and dated the "SRO" blank.
Record 1 in the affected containment blank.
Initial and date "operator" blank. Request SRO initial and date "SRO" blank.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 3. RECORD the affected containment pressure.
NOTE: If examinee indicates they would use containment pressure meter on 1PM06J, inform the examinee that the meter on 1PM06J is inoperable and that the equivalent meter at 0PM02J is available (1PDI
-VP231). Record affected containment pressure in blank. Initial and date "operator" blank. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 4. Ensure HVAC requirements are still in effect.
Verify 0VA02CA or CB is running. Initial and date the "operator" blank SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 5. Refer to BwOP VQ
-6 CUE: Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions are met.
Open BwOP VQ
-6. REVIEW the applicable Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions. Determine step 8 is applicabl e. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
SIM-805 Page 4 of 5 6*. Open mini purge containment isolation valves.
At 0PM02J:
Open 1VQ005A Open 1VQ005B Open 1VQ005C SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 7. Record the time the valves were open on RP
-BR-980 step E.2.d.
Record the current time. Initial and date the "operator" blank SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 8*. Start Mini Purge Exhaust Fan.
At 0PM02J, start 1VQ05C SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 9. Record the time the fan was started on RP
-BR-980 step E.2.e.
Record the current time. Initial and date the "operator" blank SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME
COMMENTS:
SIM-805 Page 5 of 5 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM
-805 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE (S): ANY MALFUNCTION #'S: N/A COMMENTS: 1. RP-BR-980 needs to be filled out through section D.
- 2. Verify 0VA02CA or CB is running.
- 3. Raise containment pressure to
> 0.3 psig with main containment purge supply system.
- 4. Place "Release in Progress" placard on 0PM02J
BRAIDWOOD STATION PROCEDURE BwOP VQ-6 UNIT NO. REVISION NO.
21 PROCEDURE TITLE:
CONTAINMENT MINI
-PURGE SYSTEM OPERATION Rev Summary IR# / EC# (if applicable) 21 Reinstate Step F.1 clarification that was inadvertently dropped from Rev 19.
PCRA 1292723
-02 BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 1 CONTAINMENT MINI
-PURGE SYSTEM OPERATION
A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY
This procedure describes the steps required to startup and shutdown the Containment Mini-Purge System.
B. REFERENCES
- 1. Station Procedures:
- a. BwOP VQ-M1/M2, Mechanical Lineup.
- b. BwOP VQ-E1/E2, Electrical Lineup.
- c. RP-BR-980, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents.
- d. RP-BR-932, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents with 1(2)PR01J Inoperable.
- e. _BwOSR 3.6.3.2, Cnmt Ventilation 8" Purge Sup/Exh Isol Weekly Surv.
- 2. Station Drawing: M
-105, Containment Purge System.
- 3. Tech Specs:
- a. 3.6.4. b. 3.6.5. c. 3.6.3. d. 3.9.4. 4. UFSAR Sections:
- a. 9.4.9. b. 11.5.2. 5. Westinghouse PLS.
- 6. Station Commitment:
456-402-91-00100, Precaution on Spent Fuel Pool Impact.
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 2 C. PREREQUISITES
- 1. The system is lined up in accordance with BwOP VQ
-M1/M2.
- 2. The system is lined up in accordance with BwOP VQ
-E1/E2.
- 3. NOTIFY the Radiation Protection Department that this procedure is being performed and the purpose of the performance and verify that the filter will not be changed in _PR01J during release.
- 4. Either of the following may be used to perform the Containment Release:
RP-BR-980, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents (_PR01J OPERABLE).
RP-BR-932, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents with 1(2)PR01J INOPERABLE.
- 5. _PR28J must be OPERABLE if the containment release is being performed using RP-BR-932 with _PR01J INOPERABLE.
D. PRECAUTIONS
- Startup and Shutdown of the Containment Mini
-Purge System may impact Spent Fuel Pool Level if the Spent Fuel Pool is connected to the Refueling Cavity via the Transfer Canal. If the "Spent Fuel Pit Level High Low" annunciator is not operable, direct communications between the Control Room and the Spent Fuel Pool MUST be maintained until conditions stabilize.
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 3 E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS
- 1. When any system valves of Containment Mini
-Purge lines are open in MODE 1, 2, 3 and 4, in accordance with Tech Spec 3.6.3, or are open during core alterations or movement of irradiated fuel within the containment in accordance with Tech Spec 3.9.4:
- a. The valves must be capable of closing under accident conditions.
- b. The instrumentation for causing isolation of the valves must be functioning.
- c. The effluent release must be monitored and must be within regulatory limits. 2. Containment internal pressure shall be maintained between
-0.1 and +1.0 psig in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4, in accordance with Tech Spec 3.6.4.
- 3. Containment maximum temperature shall not exceed 120F in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 per Tech Spec 3.6.5.
- 4. IF Containment temperature is less than 70F with the SI Accumulators pressurized, VERIFY _BwOS SI
-1a is entered.
- 5. Refer to Attachment A of this procedure if _PR01J alarms during a containment release. (N/A if release initiated with RP
-BR-932.) 6. The following Containment Mini
-Purge valves will close upon a Containment Ventilation Isolation Signal:
- a. _VQ003, Mini
-Flow to Post LOCA Purge Isol Vlv.
- b. _VQ005A, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv.
- c. _VQ005B, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.
- d. _VQ005C, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.
- e. _VQ004A, Mini
-Flow Prg Sup Inside Isol Vlv.
- f. _VQ004B, Mini
-Flow Prg Sup Outside Isol Vlv.
- 7. All references to _BwOSR 3.6.3.2 are not applicable in Modes 5 or 6, and recording data is not required in these modes.
- 8. Containment pressure should be less than 0.3 psig prior to starting the _VQ04C, Mini-Purge Supply Fan to allow forward flow.
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 4 F. MAIN BODY CAUTION If _PR01J becomes inoperable during the release, IMMEDIATELY suspend the release. The release may still be performed if initiated with RP
-BR-932. NOTE Steps 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 can be performed independent of each other.
Steps 4 and 5: Purge the Containment with No Mini
-Purge Fans.
Steps 6 and 7: Operate Containment Mini
-Purge Supply Fans.
Steps 8 and 9: Operate Containment Mini
-Purge Exhaust Fans.
Step 10: Performs an Extended Purge of Containment (feed and bleed). 1. VERIFY either of the following is approved by the Shift Manager or designee
- (N/A if only supply fans are to be run):
RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)
RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)
NOTE If taking credit for VA Charcoal Booster and FHB Charcoal Booster Fans, then the opposite unit's VA Exhaust Fan should be shutdown to prevent a loss of flow up the applicable vent stack.
- 2. VERIFY when starting Unit 1 Containment Mini
-Purge System at least one of the following is in operation. (N/A if only supply fans are to be run).
Unit One Aux Building Exhaust Fan 0VA02CA/B.
One Lab HVAC Fume Hood Exhaust Fan, 0VL02CA/B.
Two VA Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA/B/C/D/E/F) and one FHB Charcoal Booster Fan (0VA04CA/B).
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 5 NOTE If taking credit for VA Charcoal Booster and FHB Charcoal Booster Fans, then the opposite unit's VA Exhaust Fan should be shutdown to prevent a loss of flow up the applicable vent stack.
F. 3. VERIFY when starting Unit 2 Containment Mini
-Purge System at least one of the following is in operation. (N/A if only supply fans are to be run).
Unit Two Aux Building Exhaust Fan 0VA02CC/D.
One Radwaste Building Exhaust Fan 0VW03CA/B.
Two VA Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA/B/C/D/E/F) and one FHB Charcoal Booster Fan (0VA04CA/B).
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 6 NOTE The Mini-Purge containment isolation valves will not maintain their open position unless the limit switch interlock is complete. Limit switch interlock is complete when valve indication no longer shows dual indication (only the open light is lit).
NOTE If _PR01J alarms during a containment release, PERFORM Attachment A of this procedure for _PR01J alarm response. (N/A if release was initiated with RP
-BR-932.)
F. 4. To PURGE Containment with no Mini
-Purge Fans, perform the following at 0PM02J: a. RECORD Containment initial pressure on RP-BR-980, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents or RP
-BR-932, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents with 1(2)PR01J Inoperable
.
- b. OPEN _VQ005A, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv.
- c. OPEN _VQ005B, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.
- d. OPEN _VQ005C, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.
- e. RECORD the time when valves were opened and release began on the following:
RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)
RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 7 F. 5. To SECURE/SUSPEND PURGING Containment with no Mini
-Purge Fans, perform the following at 0PM02J.
- a. CLOSE _VQ005A, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv.
- b. CLOSE _VQ005B, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.
- c. CLOSE _VQ005C, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.
- d. RECORD the time when valves were closed and Release was secured/suspended on the following:
RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)
RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)
- e. RECORD Containment final pressure on the following:
RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)
RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 8 CAUTION When any system valves of Containment Mini
-Purge lines are open in Mode 1, 2, 3 and 4, in accordance with Tech Spec 3.6.3 then:
- 1. The valves must be capable of closing under accident conditions.
- 2. The instrumentation for causing isolation of the valves must be functioning.
- 3. The effluent release must be monitored and must be within regulatory limits.
NOTE When starting _VQ04C, Cnmt Mini
-Flow Prg Supply Fan, the Control Switch must be held in the start position until the fan suction damper _VQ01Y is in the open position. The fan will not start until that interlock is satisfied.
NOTE Notify Radiation Protection to address any radiological concerns when starting Cnmt Mini
-Purge Supply when Containment Integrity is set. NOTE Before proceeding with the next step, Containment Pressure should be less than 0.3 psig to allow forward flow.
NOTE The Mini-Purge containment isolation valves will not maintain their open position unless the limit switch interlock is complete. Limit switch interlock is complete when valve indication no longer shows dual indication (only the open light is lit).
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 9 NOTE If _PR01J alarms during a containment release, PERFORM Attachment A of this procedure for _PR01J alarm response. (N/A if release initiated with RP
-BR-932.)
F. 6. To startup Cnmt Mini
-Purge Supply Fan, perform the following at 0PM02J:
- a. OPEN _VQ004A, Mini
-Flow Prg Sup Inside Isol Vlv.
- b. OPEN _VQ004B, Mini
-Flow Prg Sup Outside Isol Vlv.
- c. START _VQ04C, Cnmt Mini Flow Prg Supply Fan.
- d. MONITOR Containment pressure.
- 7. To SECURE/SUSPEND Cnmt Mini
-Purge Supply Fan, perform the following at 0PM02J:
- a. STOP _VQ04C, Cnmt Mini
-Flow Prg Supply Fan.
- b. CLOSE _VQ004A, Mini
-Flow Prg Sup Inside Isol Vlv.
- c. CLOSE _VQ004B, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Outside Isol Vlv.
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 10 CAUTION When any system valves of Containment Mini
-Purge lines are open in Mode 1, 2, 3 and 4, in accordance with Tech Spec 3.6.3 then:
- 1. The valves must be capable of closing under accident conditions.
- 2. The instrumentation for causing isolation of the valves must be functioning.
- 3. The effluent release must be monitored and must be within regulatory limits.
NOTE The Mini-Purge containment isolation valves will not maintain their open position unless the limit switch interlock is complete. Limit switch interlock is complete when valve indication no longer shows dual indication (only the open light is lit).
NOTE If _PR01J alarms during a containment release, PERFORM Attachment A of this procedure for _PR01J alarm response. (N/A if release initiated with RP
-BR-932.) F. 8. To Startup Cnmt Mini
-Purge Exhaust Fan, perform the following at 0PM02J:
- a. OPEN _VQ005A, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv.
- b. OPEN _VQ005B, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.
- c. OPEN _VQ005C, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.
- d. RECORD time valves were opened on the following:
RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)
RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)
- e. START _VQ05C, Cnmt Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Fan.
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 11 F. 8. f. RECORD start time of fan on the following:
RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)
RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)
- g. OPERATE Containment Mini
-Purge Exhaust Fan as directed by the Unit Supervisor while MONITORING the Containment pressure.
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 12 F. 9. To SECURE/SUSPEND Cnmt Mini
-Purge Exhaust Fan, perform the following at 0PM02J:
- a. STOP _VQ05C, Cnmt Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Fan.
- b. RECORD fan stop time on the following:
RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)
RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)
- c. CLOSE _VQ005A, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv.
- d. CLOSE _VQ005B, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.
- e. CLOSE _VQ005C, Mini
-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.
- f. RECORD valve closure time on the following:
RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)
RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)
- g. RECORD Containment final pressure on the following:
RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)
RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 13 F. 10. To perform an Extended Purge (feed and bleed) of Unit _ Containment, perform the following:
CAUTION Containment pressure SHALL be maintained between
- 0.1 and 1.0 psig in Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4.
- a. VERIFY/START the Cnmt Mini
-Purge Exhaust Fan per Step F.8.
NOTE Before proceeding with the next step, Containment Pressure should be less than 0.3 psig to allow forward flow.
- b. START the Cnmt Mini
-Purge Supply Fan per Step F.6.
- c. WHEN Containment Pressure reaches the desired value, STOP _VQ05C, Cnmt Mini-Flow Prg Exh Fan.
- d. OPERATE Cnmt Mini
-Purge Supply and Exhaust Fans as directed by the Unit Supervisor while monitoring Containment Pressure.
- e. SECURE/SUSPEND the Release per Steps F.7 and F.9 when necessary.
BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use 14 ATTACHMENT A
_PR01J ALARM RESPONSE DURING CONTAINMENT RELEASES NOTE This attachment should only be used if the release was initiated using RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE).
If _PR01J alarms during a containment release, PERFORM the following as applicable:
If a HIGH Alarm is received on any Channel, PERFORM the following:
- 1. SECURE the release by performing the applicable steps of this procedure.
- 2. TERMINATE the release package.
- 3. NOTIFY Rad Protection that the release has been terminated.
If an ALERT Alarm is received on any Channel, continue to CLOSELY MONITOR the containment release. (The ALERT Alarm is normally set close to the HIGH setpoint to warn the operator that prompt manual action may be required).
If a Communications, Operate, or Equipment Failure has occurred, PERFORM the following:
- 1. SUSPEND the release by performing the applicable steps of this procedure.
- 2. Determine the cause of the monitor failure per BwOP AR/PR
-11, using the RM-11 Alarm Response Guidelines.
- 3. If the alarm condition can be cleared and the monitor restored to normal while the unit is in Mode 5, 6 or defueled, then the release may be RESTARTED with Shift Supervisor permission.
- 4. If the alarm condition CANNOT be cleared, TERMINATE the release package.
(Final)
RETDAS v3.6.3 <BRA>
VSSI GASEOUS PRE
-RELEASE PERMIT REPORT
Permit Number:
2006100 Release Point:
Unit 1 Containment Purge Release Mode :
2 Batch Permit Status :
Pre-Release Comments: === RELEASE D ATA ===================================================
Release Number ..........................................
G-13-001 1(2) PB101 High Alarm Setpoint (uCi/cc)...................
6.06E-04 Alert Alarm Setpoint (uCi/cc)...................
6.06E-05 === MONITOR DATA ===================================================
1(2) PB101 Monitor Background(uCi/cc)......................
1.82E-06 Calculated Setpoint (uCi/cc)..............................
7.23E-06 === RELEASE RATE DATA ============================
======
Procedure: BwRP 6110
-13T1 Section: A.5.b.1...........
YES This package is acceptable for release using the Main Purge, Mini
-Purge, Vent Path or Post
-LOCA flowpaths.
Discharge flowrate (cfm)...................................
4.39E+04 Discharge flowrate (cc/sec)................................
2.07E+07 NG Release Rate (uCi/sec)..................................
7.48E+01 Percent of Release Rate Limit (%)..........................
7.48E-02 H-3 Release Rate (uCi/sec)...................
..............
8.50E+01 Percent of Release Rate Limit (%)..........................
8.50E-02 === LIMITS ANALYSIS ================================================
Performed by:_____
R. P. Tech
____________________ Date: _
Today_____
RETDAS v3.6.3 VSSI GASEOUS PRE
-RELEASE PERMIT REPORT
Permit Number: 2006100
=== NUCLIDE DATA
===========================================
Undiluted Rel Rate Nuclide uCi/cc uCi/sec --------- --------- --------- XE-133 4.89E-05 7.48E+03 --------- --------- --------- F&AG 5.09E-05 7.48+03 H-3 1.82E-06 8.50E+01 --------- --------- --------- H-3 1.82E-06 8.50E+01 --------- --------- --------- Total 5.27E-05 1.60E+02 RP-BR-911 Revision 6 Page 14 of 14 ATTACHMENT 8 1/2RE-PR011J ATMOSPHERIC TRITIUM CALCULATION FORM Page 1 of 1
A. Sample Information Sample Location:_____1PR11J________ RT:________
WH____________
Date On: _____today__________ Date Off: _______
today __________
Time On: _______0100________ Time Off: ________0215__________
B. Tritium Concentration Calculation
___4.10E-4____Ci/ml (150 ml) ( 200cc/min) ( 75_ min) Tritium Concentration = ___4.1E-6_____Ci/cc C. Derived Air Concentration Calculation Tritium Concentration 2 E-5 Ci/cc/DAC DAC Fraction = ___2.05E-1______
Reviewed By: _____Rad Pro Sup________/___today___ Radiation Protection/Chemistry Date
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 1 of 25 Level 1 - Continuous Use
- 1. CONTAINMENT VENT AND MINI PURGE GASEOUS EFFLUENTS 1.1. This procedure outlines the method to be used to verify that the principal gamma emitting noble gas isotopes, iodine and tritium activities in the Containment Building atmosphere are identified and quantified and dose rates established as required by Technical Specifications.
PURPOSE 2. MATERIAL AND SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 3. - NONE 3.1. PRECAUTIONS, LIMITATIONS, AND PREREQUISITES 3.1.1. If an out-of-spec condition exists (such as exceeding activity limits in step A.5.b.2., monitoring equipment failure, etc.) immediately notify the Shift Manager.
Precautions 3.2. 3.2.1. Contact Operations to determine if 1(2)PR01J is operable.
If 1(2)PR001J is inoperable, then refer to RP
-BR-932 for release from containment with 1(2)PR001J inoperable Limitations 3.2.2. The limiting condition for operation is met when the principle gamma emitting noble gases, iodine and tritium activities are identified and quantified and the dose rates released in gaseous effluents from the site to areas at or beyond the site boundary are limited to the following (exceeding activity concentrations in A.5.b.2. may indicate these dose limits need to be evaluated by chemistry):
- 1. Whole body
- less than or equal to 500 mrem/yr.
- 2. Skin - less than or equal to 3000 mrem/yr.
3.2.3. Dose rate calculations for this surveillance shall be performed in accordance with the methodology and parameters in the Offsite Dose Calculation Manual.
3.2.4. This procedure is applicable at all times and in all modes of reactor operation.
3.2.5. The Shift Manager must be notified immediately whenever the limiting condition for operation cannot be met.
3.2.6. In the event an out
-of-specification condition exists, immediately notify the Shift Manager to implement the applicable LCOAR procedure.
3.2.7. Use of "N/A" is allowed when procedure/attachment step is not required.
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 2 of 25 3.3. 3.3.1. Attachment 1, Containment Release Form, has been approved by Radiation Protection and the Shift Manager or SRO prior to commencing a containment release. Prerequisites
- 4. 4.1. OBTAIN Attachment 1, Containment Release Form. Radiation Protection SHALL assign a Release Number from Attachment 2, Containment Release Log.
MAIN BODY 4.2. Radiation Protection SHALL OBTAIN all necessary sample results and COMPLETE Section A. The form should be HAND DELIVERED to Chemistry to COMPLETE Section B, unless Section B is not applicable and Chemistry ODCM evaluation is not required. The form should be HAND DELIVERED to Operating to COMPLETE Sections C, D, E and F. 4.3. Following the completion of the release, Attachment 1 will be delivered to Chemistry
for completion of Section G. Attachment 1 will be FILED by the Chemistry Department.
- 5. 5.1. This procedure is considered complete and no further action is required when Attachment 1 is properly completed for each release and the dose limits have been met. RETURN TO NORMAL
- 6. 6.1. REFERENCES
6.1.1. Offsite
Dose Calculation Manual (ODCM).
Commitments
6.1.2. Technical
Specification Section 3.6.3, "Containment Isolation Valves".
6.1.3. Technical
Specification Section 5.5.4, "Radioactive Effluent Controls Program".
- 7. 7.1. Attachment 1
- Containment Release Form ATTACHMENTS
7.2. Attachment
2
- Containment Release Log
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 3 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 1 of 22 1(2) PR 01J Operable ___
XRelease Number _____Yes ________No (refer to RP
-BR-932) G-1 3-001Initiate Purge by Time/Date ___
___ 0700/tomorrow A. _ 1. INDICATE the Containment to be released by CHECKING the applicable Unit.
Radiation Protection/Chemistry Responsibility Unit One Containment X Unit Two Containment N/A Release Type Notes Initial Date Routine Release 1,2,3,6,7 RR First Post
-Shutdown Release toda y 1,2,3,6,7 N/A N/A Second Post Shutdown Release 1,2,3,6,7 N/A N/A Third Post Shutdown Release 1,2,3,6,7 N/A N/A Additional Non
-Continuous Post Shutdown Release 1,2,3,6,7 N/A N/A Continuous Post Shutdown Release 3,4,5,6,7 N/A N/A NOTE 1: Only one containment release can be performed with each containment noble gas, iodine and tritium analysis, unless otherwise approved by RP/Chemistry Supervision. A release is defined as the exhaust isolation valves being open for greater than one minute.
_________________________________________
Leave blank if no approval needed.
SRRS 2C.111
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 4 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 2 of 22 NOTE 2: Routine non
-outage analyzed samples are valid for a period of 48 hours2 days <br />0.286 weeks <br />0.0658 months <br /> from the time the sample is pulled. As long as the purge is initiated in the 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> window, the package is valid until the purge is terminated. Under conditions of continuous feed and bleed in modes 1
-4, a new sample must be obtained every 24 hours1 days <br />0.143 weeks <br />0.0329 months <br /> and a new release package must be prepared and used within 48 hours2 days <br />0.286 weeks <br />0.0658 months <br /> from the time each sample is pulled.
NOTE 3: Following a startup, shutdown, or thermal power change of 15% within one hour, new containment samples must be obtained and analyzed prior to a containment purge or vent. NOTE 4: During refueling or extended outages when containment integrity is broken and the containment purge system is in continuous use, the following special practices will be implemented:
A new containment release form should be completed every 30 hours1.25 days <br />0.179 weeks <br />0.0411 months <br />, not to exceed 48 hours2 days <br />0.286 weeks <br />0.0658 months <br /> during the first three days of the outage until the noble gas and tritium activity in containment has stabilized at or near LLD.
Once the noble gas and tritium concentrations are verified stabilized by trending for a period of 3 days, the purge can be run continuously without generating a new package.
To initiate a containment release package, with no expiration date, complete steps A.1. through A.6., and mark " continuous release" in the "Initiate Purge by" blank on Page 1 If significant increases in daily noble gas or tritium concentrations are noted or the purge is terminated a new containment release package must be initiated.
NOTE 5: In Modes 5, 6 and defueled only, interruptions of 4 hours0.167 days <br />0.0238 weeks <br />0.00548 months <br /> or less shall not be considered a termination of release.
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 5 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 3 of 22 NOTE 6: It is permissible to simultaneously release from multiple sources (i.e., U
-1 Containment and Gas Decay Tank) provided that each release path meets its respective
release rate limits as documented on the applicable release form.
NOTE 7: All times should be recorded in a 2400 hour0.0278 days <br />0.667 hours <br />0.00397 weeks <br />9.132e-4 months <br /> time format.
A. 2. OBTAIN the following and ATTACH to this release form:
- a. Containment noble gas activity
__ RR _/__ Initial Date today 3. VERIFY that the noble gas activity from 1(2)PB111 has not changed significantly since sampling. (NA this step if 1(2)PB111 is not in service). The 1(2) PB111 trend can be obtained from the 1(2) RM11, or Plant Parameter Displays Trend ID BRW01V_RP0076 (Unit 1) or BRW02V_RP0114 (Unit 2).
__ RR _/_ Initial Date today CAUTION If 0VA02CC/D is in operation without 0VA02CA/B in operation, VA will not provide any flow up the unit 1 stack even with the charcoal booster fans in operation. In this case, a Laboratory Fume Hood exhaust fan (0VL02CA/B) must be in operation to provide air flow.
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 6 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 4 of 22
- 4. a. For a Unit one release VERIFY at least one of the following conditions exists. (Check box next to operating component, NA this step if performing a Unit two release)
Unit one Aux Building Exhaust Fan (0VA02CA or 0VA02CB) running One Lab HVAC Fume Hood Exhaust (0VL02CA or 0VL02CB) running Two VA Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA
-F) and one FHB Charcoal Booster Fan running (0VA04CA or 0VA04CB) with NO main VA fans running (0VA02CA
-D). __ RR __/_ Initial Date today CAUTION If 0VA02CA/B is in operation without 0VA02CC/D in operation, VA will not provide any flow up the unit 2 stack even with the charcoal booster fans in operation. In this case, a Radwaste Exhaust Fan (0VW03CA/B) must be in operation to provide air flow.
A. 4. b. For a Unit two release VERIFY at least one of the following conditions exists. (Check box next to operating component, NA this step if performing a Unit one release)
Unit two Aux Building Exhaust Fan (0VA02CC or 0VA02CD) running One Radwaste Building Exhaust Fan (0VW03CA or 0VW03CB) running Two VA Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA
-F) and one FHB Charcoal Booster Fan runnning (0VA04CA or 0VA04CB) with no main VA fans running (0VA02CA
-D). _______/_______
Initial Date
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 7 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 5 of 22 NOTE: If no quantifiable noble gas peaks and no tritium are found in the containment radionuclide analysis, or if all identified noble gases and tritium are less than their respective LLD's, enter "<LLD" in steps A.5.a.1 and A.5.a.2 NOTE: If a computerized release program is available, attach the printout to this form. "N/A" may be used for steps that perform same function as computer when computer is used. 5. Release Rate and Monitor Setpoint Determination
- a. VERIFY that the release does not exceed the 10CFR20 release limits by COMPARING the calculated total Ci/cc values to their stated Ci/cc limits in Step A.5.b.
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 8 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 6 of 22 A. 5. a. 1) RECORD the total noble gas activity from the applicable isotopic below. Noble Gas Activity = ______4.44E-4________ uCi/cc RR __/__ Initial Date today 2) RECORD the tritium activity from Section B of RP
-BR-911 or RP-BR-949. Tritium Activity = _______4.1E-6_________ uCi/cc RR __/__ Initial Date today b) 1) Is the NOBLE GAS activity (step A.5.a.1) less than or equal to 5.29E-2 Ci/cc AND the TRITIUM activity (step A.5.a.2) less than or equal to 5.29E
-2 Ci/cc? [ ] YES This package is acceptable for release using the Mini
-Purge or Post
-Loca flowpaths. (N/A all of step A.5.b.2). [ ] NO Then answer the following question:
- 2) Is the NOBLE GAS activity (step A.5.a.1) less than or equal to 5.29E-1 Ci/cc AND the TRITIUM activity (step A.5.a.2) less than or equal to 5.29E
-1 Ci/cc? [ ] YES This package is acceptable for release using the Post-Loca Flowpath only. N/A all of step E.1 now.
[ ] NO THIS PACKAGE MAY BE UNACCEPTABLE FOR RELEASE. Notify Unit Supervisor. Notify Chemistry ODCM/RETS owner for further guidance.
__ RR __/_ today Initial Date
_
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 9 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 7 of 22 NOTE: The following guidance only applies to the RETDAS computer program:
The release rate calculation should initially be performed assuming a containment purge rate of 4000 cfm (1.89E6 cc/sec). This release rate is associated with the mini purge system.
If a recalculation is required (Step A.5.b.2 is answered yes) the containment purge rate used should be 400 cfm (1.89E5 cc/sec). This release rate is associated with the post-LOCA purge system.
In either case, the total noble gas or tritium release rate must be <=1E5
µCi/sec. NOTE: If the noble gas activity recorded in Step A.5.a.1. is <LLD, a value of zero should be used for the total containment activity in Step A.5.c.
NOTE: Independent verification of steps A.5.c and A.5.d is required if manual calculations are performed. If a computerized release program is used, attach the printout and "NA" Steps A.5.c. and A.5.
e d. c. The alarm setpoints will be set at a value of 50% above the containment total analyzed noble gas activity plus the current containment purge monitor gas detector [1(2)PB101] background. The current 1(2)PB101 background value can be OBTAINED from the 1(2)RM
-11, or Plant Parameter Displays Trend ID BRW01V_RP0066 (Unit 1) or BRW02V_RP0104 (Unit 2).
(Total Containment activity x 1.5) + [1(2)PB101] background =
(________________ Ci/cc x 1.5) +
____________(Step A.5.a.1)
_____ Ci/cc = ____________ Indep Verf
_____ Ci/cc __ _____/_ ____ _ ___ Initial Date Initial Date
__/______
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 1 0 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 8 of 22
- d. EVALUATE the calculated monitor setpoint as follows:
- 1) COMPARE the calculated monitor setpoint from Step A.5.c. to the baseline monitor HIGH alarm setpoint of 6.06E
-4 Ci/cc. If the calculated value is less than the baseline monitor setpoint, RECORD the baseline monitor HIGH alarm setpoint as the release setpoint. If the calculated value is greater than the baseline monitor HIGH alarm setpoint, RECORD the calculated value as the release setpoint. 1(2)PB101 HIGH Alarm Setpoint ________2) COMPARE the calculated monitor setpoint from Step A.5.c. to the baseline monitor ALERT alarm setpoint of 6.06E
-5 Ci/cc. If the calculated value is less than the baseline monitor setpoint, RECORD the baseline monitor ALERT alarm setpoint as the release setpoint. If the calculated value is greater than the baseline monitor ALERT alarm setpoint, RECORD the calculated value as the release setpoint
. __ Ci/cc 1(2)PB101 ALERT Alarm Setpoint _________ __ Ci/cc e. RECORD Release Setpoints:
1(2)PB101 HIGH Alarm Setpoint __6.06E-4ALERT Alarm Setpoint __
___ Ci/cc 6.06E-5 Indep Verf
____ Ci/cc __ RR __/ today __ N/A Initial Date Initial Date
_/______ NOTE: If any single isotope of iodine is present in the attached isotopic report(s) at greater than 1.0E
-8 Ci/cc, then Chemistry ODCM evaluation is required prior to performing this containment release. If Section B of this procedure is N/A, then forward this release package to Operations (as required by Step 4.2 in this procedure) after approval for release at Step A.7.
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 11 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 9 of 22 A. 6. REVIEW the attached iodine isotopic report(s) and SELECT one of the following:
o Any single isotope of iodine is present at greater than 1.0 E
-8 Ci/cc, Section B must be completed by Chemistry.
_______/______
Initial Date o No single isotope of iodine is present at greater than 1.0E
-8 Ci/cc, mark Section B "N/A".
_______/______
Initial Date
- 7. Radiation Protection _____APPROVAL FOR RELEASE Rad Supervisor________
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 12 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 10 of 22 B. NOTE: If detectable levels of Iodine are present in the attached isotopic report(s), then Chemistry ODCM evaluation is required for Quarterly and Annual Effluent dose limits prior to performing this containment release.
Chemistry Department Responsibility
- 1. The Chemistry ODCM evaluation is complete.
_______/______
Initial Date The following release path is required:
Post-Loca flowpath Release path as outlined in step A.5.b.
Approval for release:
Chemistry ________________________________
_______/______
Initial Date
C. NOTE: If any of the below instruments are inoperable, then refer to RETS 12.2.2.A and Table 12.2
-3 for appropriate action.
Operating Department Responsibility
- 1. PERFORM the appropriate instrumentation operability checks and required Tech Spec surveillances on applicable monitors.
- a. PERFORM _1BwOS RETS 2.2.B
-1, Unit 1_Pre-Release Source and Channel Check of Containment Purge Effluent Monitor 1PR01J (1 RE-PR001A/B/C).
___ JN _/_ Initial Date Today
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 13 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 11 of 22
- b. RECORD original Setpoint of __RE
-PR001 Gas Channel RM-11 Monitor GRID CNMT 2 _1PB101 HIGH ALARM SETPOINT ADDRESS 6.06E-4__Ci/cc PURGE EFF ALERT ALARM SETPOINT _6.06E-5___Ci/cc JN __/_ Initial Date Today NOTE: Steps c-f should be completed only if the setpoints recommended by RP in Step A.5.e. are different than the current setpoints of _RE
-PR001 Gas Channel.
NOTE: When the RM
-11 is in SUPERVISOR MODE, some actions may have serious detrimental effects on system operation. Use CAUTION and DO NOT leave the RM
-11 console unattended when it is in the SUPERVISOR MODE. If any unusual conditions occur then contact the system STE.
- c. PLACE the RM-11 console in SUPERVISOR MODE. _______/_______
Initial Date
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 14 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 12 of 22
- d. DEPRESS the CHANNEL ITEM Key. Then SELECT the High Alarm Setpoint Channel Item by KEYING in "09" and then DEPRESSING the SEL key. Grid 2 ____PB101
_______/______
Initial Date
- e. ENTER the High Alarm Setpoint for _PB101 suggested by Radiation Protection/Chemistry in section A.5.e. using the format XYZ
+ AB. (i.e. A value of 5.36E
-12 would be entered as 536
-12). High Alarm Release Setpoint Indep Verf
___PB101 ______________
_______/______
_______/______
Initial Date Initial Date
- f. ENTER the Alert Alarm Setpoint suggested by Radiation Protection/Chemistry in Section A.5.e. using the method described in steps d and e. In order to select the Alert Alarm Channel Item in step d, a "10" must be KEYED in. High Alarm Release Setpoint Indep Verf
___PB101 ______________
_______/______
_______/______
Initial Date Initial Date
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 15 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 13 of 22 D. SHIFT ENGINEER OR SRO RESPONSIBILITY
- 1. PLACE the placard "Gaseous Release in Progress" somewhere on 0PM02J where the placard will be visible. This is to ensure that for a unit 1 release an Aux. Bldg. Exhaust Fan (unit 1 side) or a Lab HVAC exhaust fan is in operation, OR for a unit 2 release an Aux. Bldg. Exhaust Fan (unit 2 side) or a Radwaste Bldg. Exhaust Fan is in operation, or for either unit , to have (2) Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA
-F) and (1) FHB Charcoal Booster Fan (0VA04CA or 0VA04CB) in operation.
_ US___/_ Initial Date today NOTE: Routine non
-outage analyzed samples are valid for a period of 48 hours2 days <br />0.286 weeks <br />0.0658 months <br />. As long as the purge is initiated in the 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> window, the package is valid until the purge is terminated NOTE: Following a startup, shutdown, or thermal power change of 15% within one hour, new containment samples must be obtained and analyzed prior to a containment purge or vent.
- 2. ENSURE sections A.7. and B.1 are signed or labeled not applicable by a member of Radiation Protection and/or Chemistry approving the release.
ENSURE the sample analyses have not expired from page 1.
__ US__/_ Initial Date today RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 16 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 14 of 22
- 3. If the release is from Containment through the Mini Purge System, then INSTRUCT the operator to start the Mini Purge System per BwOP VQ
-6 Containment Mini
-Purge Operation (The fan start section), following SE or SRO approval in Step D.2. above. ENSURE the purge is acceptable per HP calculations in Step A.5.b. for Mini
-Purge flowpath, and per Chemistry approval in Step B.1 (if required).
If the release is from Containment through the Mini Purge System for the purpose of equalizing Containment pressure with atmospheric pressure (no fans required), then INSTRUCT the Operator to perform procedure BwOP VQ
-6, Containment Mini
-Purge Operation (The venting containment section), following SE or SRO approval in Step D.2. above. ENSURE the purge is acceptable per HP calculations in Step A.5.b. for mini purge flowpath, and per Chemistry approval in Step B.1 (if required).
If the release is from Containment through the Post
-LOCA Purge System, INSTRUCT the operator to PERFORM procedure BwOP VQ
-7 following SE or SRO approval in step D.2. above. ENSURE the purge is acceptable per HP calculations in step A.5.b. for Post
-LOCA flowpath, or per Chemistry direction in Step B.1. D. 4. REVIEW information and ENSURE the form is filled out properly.
Approval for Release _______
US ________/__SE OR SRO Date today RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 17 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 15 of 22 E. Operator Responsibility
- 1. If the release is through the Containment Mini Purge System, then COMPLETE the following:
OPERATOR
- a. Affected Containment
____ ______/______ ______/______
SRO b. RECORD affected containment pressure
____psig ______/______
- c. ENSURE that the HVAC requirements of step A.4.a, or A.4.b as applicable, are still in effect.
______/______ d. Start time of purge
____ ______/______
Exhaust isolation dampers open per BwOP VQ
-6 OR Time of transfer from Release # _________________________
- e. Start time of fan
____ ______/______
- f. Purge flowrate _FI
-VQ009 ____cfm ______/______
(or estimate if flow gauge is inoperable)
- g. Stop time of fan
____ ______/______
- h. Stop time of purge
____ ______/______
Exhaust isolation dampers closed per BwOP VQ
-6 or Time of transfer to Release #___________________________
- i. Final affected containment pressure ____psig ______/______
NOTE: In Modes 5, 6 and defueled only, momentary interruptions of 4 hours0.167 days <br />0.0238 weeks <br />0.00548 months <br /> or less shall not be considered a termination of release.
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 18 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 16 of 22 E. 1. j. Purge interruptions of 4 hours0.167 days <br />0.0238 weeks <br />0.00548 months <br /> or less Stop time Start time
____ ____ ______/______
____ ____ ______/______
____ ____ ______/______
____ ____ ______/______
____ ____ ______/______
E. 2. If the release is through the Containment Mini Purge System as a VENT PATH (without a fan in operation), then COMPLETE the following:
OPERATOR SRO a. Affected Containment
____ ______/______ ______/______
Unit. b. RECORD affected Containment
____psig ______/______
Positive Pressure
- c. ENSURE that the HVAC requirements of step A.4.a, or A.4.b as applicable, are still in affect.
______/______
- d. Start time of release (Exhaust isolation valves open per BwOP VQ
-6) ____ ______/______
- e. Stop time of release (Exhaust Isolation valves closed per BwOP VQ-6) ____ ______/______
- f. Final affected Containment Pressure
____psig ______/______
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 19 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 17 of 22 E. 3. If the release is through the CNMT Post LOCA Purge System, then COMPLETE the following:
OPERATOR a. Affected Containment
____ ______/______ ______/______
SRO b. RECORD affected containment pressure
____psig ______/______
- c. ENSURE that the HVAC requirements of step A.4.a, or A.4.b as applicable, are still in affect.
______/______
- d. Start time of purge
____ ______/______
Exhaust isolation dampers open per BwOP VQ
-7 or Time of transfer from Release # _________________________
- e. Start time of fan
____ ______/______
- f. Purge flowrate _FI
-VQ093 ____cfm ______/______
(or estimate if flow gauge is inoperable)
- g. Stop time of fan
____ ______/______
- h. Stop time of purge
____ ______/______
Exhaust isolation dampers closed per BwOP VQ
-7 or Time of transfer to Release #___________________________
- i. Final affected containment pressure
____psi g ______/______
- j. Purge interruptions of 4 hours0.167 days <br />0.0238 weeks <br />0.00548 months <br /> or less Stop time Start time
____ ____ ______/______
____ ____ ______/______
____ ____ ______/______
____ ____ ______/______
____ ____ ______/______
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 20 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 18 of 22 NOTE: If this release will be continued on another release package (unit is in a continuous release mode) step E.4 and E.5 can be skipped.
E. 4. RETURN Rad Monitors for the affected release path to their baseline setpoints (This Step is NOT APPLICABLE if setpoints were not changed in step C.1.)
- a. Containment Release ( RE-PR001) 1) RETURN the HIGH ALARM Setpoint for PB101 to the baseline setpoint in Section A.5.e. (USE the method described in Section C.1.) High Alarm Baseline Setpoint Indep Verf
___PB101 ______________
_______/________
_______/________
Initial Date Initial Date
- 2) RETURN the Alert Alarm Setpoint for PB101 to the baseline Setpoint in section A.5.e. (USE the method described in Section C.1.). Alert Alarm Baseline Setpoint Indep Verf
___PB101 ______________
_______/________
_______/________
Initial Date Initial Date
- 5. REMOVE the placard "Gaseous Release in Progress" from 0PM02J.
6 RETURN this release form to the SE or SRO.
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 21 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 19 of 22 F. NOTE: Notify Radiation Protection/Chemistry that the release has been terminated if containment purge will be discontinued for more than 4 hours0.167 days <br />0.0238 weeks <br />0.00548 months <br /> AND containment integrity is broken.
- 1. REVIEW the discharge data and ENSURE that the form is filled out properly.
Discharge complete; reviewed by _________/______/_____
- 2. FORWARD this form to Chemistry Supervision.
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 22 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 20 of 22 G. 1. Actual Gaseous and TRITIUM Activity Released Chemistry Responsibility NOTE: If a computerized release program is available, attach the printout to this form and indicate "see attached" in the calculation spaces below. If manual calculations are performed, independent verification is required.
NOTE: More than one method may be used to quantify a release if the time the isolation dampers were opened differs from the time the fans were turned on or separate calculations of the same method may be performed. For example two different release paths were used with different flow rates.
- a. Differential Pressure Method
- to be used when containment integrity is not broken.
- 1) Volume of containment released Where: P i P = pressure before release
_____psig f = pressure after release
_____psig cc P P P x tcontainmen in cc E i f i7.14)(10 82.7 RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 23 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 21 of 22 G. 1. a. 2) DOCUMENT in the table below the total Ci released of each noble gas isotope and tritium.
NOTE: Ci released
= Analyzed noble gas or tritium activity (Ci/cc) x volume of containment released (cc).
Noble Gas and Tritium Isotope
__________________
___________
Ci Released
__________________
___________
__________________
___________
__________________ ___________
Indep Verf
_______/______
_______/______
Initial Date Initial Date
- b. Activity x Flowrate x Time method
- to be used when containment integrity is broken (i.e. outages) and no difference in pressure can be noted.
Fill in the chart MULTIPLYING the first 4 columns to OBTAIN activity released in Ci. DIVIDE the activity by the duration of release (seconds) to OBTAIN Ci/sec. NUCLIDE CONTAINMENT (Ci/cc) FAN FLOW (cfm) CONSTANT (cc/cf) TIME (min) ACTIVITY (Ci) RATE (Ci/s) H-3 2.83E+004 Ar-41 2.83E+004 Kr-85 2.83E+004 Kr-85M 2.83E+004 Kr-87 2.83E+004 Kr-88 2.83E+004 Xe-131M 2.83E+004 Xe-133 2.83E+004 Xe-133M 2.83E+004 Xe-135 2.83E+004 TOTA LS Indep Verf
_______/______
_______/______
Initial Date Initial Date
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 24 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 22 of 22 G. 1. c. Concentration Curve Fit Method
- if a high fan flow or high concentration was used during the release and sufficient containment atmosphere samples are available the rate change of concentration in containment may be used for a more accurate determination of released activity.
REFER to policy Memo EFF
-06 and ATTACH pertinent calculations to this form. 2. VERIFY compliance with 10CFR50 dose limits by ENTERING release data into the 10CFR50 ODCM gaseous release program per CY
-AA-170-200, Radioactive Effluent Controls Program.
RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 25 of 25 ATTACHMENT 2 Containment Release Lo g Page 1 of 1 Date Pkg. Made Release Number Release Source Date Pkg. Made Release Number Release Source
Records Retention: SRRS 2C.111
IP-204 1 TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an EO.
- 2. The Control Room has been evacuated.
- 3. 1BwOA PRI-5, Control Room Inaccessibility, is in progress.
- 4. 1CV112D is stuck closed and 1CV112E will not open locally due to the handwheel not engaging.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. You have been directed to open 1CV112E at MCC 132X4 Cubicle C2 per 1BwOA ELEC
-5. You have already obtained the jumper from the Remote Shutdown Panel.
IP-204 2 TASK TITLE:
Open RWST to CV Pump Suction Valve (1CV112E) from the MCC JPM No.: IP-204 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4.D.OA-35 K&A No.: 006000 2.4.35 TASK No.: R-OA-099, Establish Emergency Control of K&A IMP: 3.8/4.0 Safe Shutdown equipment
EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 3-6 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 31 MINUTES
CRITICAL TIME:
NA EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: PERFORM X IN PLANT X SIMULATE SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. 1BwOA ELEC
-5, Attachment C, Rev. 105
MATERIALS:
- 1. 1BwOA ELEC
-5, Attachment C, Rev. 105
- 2. PPE for electrical work
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Open 1CV112E from the MCC.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an EO.
- 2. The Control Room has been evacuated.
- 3. 1BwOA PRI-5, Control Room Inaccessibility, is in progress. 4. 1CV112D is stuck closed and 1CV112E will not open locally due to the handwheel not engaging.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. You have been directed to open 1CV112E at MCC 132X4 Cubicle C2 per 1BwOA ELEC
-5. You have already obtained the jumper from the Remote Shutdown Panel.
IP-204 3 RECORD START TIME NOTE: The student must obtain/locate high voltage protective gear (face shield, apron or approved switching coverall, gloves, hardhat, eye protection) to perform this JPM. It is NOT necessary to don the gear for the simulation.
NOTE: DO NOT ALLOW EXAMINEE TO ACTUALLY OPEN THE MCC CUBICLE DOOR. It is the intent of this JPM for the examinee to locate the MCC cubicle that the jumper will be installed in and explain how the MCC door can be opened. The evaluator should then show the examinee the attached photo of an open MCC and the remainder of the JPM will consist of the examinee explaining their actions to the evaluator using the photo.
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 1. Refer to 1BwOA ELEC
-5, Attachment C, step 1.
CUE: After examinee locates procedure, provide a copy Locate and open 1BwOA ELEC
-5, Attachment C, step 1.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. Locate proper MCC and cubicle.
Locate MCC 132X4, Cub C2.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *3. De-energize valve.
CUE: Brkr is OFF and Cubicle door is OPEN.
NOTE: At this point provide examinee with attached photo of 480V MCC valve breaker cubicle.
Turn Breaker OFF and OPEN cubicle door for valve to be
opened. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *4. Install jumper.
CUE: Jumper is installed between points 2 and 3.
Remove terminal cover, then install jumper between points 2 and 3 on terminal board at front of the cubicle. (Point out to evaluator on photo where jumper will be installed)
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
IP-204 4 *5. Override interlock and then turn breaker on.
NOTE: The door interlock for closing the breaker with the door open, is defeated by pushing the steel bar (that protrudes through a slot in the top of the cubicle bucket above the breaker handle) toward the rear of the cubicle.
NOTE: The interlock screw above the breaker handle is NOT the correct interlock for this JPM. The screw is used to defeat the interlock that prevents opening the door while the breaker is closed. If the examinee tries to use that interlock to close the breaker with the door open, CUE the examinee that the breaker will not close.
CUE: Interlock is overridden, breaker is ON, "O" contactor energizes.
Override breaker/door interlock, then turn breaker ON.
(Point out to evaluator on photo how breaker closing interlock will be over ridden)
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *6. Restore breaker.
CUE: 'O' contactor has dropped out. Breaker is Off.
Jumper is removed.
Terminal cover is installed.
Cubicle door is closed.
When "O" contactor drops out:
Immediately turn breaker OFF. Remove the jumper.
o Install terminal cover.
Close the cubicle door.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 7. Verify valve position
CUE: Another EO at 1CV112E reports that 1CV112E is open. Verify valve position locally by visual inspection.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME
COMMENTS:
IP-204 5 SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS
JPM NO: IP
-204 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE (S): N/A, IN PLANT
MALFUNCTION #'S: N/A
COMMENTS:
(Final)
LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 A.A.PURPOSE PURPOSE This procedure provides the actions required for local emergency This procedure provides the actions required for local emergency control of loads necessary for safe shutdown operation of the control of loads necessary for safe shutdown operation of the plant.plant.B.B.SYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONS SYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONS 1)1)The following conditions may cause entry into this procedure:
The following conditions may cause entry into this procedure:
ooAny event causing a loss of normal controls for safe shutdown Any event causing a loss of normal controls for safe shutdown equipment when operation of that equipment is necessary for equipment when operation of that equipment is necessary for safe plant control.
safe plant control.
ooA loss of normal control of a 480V, 4KV or 6.9KV breaker.
A loss of normal control of a 480V, 4KV or 6.9KV breaker.
ooA loss of normal control of a motor operated valve where A loss of normal control of a motor operated valve where local operation is local operation is NOT NOT prudent. prudent.Page 1 of 27 Page 1 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1CAUTION CAUTIONOperators shall wear high voltage Operators shall wear high voltageprotective gear when operating any protective gear when operating anycircuit breaker locally.
circuit breaker locally.CAUTION CAUTIONLocal closure of a breaker will Local closure of a breaker willstart equipment with its starting start equipment with its startinginterlocks disabled.
interlocks disabled.
- local emergency mode should belocal emergency mode should be*
- Non-emergency mode equipment shouldNon-emergency mode equipment should*
- NOTE NOTE****With this procedure in effect, theWith this procedure in effect, the*
- Emergency Director shall evaluateEmergency Director shall evaluate*
- for Emergency Plan conditions.for Emergency Plan conditions.*
1 11IMPLEMENT APPROPRIATE IMPLEMENT APPROPRIATE IMPLEMENT APPROPRIATE ATTACHMENT ATTACHMENT ATTACHMENT
- oo4KV or 6.9KV Breaker Local 4KV or 6.9KV Breaker Local Operation:
Operation:
ooClosing Breaker -
Closing Breaker -
ATTACHMENT A, Step 1 (Page 4)
ATTACHMENT A, Step 1 (Page 4) ooOpening Breaker -
Opening Breaker -
ATTACHMENT A, Step 3 (Page 7)
ATTACHMENT A, Step 3 (Page 7)
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 2 of 27 Page 2 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 Step 1 (continued)
Step 1 (continued) oo480V Rackable Breaker Local 480V Rackable Breaker Local Operation:
Operation:
ooClosing Breaker -
Closing Breaker -
ATTACHMENT B, Step 1 (Page 8)
ATTACHMENT B, Step 1 (Page 8) ooOpening Breaker -
Opening Breaker -
ATTACHMENT B, Step 2 (Page 9)
ATTACHMENT B, Step 2 (Page 9) ooMotor Operated Valve (MOV)
Motor Operated Valve (MOV)
Local Operation:
Local Operation:
ooOpen MOV -
Open MOV -
ATTACHMENT C, Step 1 ATTACHMENT C, Step 1 (Page 10)(Page 10)ooClose MOV -
Close MOV -
ATTACHMENT C, Step 2 ATTACHMENT C, Step 2 (Page 13)(Page 13)ooComponent Cooling Pump Local Component Cooling Pump Local Start - Start - ATTACHMENT D (Page 17)
ATTACHMENT D (Page 17) ooSVAG VALVE MCC energization -
SVAG VALVE MCC energization -
ATTACHMENT E (Page 22)
ATTACHMENT E (Page 22) -END- -END-Page 3 of 27 Page 3 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT A (PG 1 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT A (PG 1 OF 4) 4KV OR 6.9KV BREAKER LOCAL OPERATION 4KV OR 6.9KV BREAKER LOCAL OPERATIONCAUTION CAUTIONEITHER of the following will disable EITHER of the following will disableprotective trips on 4KV or 6.9KV protective trips on 4KV or 6.9KVequipment:
equipment:ooLoss of DC control power Loss of DC control powerooControl power fuses removed Control power fuses removed 1 11LOCAL CLOSING OF 4KV OR 6.9KV LOCAL CLOSING OF 4KV OR 6.9KV LOCAL CLOSING OF 4KV OR 6.9KV BREAKERS BREAKERS BREAKERS::: a.a.Check breaker - Check breaker - RACKED IN RACKED IN a.a.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
1)1)Pull the trip and close Pull the trip and close circuit fuse(s).
circuit fuse(s).
2)2)Rack the breaker in.
Rack the breaker in.
3)3)Verify floor trip Verify floor trip mechanism reset.
mechanism reset.
b.b.Check relay targets - Check relay targets - NOT UP NOT UP b.b.IF IF redundant equipment is redundant equipment is available, available, THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 1a. Step 1a.IF IF NO equipment is NO equipment is available, available, THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure procedure and step in effect.
and step in effect.
c.c.Check trip and close circuitCheck trip and close circuitc.c.Install the fuses.
Install the fuses.
fuses - fuses - INSTALLED INSTALLED d.d.Check closing spring - Check closing spring - CHARGED CHARGED d.d.Charge spring with the Charge spring with the charging lever.
charging lever.
e.e.Verify MCR control switch in -
Verify MCR control switch in -
AFTER TRIP AFTER TRIP f.f.Close breaker with close reach Close breaker with close reach rod rod Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 4 of 27 Page 4 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT A (PG 2 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT A (PG 2 OF 4) 4KV OR 6.9KV BREAKER LOCAL OPERATION 4KV OR 6.9KV BREAKER LOCAL OPERATION Step 1 (continued)
Step 1 (continued) g.g.Verify equipment - Verify equipment - RUNNING RUNNING::g.g.IF IF redundant equipment is redundant equipment is available, available, ooBreaker indicates - Breaker indicates - CLOSED CLOSED THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 1a. Step 1a.ooAmmeter at MCB indicates -
Ammeter at MCB indicates -
IF IF ALL available equipment ALL available equipment RUN CURRENT RUN CURRENT fails to start, fails to start, THEN THEN GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 2 (Next Step 2 (Next ooLocal ObservationLocal ObservationPage).
Page).h.h.Verify associated ESF pumpVerify associated ESF pumph.h.Establish alternate means Establish alternate means cubicle cooler(s) - cubicle cooler(s) - RUNNING RUNNING of cooling for ESF pump of cooling for ESF pump cubicle(s).
cubicle(s).
i.i.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect.
in effect.
Page 5 of 27 Page 5 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT A (PG 3 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT A (PG 3 OF 4) 4KV OR 6.9KV BREAKER LOCAL OPERATION 4KV OR 6.9KV BREAKER LOCAL OPERATIONCAUTION CAUTIONDo Do NOT NOT attempt to close a breaker attempt to close a breakerwithout control power if its power without control power if its powercable is damaged.
cable is damaged.
2 22START OF EQUIPMENT WITHOUT START OF EQUIPMENT WITHOUT START OF EQUIPMENT WITHOUT CONTROL POWER CONTROL POWER CONTROL POWER
- a.a.Select equipment for start Select equipment for start without control power without control power b.b.Check relay targets - Check relay targets - NOT UP NOT UP b.b.IF IF redundant equipment is redundant equipment is available, available, THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 2a. Step 2a.IF IF NO equipment is NO equipment is available, available, THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure procedure and step in effect.
and step in effect.
c.c.Pull trip and close circuit Pull trip and close circuit fuses fuses d.d.Check closing spring - Check closing spring - CHARGED CHARGED d.d.Charge spring with the Charge spring with the charging lever.
charging lever.
e.e.Close breaker with close reach Close breaker with close reach rod rod f.f.Verify equipment - Verify equipment - RUNNING RUNNING::f.f.IF IF redundant equipment is redundant equipment is available, available, ooBreaker indicates - Breaker indicates - CLOSED CLOSED THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 2a. Step 2a.ooAmmeter at MCB indicates -
Ammeter at MCB indicates -
IF IF ALL available equipment ALL available equipment RUN CURRENT RUN CURRENT fails to start, fails to start, THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure procedure ooLocal observationLocal observationand step in effect.
and step in effect.
g.g.Verify associated ESF pumpVerify associated ESF pumpg.g.Establish alternate means Establish alternate means cubicle cooler(s) - cubicle cooler(s) - RUNNING RUNNING of cooling for ESF pump of cooling for ESF pump cubicle(s).
cubicle(s).
h.h.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect.
in effect.
Page 6 of 27 Page 6 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT A (PG 4 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT A (PG 4 OF 4) 4KV OR 6.9KV BREAKER LOCAL OPERATION 4KV OR 6.9KV BREAKER LOCAL OPERATION 3 33LOCAL OPENING OF 4KV OR 6.9KV LOCAL OPENING OF 4KV OR 6.9KV LOCAL OPENING OF 4KV OR 6.9KV BREAKERS BREAKERS BREAKERS::: a.a.Pull trip and close circuit Pull trip and close circuit fuses fuses b.b.Open breaker using open reach Open breaker using open reach rod rod c.c.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect.
in effect.-END--END-Page 7 of 27 Page 7 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 2)
ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 2) 480V RACKABLE BREAKER LOCAL OPERATION 480V RACKABLE BREAKER LOCAL OPERATION
- NOTE NOTE****480 Volt breakers protective trips480 Volt breakers protective trips*
- do do NOT NOT require control power to require control power to*
- function.function.*
- low speed a 20 second time delaylow speed a 20 second time delay*
- must be observed to preventmust be observed to prevent*
- equipment damage.equipment damage.*
- 1* 1* 1LOCAL CLOSING OF 480V BREAKERS LOCAL CLOSING OF 480V BREAKERS LOCAL CLOSING OF 480V BREAKERS
- a.a.Check breaker - Check breaker - RACKED IN RACKED IN a.a.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
1)1)Pull the trip and close Pull the trip and close circuit fuse.
circuit fuse.
2)2)Rack the breaker in.
Rack the breaker in.
b.b.Check trip and close circuit Check trip and close circuit b.b.Install the fuse.
Install the fuse.
fuse - fuse - INSTALLED INSTALLED c.c.Check closing spring - Check closing spring - CHARGED CHARGED c.c.Charge the closing spring.
Charge the closing spring.
d.d.Verify MCR control switch in -
Verify MCR control switch in -
AFTER TRIP AFTER TRIP e.e.Depress CLOSE pushbutton on Depress CLOSE pushbutton on front of breaker front of breaker Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 8 of 27 Page 8 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT B (PG 2 OF 2)
ATTACHMENT B (PG 2 OF 2) 480V RACKABLE BREAKER LOCAL OPERATION 480V RACKABLE BREAKER LOCAL OPERATION Step 1 (continued)
Step 1 (continued) f.f.Check equipment - Check equipment - RUNNING RUNNING::f.f.IF IF redundant equipment is redundant equipment is available, available, ooBreaker indicates - Breaker indicates - CLOSED CLOSED THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 1a Step 1a (Previous Page).(Previous Page).
ooAmmeter at MCB indicates -
Ammeter at MCB indicates -
RUN CURRENT RUN CURRENT IF IF ALL available equipment ALL available equipment fails to start, fails to start, ooLocal ObservationLocal ObservationTHEN THEN perform the perform the following:
following:
1)1)Select equipment to Select equipment to start without control start without control power.power.2)2)Pull the trip and close Pull the trip and close circuit fuse for the circuit fuse for the selected equipment.
selected equipment.
3)3)RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 1c Step 1c (Previous Page).(Previous Page).
g.g.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect in effect 2 22LOCAL OPENING OF 480V BREAKERS LOCAL OPENING OF 480V BREAKERS LOCAL OPENING OF 480V BREAKERS
- a.a.Pull trip and close circuit Pull trip and close circuit fuse fuse b.b.Depress TRIP pushbutton on Depress TRIP pushbutton on front of breaker front of breaker c.c.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect in effect-END--END-Page 9 of 27 Page 9 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 7)
ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 7)
MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION
- NOTE NOTE****If a seal-in signal is present theIf a seal-in signal is present the*
- MOV will reclose after the "O"MOV will reclose after the "O"*
- contactor drops out, unless the MOVcontactor drops out, unless the MOV*
- is IMMEDIATELY deenergized.is IMMEDIATELY deenergized.*
- NOTE NOTE****Valves 1SI8811A or B can not beValves 1SI8811A or B can not be*
- jumpered OPEN without first liftingjumpered OPEN without first lifting*
- circuit.circuit.*******************************************
1 11TO OPEN ANY MOV (480 VOLT MCC)
TO OPEN ANY MOV (480 VOLT MCC)
TO OPEN ANY MOV (480 VOLT MCC)
- a.a.Turn breaker OFF Turn breaker OFF b.b.Open cubicle door for valve to Open cubicle door for valve to be opened be opened Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 10 of 27 Page 10 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT C (PG 2 OF 7)
ATTACHMENT C (PG 2 OF 7)
MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION Step 1 (continued)
Step 1 (continued) c.c.Check valve - Check valve - NOT LISTED BELOW NOT LISTED BELOW
- c.c.Locally open valve(s):
Locally open valve(s):1SI8811A1SI8811AooOpen electrically from Open electrically from1SI8811B1SI8811Bbreaker:
breaker: a)a)Lift lead from Point Lift lead from Point 10 on terminal strip 10 on terminal strip at front of cubicle at front of cubicle to defeat shorting to defeat shorting circuit: circuit: oo1SI8811A MCC 131X1 1SI8811A MCC 131X1 M3 (364' S12)
M3 (364' S12) oo1SI8811B MCC 132X4 1SI8811B MCC 132X4 H1 (426' S12)
H1 (426' S12) b)b)Tape end of lead.
Tape end of lead.
c)c)Notify the control Notify the control room to log lifted room to log lifted lead in TCC Log.
d)d)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 1d Step 1d ooOpen manually at valve:
Open manually at valve:
a)a)Locally open valve Locally open valve using the handwheel.
using the handwheel.
b)b)RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure procedure and step in effect.
and step in effect.
d.d.Install jumper between points 2 Install jumper between points 2 and 3 on terminal board at and 3 on terminal board at front of cubicle front of cubicle e.e.Override breaker and door Override breaker and door interlock interlock f.f.Turn breaker ON Turn breaker ON Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 11 of 27 Page 11 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT C (PG 3 OF 7)
ATTACHMENT C (PG 3 OF 7)
MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION Step 1 (continued)
Step 1 (continued) g.g.WHEN "O" contactor drops out, WHEN "O" contactor drops out, THEN immediately turn breaker THEN immediately turn breaker OFF OFF h.h.Remove jumper Remove jumper i.i.Close cubicle door Close cubicle door j.j.Check valve position by localCheck valve position by localj.j.Locally open valve at Locally open valve at inspection if possibleinspection if possibleShift Manager's Shift Manager's discretion.
discretion.
k.k.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect in effect Page 12 of 27 Page 12 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT C (PG 4 OF 7)
ATTACHMENT C (PG 4 OF 7)
MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION
- NOTE NOTE****If a seal-in signal is present theIf a seal-in signal is present the*
- MOV will reopen after the "C"MOV will reopen after the "C"*
- contactor drops out, unless the MOVcontactor drops out, unless the MOV*
- is IMMEDIATELY deenergized.is IMMEDIATELY deenergized.*
- NOTE NOTE****The valves listed in step 2c (NextThe valves listed in step 2c (Next*
- defeat the shorting circuit.defeat the shorting circuit.*
- NOTE NOTE****Valves 1AF013C, D, G and H requireValves 1AF013C, D, G and H require*
- placing the RSDP Transfer Controlplacing the RSDP Transfer Control*
- Switch in LOCAL to defeat theSwitch in LOCAL to defeat the*
- shorting circuit. Transfer switchshorting circuit. Transfer switch*
- must be maintained in LOCAL aftermust be maintained in LOCAL after*
- use.use.*******************************************
2 22TO CLOSE ANY MOV (480 VOLT MCC)
TO CLOSE ANY MOV (480 VOLT MCC)
TO CLOSE ANY MOV (480 VOLT MCC)
- a.a.Turn breaker OFF Turn breaker OFF b.b.Open cubicle door for valve to Open cubicle door for valve to be closed be closed Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 13 of 27 Page 13 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT C (PG 5 OF 7)
ATTACHMENT C (PG 5 OF 7)
MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION Step 2 (continued)
Step 2 (continued) c.c.Check valve - Check valve - NOT LISTED BELOW NOT LISTED BELOW
- c.c.Locally close valve:
Locally close valve:1CV112B1CV112BooClose electrically from Close electrically from1CV112C1CV112Cbreaker:
breaker:1CV8110 1CV81101CV81111CV8111a)a)Lift lead to defeat Lift lead to defeat1SX0041SX004shorting ciruit:
shorting ciruit:1SX010 1SX0101SX0111SX011oo1CV112B MCC 131X5 1CV112B MCC 131X51SX0331SX033A5 (426' Q16)
A5 (426' Q16)1SX0341SX034(Point 13)(Point 13)1SX1361SX136oo1CV112C MCC 132X4 1CV112C MCC 132X4G1 (426' S12 CWA)
G1 (426' S12 CWA)(Point-13)(Point-13)oo1CV8110 MCC 131X1 1CV8110 MCC 131X1 M1 (364' S12)
M1 (364' S12)(Point 14)(Point 14) oo1CV8111 MCC 132X4 1CV8111 MCC 132X4 C4 (426' S12)
C4 (426' S12)(Point 14)(Point 14) oo1SX004 MCC 131X1 A2 1SX004 MCC 131X1 A2 (364' S12)
(364' S12)(Point-13)(Point-13) oo1SX010 MCC 132X1 H4 1SX010 MCC 132X1 H4 (364' P18)
(364' P18)(Point-13)(Point-13) oo1SX011 MCC 132X1 B2 1SX011 MCC 132X1 B2 (364' P18)
(364' P18)(Point-13)(Point-13) oo1SX033 MCC 131X1 A4 1SX033 MCC 131X1 A4 (364' S12)
(364' S12)(Point-13)(Point-13) oo1SX034 MCC 132X1 B4 1SX034 MCC 132X1 B4 (364' P18)
(364' P18)(Point-13)(Point-13) oo1SX136 MCC 132X1 H5 1SX136 MCC 132X1 H5 (364' P18)
(364' P18)(Point-13)(Point-13) b)b)Tape end of lead.
Tape end of lead.
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 14 of 27 Page 14 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT C (PG 6 OF 7)
ATTACHMENT C (PG 6 OF 7)
MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION Step 2 (continued)
Step 2 (continued) c)c)Notify the control Notify the control room to log lifted room to log lifted lead in TCC Log.
d)d)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 2e. Step 2e.ooLocally close valve Locally close valve using the hand wheel.
using the hand wheel.
d.d.Check valve - Check valve - NOT LISTED BELOW NOT LISTED BELOW
- d.d.Close electrically from Close electrically from breaker: breaker:1AF013C 1AF013C1AF013D1AF013D1)1)Defeat shorting circuit:
Defeat shorting circuit:1AF013G 1AF013G1AF013H1AF013Ha)a)Place RSDP Place RSDP Local/Remote Transfer Local/Remote Transfer C/S in LOCAL.
C/S in LOCAL.
b)b)Install a jumper Install a jumper between points 21 and between points 21 and 5 on terminal board 5 on terminal board in front of cubicle.
in front of cubicle.
2)2)Notify the control room Notify the control room to log jumper in TCC to log jumper in TCC Log.Log.3)3)Notify the control room Notify the control room to log switch position to log switch position using an Abnormal using an Abnormal Component Position Component Position Sheet.Sheet.4)4)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 2f (Next Step 2f (Next Page).Page).e.e.Install jumper between points 4 Install jumper between points 4 and 5 on terminal board at and 5 on terminal board at front of cubicle front of cubicle Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 15 of 27 Page 15 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT C (PG 7 OF 7)
ATTACHMENT C (PG 7 OF 7)
MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION MOTOR OPERATED VALVE (MOV) LOCAL OPERATION Step 2 (continued)
Step 2 (continued) f.f.Override breaker and door Override breaker and door interlock interlock g.g.Turn breaker ON Turn breaker ON h.h.WHEN "C" contactor drops out, WHEN "C" contactor drops out, THEN immediately turn breaker THEN immediately turn breaker OFF OFF i.i.Remove jumper Remove jumper j.j.Close cubicle door Close cubicle door k.k.Check valve position by localCheck valve position by localk.k.IF IF unable to electrically unable to electrically inspection if possibleinspection if possibleclose valve, close valve, THEN THEN locally close at locally close at Shift Manager's Shift Manager's discretion.
discretion.
l.l.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect in effect-END--END-Page 16 of 27 Page 16 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT D (PG 1 OF 5)
ATTACHMENT D (PG 1 OF 5)
COMPONENT COOLING PUMP LOCAL START COMPONENT COOLING PUMP LOCAL STARTCAUTION CAUTIONEITHER of the following will disable EITHER of the following will disablethe protective trips on the CC the protective trips on the CCpumps: pumps:ooLoss of DC control power Loss of DC control powerooControl power fuses removed Control power fuses removedCAUTION CAUTIONFor the U-0 CC pump to trip on low For the U-0 CC pump to trip on lowsurge tank level, the control power surge tank level, the control powerfuses must be installed in EITHER fuses must be installed in EITHERthe 1A CC pump breaker if the U-0 the 1A CC pump breaker if the U-0pump is racked into Bus 141 pump is racked into Bus 141 OR OR in inthe 1B CC pump breaker if the U-0 the 1B CC pump breaker if the U-0pump is racked into Bus 142.
pump is racked into Bus 142.
- and a local breaker in series. Theand a local breaker in series. The*
- local breaker is interlocked tolocal breaker is interlocked to*
- close when the bus breaker closes.close when the bus breaker closes.*
1 11CC PUMP LOCAL EMERGENCY START CC PUMP LOCAL EMERGENCY START CC PUMP LOCAL EMERGENCY START
- a.a.Check selected pumpCheck selected pumpa.a.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
breaker(s) - breaker(s) - RACKED IN RACKED IN:: 1)1)Pull the trip and close Pull the trip and close ooCC pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 12)CC pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 12)circuit fuses.
circuit fuses.
ooCC pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 9)CC pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 9)2)2)Rack the breaker(s) in.
Rack the breaker(s) in.
ooCC pump 0:CC pump 0:3)3)Verify floor trip Verify floor trip mechanism reset.
mechanism reset.Bus 141 Cub 18 Bus 141 Cub 18-AND--AND-Local Breaker for Bus 141 Local Breaker for Bus 141 (383' N-17)
(383' N-17)
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 17 of 27 Page 17 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT D (PG 2 OF 5)
ATTACHMENT D (PG 2 OF 5)
COMPONENT COOLING PUMP LOCAL START COMPONENT COOLING PUMP LOCAL START Step 1a (continued)
Step 1a (continued) ooCC pump 0:
CC pump 0:Bus 142 Cub 12 Bus 142 Cub 12-AND--AND-Local Breaker for Bus 142 Local Breaker for Bus 142 (383' N-17)
(383' N-17) b.b.Check relay targets - Check relay targets - NOT UP NOT UP b.b.IF IF redundant equipment is redundant equipment is available, available, THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 1a Step 1a (Previous Page).(Previous Page).
IF IF NO CC pumps are NO CC pumps are available, available, THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure procedure and step in effect.
and step in effect.
c.c.Verify the following for Verify the following for EACH EACH breaker to be closed:
breaker to be closed:
1)1)Trip and close circuit Trip and close circuit 1)1)Install the fuses.
Install the fuses.
fuses - fuses - INSTALLED INSTALLED 2)2)Closing spring - Closing spring - CHARGED CHARGED 2)2)Charge spring with the Charge spring with the charging lever.
charging lever.
d.d.Verify MCR control switch in -
Verify MCR control switch in -
AFTER TRIP AFTER TRIP e.e.Close breaker with close reach Close breaker with close reach rod: rod: ooCC pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 12)
CC pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 12) ooCC pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 9)
CC pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 9) ooCC pump 0 (Bus 141 Cub 18)
CC pump 0 (Bus 141 Cub 18) ooCC pump 0 (Bus 142 Cub 12)
CC pump 0 (Bus 142 Cub 12)
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 18 of 27 Page 18 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT D (PG 3 OF 5)
ATTACHMENT D (PG 3 OF 5)
COMPONENT COOLING PUMP LOCAL START COMPONENT COOLING PUMP LOCAL START Step 1 (continued)
Step 1 (continued) f.f.Verify pump - Verify pump - RUNNING RUNNING::f.f.IF IF the CC pump 0 did the CC pump 0 did NOT NOT start, start, ooBreaker(s) indicate - Breaker(s) indicate - CLOSED CLOSED THEN THEN close its associated close its associated breaker (383' N-17) with breaker (383' N-17) with ooAmmeter at MCB indicates -
Ammeter at MCB indicates -
the close reach rod.
the close reach rod.
RUN CURRENT RUN CURRENT IF IF the selected pump did the selected pump did ooLocal observationLocal observationNOT NOT start, start, THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 1a Step 1a (Page 17) to start an (Page 17) to start an alternate pump.
alternate pump.
IF IF ALL available CC pumps ALL available CC pumps fail to start, fail to start, THEN THEN GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 2 (Next Step 2 (Next Page).Page).g.g.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect.
in effect.
Page 19 of 27 Page 19 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT D (PG 4 OF 5)
ATTACHMENT D (PG 4 OF 5)
COMPONENT COOLING PUMP LOCAL START COMPONENT COOLING PUMP LOCAL START 2 22START OF A CC PUMP WITHOUT START OF A CC PUMP WITHOUT START OF A CC PUMP WITHOUT CONTROL POWER CONTROL POWER CONTROL POWER
- a.a.Select a CC pump for start Select a CC pump for start without control power without control power b.b.Check relay targets - Check relay targets - NOT UP NOT UP b.b.IF IF redundant equipment is redundant equipment is available, available, THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 2a. Step 2a.IF IF NO CC pumps are NO CC pumps are available, available, THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure procedure and step in effect.
and step in effect.
c.c.Pull trip and close circuit Pull trip and close circuit fuses fuses d.d.Check closing spring - Check closing spring - CHARGED CHARGED d.d.Charge spring with the Charge spring with the charging lever.
charging lever.
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 20 of 27 Page 20 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT D (PG 5 OF 5)
ATTACHMENT D (PG 5 OF 5)
COMPONENT COOLING PUMP LOCAL START COMPONENT COOLING PUMP LOCAL START Step 2 (continued)
Step 2 (continued) e.e.Close breaker(s) with close Close breaker(s) with close reach rod:
reach rod:
ooCC pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 12)
CC pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 12) ooCC pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 9)
CC pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 9) ooCC pump 0:
CC pump 0:Bus 141 Cub 18 Bus 141 Cub 18-AND--AND-Local Breaker for Bus 141 Local Breaker for Bus 141 (383' N-17)
(383' N-17) ooCC pump 0:
CC pump 0:Bus 142 Cub 12 Bus 142 Cub 12-AND--AND-Local Breaker for Bus 142 Local Breaker for Bus 142 (383' N-17)
(383' N-17) f.f.Verify pump - Verify pump - RUNNING RUNNING::f.f.IF IF redundant equipment is redundant equipment is available, available, ooBreaker(s) indicate - Breaker(s) indicate - CLOSED CLOSED THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 2a Step 2a (Previous Page).(Previous Page).
ooAmmeter at MCB indicates -
Ammeter at MCB indicates -
RUN CURRENT RUN CURRENT IF IF NO CC pumps are NO CC pumps are available, available, ooLocal observationLocal observationTHEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure procedure and step in effect.
and step in effect.
g.g.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect.
in effect.-END--END-Page 21 of 27 Page 21 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT E (PG 1 OF 6)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 1 OF 6)
SVAG VALVE MCC ENERGIZATION SVAG VALVE MCC ENERGIZATION 1 11ENERGIZE DESIRED MCC(S)
ENERGIZE DESIRED MCC(S)
ENERGIZE DESIRED MCC(S)
- ooTrain A SI accumulator Train A SI accumulator discharge valves (MCC 131X2A) -
discharge valves (MCC 131X2A) -
GO TO GO TO GO TO STEP 2 (Next Page)
STEP 2 (Next Page) ooTrain B SI accumulator Train B SI accumulator discharge valves (MCC 132X2A) -
discharge valves (MCC 132X2A) -
GO TO GO TO GO TO STEP 3 (Page 24)
STEP 3 (Page 24) ooTrain A SVAG VALVES Train A SVAG VALVES (MCC 131X1A) - (MCC 131X1A) -
GO TO GO TO GO TO STEP 4 (Page 25)
STEP 4 (Page 25) ooTrain B SVAG VALVES Train B SVAG VALVES (MCC 132X4A) - (MCC 132X4A) -
GO TO GO TO GO TO STEP 5 (Page 26)
STEP 5 (Page 26)
Page 22 of 27 Page 22 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT E (PG 2 OF 6)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 2 OF 6)
SVAG VALVE MCC ENERGIZATION SVAG VALVE MCC ENERGIZATION 2 22TRAIN A (1SI8808A AND D)
TRAIN A (1SI8808A AND D)
TRAIN A (1SI8808A AND D)
(414' S12 CWA):
1)1)Turn MCC 131X2 B2 - Turn MCC 131X2 B2 - OFF OFF 2)2)Open cubicle door Open cubicle door 3)3)Install jumper between point Install jumper between point 1 and 3A on terminal board at 1 and 3A on terminal board at front of cubicle front of cubicle 4)4)Override breaker and door Override breaker and door interlock interlock 5)5)Turn breaker MCC 131X2 B2 -
Turn breaker MCC 131X2 B2 -
ON ON 6)6)Check MCC 131X2A - Check MCC 131X2A - ENERGIZED ENERGIZED b.b.Locally close SI accumulatorLocally close SI accumulatorb.b.Locally close valve(s):
Locally close valve(s):
discharge valves per 1BwOA discharge valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROLELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROLoo1SI8808A (412' R15 OMB) 1SI8808A (412' R15 OMB)
OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTOF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENToo1SI8808D (412' R9 OMB) 1SI8808D (412' R9 OMB)MCC 131X2A A3 (1SI8808A)
MCC 131X2A A3 (1SI8808A)
(414' S12 CWA)
(414' S12 CWA)MCC 131X2A A2 (1SI8808D)
MCC 131X2A A2 (1SI8808D)
(414' S12 CWA)
(414' S12 CWA) c.c.Locally de-energize MCC 131X2A Locally de-energize MCC 131X2A (414' S12 CWA):
(414' S12 CWA):
1)1)Turn MCC 131X2 B2 - Turn MCC 131X2 B2 - OFF OFF 2)2)Remove jumper Remove jumper 3)3)Close cubicle door Close cubicle door 4)4)Turn MCC 131X2 B2 - Turn MCC 131X2 B2 - ON ON Page 23 of 27 Page 23 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT E (PG 3 OF 6)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 3 OF 6)
SVAG VALVE MCC ENERGIZATION SVAG VALVE MCC ENERGIZATION 3 33TRAIN B (1SI8808B AND C)
TRAIN B (1SI8808B AND C)
TRAIN B (1SI8808B AND C)
(426' S12 CWA):
1)1)Turn MCC 132X2 B2 - Turn MCC 132X2 B2 - OFF OFF 2)2)Open cubicle door Open cubicle door 3)3)Install jumper between point Install jumper between point 1 and 3A on terminal board at 1 and 3A on terminal board at front of cubicle front of cubicle 4)4)Override breaker and door Override breaker and door interlock interlock 5)5)Turn breaker MCC 132X2 B2 -
Turn breaker MCC 132X2 B2 -
ON ON 6)6)Check MCC 132X2A - Check MCC 132X2A - ENERGIZED ENERGIZED b.b.Locally close SI accumulatorLocally close SI accumulatorb.b.Locally close valve(s):
Locally close valve(s):
discharge valves per 1BwOA discharge valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROLELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROLoo1SI8808B (412' R18 OMB) 1SI8808B (412' R18 OMB)
OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTOF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENToo1SI8808C (412' R5 OMB) 1SI8808C (412' R5 OMB)MCC 132X2A A3 (1SI8808B)
MCC 132X2A A3 (1SI8808B)
(426' S12 CWA)
(426' S12 CWA)MCC 132X2A A2 (1SI8808C)
MCC 132X2A A2 (1SI8808C)
(426' S12 CWA)
(426' S12 CWA) c.c.Locally de-energize MCC 132X2A Locally de-energize MCC 132X2A (426' S12 CWA):
(426' S12 CWA):
1)1)Turn MCC 132X2 B2 - Turn MCC 132X2 B2 - OFF OFF 2)2)Remove jumper Remove jumper 3)3)Close cubicle door Close cubicle door 4)4)Turn MCC 132X2 B2 - Turn MCC 132X2 B2 - ON ON Page 24 of 27 Page 24 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT E (PG 4 OF 6)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 4 OF 6)
SVAG VALVE MCC ENERGIZATION SVAG VALVE MCC ENERGIZATION 4 44TRAIN A SVAG VALVES TRAIN A SVAG VALVES TRAIN A SVAG VALVES
(364' S12 CWA):
1)1)Turn MCC 131X1 M2 - Turn MCC 131X1 M2 - OFF OFF 2)2)Open cubicle door Open cubicle door 3)3)Lift lead from Point 14 on Lift lead from Point 14 on terminal strip at front of terminal strip at front of cubicle to defeat shorting cubicle to defeat shorting circuit circuit 4)4)Tape end of lead.
Tape end of lead.
5)5)Notify the control room to Notify the control room to log lifted lead in TCC log log lifted lead in TCC log 6)6)Install jumper between points Install jumper between points 1 and 3 on control relay in 1 and 3 on control relay in front of cubicle front of cubicle 7)7)Override breaker and door Override breaker and door interlock interlock 8)8)Turn breaker MCC 131X1 M2 -
Turn breaker MCC 131X1 M2 -
ON ON 9)9)Check MCC 131X1A - Check MCC 131X1A - ENERGIZED ENERGIZED b.b.Align valve(s) as required:
Align valve(s) as required:
ooControl switch Control switch oo1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT c.c.Locally de-energize MCC 131X1A Locally de-energize MCC 131X1A (364' S12 CWA):
(364' S12 CWA):
1)1)Turn MCC 131X1 M2 - Turn MCC 131X1 M2 - OFF OFF 2)2)Remove jumper Remove jumper 3)3)Untape and land lead from Untape and land lead from Point 14 on terminal strip at Point 14 on terminal strip at front of cubicle front of cubicle 4)4)Notify control room that lead Notify control room that lead was landed was landed 5)5)Close cubicle door Close cubicle door 6)6)Turn MCC 131X1 M2 - Turn MCC 131X1 M2 - ON ON Page 25 of 27 Page 25 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT E (PG 5 OF 6)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 5 OF 6)
SVAG VALVE MCC ENERGIZATION SVAG VALVE MCC ENERGIZATION 5 55TRAIN B SVAG VALVES TRAIN B SVAG VALVES TRAIN B SVAG VALVES
(426' S12 CWA):
1)1)Turn MCC 132X4 K2 - Turn MCC 132X4 K2 - OFF OFF 2)2)Open cubicle door Open cubicle door 3)3)Lift lead from Point 14 on Lift lead from Point 14 on terminal strip at front of terminal strip at front of cubicle to defeat shorting cubicle to defeat shorting circuit circuit 4)4)Tape end of lead.
Tape end of lead.
5)5)Notify the control room to Notify the control room to log lifted lead in TCC log log lifted lead in TCC log 6)6)Install jumper between points Install jumper between points 1 and 3 on control relay in 1 and 3 on control relay in front of cubicle front of cubicle 7)7)Override breaker and door Override breaker and door interlock interlock 8)8)Turn breaker MCC 132X4 K2 -
Turn breaker MCC 132X4 K2 -
ON ON 9)9)Check MCC 132X4A - Check MCC 132X4A - ENERGIZED ENERGIZED b.b.Align valve(s) as required:
Align valve(s) as required:
ooControl switch Control switch oo1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 26 of 27 Page 26 of 27 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE REV. 105 REV. 105 REV. 105 1BwOA 1BwOA 1BwOA SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT ELEC-5 ELEC-5 ELEC-5 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT E (PG 6 OF 6)
ATTACHMENT E (PG 6 OF 6)
SVAG VALVE MCC ENERGIZATION SVAG VALVE MCC ENERGIZATION Step 5 (continued)
Step 5 (continued) c.c.Locally de-energize MCC 132X4A Locally de-energize MCC 132X4A (426' S12 CWA):
(426' S12 CWA):
1)1)Turn MCC 132X4 K2 - Turn MCC 132X4 K2 - OFF OFF 2)2)Remove jumper Remove jumper 3)3)Untape and land lead from Untape and land lead from Point 14 on terminal strip at Point 14 on terminal strip at front of cubicle front of cubicle 4)4)Notify control room that lead Notify control room that lead was landed was landed 5)5)Close cubicle door Close cubicle door 6)6)Turn MCC 132X4 K2 - Turn MCC 132X4 K2 - ON ON-END--END-Page 27 of 27 Page 27 of 27
IP-406S Page 1 of 4 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an extra NSO.
- 2. A loss of Essential Service Water is in progress on Unit 2.
- 3. 2A CV pump is not running.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit Supervisor has directed you to align Fire Protection Cooling ONLY to the 2A Centrifugal Charging Pump per 2BwOA PRI
-8, ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION, Attachment C.
- 2. 2A CV pump will remain in standby.
- 3. Inform the Unit Supervisor when you have aligned Fire Protection Cooling to the 2A Centrifugal Charging Pump.
IP-406S Page 2 of 4 TASK TITLE:
Align Fire Protection Cooling to the 2A Centrifugal Charging Pump JPM No.: IP-406S REV: 2013 NRC Task No.: R-CV-23 K&A No.: K2.1.30 Objective No.:
4.D.OA-69 K&A IMP: 4.4/4.0 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)
EVALUATOR:
DATE: The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 2, 3 APPROX COMPLETION TIME:
15 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME:
NA EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: PERFORM X IN PLANT X SIMULATE SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. 2BwOA PRI-8, ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION, Rev 105.
MATERIALS:
- 2. 2BwOA PRI-8, ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION, Rev 105.
TASK STANDARDS:
- 2. Align FR system to 2A CV pump oil cooler.
TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an extra NSO.
- 2. A loss of Essential Service Water is in progress on Unit 2.
- 3. 2A CV pump is not running.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit 2 Unit Supervisor has directed you to align Fire Protection Cooling ONLY to the 2A Centrifugal Charging Pump per 2BwOA PRI
-8, ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION, Attachment C.
- 2. 2A CV pump will remain in standby.
- 3. Inform the Unit 2 Unit Supervisor when you have aligned Fire Protection Cooling to the 2A Centrifugal Charging Pump.
IP-406S Page 3 of 4 RECORD START TIME: PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 1. Refer to 2BwOA PRI
-8, ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION.
CUE: After examinee locates procedure, provide copy of 2BwOA PRI
-8, Attachment C.
Locate and open 2BwOA PRI
-8, ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION, Attachment C.
Determine 2A CV pump selected for FP alignment (from initial cue).
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *2. Connect and align fire hose.
CUE: FP Supply Hose Connected CUE: 0FP840 is rotated counter clockwise until the valve handwheel stops. CUE: Hose is not pinched by room door. No kinks in hose Connect and align fire hose Locate fire hose in 2A CV pump room.
Connect one end of fire hose to CV pump 2A lube oil cooler.
Connect opposite end of fire hose to FP connection outside 2A CV Pump room (364' V18).
Determine FP hose NOT required to be connected to 1A CV pump (from initiating cue, only 2A CV pump to be aligned to FP cooling).
Open 0FP840, 1A/2A CV pump oil cooler alternate cooling water supply tie valve (364' V18)
Verify fire hose charged Hose not pinched by room door.
No kinks in hose.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
IP-406S Page 4 of 4 PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 3. Align FP cooling to oil cooler CUE: 2SX259A is rotated counter clockwise until the valve handwheel
st ops. CUE: 2SX258A is rotated clockwise until the valve handwheel stops.
Align FP to CHG PUMP Lube Oil Cooler:
Open 2SX259A, 2A CV pump FP supply to oil cooler isolation valve (364' U20 in 2A CV ump room).
Close 2SX258A, 2A CV pump gear and oil cooler isolation valve (364' U20 in 2A CV ump room).
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 4. Check Centrifugal Charging Pump 2A Operation:
CUE: 2A CV Pump is not running. Check Centrifugal Charging Pump 2A Operation:
2A CV pump is not running (from initiating cue)
Determine 2A CV pump is being aligned for standby operation (from initiating cue) SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 5. Check if FP alignment required for 2B CV pump:
CUE: As Unit Supervisor, acknowledge report.
NOTE: The alignment does render the 2A CV pump inoperable, even though the pump will function.
Check if FP alignment required for 2B CV pump:
Determine 2A CV pump selected for FP alignment (from initial cue).
Return to procedure and step in effect.
Inform US FP aligned to 2A CV pump.
CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME:
COMMENTS:
(Final)
REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 A.A.PURPOSE PURPOSE This procedure provides actions required in the event of a This procedure provides actions required in the event of a malfunction of the Essential Service Water system.
malfunction of the Essential Service Water system.
B.B.SYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONS SYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONS 1)1)The following annunciators may cause entry into this procedure:
The following annunciators may cause entry into this procedure:
ooCNMT DRAIN LEAK DETECT FLOW HIGH (2-1-A2)
CNMT DRAIN LEAK DETECT FLOW HIGH (2-1-A2) ooSX PUMP TRIP (2-2-A1)
SX PUMP TRIP (2-2-A1) ooSX PUMP DSCH HDR PRESS LOW (2-2-A2)
SX PUMP DSCH HDR PRESS LOW (2-2-A2) ooSX PUMP DSCH HDR TEMP HIGH/LOW (2-2-B2)
SX PUMP DSCH HDR TEMP HIGH/LOW (2-2-B2) ooSX PUMP SUCT PRESS LOW (2-2-C1)
SX PUMP SUCT PRESS LOW (2-2-C1) ooSX STRN DP HIGH (2-2-C2)
SX STRN DP HIGH (2-2-C2) ooSX PUMP SUCT VLV PIT LEVEL HIGH (2-2-D2)
SX PUMP SUCT VLV PIT LEVEL HIGH (2-2-D2)
Page 1 of 29 Page 1 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8*****************************************
- NOTE NOTE****With this procedure in effect, theWith this procedure in effect, the*
- Emergency Director shall evaluateEmergency Director shall evaluate*
- for Emergency Plan conditions.for Emergency Plan conditions.*
1 11CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE IN CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE IN CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE IN GO TO GO TO GO TO ATTACHMENT A, Step 1 ATTACHMENT A, Step 1 AUX BUILDING AUX BUILDING AUX BUILDING
- (Page 15).(Page 15).Contact Radwaste to monitor aux Contact Radwaste to monitor aux building sumps:
building sumps:Aux Bldg sumps - Aux Bldg sumps - NORMAL NORMALSX PUMP SUCT VLV PIT LEVEL HIGH SX PUMP SUCT VLV PIT LEVEL HIGH (2-2-D2) - (2-2-D2) - NOT LIT NOT LIT 2 22CHECK STATUS OF SX PUMPS CHECK STATUS OF SX PUMPS CHECK STATUS OF SX PUMPS
valves open:
ooTrain A Train A2SX001A 2SX001A2SX016A 2SX016A2SX027A 2SX027A-OR--OR-ooTrain B Train B2SX001B 2SX001B2SX016B 2SX016B2SX027B 2SX027B 2)2)Start the selected SX Start the selected SX pump.pump.IF IF NO NO UNIT 2 SX pump(s)
UNIT 2 SX pump(s) can be started, can be started, THEN THEN GO TO GO TO GO TO*ATTACHMENT B
- ATTACHMENT B (Page 18). (Page 18).
Page 2 of 29 Page 2 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 3 33CHECK STATUS OF SX SYSTEM CHECK STATUS OF SX SYSTEM CHECK STATUS OF SX SYSTEM
- a.a.SX PUMP SUCT PRESSURE LOWSX PUMP SUCT PRESSURE LOWa.a.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
(2-2-C1) - (2-2-C1) - NOT LIT NOT LIT 1)1)Verify SX pump(s)
Verify SX pump(s) suction valves are open:
suction valves are open:2SX001A 2SX001A2SX001B 2SX001B 2)2)Dispatch an operator to Dispatch an operator to verify traveling screens verify traveling screens clear of icing/debris.
clear of icing/debris.
b.b.SX STRN DP HIGH (2-2-C2) - SX STRN DP HIGH (2-2-C2) - NOT NOT b.b.Locally backwash Locally backwash LIT LIT strainer(s) per BwOP SX-6, strainer(s) per BwOP SX-6, ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER STRAINER MANUAL OPERATION STRAINER MANUAL OPERATION c.c.SX PUMP DSCH HDR PRESS LOWSX PUMP DSCH HDR PRESS LOWc.c.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
(2-2-A2) - (2-2-A2) - NOT LIT NOT LIT ooStart an additional SX Start an additional SX pump.pump.ooLocally verify the SX Locally verify the SX pump discharge strainers pump discharge strainers are are NOT NOT backwashing.
backwashing.
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 3 of 29 Page 3 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 Step 3 (continued)
Step 3 (continued) ooLocally adjust SX outlet Locally adjust SX outlet from CC heat exchanger from CC heat exchanger valve(s) while valve(s) while maintaining outlet maintaining outlet temperature(s) less than temperature(s) less than 105 105F F:: oo2SX007 (346' M20):
2SX007 (346' M20):1)1)Close 2SX007E, Close 2SX007E,Local Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.2)2)Throttle 2SX007 as Throttle 2SX007 asrequired.required.3)3)WHEN WHEN adjustments adjustmentsare complete, are complete, THEN THEN open 2SX007E, open 2SX007E,Local Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.oo0SX007 (346' M16):
0SX007 (346' M16):1)1)Close 0SX007E, Close 0SX007E,Local Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.2)2)Throttle 0SX007 as Throttle 0SX007 asrequired.required.3)3)WHEN WHEN adjustments adjustmentsare complete, are complete, THEN THEN open 0SX007E open 0SX007ELocal Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 4 of 29 Page 4 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 Step 3 (continued)
Step 3 (continued)
IF IF SX pump discharge SX pump discharge header pressure can header pressure can NOT NOT be be restored, restored, THEN THEN perform the perform the following:
following:
a)a)Monitor temperatures of Monitor temperatures of equipment cooled by SX.
equipment cooled by SX.
b)b)Shutdown Shutdown ANY ANY unnecessary unnecessary equipment:
equipment:
ooDG(s)DG(s)ooMCR chiller(s)
MCR chiller(s) ooSI pump(s)
SI pump(s) ooRCFC(s)RCFC(s)ooContainment Containment chiller(s) chiller(s) c)c)Close the SX outlet Close the SX outlet valve for valve for ANY ANY shutdown shutdown RCFC train(s):
RCFC train(s):
oo2SX027A 2SX027A oo2SX027B 2SX027B d)d)IF IF CENT CHG pump CENT CHG pump temperatures are temperatures are approaching the limits approaching the limits of TABLE A (Page 29), of TABLE A (Page 29), THEN THEN align FP to a CENT align FP to a CENT CHG pump lube oil cooler CHG pump lube oil cooler per ATTACHMENT C per ATTACHMENT C (Page 23) while (Page 23) while continuing with this continuing with this procedure:
procedure:
ooCENT CHG pump 2A CENT CHG pump 2A ooCENT CHG pump 2B CENT CHG pump 2B e)e)Shutdown Shutdown ANY ANY vital vital equipment exceeding the equipment exceeding the limits of TABLE A limits of TABLE A (Page 29).(Page 29).
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 5 of 29 Page 5 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 Step 3 (continued)
Step 3 (continued) f)f)At Shift Manager At Shift Manager discretion align discretion align UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 SX to cool Unit 2 CC SX to cool Unit 2 CC loads via the Unit 0 CC loads via the Unit 0 CC heat exchanger:
heat exchanger:
1)1)Open CC HX 0 SX inlet Open CC HX 0 SX inlet valve: valve:1SX005 1SX005 2)2)Open the CC HX 0 SX Open the CC HX 0 SX outlet valve(s):
outlet valve(s):
oo0SX146 0SX146 oo0SX147 0SX147 3)3)Align the UNIT 0 CC Align the UNIT 0 CC heat exchanger to heat exchanger to Unit 2 per BwOP CC-8, Unit 2 per BwOP CC-8, ISOLATION OF CC ISOLATION OF CC BETWEEN UNITS 1 AND BETWEEN UNITS 1 AND 2.2.Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 6 of 29 Page 6 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 Step 3 (continued)
Step 3 (continued) d.d.SX PUMP DSCH HDR TEMP HIGH LOWSX PUMP DSCH HDR TEMP HIGH LOWd.d.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
(2-2-B2) - (2-2-B2) - NOT LIT NOT LIT 1)1)Start an additional SX Start an additional SX pump at Shift Manager pump at Shift Manager discretion.
discretion.
2)2)Monitor temperatures of Monitor temperatures of running equipment cooled running equipment cooled by SX.by SX.3)3)Shutdown Shutdown ANY ANY unnecessary unnecessary equipment:
equipment:
ooDG(s)DG(s)ooMCR chiller(s)
MCR chiller(s) ooSI pump(s)
SI pump(s) ooRCFC(s)RCFC(s)ooContainment Containment chiller(s) chiller(s) 4)4)Close the SX outlet Close the SX outlet valve for valve for ANY ANY shutdown shutdown RCFC train(s):
RCFC train(s):
oo2SX027A 2SX027A oo2SX027B 2SX027B 5)5)IF IF CENT CHG pump CENT CHG pump temperatures are temperatures are approaching the limits approaching the limits of TABLE A (Page 29), of TABLE A (Page 29), THEN THEN align FP to a CENT align FP to a CENT CHG pump lube oil cooler CHG pump lube oil cooler per ATTACHMENT C per ATTACHMENT C (Page 23) while (Page 23) while continuing with this continuing with this procedure:
procedure:
ooCENT CHG pump 2A CENT CHG pump 2A ooCENT CHG pump 2B CENT CHG pump 2B 6)6)Shutdown Shutdown ANY ANY vital vital equipment exceeding the equipment exceeding the limits of TABLE A limits of TABLE A (Page 29).(Page 29).
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 7 of 29 Page 7 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 Step 3 (continued)
Step 3 (continued) 7)7)At Shift Manager At Shift Manager discretion align discretion align UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 SX to cool Unit 2 CC SX to cool Unit 2 CC loads via the Unit 0 CC loads via the Unit 0 CC heat exchanger:
heat exchanger:
a)a)Open the CC HX 0 SX Open the CC HX 0 SX inlet valve:
inlet valve:1SX005 1SX005 b)b)Open CC HX 0 SX Open CC HX 0 SX outlet valve(s):
outlet valve(s):
oo0SX146 0SX146 oo0SX147 0SX147 c)c)Align the UNIT 0 CC Align the UNIT 0 CC heat exchanger to heat exchanger to Unit 2 per BwOP CC-8, Unit 2 per BwOP CC-8, ISOLATION OF CC ISOLATION OF CC BETWEEN UNITS 1 AND BETWEEN UNITS 1 AND 2.2.e.e.Locally check tripped SXLocally check tripped SXe.e.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
pump(s) - pump(s) - NOT ROTATING NOT ROTATING 1)1)Dispatch an operator to Dispatch an operator to energize the affected energize the affected pump's suction valve:
pump's suction valve:
oo2SX001A at MCC 231X3 2SX001A at MCC 231X3 E4 (401' M20)
E4 (401' M20) oo2SX001B at MCC 232X1 2SX001B at MCC 232X1 C1 (383' M23)
C1 (383' M23) 2)2)Close affected pump's Close affected pump's suction valve:
suction valve:
oo2SX001A 2SX001A oo2SX001B 2SX001B Page 8 of 29 Page 8 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 4 44CHECK FOR SX LEAKAGE INTO CHECK FOR SX LEAKAGE INTO CHECK FOR SX LEAKAGE INTO Perform the following:
Perform the following:
CONTAINMENT CONTAINMENT CONTAINMENT
running.HIGH (2-1-A2) - HIGH (2-1-A2) - NOT LIT NOT LIT b.b.Shutdown RCFC train for Shutdown RCFC train for non-running SX pump:
non-running SX pump:
1)1)Stop associated RCFCs:
Stop associated RCFCs:
ooSX pump 2A:
SX pump 2A:RCFC 2A RCFC 2ARCFC 2C RCFC 2C ooSX pump 2B:
SX pump 2B:RCFC 2B RCFC 2BRCFC 2D RCFC 2D 2)2)Close associated RCFC SX Close associated RCFC SX inlet valve:
inlet valve:
oo2SX016A (SX pump 2A) 2SX016A (SX pump 2A) oo2SX016B (SX pump 2B) 2SX016B (SX pump 2B) 3)3)Close associated RCFC SX Close associated RCFC SX outlet valve:
outlet valve:
oo2SX027A (SX pump 2A) 2SX027A (SX pump 2A) oo2SX027B (SX pump 2B) 2SX027B (SX pump 2B)
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 9 of 29 Page 9 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 Step 4 (continued)
Step 4 (continued) c.c.Determine if leakage Determine if leakage stopped: stopped: ooMonitor SX pump Monitor SX pump parameters:
parameters:Pump discharge Pump discharge pressure pressurePump amps Pump amps ooMonitor containment Monitor containment water level:
water level:Floor drain sump Floor drain sump level: level:2LI-PC002 2LI-PC0022LI-PC003 2LI-PC003Floor water level:
Floor water level:2LI-PC006 2LI-PC0062LI-PC007 2LI-PC007 d.d.IF IF leakage is stopped, leakage is stopped, THEN THEN perform the perform the following:
following:
1)1)Verify the RCFC SX Verify the RCFC SX outlet rad monitor is outlet rad monitor is online: online: oo2PR02J 2PR02J oo2PR03J 2PR03J 2)2)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 5 (Page 12).
Step 5 (Page 12).
Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 10 of 29 Page 10 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 Step 4 (continued)
Step 4 (continued) e.e.IF IF leakage still exists, leakage still exists, THEN THEN perform the following perform the following to swap running RCFC to swap running RCFC trains: trains: 1)1)Open RCFC SX inlet valve Open RCFC SX inlet valve for non-running SX pump:
for non-running SX pump:
oo2SX016A (SX pump 2A) 2SX016A (SX pump 2A) oo2SX016B (SX pump 2B) 2SX016B (SX pump 2B) 2)2)Open RCFC SX outlet Open RCFC SX outlet valve for non-running SX valve for non-running SX pump: pump: oo2SX027A (SX pump 2A) 2SX027A (SX pump 2A) oo2SX027B (SX pump 2B) 2SX027B (SX pump 2B) 3)3)Swap running SX pumps.
Swap running SX pumps.
4)4)Start non-running RCFCs.
Start non-running RCFCs.
5)5)RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Substep 4b Substep 4b RNO above.
RNO above.
Page 11 of 29 Page 11 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 5 55CHECK CC OUTLET TEMPERATURE CHECK CC OUTLET TEMPERATURE CHECK CC OUTLET TEMPERATURE
- a.a.CC heat exchanger outletCC heat exchanger outleta.a.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
temperature(s) - temperature(s) - LESS THAN LESS THAN 105 105F F::1)1)Locally throttle SX Locally throttle SX outlet from CC heat outlet from CC heat(2TI-674)(2TI-674)exchanger valve(s) to exchanger valve(s) to(2TI-675)(2TI-675)maintain CC maintain CC temperature(s) less than temperature(s) less than 105 105F F:: oo2SX007 (346' M20):
2SX007 (346' M20):1)1)Close 2SX007E, Close 2SX007E,Local Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.2)2)Throttle 2SX007 as Throttle 2SX007 asrequired.required.3)3)WHEN WHEN adjustments adjustmentsare complete, are complete, THEN THEN open 2SX007E, open 2SX007E,Local Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.oo0SX007 (346' M16):
0SX007 (346' M16):1)1)Close 0SX007E, Close 0SX007E,Local Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.2)2)Throttle 0SX007 as Throttle 0SX007 asrequired.required.3)3)WHEN WHEN adjustments adjustmentsare complete, are complete, THEN THEN open 0SX007E open 0SX007ELocal Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.2)2)IF IF RCP THERMAL BARR CC RCP THERMAL BARR CC WTR TEMP HIGH (2-7-E3)
WTR TEMP HIGH (2-7-E3) is LIT, is LIT, THEN THEN maintain seal maintain seal injection flow between injection flow between 8 GPM 8 GPM and and 13 GPM 13 GPM per per pump.pump.Page 12 of 29 Page 12 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 6 66CHECK RCP COOLING CHECK RCP COOLING CHECK RCP COOLING
- a.a.Check the following alarms -Check the following alarms -a.a.Monitor RCP temperatures.
Monitor RCP temperatures.
NOT LIT NOT LIT:: IF IF motor bearing motor bearingRCP THERM BARR CC WTR TEMPRCP THERM BARR CC WTR TEMPtemperature exceeds temperature exceeds 195 195F F HIGH (2-7-E3)HIGH (2-7-E3)OR OR lower radial bearing lower radial bearing temperature exceeds temperature exceeds 225 225F FRCP BRNG CC WTR TEMP HIGHRCP BRNG CC WTR TEMP HIGHOR OR seal outlet temperature seal outlet temperature (2-7-E5)(2-7-E5)exceeds exceeds 235 235F F , , THEN THEN perform the perform the following:
following:
a)a)Trip the reactor.
Trip the reactor.
b)b)Trip the affected Trip the affected RCP(s).RCP(s).c)c)Perform 2BwEP-0, REACTOR Perform 2BwEP-0, REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION while continuing with while continuing with this procedure.
this procedure.
7 77NOTIFY THE SHIFT MANAGER TO NOTIFY THE SHIFT MANAGER TO NOTIFY THE SHIFT MANAGER TO PERFORM THE FOLLOWING PERFORM THE FOLLOWING PERFORM THE FOLLOWING
- Risk Evaluation Risk EvaluationInitiate an IR Initiate an IRNotify the following personnel Notify the following personnel as appropriate:
as appropriate:
ooStation Duty Manager Station Duty Manager ooStation Duty Officer Station Duty Officer ooNuclear Duty Officer Nuclear Duty Officer ooWork Week Manager Work Week Manager 8 88REFER TO TECH SPECS REFER TO TECH SPECS REFER TO TECH SPECS
- 3.6.6 3.6.63.7.8 3.7.83.7.9 3.7.9Perform a risk assessment Perform a risk assessment Page 13 of 29 Page 13 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 9 99RETURN TO PROCEDURE AND STEP IN RETURN TO PROCEDURE AND STEP IN RETURN TO PROCEDURE AND STEP IN EFFECT EFFECT EFFECT -END- -END-Page 14 of 29 Page 14 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 ATTACHMENT A (PG 1 OF 3)
ATTACHMENT A (PG 1 OF 3)
AUX BUILDING PIPING RUPTURE AUX BUILDING PIPING RUPTURE 1 11PERFORM 0BWOA PRI-8, AUXILIARY PERFORM 0BWOA PRI-8, AUXILIARY PERFORM 0BWOA PRI-8, AUXILIARY BUILDING FLOODING, WHILE BUILDING FLOODING, WHILE BUILDING FLOODING, WHILE CONTINUING WITH THIS PROCEDURE CONTINUING WITH THIS PROCEDURE CONTINUING WITH THIS PROCEDURE 2 22MONITOR TEMPERATURES ON RUNNING MONITOR TEMPERATURES ON RUNNING MONITOR TEMPERATURES ON RUNNING EQUIPMENT COOLED BY SX EQUIPMENT COOLED BY SX EQUIPMENT COOLED BY SX
PRI-8, SX MALFUNCTION)CC heat exchanger outlet CC heat exchanger outlet temperature temperature 3 33ALIGN FIRE PROTECTION TO CENT CHG ALIGN FIRE PROTECTION TO CENT CHG ALIGN FIRE PROTECTION TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLERS PUMP LUBE OIL COOLERS PUMP LUBE OIL COOLERS
this procedure:
ooCENT CHG pump 2A CENT CHG pump 2A ooCENT CHG pump 2B CENT CHG pump 2B 4 44PROTECT IMPORTANT EQUIPMENT PROTECT IMPORTANT EQUIPMENT PROTECT IMPORTANT EQUIPMENT
- a.a.Shutdown Shutdown ANY ANY unnecessary unnecessary equipment:
equipment:
ooDG(s)DG(s)ooMCR chiller(s)
MCR chiller(s) ooSI pump(s)
SI pump(s) ooContainment chiller(s)
Containment chiller(s) b.b.Place in PULL OUT Place in PULL OUT ANY ANY vital vital equipment - equipment - EXCEEDING THE EXCEEDING THE LIMITS OF TABLE A (Page 29)
LIMITS OF TABLE A (Page 29) c.c.Dispatch an operator to prepare Dispatch an operator to prepare Startup FW pump for start per Startup FW pump for start per BwOP FW-5, OPERATION OF A BwOP FW-5, OPERATION OF A STARTUP FW PUMP STARTUP FW PUMP Page 15 of 29 Page 15 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 ATTACHMENT A (PG 2 OF 3)
ATTACHMENT A (PG 2 OF 3)
AUX BUILDING PIPING RUPTURE AUX BUILDING PIPING RUPTURE 5 55CHECK IF REACTOR SHUTDOWN CHECK IF REACTOR SHUTDOWN CHECK IF REACTOR SHUTDOWN REQUIRED REQUIRED REQUIRED::: a.a.Field reports indicate floodingField reports indicate floodinga.a.Continue with Step 6 (Next Continue with Step 6 (Next of vital equipment (SX pumps inof vital equipment (SX pumps inPage).
Page). both rooms, RH pumps, etc.) -both rooms, RH pumps, etc.) -IF IF reports indicate reports indicate IMMINENT IMMINENT flooding of vital flooding of vital equipment is imminent, equipment is imminent, THEN THEN do Steps 5b thru 5j.
do Steps 5b thru 5j.
b.b.Trip the reactor Trip the reactor c.c.Perform 2BwEP-0, REACTOR TRIP Perform 2BwEP-0, REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION while OR SAFETY INJECTION while continuing with this procedure continuing with this procedure d.d.Check WS pumps - Check WS pumps - ANY RUNNING ANY RUNNING d.d.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
1)1)Place motor driven AF Place motor driven AF pump in - pump in - PULL OUT PULL OUT::AF pump 2A AF pump 2A 2)2)Shutdown the following Shutdown the following SX cooled equipment:
SX cooled equipment:DG(s)DG(s)MCR chiller(s)
SI pump(s)Containment Containment chiller(s) chiller(s) 3)3)Control feed flow from Control feed flow from the diesel driven AF the diesel driven AF pump to maintain narrow pump to maintain narrow range levels - range levels - BETWEEN BETWEEN 42% AND 50%
42% AND 50%
4)4)GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 6 (Next Step 6 (Next Page).Page).e.e.Align normal feedwater per Align normal feedwater per 2BwEP ES-0.1, REACTOR TRIP 2BwEP ES-0.1, REACTOR TRIP RESPONSE, ATTACHMENT C RESPONSE, ATTACHMENT C Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 16 of 29 Page 16 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 ATTACHMENT A (PG 3 OF 3)
ATTACHMENT A (PG 3 OF 3)
AUX BUILDING PIPING RUPTURE AUX BUILDING PIPING RUPTURE Step 5 (continued)
Step 5 (continued) f.f.Control feed flow to maintain Control feed flow to maintain narrow range levels - narrow range levels - BETWEEN BETWEEN 42% AND 50%
42% AND 50%
g.g.Place motor driven AF pump in -
Place motor driven AF pump in -
PULL OUT PULL OUT::AF pump 2A AF pump 2A h.h.Shutdown the following SX Shutdown the following SX cooled equipment:
cooled equipment:DG(s)DG(s)MCR chiller(s)
SI pump(s)Containment chiller(s)
Containment chiller(s) i.i.Check all SG levels - Check all SG levels - GREATER GREATER i.i.Continue with Step 6.
Continue with Step 6.
THAN 42%THAN 42%WHEN WHEN all SG levels are all SG levels are greater than greater than 42%
42%, , THEN THEN do Step 5j.
do Step 5j.
j.j.Place diesel driven AF pump Place diesel driven AF pump in - in - AFTER TRIP AFTER TRIP
- AF pump 2B AF pump 2B 6 66CHECK STATUS OF PIPE LEAK CHECK STATUS OF PIPE LEAK CHECK STATUS OF PIPE LEAK
- a.a.Aux building flooding - Aux building flooding - STOPPED STOPPED a.a.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO Step 2 Step 2 (Page 15).(Page 15).
b.b.SX pumps - SX pumps - NONE RUNNING ON NONE RUNNING ON b.b.IF IF an SX pump is running an SX pump is running EITHER UNIT EITHER UNIT on Unit 2, on Unit 2, THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO MAIN BODY, MAIN BODY, Step 3 (Page 3).
Step 3 (Page 3).
c.c.GO TO GO TO GO TO 0BwOA PRI-8, AUXILIARY 0BwOA PRI-8, AUXILIARY BUILDING FLOODING, Step 10 BUILDING FLOODING, Step 10-END--END-Page 17 of 29 Page 17 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8*ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 5)
- ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 5)
ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CROSSTIE ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CROSSTIE 1 11START AN ADDITIONAL START AN ADDITIONAL START AN ADDITIONAL UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1 SX SX SX PUMP PUMP PUMP::: a.a.Check the following valves forCheck the following valves fora.a.Manually open valve(s).
Manually open valve(s).
UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 SX train to be SX train to be started - started - OPEN OPEN::IF IF an SX001 valve is an SX001 valve is deenergized closed, deenergized closed, ooTrain A:Train A:THEN THEN dispatch an operator dispatch an operator to energize the affected to energize the affected1SX001A1SX001Apump's suction valve:
pump's suction valve:1SX016A 1SX016A1SX027A1SX027Aoo1SX001A at MCC 131X3 E4 1SX001A at MCC 131X3 E4 (383' M15)
(383' M15)-OR--OR-oo1SX001B at MCC 132X1 C1 1SX001B at MCC 132X1 C1 (364' P18 (364' P18 ooTrain B: Train B:1SX001B 1SX001B1SX016B 1SX016B1SX027B 1SX027B b.b.Start standby Start standby UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 SX pump SX pumpb.b.Perform the following:
Perform the following:
1)1)Shutdown Shutdown ONE ONE RCFC train RCFC train on on EACH EACH unit: unit: oo2A and 2C RCFC 2A and 2C RCFC oo2B and 2D RCFC 2B and 2D RCFC oo1A and 1C RCFC 1A and 1C RCFC oo1B and 1D RCFC 1B and 1D RCFC 2)2)Close the SX outlet Close the SX outlet valve for the shutdown valve for the shutdown RCFC trains:
RCFC trains:
oo2SX027A 2SX027A oo2SX027B 2SX027B oo1SX027A 1SX027A oo1SX027B 1SX027B 3)3)Monitor containment Monitor containment temperature and pressure temperature and pressure on on BOTH BOTH units. units.Page 18 of 29 Page 18 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8*ATTACHMENT B (PG 2 OF 5)
- ATTACHMENT B (PG 2 OF 5)
ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CROSSTIE ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CROSSTIE 2 22CROSSTIE SX SYSTEM CROSSTIE SX SYSTEM CROSSTIE SX SYSTEM
Locally open valves:
valves: valves: oo1SX005 (330' Q19) 1SX005 (330' Q19)1SX0051SX005oo2SX005 (330' Q20) 2SX005 (330' Q20)2SX005 2SX005 b.b.Check SX pump crosstie valves -Check SX pump crosstie valves -b.b.Manually or locally open Manually or locally open OPEN OPEN::valves: valves:1SX0331SX033oo1SX033 (330' Q17) 1SX033 (330' Q17)1SX0341SX034oo1SX034 (330' Q19) 1SX034 (330' Q19)2SX0332SX033oo2SX033 (330' Q17) 2SX033 (330' Q17)2SX0342SX034oo2SX034 (330' Q20) 2SX034 (330' Q20)
Page 19 of 29 Page 19 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8*ATTACHMENT B (PG 3 OF 5)
- ATTACHMENT B (PG 3 OF 5)
ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CROSSTIE ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CROSSTIE 3 33MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR UNIT 1 UNIT 1UNIT 1 SX SYSTEM SX SYSTEM SX SYSTEM
- a.a.Check the following:Check the following:a.a.Perform the following:
Perform the following:UNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 SX pump motor amps - SX pump motor amps -ooIF IF CENT CHG pump CENT CHG pump LESS THAN 180 AMPS LESS THAN 180 AMPS temperatures are temperatures are approaching the limits approaching the limitsUNIT 1 UNIT 1 UNIT 1 SX pump discharge SX pump dischargeof TABLE A (Page 29), of TABLE A (Page 29), pressure - pressure - GREATER THAN GREATER THAN THEN THEN align FP to a CENT align FP to a CENT 90 PSIG 90 PSIG::CHG pump lube oil cooler CHG pump lube oil cooler per ATTACHMENT C per ATTACHMENT C oo1PI-SX007 (1A SX pump)1PI-SX007 (1A SX pump)(Page 23) while (Page 23) while oo1PI-SX008 (1B SX pump)1PI-SX008 (1B SX pump)continuing with this continuing with this procedure:
procedure:CC heat exchanger outlet CC heat exchanger outlet temperature - temperature - LESS THAN 105 LESS THAN 105F F::ooCENT CHG pump 2A CENT CHG pump 2A ooCENT CHG pump 2B CENT CHG pump 2B1TI-674 1TI-6742TI-6742TI-674ooIsolate SX to UNIT 2 Isolate SX to UNIT 20TI-6750TI-675RCFC train(s):
RCFC train(s):
a)a)Shutdown RCFC Shutdown RCFC train(s): train(s): oo2A and 2C RCFC 2A and 2C RCFC oo2B and 2D RCFC 2B and 2D RCFC b)b)Close RCFC SX outlet Close RCFC SX outlet valves: valves: oo2SX027A 2SX027A oo2SX027B 2SX027B c)c)Monitor containment Monitor containment temperature and temperature and pressure.pressure.Step continued on next page Step continued on next page Page 20 of 29 Page 20 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8*ATTACHMENT B (PG 4 OF 5)
- ATTACHMENT B (PG 4 OF 5)
ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CROSSTIE ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CROSSTIE Step 3 (continued)
Step 3 (continued) ooLocally adjust SX outlet Locally adjust SX outlet from CC heat exchanger from CC heat exchanger valve(s): valve(s): oo2SX007 (346' M20):
2SX007 (346' M20):1)1)Close 2SX007E, Close 2SX007E,Local Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.2)2)Throttle 2SX007 as Throttle 2SX007 asrequired.required.3)3)WHEN WHEN adjustments adjustmentsare complete, are complete, THEN THEN open 2SX007E, open 2SX007E,Local Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.oo1SX007 (346' M16) 1SX007 (346' M16)1)1)Close 1SX007E, Close 1SX007E,Local Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.2)2)Throttle 1SX007 as Throttle 1SX007 asrequired.required.3)3)When adjustments When adjustmentsare complete, are complete, THEN THEN open 1SX007E, open 1SX007E,Local Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.oo0SX007 (346' M16):
0SX007 (346' M16):1)1)Close 0SX007E, Close 0SX007E,Local Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.2)2)Throttle 0SX007 as Throttle 0SX007 asrequired.required.3)3)WHEN WHEN adjustments adjustmentsare complete, are complete, THEN THEN open 0SX007E open 0SX007ELocal Disc Sw.
Local Disc Sw.ooShutdown Shutdown ANY ANY unnecessary unnecessary diesel generators.
diesel generators.
Page 21 of 29 Page 21 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8*ATTACHMENT B (PG 5 OF 5)
- ATTACHMENT B (PG 5 OF 5)
ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CROSSTIE ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CROSSTIE 4 44CHECK CHILLER OPERATION CHECK CHILLER OPERATION CHECK CHILLER OPERATION
ROOM CHILLED WATER SYSTEM.
b.b.Restart containment chillers as Restart containment chillers as necessary necessary 5 55RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 3 RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 3 RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 3 (Page 3)(Page 3)(Page 3)-END--END-Page 22 of 29 Page 22 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 4)
ALIGNMENT OF FP TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLER ALIGNMENT OF FP TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLER 1 11LOCALLY ALIGN FP TO CENT CHG PUMP LOCALLY ALIGN FP TO CENT CHG PUMP LOCALLY ALIGN FP TO CENT CHG PUMP 2A LUBE OIL COOLER 2A LUBE OIL COOLER 2A LUBE OIL COOLER
- a.a.Check CENT CHG pump 2A -Check CENT CHG pump 2A -a.
a.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 3 (Page 25) to Step 3 (Page 25) to SELECTED FOR FP ALIGNMENT SELECTED FOR FP ALIGNMENT align CENT CHG pump 2B.
align CENT CHG pump 2B.
b.b.Connect fire hose (located in Connect fire hose (located in 2A 2A 2A CV pump room) to CENT CHG CV pump room) to CENT CHG pump 2A lube oil cooler pump 2A lube oil cooler AND AND FP FP connection outside connection outside 2A 2A 2A CV pump CV pump room (364' V18) room (364' V18) c.c.Check FP hose - Check FP hose - CONNECTED TO CONNECTED TO c.c.IF IF only CENT CHG pump 2A only CENT CHG pump 2A CENT CHG PUMPS ON BOTH UNITS CENT CHG PUMPS ON BOTH UNITS
- is being aligned to FP, is being aligned to FP, THEN THEN GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 1d. Step 1d.CENT CHG pump 2A CENT CHG pump 2A IF IF CENT CHG pump 1A is CENT CHG pump 1A isCENT CHG pump 1ACENT CHG pump 1Aalso being aligned, also being aligned, THEN THEN do do NOT NOT continue until continue until hose connections are hose connections are complete to BOTH CENT CHG complete to BOTH CENT CHG pumps.pumps.d.d.Open FP hose supply isolation Open FP hose supply isolation valve: valve:0FP840 (364' V18) 0FP840 (364' V18) e.e.Verify fire hose - Verify fire hose - CHARGED CHARGED::Hose Hose NOT NOT pinched by room door pinched by room doorNo kinks in hose No kinks in hose f.f.Open CENT CHG pump oil cooler Open CENT CHG pump oil cooler FP supply isolation valve:
FP supply isolation valve:2SX259A (364' U20 2A CENT 2SX259A (364' U20 2A CENT CHG pump room)
CHG pump room) g.g.Close CENT CHG pump oil cooler Close CENT CHG pump oil cooler SX supply isolation valve:
SX supply isolation valve:2SX258A (364' U20 2A CENT 2SX258A (364' U20 2A CENT CHG pump room)
CHG pump room)
Page 23 of 29 Page 23 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 ATTACHMENT C (PG 2 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT C (PG 2 OF 4)
ALIGNMENT OF FP TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLER ALIGNMENT OF FP TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLER 2 22CHECK CENT CHG PUMP 2A CHECK CENT CHG PUMP 2A CHECK CENT CHG PUMP 2A OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION::: a.a.CENT CHG pump 2A - CENT CHG pump 2A - RUNNING RUNNING a.a.IF IF CENT CHG pump 2A is CENT CHG pump 2A is being aligned for standby being aligned for standby operation, operation, THEN THEN GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 3 (Next Step 3 (Next Page).Page).IF IF CENT CHG pump 2A is CENT CHG pump 2A is desired to be running, desired to be running, THEN THEN Start CENT CHG pump Start CENT CHG pump 2A per either of the 2A per either of the following:
following:
ooBwOP CV-19, SWITCHING BwOP CV-19, SWITCHING CHARGING PUMPS CHARGING PUMPS-OR--OR-ooBwOP CV-1, CV SYSTEM BwOP CV-1, CV SYSTEM STARTUP STARTUP b.b.Monitor temperatures listed in Monitor temperatures listed in TABLE A (Page 29) for CENT CHG TABLE A (Page 29) for CENT CHG pump 2A pump 2A c.c.Place a portable fan in door Place a portable fan in door opening as necessary to opening as necessary to maintain CENT CHG pump 2A room maintain CENT CHG pump 2A room temperature - temperature - NORMAL NORMAL Page 24 of 29 Page 24 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 ATTACHMENT C (PG 3 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT C (PG 3 OF 4)
ALIGNMENT OF FP TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLER ALIGNMENT OF FP TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLER 3 33LOCALLY ALIGN FP TO CENT CHG PUMP LOCALLY ALIGN FP TO CENT CHG PUMP LOCALLY ALIGN FP TO CENT CHG PUMP 2B LUBE OIL COOLER 2B LUBE OIL COOLER 2B LUBE OIL COOLER
- a.a.Check CENT CHG pump 2B -Check CENT CHG pump 2B -a.
a.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and SELECTED FOR FP ALIGNMENT SELECTED FOR FP ALIGNMENT step in effect step in effect b.b.Connect fire hose (located in Connect fire hose (located in 2B CV pump room) to CENT CHG 2B CV pump room) to CENT CHG pump 2B lube oil cooler pump 2B lube oil cooler AND AND FP FP connection outside 2B CV pump connection outside 2B CV pump room (364' Y21) room (364' Y21) c.c.Open FP hose supply isolation Open FP hose supply isolation valve: valve:2FP384 (364' Y21) 2FP384 (364' Y21) d.d.Verify fire hose - Verify fire hose - CHARGED CHARGED::Hose Hose NOT NOT pinched by room door pinched by room doorNo kinks in hose No kinks in hose e.e.Open CENT CHG pump oil cooler Open CENT CHG pump oil cooler FP supply isolation valve:
FP supply isolation valve:2SX259B (364' Y22 2B CENT 2SX259B (364' Y22 2B CENT CHG pump room)
CHG pump room) f.f.Close CENT CHG pump oil cooler Close CENT CHG pump oil cooler SX supply isolation valve:
SX supply isolation valve:2SX258B (364' Y22 2B CENT 2SX258B (364' Y22 2B CENT CHG pump room)
CHG pump room)
Page 25 of 29 Page 25 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 ATTACHMENT C (PG 4 OF 4)
ATTACHMENT C (PG 4 OF 4)
ALIGNMENT OF FP TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLER ALIGNMENT OF FP TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLER 4 44CHECK CENT CHG PUMP 2B CHECK CENT CHG PUMP 2B CHECK CENT CHG PUMP 2B OPERATION OPERATION OPERATION::: a.a.CENT CHG pump 2B - CENT CHG pump 2B - RUNNING RUNNING a.a.IF IF CENT CHG pump 2B is CENT CHG pump 2B is being aligned for standby being aligned for standby operation, operation, THEN THEN RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure procedure and step in effect.
and step in effect.
IF IF CENT CHG pump 2B is CENT CHG pump 2B is desired to be running, desired to be running, THEN THEN Start CENT CHG pump Start CENT CHG pump 2B per either of the 2B per either of the following:
following:
ooBwOP CV-19, SWITCHING BwOP CV-19, SWITCHING CHARGING PUMPS CHARGING PUMPS-OR--OR-ooBwOP CV-1, CV SYSTEM BwOP CV-1, CV SYSTEM STARTUP STARTUP b.b.Monitor temperatures listed in Monitor temperatures listed in TABLE A (Page 29) for CENT CHG TABLE A (Page 29) for CENT CHG pump 2B pump 2B c.c.Place a portable fan in door Place a portable fan in door opening as necessary to opening as necessary to maintain CENT CHG pump 2B room maintain CENT CHG pump 2B room temperature - temperature - NORMAL NORMAL d.d.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect in effect-END--END-Page 26 of 29 Page 26 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 ATTACHMENT D (PG 1 OF 2)
ATTACHMENT D (PG 1 OF 2)
RESTORATION OF SX TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLER RESTORATION OF SX TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLER
- portable fan will remain in place,portable fan will remain in place,*
- Temporary Configuration ChangeTemporary Configuration Change*
- Paperwork should be initiated perPaperwork should be initiated per*
- CC-AA-112.CC-AA-112.*
1 11LOCALLY ALIGN SX TO CENT CHG PUMP LOCALLY ALIGN SX TO CENT CHG PUMP LOCALLY ALIGN SX TO CENT CHG PUMP 2A LUBE OIL COOLER 2A LUBE OIL COOLER 2A LUBE OIL COOLER
- a.a.Check CENT CHG pump 2A -Check CENT CHG pump 2A -a.
a.GO TO GO TO GO TO Step 2 (Next Page)
Step 2 (Next Page)
ALIGNED FOR FP COOLING ALIGNED FOR FP COOLING to align CENT CHG pump 2B.
to align CENT CHG pump 2B.
b.b.Open CENT CHG pump oil cooler Open CENT CHG pump oil cooler SX supply isolation valve:
SX supply isolation valve:2SX258A (364' U20 2A CENT 2SX258A (364' U20 2A CENT CHG pump room)
CHG pump room) c.c.Close CENT CHG pump oil cooler Close CENT CHG pump oil cooler FP supply isolation valve:
FP supply isolation valve:2SX259A (364' U20 2A CENT 2SX259A (364' U20 2A CENT CHG pump room)
CHG pump room) d.d.Check CENT CHG pump Check CENT CHG pump 1A 1A 1A lube oil lube oild.d.Do Do NOT NOT continue until SX continue until SX cooler - cooler - NOT ALIGNED TO FP NOT ALIGNED TO FP cooling is restored to the cooling is restored to the COOLING COOLING CENT CHG pump CENT CHG pump 1A 1A 1A lube oil lube oil cooler.cooler.e.e.Close FP hose supply isolation Close FP hose supply isolation valve: valve:0FP840 (364' V18) 0FP840 (364' V18) f.f.Disconnect fire hose Disconnect fire hose g.g.Remove portable fan Remove portable fan Page 27 of 29 Page 27 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 ATTACHMENT D (PG 2 OF 2)
ATTACHMENT D (PG 2 OF 2)
RESTORATION OF SX TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLER RESTORATION OF SX TO CENT CHG PUMP LUBE OIL COOLER 2 22LOCALLY ALIGN SX TO CENT CHG PUMP LOCALLY ALIGN SX TO CENT CHG PUMP LOCALLY ALIGN SX TO CENT CHG PUMP 2B LUBE OIL COOLER 2B LUBE OIL COOLER 2B LUBE OIL COOLER
- a.a.Check CENT CHG pump 2B -Check CENT CHG pump 2B -a.
a.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and procedure and ALIGNED FOR FP COOLING ALIGNED FOR FP COOLING step in effect.
step in effect.
b.b.Open CENT CHG pump oil cooler Open CENT CHG pump oil cooler SX supply isolation valve:
SX supply isolation valve:2SX258B (364' Y22 2B CENT 2SX258B (364' Y22 2B CENT CHG pump room)
CHG pump room) c.c.Close CENT CHG pump oil cooler Close CENT CHG pump oil cooler FP supply isolation valve:
FP supply isolation valve:2SX259B (364' Y22 2B CENT 2SX259B (364' Y22 2B CENT CHG pump room)
CHG pump room) d.d.Close FP hose supply isolation Close FP hose supply isolation valve: valve:2FP384 (364' Y21) 2FP384 (364' Y21) e.e.Disconnect fire hose Disconnect fire hose f.f.Remove portable fan Remove portable fan g.g.RETURN TO RETURN TO RETURN TO procedure and step procedure and step in effect in effect-END--END-Page 28 of 29 Page 28 of 29 STEPSTEPACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSERESPONSE NOT OBTAINED RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION ESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTIONESSENTIAL SERVICE WATER MALFUNCTION2BwOA 2BwOA 2BwOA UNIT 2 UNIT 2UNIT 2PRI-8 PRI-8 PRI-8 TABLE A (PG 1 OF 1)
TABLE A (PG 1 OF 1)
VITAL EQUIPMENT TEMPERATURE LIMITS VITAL EQUIPMENT TEMPERATURE LIMITS 1 11TEMPERATURE LIMITS TEMPERATURE LIMITS TEMPERATURE LIMITS
- EQUIPMENT COMPUTER TREND/POINT LIMIT EQUIPMENT COMPUTER TREND/POINT LIMIT CENT CHG PUMP 2A TR048 CENT CHG PUMP 2A TR048 INBD BRNG T0112 205 INBD BRNG T0112 205F F OUTBD BRNG T0113 205 OUTBD BRNG T0113 205F F THRUST BRNG T0114 205 THRUST BRNG T0114 205F F GEAR DRIVE OIL (Local gauge at pump) 175 GEAR DRIVE OIL (Local gauge at pump) 175F F CENT CHG PUMP 2B TR049 CENT CHG PUMP 2B TR049 INBD BRNG T0117 205 INBD BRNG T0117 205F F OUTBD BRNG T0118 205 OUTBD BRNG T0118 205F F THRUST BRNG T0119 205 THRUST BRNG T0119 205F F GEAR DRIVE OIL (Local gauge at pump) 175 GEAR DRIVE OIL (Local gauge at pump) 175F F SX PUMP 2A TR037 SX PUMP 2A TR037 INBD BRNG T0643 175 INBD BRNG T0643 175F F OUTBD BRNG T0644 175 OUTBD BRNG T0644 175F F SX PUMP 2B TR038 SX PUMP 2B TR038 INBD BRNG T0648 175 INBD BRNG T0648 175F F OUTBD BRNG T0649 175 OUTBD BRNG T0649 175F F AF PUMP 2A TR042 AF PUMP 2A TR042 THRUST BRNG T2372 165 THRUST BRNG T2372 165F F INBD BRNG T2373 165 INBD BRNG T2373 165F F OUTBD BRNG T2374 165 OUTBD BRNG T2374 165F F AF PUMP 2B TR043 AF PUMP 2B TR043 THRUST BRNG T2377 165 THRUST BRNG T2377 165F F INBD BRNG T2378 165 INBD BRNG T2378 165F F OUTBD BRNG T2379 165 OUTBD BRNG T2379 165F F -END--END-Page 29 of 29 Page 29 of 29
REV. 105 REV. 105REV. 105OPERATOR ACTION
SUMMARY
OPERATOR ACTION
SUMMARY
OPERATOR ACTION
SUMMARY
2BwOA PRI-F:8 2BwOA PRI-F:8 2BwOA PRI-F:8
FOR 2BwOA PRI-8 FOR 2BwOA PRI-8 FOR 2BwOA PRI-8 GO TO ATTACHMENT A STEP 5b IF GO TO ATTACHMENT A STEP 5b IF GO TO ATTACHMENT A STEP 5b IF FLOODING OF VITAL EQUIPMENT IS FLOODING OF VITAL EQUIPMENT IS FLOODING OF VITAL EQUIPMENT IS IMMINENT IMMINENT IMMINENT IP-804 Page 1 of 6 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:
- 1. You are an extra NSO.
- 2. Both Units are at 100% power.
- 3. A fire is occurring in the 2B Aux Feedwater Pump Room.
- 4. The automatic CO 2 actuating circuits have failed to operate.
INITIATING CUES:
- 1. The Unit 2 Unit Supervisor has instructed you to manually initiate CO 2 to the 2B Aux Feedwater Pump Room. 2. Inform the Unit 2 Unit Supervisor when CO 2 has been initiated to the 2B Aux Feedwater Pump Room.
IP-804 Page 2 of 6 TASK TITLE:
Manual Actuation of the CO2 Fire Suppression System JPM No.: IP-804 REV: 2013 NRC Task No.: R-FP-002 K&A No.: 08600A2.04 Objective No.:
EVALUATOR:
DATE:
The Examinee:
PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:
FAILED TIME FINISHED:
JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS:
(*) 5, 6 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 25 MINUTES
CRITICAL TIME:
NA ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATION METHOD:
LOCATION: PERFORM X IN PLANT X SIMULATE SIMULATOR GENERAL
REFERENCES:
- 1. BwOP CO-5, MANUAL ACTUATION OF THE CARBON DIOXIDE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS, Rev 6.
- 2. BwOP CO-5T2, MANUAL ACTUATION OF THE UNIT 2 CARBON DIOXIDE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS TABLE 2, Rev. 4.
MATERIALS:
- 1. BwOP CO-5, MANUAL ACTUATION OF THE CARBON DIOXIDE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS, Rev
- 6. 2. BwOP CO-5T2, MANUAL ACTUATION OF THE UNIT 2 CARBON DIOXIDE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS TABLE 2, Rev. 4.
TASK STANDARDS:
- 1. Determine Carbon Dioxide system manual alignment required to actuate system.
- 2. Manually initiate the Carbon Dioxide suppression system to the 2B Aux Feedwater Pump Room. TASK CONDITIONS:
- 5. You are an extra NSO.
- 6. Both Units are at 100% power.
- 7. A fire is occurring in the 2B Aux Feedwater Pump Room.
- 8. The automatic CO 2 actuating circuits have failed to operate.
INITIATING CUES:
- 3. The Unit 2 Unit Supervisor has instructed you to manually initiate CO 2 to the 2B Aux Feedwater Pump Room.
- 4. Inform the Unit 2 Unit Supervisor when CO 2 has been initiated to the 2B Aux Feedwater Pump Room.
IP-804 Page 3 of 6 RECORD START TIME:
PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 1. Refer to BwOP CO
-5 and BwOP CO-5T2. CUE: After examinee locates procedures, provide copies of BwOP CO
-5 & BwOP CO-5T2. CUE: All applicable prerequisites, precautions, limitations and actions have been met. Refer to BwOP CO
-5 and BwOP CO-5T2: Verify all applicable Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions are satisfactorily addressed.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: 2. Determine and locate the appropriate Pushbutton Station for the 2B AF Pump Room.
Note: 2HS-CO032 is located on the wall to the right of 2B AF pump room door, 383' M-19. Note: 2HS-CO033 is located on the wall to the left of 2B AF pump room door, 383' M-19. The Procedure does not specify to try one PB prior to the other
. Determine and locate pushbutton stations for 2B AF pump room from page 2 of BwOP CO-5T2 as follows:
o Pushbutton #1 (2HS
-CO032) is at Aux Bldg 383'
M-19. o Pushbutton #2 (2HS
-CO033) is at Aux Bldg 383'
M-19. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
IP-804 Page 4 of 6 Examiners note: The examinee may attempt to actuate CO 2 from both pushbuttons in the following step. Depressing both pushbuttons is NOT required since they are redundant functions
. PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE
- 3. Actuate CO2 system from local pushbuttons.
CUE: Pushbutton Station Cover is pulled down.
CU E: Pushbutton has been depressed.
NOTE: Wait 3-5 seconds and provide the following
cue: CUE: 3-5 seconds have elapsed. CUE: Pushbutton has been released. CUE: For FIRST Pushbutton attempted: Pre
-
discharge alarm did NOT sound. No sound of CO 2 flowing and discharge piping is NOT frosted.
CUE: For SECOND Pushbutton attempted (if used): Pre
-discharge alarm has sounded.
CUE: Pre-discharge alarm is stopped. Note: Provide the following
cue after the examinee has checked for CO 2 flow. CUE: No sound of CO 2 flowing. CUE: CO 2 discharge piping is NOT frosted.
Perform the following at one of the pushbutton locations to attempt to actuate CO2 system from local pushbuttons: (Step may be performed twice, once at 2HS-CO032 and once at 2HS-CO033): Pull down the cover on the pushbutton station.
Depress the pushbutton for 3-5 seconds.
Verify the pre
-discharge alarm sounds. (NO ALARM sounded
) Realizes the first pushbutton did not function.
Attempt to actuate CO 2 using alternate pushbutton (following first attempt).
Verify the pre
-discharge alarm sounds. (ALARM sounded) After pre-discharge alarm stops, verify CO 2 discharge by sound and frosting of piping above 2CO14JB. (No sound of flow or frosting
) Determines CO 2 system did not actuate.
Proceed to step F.2 (following second attempt).
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
IP-804 Page 5 of 6 EVALUATOR NOTE: Alternate path begins here
- 4. Determine and locate the 2B AF Pump Room Damper Control Cabinet and determine power is available.
Note: 2CO18J is located on the wall to the left of 2B AF pump room door, 383'
M-20. Note: When correct cabinet is located, and power light is checked, provide the following cue:
CUE: The RED (power available) light is lit.
Determine and locate the 2B AF Pump Room Damper Control Cabinet from BwOP CO-5T2 page 2 as follows:
Damper Control Cabinet (2CO18J) for 2B AF Pump Room is at Aux Bldg 383' M-20. VERIFY power at the Damper Control Cabinet.
Power available light lit.
SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:
IP-804 Page 6 of 6 PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable
- 5. Actuate CO 2 from Selector EMPC valve Note: 2CO14JB is located on the wall to the right of 2B AF pump room door, 383'
M-19. CUE: Selector EMPC glass is broken. CUE: Selector EMPC is rotated
90 to open position.
CUE: Sound of CO 2 flowing is heard and frosting of piping is evident.
Perform the following to actuate CO 2 system from the Selector EMPC valve:
Determine and locate the selector EMPC (2CO14JB) at Aux Bldg 383' M
-19. Break the selector EMPC cabinet glass.
Place selector EMPC actuator lever in the op en position. Verify CO 2 discharge by sound and frosting of piping. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: *6. Secure CO 2 using the Selector EMPC valve.
CUE: After 79 seconds have elapsed, ask the examinee when the next step may be performed.
IF the examinee closes the EMPC actuator lever prior to 79 seconds has elapsed, then failure criteria is met.
CUE: Selector EMPC is in close position.
Note: After examinee closes the selector EMPC valve provide the following
cue: CUE: No sound of CO 2 flowing. CUE: Unit supervisor informs you another operator will complete BwOP CO
-5. Perform the following to secure CO 2 system from the Selector EMPC valve Maintain selector EMPC in open position for >79 seconds. Place the Selector EMPC actuator lever in the closed position. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments: CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.
RECORD STOP TIME:
COMMENTS:
(Final)